Passionately Swiss.

TM

STANDARD DESIGN
AND
OPERATIONAL
PLANNING GUIDELINES
(SDOPG)

January 2018

The Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines will be used by the Development & Technical
Services Department of MH&R for the following situations:

1. Plan and specification review for a proposed new construction project.

2. Plan and specification review for remodelling, refurbishing and renovation projects.
3. Preparation of a deficiency list in connection with the conversion of a non- Mövenpick Hotel to
a Mövenpick – Hotel or Resort.

1
Contents.
Section A: An introduction to these standards ..................................................................... 17
Foreword by the President and CEO of Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts .............................. 18
The Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines ................................................ 19
Section B: The creation of a Mövenpick Hotel ..................................................................... 20
Design Direction.................................................................................................................. 20
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 21
Designing to the Bottom Line ....................................................................................... 21
Technology .................................................................................................................. 21
Guest Sophistication .................................................................................................... 21
Cultural, Green Aspects ............................................................................................... 22
Key success Factors of a Mövenpick Hotel ..................................................................... 22
Design………………………………………………………………………………………… ..22
Technology .................................................................................................................. 24
Merging the Business and Leisure Travellers ............................................................... 24
Sustainability and Cultural aspects .............................................................................. 24
Basic Services of Architects, Consultants and Engineers ................................................ 25
Architects / Engineers / Consultants............................................................................. 25
Interior Designer's including Spa/Wellness Consultants ............................................... 25
Food & Beverage Consultant / Kitchen Consultant/ laundry Consultant ....................... 25
Technical Services Agreements (TSA) ............................................................................ 26
Value Design, Value Engineering and Life Cycle Analysis ............................................... 28
Co-ordination with MH&R after an HMA being signed. .................................................... 28
A. New hotel construction projects. .................................................................................. 29
B. Remodelling, refurbishing or renovation of an existing hotel ........................................ 30
C. Conversion of an existing non-Mövenpick Hotel to a Mövenpick Hotel & Resort .......... 30
Building Criteria ............................................................................................................... 32
Construction and Architectural Considerations ................................................................ 32
Section C: MH&R Standard Space Requirements ............................................................... 34
1. Public Areas ................................................................................................................ 34
1.1 Entrance and Lobby Areas ................................................................................... 34
1.2 Exterior Lighting.................................................................................................... 35

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 2
 1.3 Hotel Entry............................................................................................................ 35
1.4 Lobby ................................................................................................................... 36
1.5 Front Desk ............................................................................................................ 36
1.6 Concierge Desk and Work Room ......................................................................... 37
1.7 Public Washrooms................................................................................................ 37
1.8 Examples of actual MH&R Façades and Public Areas .......................................... 39
2. Food and Beverage ..................................................................................................... 43
2.1 Host / Maitre D’ Stand........................................................................................... 43
2.2 Service Stations.................................................................................................... 43
2.3 Display Kitchen / Kitchen ...................................................................................... 45
2.4 Lobby Lounge and Lobby Bar ............................................................................... 45
2.5 Three Meal / All Day Dining Restaurant ................................................................ 45
2.6 Specialty Bar ........................................................................................................ 46
2.7 Specialty Restaurant ............................................................................................ 46
2.8 Gourmet Café ....................................................................................................... 47
2.9 Pool Bar and Grille ............................................................................................... 47
2.10 Meeting Rooms Communal Coffee Break Area .................................................... 47
2.11 Coffee/Wine Lounge ............................................................................................. 47
2.12 Examples of Actual MH&R Restaurants & Bars .................................................... 48
3. Retail ........................................................................................................................... 52
3.1 Retail Shops ......................................................................................................... 52
4. Ballrooms and Meeting Rooms .................................................................................... 53
4.1 General Requirements.......................................................................................... 53
4.2 Ballroom Pre-function / Foyer ............................................................................... 54
4.3 Main Ballroom ...................................................................................................... 55
4.4 Meeting Rooms .................................................................................................... 57
4.5 Business Corner – More relaxed and casual area ................................................ 57
4.6 Boardrooms .......................................................................................................... 58
4.7 Meeting Planners Office ....................................................................................... 58
4.8 Examples of actual MH&R Banquet Halls and Meeting Rooms ............................ 59
Additional support areas .................................................................................................. 62
4.9 Bellman’s Stand.................................................................................................... 62
4.10 Parking Valet/Cashier ........................................................................................... 62

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 3
 4.11 Luggage Room ..................................................................................................... 62
4.12 Guest Service Center (Telephone Operators) ....................................................... 62
4.13 Food and Beverage Support Areas....................................................................... 63
4.14 Banquet Storage................................................................................................... 63
4.15 AV Support and Storage ....................................................................................... 63
4.16 Janitor’s Closets ................................................................................................... 63
4.17 Staff Toilets .......................................................................................................... 64
Section D: Guestroom Areas............................................................................................... 65
1. Standard Guestrooms .................................................................................................. 65
1.1 General Requirements.......................................................................................... 65
1.2 Entry Door / Connecting Doors ............................................................................. 65
1.3 Guestroom Modules ............................................................................................. 66
1.4 Bedroom ............................................................................................................... 66
1.5 Beds ..................................................................................................................... 67
1.6 Wardrobe.............................................................................................................. 67
1.7 Mini Bar Area ........................................................................................................ 68
1.8 Guest Bathroom ................................................................................................... 68
1.9 Rest Rooms and Dry Vanities ............................................................................... 70
1.10 Toilet (WC) and Bidets.......................................................................................... 71
1.11 Bathroom Doors ................................................................................................... 71
1.12 Windows and Sliding Glass Doors ....................................................................... 71
1.13 Balconies / Terraces ............................................................................................ 71
1.14 Mechanical and Electrical..................................................................................... 72
1.15 ADA Room Accessibility Requirements ................................................................ 73
2. Suites .......................................................................................................................... 74
2.1 General Requirements.......................................................................................... 74
2.2 Module Requirements........................................................................................... 75
3. Executive Lounge and Guestrooms ............................................................................. 75
3.1 General Requirements.......................................................................................... 75
3.2 Entrance ............................................................................................................... 76
3.3 Guestrooms .......................................................................................................... 76
3.4 Reception Desk .................................................................................................... 76
3.5 Support Work Area ............................................................................................... 76

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 4
 3.6 Food and Beverage offering in Executive Lounge................................................. 76
3.7 Service Pantry ...................................................................................................... 77
4. Corridors and Related Areas ....................................................................................... 77
4.1 Guestroom Corridors ............................................................................................ 77
4.2 Elevator Lobby ..................................................................................................... 78
4.3 Ice Machine Room................................................................................................ 79
4.4 Service Elevator Foyer ......................................................................................... 79
4.5 Housekeeping Storage Room ............................................................................... 79
4.6 Janitor’s Closet (can be included within the HK storage room) ............................. 80
4.7 Staff Toilet (where possible) ................................................................................. 80
4.8 Electrical and Communication Rooms .................................................................. 80
5. General Design Conditions .......................................................................................... 81
6. Examples of actual MH&R Guestrooms and Suites ..................................................... 82
Section E: Spa and Fitness ................................................................................................. 84
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 84
2. Fitness Centre or Spa or Fitness Centre and Spa ........................................................ 84
3. Spa .............................................................................................................................. 85
3.1 Spa Design Flow .................................................................................................. 85
3.2 Features and Facilities.......................................................................................... 86
3.3 Spa Arrival / Reception ......................................................................................... 86
3.4 Administration Offices for Spa .............................................................................. 87
3.5 Retail .................................................................................................................... 88
3.6 Fitness Area and Studio ....................................................................................... 89
3.7 Salon (Hair Styling, Make-up, Manicure, Pedicure) ............................................... 90
3.8 Lockers, Areas, Wet Areas and Relaxation Amenities .......................................... 91
3.9 Social Lounges (Optional) .................................................................................... 96
3.10 Outdoor Spa Pools, Water Features and Relaxation Areas .................................. 97
3.11 Treatment Rooms ................................................................................................. 98
3.12 Back of House .................................................................................................... 102
4. Examples of actual MH&R Spas & Fitness Centres ................................................... 105
Section F: Pool and Leisure Activity Areas ........................................................................ 107
1. General Swimming Pool Requirements ..................................................................... 107
2. Swimming pools, whirlpools and decks ...................................................................... 108

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 5
 2.1 Main / Adult Pool(s) ............................................................................................ 108
2.2 Children’s Pool ................................................................................................... 108
2.3 Whirlpools/Plunge Pools ..................................................................................... 109
2.4 Pool Deck and Related Amenities ...................................................................... 109
2.5 Cabanas ............................................................................................................. 109
2.6 Pool Support Services ....................................................................................... 110
3. Outdoor recreational facilities..................................................................................... 110
3.1 Comfort Station................................................................................................... 110
3.2 Pro Shop ............................................................................................................ 111
4. Beach Activities ......................................................................................................... 111
4.1 Beach Pavilion ................................................................................................... 111
5. Indoor Recreational Facilities ..................................................................................... 112
6. Children and Youth Centres ....................................................................................... 112
7. Departure lounge ....................................................................................................... 113
8. Examples of Actual MH&R Leisure Areas .................................................................. 114
Section G: MH&R Branded Residences ............................................................................ 116
1. The MH&R Branded Residences Concept ................................................................. 116
2. F&B Concepts ........................................................................................................... 117
3. Banquet, Meeting Rooms and Business Centre Facilities .......................................... 117
4. Retail and Concessionaires ....................................................................................... 118
5. Apartment / Suite Features and Configuration ........................................................... 118
5.1 Standard Features .............................................................................................. 118
5.2 Apartment / Suite Configuration .......................................................................... 119
5.3 In-room Kitchen / Kitchenette Concepts .............................................................. 119
5.4 In-Room Laundry Facilities ................................................................................. 120
5.5 In-Room Technology .......................................................................................... 120
5.6 Life Safety Systems ............................................................................................ 120
6. Leisure and Recreational Facilities ............................................................................ 120
7. Parking ...................................................................................................................... 121
8. JOP – Jointly Owned Properties ................................................................................ 121
8.1 Utilities ................................................................................................................ 121
8.2 Elevators & Lift Lobbies ...................................................................................... 122
8.3 Hotel Rental Pool Apartments............................................................................. 122

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 6
 8.4 Residential Move-in & Move-out Considerations................................................. 123
8.5 Leisure Facilities ................................................................................................. 123
8.6 Integration between Residential Intercom & Hotel Telephony System ................ 124
8.7 Convenience Store / Takeaway Coffee............................................................... 124
8.8 Car Parks ........................................................................................................... 125
9. Examples of actual MH&R Residences ...................................................................... 126
Section H: Design and Construction Standards................................................................. 128
1. Back of House (BOH) ................................................................................................ 128
1.1 Office Areas........................................................................................................ 128
1.2 Reservations and Telephone Operator Rooms (Guest Service Center) .............. 132
1.3 Human Resources .............................................................................................. 132
1.4 Security Manager’s Office / Security Control Room ............................................ 133
1.5 Staff Facilities ..................................................................................................... 134
1.6 First Aid Office .................................................................................................... 137
2. Housekeeping, Laundry and Valet ............................................................................. 137
2.1 General Requirements........................................................................................ 137
2.2 Laundry .............................................................................................................. 137
2.3 Valet ................................................................................................................... 142
2.4 Housekeeping and Uniform Issue ....................................................................... 142
2.5 Stewards Room .................................................................................................. 143
3. Kitchen and Food preparation. ................................................................................... 143
3.1 General Design Criteria ...................................................................................... 143
3.2 Main Kitchen / Banquet Kitchen .......................................................................... 144
3.3 Walk-in Refrigerators / Freezers ......................................................................... 144
3.4 In-Room Dining................................................................................................... 144
3.5 Flower Work Room ............................................................................................. 145
4. Loading dock, receiving, purchasing and storage ...................................................... 145
4.1 Loading Area ...................................................................................................... 145
4.2 Support Offices ................................................................................................... 146
4.3 Repairs and Maintenance ................................................................................... 147
Section I: General Project Conditions................................................................................ 149
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................ 149
2. Design and Construction Requirements ..................................................................... 149

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 7
 2.1 Project Technical Services ................................................................................. 149
2.2 Project Records .................................................................................................. 150
2.3 Substantial Completion Documentation .............................................................. 150
2.4 Attic Stock .......................................................................................................... 151
3. Mock up Rooms and Pre-Opening Offices ................................................................. 151
3.1 Mock up Rooms and Corridors ........................................................................... 151
3.2 Pre-Opening Offices ........................................................................................... 152
4. Punch list Procedures and Project Takeover ............................................................. 153
4.1 General .............................................................................................................. 153
4.2 Guestrooms, Residential Units and Corridors ..................................................... 153
4.3 Public Areas and Heart-of-House ....................................................................... 154
4.4 Construction Punch List Criteria ......................................................................... 154
5. Early Occupancy, FF&E Installation Requirements and Pre-Opening ........................ 155
5.1 General .............................................................................................................. 155
5.2 Installation Requirements ................................................................................... 156
5.3 Start-Up and Testing .......................................................................................... 156
5.4 Schedule of Early Hand Over and Occupancy .................................................... 157
Section J: Mechanical Systems ......................................................................................... 159
1. General Requirements ............................................................................................... 159
1.1 Air Conditioning Systems .................................................................................... 159
1.2 Centralized Chiller Plant ..................................................................................... 160
1.3 Cooling Towers................................................................................................... 160
1.4 Chilled Water Distribution ................................................................................... 161
1.5 Special Systems ................................................................................................. 161
1.6 Elevators & Lift Lobbies...................................................................................... 162
2. Steam and Hot Water Boiler Plants............................................................................ 163
2.1 Centralized Boiler Plant ...................................................................................... 163
2.2 Hot Water Distribution......................................................................................... 164
2.3 Laundry Steam Boiler Plant ................................................................................ 165
2.4 Humidification ..................................................................................................... 165
2.5 Central Air-Compressor Plant ............................................................................. 165
2.6 Heat Exchangers ................................................................................................ 165
3. HVAC Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 166

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 8
 3.1 General Air Handling Units and HVAC Criteria ................................................... 166
3.2 Miscellaneous Operating Equipment .................................................................. 168
3.3 HVAC for the Guest Unit..................................................................................... 171
3.4 Intelligent Thermostat for Guestrooms ................................................................ 174
3.5 Corridor Air Conditioning and Pressurization ...................................................... 174
3.6 Public Areas Cooling and Heating ...................................................................... 174
3.7 Spa HVAC .......................................................................................................... 175
3.8 Kitchen HVAC .................................................................................................... 175
3.9 Underground Parking / Loading Dock ................................................................. 175
3.10 Mechanical and Service Areas ........................................................................... 176
3.11 Laundry .............................................................................................................. 176
3.12 Building Management System (BMS) ................................................................. 176
Section K: Plumbing Systems ........................................................................................... 178
1. General Requirements ............................................................................................... 178
1.1 Hot Water Supply and Treatment ....................................................................... 178
1.2 Domestic Cold Water Distribution ....................................................................... 178
1.3 Domestic Hot Water Distribution ......................................................................... 179
1.4 Storm Water Disposal ......................................................................................... 179
1.5 Sanitary Waste Disposal..................................................................................... 179
1.6 Swimming Pool Circulation and Filtration ............................................................ 180
1.7 Gas Distribution .................................................................................................. 180
1.8 Diesel Fuel Storage ............................................................................................ 180
1.9 Special Systems ................................................................................................. 181
1.10 Fire Protection, Sprinklers and Standpipes ......................................................... 181
1.11 Water Meters ...................................................................................................... 181
1.12 Insulation ............................................................................................................ 181
1.13 Noise Control Guidelines .................................................................................... 181
2. Plumbing fixture minimum requirements. ................................................................... 182
2.1 Public Areas ....................................................................................................... 182
2.2 Guestrooms ........................................................................................................ 183
2.3 Staff Areas.......................................................................................................... 183
Section L: Electrical Systems ............................................................................................ 184
1 General Requirements............................................................................................. 184

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 9
 1.1 Power Supply and Distribution ............................................................................ 184
1.2 Emergency Generator ........................................................................................ 185
1.3 Lighting and Dimming ......................................................................................... 186
1.4 Emergency Lighting ............................................................................................ 187
1.4 Exterior Landscape Lighting Requirements ........................................................ 188
1.5 Lightning Protection ............................................................................................ 188
Section M: Fire Protection and Life Safety Systems .......................................................... 189
1. General information ................................................................................................... 189
1.1 Automatic Sprinkler System ................................................................................ 190
1.2 Miscellaneous Fire Suppression Systems........................................................... 190
1.3 Fire Alarm System .............................................................................................. 190
1.4 Smoke Control and Smoke Exhaust ................................................................... 191
1.5 ADA Visual Indicating Devices ............................................................................ 191
1.6 Standby Power, Emergency Power and Lighting ................................................ 192
1.7 Evacuation Signage ............................................................................................ 192
1.8 Portable Fire Fighting Equipment ....................................................................... 192
1.9 Carbon Monoxide Detectors ............................................................................... 192
1.10 Fire Command Station ........................................................................................ 192
1.11 Supervisory Devices ........................................................................................... 193
Section N: Mechanical; HVAC; Fire, Life & Safety and Electrical Checklists ..................... 194
1. Mechanical Plumbing and Fire Protection Checklists ............................................... 194
2. Electrical Checklists ................................................................................................... 201
Section O: Security Systems ............................................................................................. 216
1. Security and Assistance Systems .............................................................................. 216
1.1 Security and CCTV Monitoring Office ................................................................. 216
1.2 Public Areas ....................................................................................................... 217
2. Global Security and Risk Control ............................................................................... 217
2.1 Global Security ................................................................................................... 217
2.2 Risk Control ........................................................................................................ 217
2.3 Draw Down of MHR Security Guidelines............................................................. 218
2.4 CCTV Equipment................................................................................................ 218
2.5 Heart of House Areas ......................................................................................... 219
2.6 Master Key System ............................................................................................ 219

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 10
 2.7 Electronic Door Locks ......................................................................................... 220
2.8 Two-Way Radio System ..................................................................................... 221
3. Life Safety and Security Systems .............................................................................. 221
3.1 General Considerations ...................................................................................... 221
3.2 Security Systems ................................................................................................ 221
3.3 Security Office .................................................................................................... 222
3.4 Global Security and Risk Control ........................................................................ 223
Section P: Elevators .......................................................................................................... 224
1. General Requirements ............................................................................................... 224
1.1 Public Elevators .................................................................................................. 224
1.2 Service / Freight Elevators .................................................................................. 225
Section Q: Electronic Locking Systems ............................................................................. 227
1. Electronic Locking System ......................................................................................... 227
2.1 General Requirements........................................................................................ 227
2.2 Hardware and Software ...................................................................................... 227
2.3 System Features ................................................................................................ 228
2.4 System Locations ............................................................................................... 228
Section R: Signage & Graphics ......................................................................................... 230
1. Introduction................................................................................................................ 230
1.1 Exterior Signage ................................................................................................. 230
1.2 Interior Signage .................................................................................................. 230
1.3 Traffic Signage ................................................................................................... 230
1.4 General Requirements........................................................................................ 230
1.5 Food and Beverage ............................................................................................ 231
1.6 Spa and Health Club .......................................................................................... 231
1.7 Visual Display Systems ...................................................................................... 231
2 Graphics .................................................................................................................... 232
2.1 Digital Signage / Electronic Way-finding ............................................................. 232
2.2 Front Desk and Concierge Areas ........................................................................ 232
2.3 Elevators ............................................................................................................ 233
3 Electronic signage and way-finding system requirements. ......................................... 233
Section S: Audio Visual & Background Music ................................................................... 234
1. Introduction................................................................................................................ 234

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 11
 1.1 Background Music .............................................................................................. 234
1.2 Background Music Equipment ............................................................................ 235
1.3 Volume Control Panels ....................................................................................... 235
1.4 Music Content .................................................................................................... 235
2. Audio Visual............................................................................................................... 236
2.1 Meeting Rooms .................................................................................................. 236
2.2 Ballrooms ........................................................................................................... 236
2.3 Boardrooms ........................................................................................................ 237
2.4 Training Rooms .................................................................................................. 237
2.5 Portable AV Equipment ...................................................................................... 237
Section T: Information Technology (IT) ............................................................................. 238
1. Passive Infrastructure ................................................................................................ 238
1.1 Cabling Standards .............................................................................................. 238
1.2 Wired LAN (Local Area Network) ....................................................................... 239
1.3 Structure Cabling (Horizontal Cabling) ................................................................ 241
2. Network Infrastructure................................................................................................ 244
2.1 Convergence ...................................................................................................... 244
2.2 Cellular Telephone Boosters............................................................................... 245
2.3 Next Generation Firewall (NGFW) ...................................................................... 245
2.4 Switches ............................................................................................................. 246
Retention of existing switches .................................................................................... 247
3. Wireless LAN (WLAN) ............................................................................................... 251
3.1 Site Surveys ....................................................................................................... 252
3.2 Wireless Access Point Antennas ........................................................................ 253
3.3 Power over Ethernet (POE+) .............................................................................. 253
4. Internet Connection ................................................................................................... 254
4.1 High Speed Internet Access (HSIA) .................................................................... 254
4.2 Network connection ............................................................................................ 254
4.3 Standards, Resources and References .............................................................. 255
4.4 MHR VPN Primary Internet connection ............................................................... 255
4.5 MHR VPN Backup Internet connection ............................................................... 255
4.6 MHR Global Network Services (GNS) ................................................................ 256
5. Data Center / Computer Room .................................................................................. 256

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 12
 5.1 Location and Space Allocation............................................................................ 257
5.2 Planning Considerations ..................................................................................... 258
6. Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) ........................................................................ 263
6.1 Function and Considerations .............................................................................. 263
6.2 Dimensions and Interior Finishes ........................................................................ 263
6.3 Electric Power .................................................................................................... 264
6.4 Environment ....................................................................................................... 264
6.5 Closet Penetrations ............................................................................................ 264
6.6 Fire Protection & Life Safety: .............................................................................. 265
7. Property Facilities ...................................................................................................... 265
7.1 Main Lobby ........................................................................................................ 265
7.2 Guestroom Layout ............................................................................................. 265
7.3 Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) and power specification ........................... 266
7.4 Building Management System (BMS) ................................................................ 267
7.5 Online Guest Room Management System (GRMS) .......................................... 267
7.6 Backup Solution ................................................................................................ 268
7.7 Server Operating System (OS).......................................................................... 269
7.8 ESX Host Servers ............................................................................................. 269
7.9 Virtual Servers .................................................................................................. 269
7.10 Digital Video Surveillance / Closed Television Circuit ....................................... 270
8. Workplace Configuration ........................................................................................... 270
8.1 Laptops ............................................................................................................. 270
8.2 Desktops PCs .................................................................................................... 270
8.3 PC Operating System ........................................................................................ 271
8.4 Office Automation and Collaboration .................................................................. 271
8.5 Smartphones (Apple IOS) .................................................................................. 271
8.6 Tablets (Apple IOS) ........................................................................................... 272
8.7 Key Locations & Componentry .......................................................................... 272
8.8 IT Security ........................................................................................................ 275
8.9 Email ................................................................................................................ 275
8.10 High volume printers ........................................................................................ 276
8.11 Individual printers ............................................................................................. 276
9. Telecommunications ................................................................................................ 276

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 13
 9.1 IP PBX ............................................................................................................... 276
9.2 Other Communication Systems ......................................................................... 280
10. Commercial and Business Solutions .................................................................... 284
10.1 Accounting ....................................................................................................... 284
10.2 Banquet and event customer surveys .............................................................. 285
10.3 Booking Engine ............................................................................................... 285
10.4 Business Intelligence / Management information ............................................. 285
10.5 Central profile .................................................................................................. 286
10.6 Central Reservations ....................................................................................... 288
10.7 Credit Card Clearing ........................................................................................ 288
10.8 CRM (Customer Relationship Management).................................................... 289
10.9 E-learning ........................................................................................................ 289
10.10 E-mail campaigning ......................................................................................... 290
10.11 Email Room Reservation Confirmations and Pre-arrival .................................. 290
10.12 Enterprise Interfacing ...................................................................................... 291
10.13 Enterprise SMS ............................................................................................... 291
10.14 E-recruitment .................................................................................................. 291
10.15 Frequent Flyer Program (FFP) ........................................................................ 292
10.16 Guest surveys ................................................................................................. 292
10.17 Human Resources and Payroll ........................................................................ 292
10.18 Digital Asset Management .............................................................................. 293
10.19 Meeting and conference builder ...................................................................... 293
10.20 Parking system................................................................................................ 293
10.21 Point of sale system ........................................................................................ 294
10.22 Property Management System (PMS) ............................................................. 295
10.23 Sales and Catering System ............................................................................. 296
10.24 Sales Force Automation (SFA) ........................................................................ 297
10.25 Rapid response/ service center ....................................................................... 297
10.26 Restaurant Reservations / Table Management ............................................... 298
10.27 RFP (Request for Proposal) ............................................................................ 298
10.28 Spa and membership system .......................................................................... 298
10.29 Talent Management System............................................................................ 299
10.30 Time and Attendance ...................................................................................... 299

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 14
 10.31 Travel Agent Commissions ............................................................................. 299
10.32 Web check-in check-out ................................................................................. 300
10.33 Revenue Yield Management .......................................................................... 300
11. Audio / Visual ............................................................................................................. 300
11.1 Antenna Television (MATV) System ................................................................. 301
11.2 Guestroom Entertainment Systems IPTV: ........................................................ 303
11.3 Digital Signage & Way-Finding: Visual Information System .............................. 304
11.4 Sound System – Background Music ................................................................. 307
11.5 Events Space Sound Systems & Visual Display ............................................... 310
11.6 Digital Signal Processing (DSP) ....................................................................... 313
11.7 Portable A/V Equipment ................................................................................... 316
11.8 Documentation ................................................................................................. 316
11.9 Warranty .......................................................................................................... 317
11.10 Food & Beverage Sound Systems................................................................... 317
11.11 Fitness Area Sound & Video Systems ............................................................. 319
11.12 Spa Sound & Video Systems .......................................................................... 320
11.13 Architectural acoustics, Event Spaces............................................................. 322
12.IT BUDGET ESTIMATIONS (USD)........................................................................... 326
Section T: Appendices ...................................................................................................... 328
1. Appendix 1: MH&R Standard Space Requirements Programs – abridged. ................ 329
2. Appendix 2: Area Finishing Standards Matrix. ........................................................... 333
3. Appendix 3: Area Design Standards – Noise Insulation and Fire Protection. ............. 337
4. Appendix 4: Area Design Standards – HVAC. ........................................................... 341
5. Appendix 5: Area Design Standards – LV; Lighting; IT, Telephone & WC Systems. .. 344
6. Appendix 6: Area Design Standards – Life Safety and Security Systems................... 348
7. Appendix 7: MH&R Kitchens – kitchen flow diagram & sample layouts. ..................... 349
7.1 Kitchen Flow Diagram ........................................................................................ 349
7.2 Sample Layout for MH&R Compact Kitchen: ..................................................... 350
7.3 Main Kitchen Central Cooking ........................................................................... 351
7.4 Main Kitchen – Banquet Kitchen, VIP Bar & Pantry........................................... 352
7.5 Main Kitchen – Bakery, Pastry & Ice Cream...................................................... 353
7.6 Main Kitchen – Main Service Bar and Cold Preparation .................................... 354
7.7 Main Kitchen – Room Service ............................................................................. 355

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 15
 7.8 Main Kitchen – Dishwashing & Trolleys .............................................................. 356
7.9 Pool Bar Restaurant & Pool Snack Bar Pantry ................................................... 357
7.10 Satellite Kitchen Sample – Gourmet Restaurant ................................................ 358
8. Appendix 8: MH&R Laundry – sample layout and linen circuit ................................... 359
8.1 Laundry Layout ................................................................................................... 359
8.2 Linen Circuit: ...................................................................................................... 360
9. Appendix 9: MH&R Flow diagrams ............................................................................ 361
9.1 Entrance Lobby / Reception Area Flow Diagram ................................................ 361
9.2 Conference Venue including Banquet Halls & Meeting Rooms Flow Diagram .... 362
9.3 Back of House Flow Diagram ............................................................................. 363
9.4 Kitchen Areas Flow Diagram .............................................................................. 363
9.5 Spa Flow Diagram .............................................................................................. 364
10. Appendix10:Abbreviations ....................................................................................... 365

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 16
Section A: An introduction to these standards
“We aren’t doing anything extraordinary. We are successful because we are doing normal
things in an extraordinary manner.” – Ueli Prager, founder of Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts.

These meaningful words constitute the foundation of what it takes to drive a Mövenpick design.

Designers should study our brand, but also the history and culture of the project’s geographic
location; then create a 360-design narrative. Survey the local competition, understand the
demographic and look at ‘normal things’ with new eyes. Let the brand’s aesthetic and the
project’s location come together in an artfully executed branded product, with a definite sense
of place.

Start with clean and contemporary architectural plans. Create interest, by shifting surfaces
inward and outward. Highlight features with powerful colours, as well as contrasting finishes.
Tie in the cultural influences with strategically positioned organic relief in unexpected, artistic
ways such as floor patterns, balustrades, carpets and textiles. Introduce decorative lighting in
unusual and sensational finishes. Generate a warm and natural ambience that subliminally
makes people feel good in the space.

Produce an undeniably bold statement of design and function with classic, modern furniture
in rich and dynamic materials. Accessorise with regionally inspired artwork that is not literal in
any way. Create guestrooms that are functional and intuitively friendly to all guests. Work side
by side with F&B consultants and the brand to create restaurant identities that will be the heart
and soul of the venue’s success.

Whenever possible, align efforts with Mövenpick’s Global Sustainability philosophy.

Incorporate low impact, non-toxic, sustainably produced or recycled materials and energy
efficient products.

Most importantly: keep it simple, but think out of the box, break barriers and cross lines.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 17
Foreword by the President and CEO of Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts

Mövenpick hotels all have a unique

personality and attitude that is rooted in
their surroundings. For us, hotels are less
about star ratings, and more about creating
the right synthesis between comfort and
sense of place. To that, we add our
Mövenpick pedigree and our Swiss
heritage.

Our legacy allows us to build on the

strength of the Mövenpick name by insisting
on high standards and innovation when it
comes not only to our guests’ welcome, in-
room and departure experiences, but also
on providing the right public space for
enjoyment and interaction. Mövenpick's
vision is we make moments. We recognise
that it is about the small things in life, that doing ordinary things in an extraordinary way has a
big impact on our guests, our owners and our people. The interiors of our hotels should provide
an environment where unique experiences and unforgettable memories can be created.

These Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines were developed to ensure that we
create the Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts experience for future properties, right from the outset.
A Mövenpick hotel is more than just a hotel and this manual should be a source of inspiration
as much as a practical guide. It is designed to provide sensible minimum requirements for
building and operating a Mövenpick property, and to communicate these in an understandable
manner and format. Planning consultants must use the manual as the first step while preparing
for and developing a lasting working relationship with Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts.

Thank you in advance for your commitment and enthusiasm as we further develop the brand
together, and create hotels where true moments can be made.

Olivier Chavy
President and CEO
Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 18
The Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines

The Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines will be used by the Development &
Technical Services Department of MH&R for the following situations:

1. Plan and specification review for a proposed new construction project.

2. Plan and specification review for remodelling, refurbishing and renovation projects.
3. Preparation of a deficiency list in connection with the conversion of a non-Mövenpick
Hotel to a Mövenpick – Hotel or Resort.

This document forthwith known as the SDOPG is a minimum requirement. For the exact
definition of the product profile a Feasibility Study has to be made by a qualified third party
and evaluated by MH&R and the local Architects / Planners on behalf of the Owner /
Developer.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 19
Section B: The creation of a Mövenpick Hotel

Design Direction
The process begins with MH&R giving the Owner/Developer this document (Standard Design
& Operational Planning Guidelines) after an HMA has been signed. This document comprises
the following main topics:
1) Introduction

2) Key success factors of a Mövenpick Hotel

3) Basic Services of Architects, Consultants & Engineers
4) Technical Services Agreements
5) Value Design, Value Engineering and Life Cycle Analysis
6) Procedures and Co-ordination with MH&R before and after Executive
Decision
7) Building Criteria
8) Standard Space Requirements - Abridged
9) Sustainable Design, Value design, Value Engineering and life cycle
Analysis

As the market strategy develops this document is adjusted to suit the particular hotel project
that is under development.

The provision of adjustments is subject to an Executive Decision and further information will
only be supplied when the Executive Committee or the Board of Mövenpick Hotels and
Resorts have ratified an Executive Decision. Please refer Section B, Chapter 6.

Before reading through this Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines the
owner/developer must be familiar with what makes a Mövenpick Hotel & Resort successful.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 20
1. Introduction

Hotels are a civilising influence, as many of today's building components and systems were
either created or refined in the development of hotels. As we approach the end of the second
decade of the millennium, it is time to assess the future of hotels and their design. Every hotel
is a balance of host, guest and place, and over the ages the balance has shifted from one
component to another. The following paragraphs describe some of the opportunities and
challenges hotel designers, owners, and operators face, given that the balance may shift in
coming years.

Designing to the Bottom Line

Hotel projects, by their nature, carry a higher financial risk than most other project types, so
creating designs that make financial sense has become a must. Designers must remember
that successful, appealing designs that establish or reinforce brand identity also minimize risk
and increase revenue potential. “Form follows function”.

Technology

The high-tech movement in the hotel industry is no longer a wish-list item. For the past several
years MH&R have been heeding the increasing demand by guests for easy access to the
Internet and for high-speed business tools in public areas and guest rooms. This means higher
capacity telephone and data infrastructure and installing data points in the furniture,
furnishings and equipment (FF&E). These requirements in turn, force the layout of the rooms
and the design of desks, armoires, and related furniture pieces to accommodate these
demands.

Guest Sophistication

Today's guest experiences, through television and the internet, a wide array of designs, home
improvements, and styles. The outcome is that, consciously or not, guests have acquired an
expanded design vocabulary and their expectations have risen. Guests of hotels are also
attuned to the concept of a design-consumer lifestyle, so materials should have a more
residential feel and more amenities will be designed with an eye to future merchandising to
guests.

There has been a notable merge in the business and leisure travel markets as well as an
increased sophistication in the business traveller. More business travellers will likely be
travelling with their families, so the former standards for a business hotel will continue to be
heavily influenced by the increase in residential and destination hotels that include convention
and business facilities.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 21
Cultural, Green Aspects

The need for designers to emphasize the hotel local connection and the need to incorporate
environmentally friendly designs and materials such as the selection of millwork made from
wood harvested from sustainable forests, to using paints and carpets free of harmful chemicals
and vapours, to using solar or wind power, there is a growing list of green design options that
future guests will expect and respond to favourably.

Key success Factors of a Mövenpick Hotel

Considering the impact of hotels on design, Mövenpick Hotels and Resorts consider that
the following points need to be emphasised when considering MH&R as a future partner.

Design

Movenpick Hotels & Resorts are constantly reviewing the designs of their Hotels as well as
the current and future trends in Hotels around the world, we pride ourselves in working with
world class Interior Designers who can deliver a local feeling to our Hotels regardless of the
location. In order to guide the Interior Designer in designing the Hotel we have developed or
are in the process of developing a number of concepts that can be used to inspire and guide
the Interior Designer to deliver an exceptional product. These concepts are as follows;

Coffee & Wine Lounge Concept, this is based on creating a space that becomes multi-
functional and transformable, evolving from a daytime coffee lounge to an evening wine lounge
through transformable fixture and fittings as well as lighting. This concept will also focus on
the provision of Movenpick products which include coffee, wine, jams, yoghurt, chocolate and
Ice Cream, this concept has been fully developed and can be issued to the appointed Interior
Designer for inclusion in the project.

Lobby Living Room – The concept is based on creating the perfect and comfortable space
to work, gather or just kick back and relax, it will also feature our Movenpick products. Key to
the success of this concept is easy to use and good connectivity to the internet as well as
convenient charging facilities for mobile phones and computers. This concept is still under
development however we can share with our owners the current status of the project.

Improved Arrival & Departure Experience – This is typically the most stressful part of a
Hotel visit and it is our objective to make this as stress free as possible, although there is
technology available to streamline this process we recognise that one solution does not fit
everyone’s needs, we are therefore looking at providing options for everyone that will provide
a quick and easy yet comfortable experience, careful thought needs to be given for our guests'
right up to the last minute! Such as a departure lounge, storage and shower facilities, emphasis
on comfort after check out.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 22
Balanced Living – Regardless of whether someone is staying in a Hotel for pleasure or for
business it is a departure from their normal routine, this can result in eating different foods or
having a disturbed sleeping experience, in addition to this many guests are becoming more
environmentally conscious and are making their choice of Hotels based on these beliefs. With
all of this in mind we are looking at ways to further accommodate a Guest’s requirement
whether it be through the provision of specific linen or pillows, healthier eating options or
quieter rooms all of which will be procured and delivered in an environmentally friendly
method, again the development of this concept is in its infancy

Whilst the development of the above-mentioned concepts will provide specific details of the
experience we want our guests to have, we also recognise that the physical space plays a
large part, our expectations is that the entrance provides a positive first impression for the
guest of the hotel. This should be dramatic but not intimidating, and as welcoming as possible
and make full use of views, space and lighting. The guest needs to feel that they are in a
specific country and not just “anywhere”.

Generally, the design should be warm, contemporary providing a modern, timeless feel and a
friendly atmosphere. (Not minimalist). Local content or traditions should be considered in the
design.

Maximum attention must be placed on the use of natural daylight, be it in the lobby, meeting
rooms, guest rooms and bathrooms, restaurants and cafeteria, fitness and wellness.

Special emphasis needs to be given to the guestrooms, as this is the only area that a guest
enjoys their privacy. All MH&R hotels must be equipped with top quality “Simmons Beautyrest
Movenpick Mattresses with Evernu” or equivalent beds and the choice of duvets and pillows,
the sizes of beds must aim to create an “at home’ feeling. In the lighting design, the creation
of a homely ambience is most important and the provision of bedside lighting is therefore a
must.

Guest Bathrooms should not only be functional but as importantly very welcoming. Special
attention is to be given to the layout of bathroom, lighting and hot water supply and pressure,
with the aim to create an excellent shower experience. The guest should feel at ease and
enjoy a truly residential feeling, “home away from home”.

MH&R also recognise the importance of our colleagues and the important role that they play
in providing excellent service to our Guests, with this in mind we believe that the BOH and
staff facilities also need great care and attention in the layout and the design therefore
attention must be given to staff and back of house areas and efforts must be made to ensure
that staff morale is good in their working environment. It is essential that workflow and
relationships between various zones of a hotel are thoroughly investigated.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 23
Emphasis should be place in a creatively, a staff canteen that is welcoming to the staff
members and not an old fashioned white tiled wall curtain, the canteen should fall under the
scope of Interior Designer.

Speciality Restaurant – at least one restaurant must be designed with an active front or show
kitchen. Product merchandising must be of an excellent standard and features such as a wine
cellar at the entrance to the restaurant should be considered.

3 Meal Dining Restaurant - At least one large family table must be accommodated in the main
3 Meal Dining Restaurant for families, large parties or single guests to share if applicable.

Mövenpick shop in the lobby selling Mövenpick products and "Swiss" items.

Art and décor elements to be thoroughly researched, but with “ethnic/local” touches to reflect
the sense of space.

Technology

100% Wifi coverage provided throughout the hotel.

High speed internet and data connections must be available in all public areas and
guestrooms.
Smart card access to guestrooms and fitness areas, and other "guest only restricted areas".
Media technology to be state of the art in meeting rooms, including electronic display and
audio systems.
Top quality lighting control must be designed for in public areas and guestrooms to enhance
the atmosphere. The lighting is to be functional and easy to use.
Top quality temperature control in public and guestrooms designed for ease of use.
Large, flat screen minimum of 49” smart TVs are to be provided in guestrooms and 55” in
suites and these are to be programmed with a minimum of 100 channels.

Merging the Business and Leisure Travellers

Fitness spa and wellness facilities are to be well equipped.

A Kids Club must be included where applicable, especially in Resort hotels.
MH&R Resort Hotels must offer swimming pools to cater for all types of hotel guests.

Sustainability and Cultural aspects

The following items are to be considered:

- Eco-friendly HVAC systems
- Noise pollution, acoustics
- Water and energy conservation, energy benchmarking

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 24
 - Energy optimised light and electricity systems
- Socio-economic effects
- Aesthetics and building efficiency
- Performance monitoring
- Waste management
- Building insulation

Basic Services of Architects, Consultants and Engineers

Architects / Engineers / Consultants

The Architect/Engineer/Consultant shall perform the following basic services pertaining to the
Hotel and be responsible to the Owner/Developer. MH&R approval must be obtained on all
matters required by the Management or Lease Agreement. Generally, all documents should
be the property of the Owner/Developer.
The Architect/Engineer/Consultant of the Owner/ Developer shall provide Value Design &
Value Engineering services consisting of evaluation of all reasonable design components,
systems and methods of efficiency, economy, energy and life safety and adaptability to the
site. The Architect/Engineer/Consultant warrants that all documents shall be in full compliance
with all applicable codes and regulations.

Interior Designer's including Spa/Wellness Consultants

In Hotel work the Interior Designer is generally employed by the owner/developer in agreement
with MH&R. The Interior Designer works collaboratively with the
Architect/Engineer/Consultants to prepare a cohesive concept for the Hotel or Resort.
MH&R has in its possession a list of preferred Interior Designers and approval must be
obtained prior to awarding of interior design contracts.
Basic Interior Design Services include normal interior design services for furniture, fixtures
and equipment (FF&E), accessories, special finishes, graphics, uniforms and table top items
and coordination with consultants approved by owner/developer.
All documents must comply with all applicable codes and regulations.
A qualified estimator must prepare all Interior Design estimations.

Food & Beverage Consultant / Kitchen Consultant/ laundry Consultant

Given the importance of the Food and Beverage (F&B) outlets and the banquet and social
functions in a hotel, it is required that this specialist Consultant works closely with MH&R and
receives approval on all matters.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 25
For all Food & Beverage outlet interior designs a specialist Food & Beverage Interior
Designers must be employed by the Owner. Upon request MHH&R can provide a list of F&B
Consultants that we have previously worked with. The scope of work includes all food
preparation and service areas including restaurants, show kitchens, exhibition and display
areas, bars, F&B storage areas, receiving, employee cafeteria, laundry, and related areas.

All documents must comply with all applicable codes and regulations in particular must be
HACCP compliant.

Technical Services Agreements (TSA)

Upon signing of a Technical Services Agreement (TSA), MH&R provide technical design
and engineering input to the owner/developer and their consultants. The MH&R Technical
Services team assists the owner’s planning team in developing imaginative, efficient and
marketable design solutions as well as to ensure a safe and environmentally sound structure.

The Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines (SDOPG) are to assist the
Architect/Engineer/Consultant in the preparation of preliminary plans to be presented to MH&R
for further negotiations.

They should not be construed to either limit the quality level of a proposed project nor do they
represent construction specifications.

MH&R may, when giving approval for projects, increase requirements or grant waivers of
certain requirements contained herein in accordance with project's local market, local customs
or Local Authority requirements, and/or determined at Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts sole
discretion

Please refer questions concerning these standards to:

Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts Management FZ - LLC

Technical Services & Projects Department
Shatha Tower, 39 Floor, Dubai Media City
P.O. Box 500590, Dubai
United Arab Emirates
Phone: +971 4 3671927
Fax: +971 4 367 2688
Web: www.moevenpick-hotels.com

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 26
Mövenpick Area Office Asia
Technical Services & Projects Department
Two Pacific Place, Level 18, Suite 1803,
142 Sukhumvit Road, Klongtoey
Bangkok 10110, Thailand
Phone: +66 2 254 2024-6
Fax: +66 2 653 2302
Web: www.movenpick.com

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 27
Value Design, Value Engineering and Life Cycle Analysis

The goal of achieving value design, or value-added design extends from the initial space
program to the construction award. It generally includes both profound and minor economies
which, in total, can easily make a difference in the projects viability.

The process is pure "cost common sense" and every project can benefit from it.

In Value Engineering the Architects, Engineers, manufacturers' representatives, and hotel

technical staff develop cost-benefit analysis of the maintenance, reliability, and durability of
major materials, systems and equipment being considered for the hotel.

It is imperative that the owner/developer have the engineers/consultants undertake a "life

cycle cost" analysis including operating, energy, maintenance, and replacement costs before
selection of final systems. Please refer Chapter 4 for more detailed information.

Co-ordination with MH&R after an HMA being signed.

Once an HMA has been approved, coordination review is provided in all phases of design
from:

- Initial (Design Brief) Program

- Concept
- Detailed Design
- Final Documentation
- Field Inspections
- Commissioning & Acceptance

Submission of progress reports is required on a thirty (30) day basis on all design and
construction stages of each respective project.

The above to ensure that MH&R and the Owner/Developer's needs are fully met prior to
construction agreements are committed.

A Co-ordination Checklist and organisational chart indicates the stages at which facilities
programming information and other Hotel Technical data are incorporated into the
Architectural and Interior Designer documents. This includes their review and approval by
Owner/Developer, MH&R and Local Authorities.

Prior to submission of plans MH&R shall be furnished with name and address of proposed
architects, engineers and consultants to be retained to prepare such plans.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 28
A. New hotel construction projects.

(This provides an illustrative indication of information that will be required; please also refer to
the TSA).

A complete set of drawings and specifications, stamped by the Architect of Record, to be

submitted to and approved by MH&R prior to commencement of the various phases of the
project and ultimately consisting of the following:

1) Complete set of architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings, including

definitions of all abbreviations and symbols used, and exterior elevations.
(Scale 1 : 100 or 1 : 50)

2) Exterior colour renderings or colour photographs of rendering.

3) All room finish, door and hardware schedules.

4) Fitness area, swimming pool and laundry drawings and specifications. Signed
and stamped by professional engineers, architects and consultants.
Communication and system drawings, specifications and diagrams unless
these are included in the electrical drawings.

5) Identification sign drawings (location, structural and electrical).

6) Complete interior design drawings and concepts to include guestroom types

and sizes, furniture layouts for public and guestroom areas, specifications
sheets, including illustrations, on all furnishings and equipment, detailed floor
plans of all areas. Interior colour boards for all commercial areas and each
room type / scheme to be provided.

7) Bar, service station, kitchen equipment layouts, and equipment schedules

provided by MH&R Food Facility planning.

8) Landscape and outdoor lighting plans to be prepared by a professional

landscape architect must be submitted to MH&R for approval at the time of
submission of final plans and specifications. The landscaping architect must
submit coloured renderings.

9) A mock-up / sample room will be required to be built and signed off by MH&R
officially with recorded protocol prior to any works being awarded.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 29
B. Remodelling, refurbishing or renovation of an existing hotel

(The list below provides an illustrative indication of information that will be required)

Drawings and specifications, properly stamped by the Architect of Record, are to be submitted
to and approved by MH&R prior to commencement of construction, and are to consist of the
following where applicable:

1) Complete architectural, mechanical, electrical and structural drawings,

including definitions of all abbreviations and symbols used, and exterior
elevations.

2) Exterior colour renderings must be furnished upon request to MH&R.

3) All room finish, door, and hardware schedules.

4) Fitness area, swimming pool and laundry room drawings and specifications (if
required due to enhance the market competitiveness).

5) Communication and system drawings, unless they are included in the electrical
drawings.
6) Complete interior design drawings and concepts, to include room types and
sizes, furniture layouts for commercial and guest room areas, specification
sheets, including illustrations of all furnishings and equipment, and detailed
floor plans of all areas.

7) Bar service station, kitchen equipment layouts, and laundry equipment layouts,
including equipment schedules where applicable.

8) Landscape drawing with lighting plan.

C. Conversion of an existing non-Mövenpick Hotel to a Mövenpick Hotel & Resort

(The list below provides an illustrative indication of information that will be required)

Within 30 days of signing an HMA with by MH&R, an inspection of the property will be
conducted by MH&R or its consultants, at which time all existing deficiencies and variances to
MH&R’s prevailing system wide standards for MH&R, including, but not limited to construction
standards, will be identified and a deficiency report prepared.

Submission for approval shall then be made as follows:

1) For conversion properties, submittal of complete set of as-built drawings and

specifications to the extent available. Such plans and specifications must be

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 30
 sufficient to illustrate the nature of the existing floor plans and layouts, the
relationship of the building within the site, and the location of any external
recreation facility and landscaping features.

2) With regard to the redesign and / or refurbishing of existing facilities design

drawings, including but not limited to guestroom and commercial area
furnishings and layouts and interior / exterior elevations shall be approved by
MH&R. Interior colour boards for all commercial areas and each room type /
scheme to be provided.

3) Where construction of additional facilities is required, complete working

drawings and specifications are to be submitted to and approved by MH&R,
prior to commencement of construction.

4) Complete architectural, mechanical, electrical and structural drawings,

(including definitions of all abbreviations and symbols used) and exterior
elevations.

5) Exterior colour renderings must be furnished upon request by MH&R.

6) All room finish, door and hardware schedules.

7) Fitness area, swimming pool and laundry room drawings and specifications
(signed and sealed by professional engineer / architect).

8) Communication and system drawings, unless these are included in the

electrical drawings.

9) Identification sign drawings (location, structural and electrical).

10) Complete interior design and drawings and concepts, to include room types
and sizes, furniture layouts for commercial and guest room areas specification
sheets, including illustrations of all furnishings and equipment, and detailed
floor plans of all areas.

11) Bar service station, kitchen equipment layouts, and laundry equipment layouts
and equipment schedules.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 31
Building Criteria

Construction and Architectural Considerations

For the construction of Mövenpick Hotels the Euro norm applies provided there are no stricter
local rules. Regarding the dimensions of rooms and connecting corridors the minimum sizes
as specified later in this document. Refer Appendices 1 to 6 – Area Design Standards.

In planning a Mövenpick Hotel the detailed Space Requirement Program provided by MH&R
has to be applied. Included in this document is an abridged version of an MH&R Space
Requirement Program. Please note that this is a standard abridged Space Requirement
Program and accordingly has not been adjusted to suit any particular project. Mövenpick
Hotels & Resorts reserves the right to adjust, amend or alter accordingly.

Special attention has to be given to this standard Space Requirement Program and any
deviations from it must be noted.

For assessment of the construction of the hotel rooms through Mövenpick, a Mock-Up room
has to be built. This Mock-Up room could be built outside the construction site (for example in
a construction container) and has to remain in place until the handover for comparison with
the effectively built hotel rooms. Prior to construction of the mock-up room, fully detailed
specifications, plans, sketches, pictures, etc, must be submitted to MH&R for approval.

At the end of the construction phase and whilst the technical and maintenance equipment,
and furniture, fixtures & equipment are being installed, the building needs to be monitored and
protected for 24 hours a day in order to prevent any theft or damage. The necessary costs
associated with this are to be taken into account by the contractor or owner.

An adequate number of plantrooms and shafts for the essential building mechanical systems
need to be provided for. The location and distribution of these technical infrastructure rooms
need to be optimized together with the relevant engineers.

As a Mövenpick Hotel will be refurbished every 5-8 years and completely renovated
approximately every 15 years, the condition of the building structure should allow for smooth,
sensible and stage wise future renovations, modernisations and modifications.

Whenever possible, environmentally sound materials should be used for construction and
surfaces as well as interior decorations. The following criteria apply:

Components:

1) Insulations made of expanded plastic slabs containing H-CFC materials or

asbestos are not permitted.

2) Materials containing toxicologically relevant parts (polychlorinated Biphenyl

PCB), Pentachlorophenol (PCP, lindane etc) are not to be used.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 32
 3) Solvent containing construction products/coating products/adhesives are not to
be used and must be substituted by equivalent solvent free or solvent poor
products.

4) All woods (e.g. MDF Plywood, plastic laminated boards) that are used for
interior construction must comply with the following EURO-Standards: prENV
717-7 and EN120., and are to be free of formaldehyde.

5) Extensive use of contact adhesives and spirit adhesives on the basis of solvent
(carpet adhesives) should be avoided.

6) Façade insulating materials are to be installed in a manner that no fibres are

released into the air.

7) The use of tropical / endangered timbers wood sources is to be avoided and

sustainable harvested timber sources is to be used where necessary.

8) Building mechanical services:

a) Wiring with non-halogen cables;
b) Refrigerant without H-CFC materials. The use of natural refrigerants should
be considered;
c) Heat insulations of expanded plastic slabs containing H-CFC materials
should not be used;
d) Insulation coatings including PVC-containing materials must not be used.

Special attention must be given to the planning the accessibility of the building for handicapped
guests and a number of hotel rooms must be designed for disabled people. In general, if at all
possible, these rooms should have no steps. In the case where steps are unavoidable they
must be furnished with a flat ramp (max. 6% slope rate). Dangerous edges are to be avoided.
Large surfaces of glass need to be clearly marked to avoid collision by vision-impaired people.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 33
Section C: MH&R Standard Space Requirements
1. Public Areas

1.1 Entrance and Lobby Areas

1.1.1. Main Entrance and Porte Cochère

An entrance lobby / reception areas flow diagram is included under Appendix 9 of these
Guidelines.

The design of the hotel entrance must inspire guests, creating an upscale sense of arrival and
departure. The entry drive shall use both landscape and hardscape to clearly identify the
entrance to the property. Quality lighting, signage and driveway designs are essential.

A minimum number of three flagpoles are required at the entry. The anodized aluminium poles
shall have halyards with a custom factory finish. If freestanding, the flagpoles shall not be less
than 4.6m or exceed 12.2m in height.

The paving surface at the approach and under the Porte Cochère should be a durable,
upgraded finish. Adequate slope, drainage, weather protection, landscaping and lighting must
be provided to enhance the appearance and overall guest experience.

Provide low-level background music through concealed speakers.

All driveways, pathways, areas around pools and parking areas should have the minimal
required amount of foot lumens. This will help ensure the safe passage of all guests as they
enter, exit or walk around the gardens.

A rolled curb is required at the Porte Cochère sidewalk for baggage handling and pedestrian
safety.

One ADA accessible curb cut is required from the Porte Cochère to the main entrance. A
diagram is included under Appendix 10 illustrating accommodations made for ADA
accessibility.

Avoid circulation conflicts between vehicles, guests, reception, baggage handling, and service
elevators. Provide continuous covered circulation from vehicles to all doors. Direct access
from the Porte Cochère to the service elevators and luggage storage without crossing the
lobby or interfering with guest circulation is required.

A holding area for taxi, limousine, and short-term valet parking should be located in close
proximity to the Porte Cochère. In resorts and convention hotels, space and access must be
provided for bus and shuttle loading and unloading adjacent to the lobby or group entrance.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 34
Provide adequate hose bibs and weatherproof duplex outlets to connect high-pressure power
washing equipment. Provide power, water and drainage for irrigation and landscape lighting
as necessary.

1.2 Exterior Lighting

1.2.1 Architectural Lighting

The architectural or building lighting shall be designed in accordance with the overall design
concept. The building shall not be illuminated as an iconic structure; rather a subtle blending
into the environment so the guest experience is welcoming without drawing attention to the
structure.

All lighting shall be designed in accordance with local city or county requirements for light
levels and light pollution.

1.2.2 Landscape Lighting

The overall night time ambiance that should be created will encompass safety, security and
aesthetic illumination. The safety and security illumination, which expresses the width and
length of the property, is accomplished by the use of properly shielded down lighting units from
the trees. The aesthetic beauty and height of the trees should be accented with vertical
uplights that are located either up in the tree, on a stake when surrounded by heavy vegetation,
or recessed when in grass. Refer to Section H – Electrical Systems for minimum requirements.

Signage, sculptures and water features should also be specifically lit with a dimmable, warm-
coloured unit. By capturing the height, width and length of any area, the perfect night time
ambiance or “moonlight” is achieved.

1.3 Hotel Entry

A revolving door shall be installed at the main entrance with manual doors on each side. The
revolving doors shall be not less than 2.1m inside diameter and 2.7m high. When a revolving
door cannot be designed due to architectural constraints, two sets of double doors with
enclosed vestibule shall be provided.

Entry doors to create a distinctive sense of place, arrival experience statement for the hotel.
Entry doors must be no less than 2.7m in height and should open out. Sliding storefront doors
are not preferred, rather revolving doors. All swinging doors shall be provided with the highest
quality recessed door closers, weather strips and decorative door hardware.

An entrance lobby / reception areas flow diagram is included under Appendix 9 of these
Guidelines.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 35
 1.4 Lobby

The Main Lobby is connected to the Porte Cochère and hotel entry; it must have a visible
connection to the front desk and reception area. The design of the lobby shall be accented by
a focal feature and/or signature view opportunity. It shall take advantages of high ceilings,
large windows, natural light and large spaces to help establish the property as an upscale
destination. Local ethnic artworks, designs, features should be designed for, to create that
sense of place of the country.

Selection of Lobby finish materials shall take into account the need to achieve a balance
between sound absorptive and reflective surfaces and match the guest visual experience with
appropriate room acoustics.

Provide low-level background music through concealed speakers and dimmable light fixtures.

1.5 Front Desk

The design of the Front Desk will reflect the architectural style of the building and the interior
design of lobby. The Front Desk shall be located in the main lobby; it should be the focal point
of the lobby but is visible to guests as they first enter the building. Ideally, the Front Desk shall
be within visual proximity to the guest elevators and concierge.

The design of the Front Desk may be freestanding units with one or two stations per unit or a
continuous counter depending on the interior design concept. The desks could be under light,
appear floating.

The desk will be staffed 24 hours a day and serves as a major control point between the
exterior and interior of the hotel. The colleague will need to be able to move freely for the work
side to the guest side of the desk. A discreet door shall be designed for access to the adjacent
front offices.

Typically, there shall be a minimum of two stations with one additional station for every 100
rooms. Each station is approximately 1.8 m long with a minimum of 1.2 m between the back
of the desk and rear wall. For hotels with a large group clientele, a separate group check-in
desk may be required adjacent to the banquet area.

The desk layout shall include a semi-recessed computer monitor, an adjustable keyboard, and
a pull out printer. Provide space between the stations for a telephone, key encoder plus
passport scanner. Provide a lockable cash drawer at each station and additional drawers and
storage space for keys, key folders, departure envelopes and other support collateral. Provide
trash and recycle bins under the counters, a typical preferred layout plan can be provided by
our Technical Services team.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 36
Provide a separate guest relations desk similar in design. It should be visually adjacent to but
separate from the other Front Desk stations. It may be located near the concierge or in its own
alcove.

Provide accessible locations for house phones in the lobby and adjacent to the Front Desk.

1.6 Concierge Desk and Work Room

Provide a stand-up desk similar in style and size to the Front Desk. The desk shall be
conveniently located to encourage guest interaction. Typically, there shall be a minimum of
two stations with one additional station for every 100 rooms.

There shall be direct access to the concierge work and storage room and it shall have a work
counter, open shelving, and lockable drawers and cabinets. Allow for an under counter
refrigerator and adequate duplex receptacles, voice and data outlets to support the Concierge.

Lighting shall not appear different or brighter than the lobby or nearby areas.

1.7 Public Washrooms

Washrooms must be designed and finished to the same level as the other Public Areas.
Entrances shall be discreet, distinct; separate from each other and from nearby facilities.

The quantity of fixtures and accessibility requirements will be based on the applicable building
codes and ADA compliance. The location of separate washrooms must be based on
convenient access from all public areas, including lobby, conference facilities, restaurants and
outdoor function areas. Provide separate facilities for male and females at each public area
level.

Wall hung water closets and urinals should be in a separate area from wet and dry vanities.
Dividers shall be provided between the urinals. The urinals should have stone/tile walls to a
minimum of 1.5m.

Individual toilet compartments shall be not less than 0.9 wide x 1.7m long. The full height walls
separating the stalls shall be constructed with water resistant drywall or block work. A solid
core or louvered wood door with 25mm undercut and a “self-closing” spring hinge shall be
installed.

Occupancy indicator shall be affixed to each stall door. Each toilet compartment shall have a
coat hook on the back of the stall door.

Provide one built-in or modular baby changing station at each public men and women’s
washroom. The design must be of luxury standard.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 37
All fixtures and accessories shall be high-end premium quality products manufactured by
Kohler, Toto, Villeroy & Boch or equal.

Architectural down lights and/or decorative ceiling fixtures will be installed in the entry, WC
stalls, and urinal areas. Decorative wall sconces shall be installed at the wet and dry counters
and low voltage recessed LED (MR-16) down lights will be installed above each basin.

Architectural down lights shall be installed above each urinal.

Provide recessed speakers wired to the central sound systems for background music.

Provide at least one floor drain per washroom area and a recessed hose bib and one
waterproof duplex electrical outlet mounted 46 cm AFFL below the vanity for cleaning.

A janitor’s closet with floor sink, mop rack and shelves shall be located immediately adjacent
to the restroom facilities or included within the men’s room.

Women’s Washrooms - Each Woman’s washroom shall have a separate make-up area
immediately inside the entrance with a dry vanity and decorative mirror, purse shelf and one
full-height dressing mirror. The wet vanities shall have a nonporous countertop, decorative
mirror, upgraded fixtures and Accessories.

All wet areas will have stone/tile floors.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 38
1.8 Examples of actual MH&R Façades and Public Areas

Mövenpick Hotel Hanoi, Vietnam

Mövenpick Hotel Ibn Battuta Gate Dubai

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 39
Mövenpick Resort Sharm El Sheikh, Naama Bay

Mövenpick Hotel & Marine Spa, Sousse, Tunisia

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 40
Mövenpick Hotel Jumeirah Beach

Mövenpick Hotel Ankara, Turkey

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 41
Mövenpick Resort, Jeddah, Saudi Arabia

Mövenpick Hotel Zürich-Regensdorf

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 42
2. Food and Beverage

A comprehensive Food and Beverage Concept Brief will be issued once an analysis of the
trends and competitive marketplace has been completed. It will include requirements
regarding size, location, hostess stand, buffet area, display kitchen, table mix, service stations,
coat check, and washrooms, based on the design intent.

The Food and Beverage Concept Brief will describe the audio visual and live entertainment
requirements for each Food and Beverage area. All restaurant and bar entertainment areas
should maximize the night time viewing areas. At the minimum, provide background music
throughout the public areas of each venue.

Included in these Guidelines under Appendix 7 is a MH&R Compact Kitchen Layout as well
as various sample MH&R Kitchen Layouts, including Main Kitchen Layouts for Central
Cooking area; Banquet, Bar & VIP area; Main Service Bar area; Bakery, Pastry, Ice Cream
area; Room Service area and Dishwasher / Trolleys area; Satellite Kitchen: i.e. Gourmet
Restaurant and Pool Snack Bar Pantry / Pool Bar Restaurant. These should be used as
guidance only.

2.1 Host / Maitre D’ Stand

The Host Stand is the central control point for the restaurant and shall be designed to
complement the interior design. The Host Stand should include a sloped writing surface with
good task lighting, locking drawers and cabinets, power, telephone and data. Locate controls
for lighting dimming, fans and background music behind a hidden panel adjacent to the stand.

2.2 Service Stations

Service stations shall include open shelving, drawers, locking cabinets, and accommodations
for soiled linen, power, telephone and data.

Wherever possible, Service stations shall be located out of the public view.

Service stations inside the restaurant may be built in millwork or freestanding to complement
the interior design. Allow for one service station for every thirty-six (36) seats.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 43
 Figure: Service Station Sample Layout

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 44
2.3 Display Kitchen / Kitchen

The design of the transition between the restaurant and kitchen must be designed to minimize
sound, light and unsightly views into the back-of house.

When there is a finishing kitchen with display cooking, the products and finishes shall integrate
with the restaurant interior design concept.

Consider upgraded finishes on the kitchen equipment. Provide lighting that is efficient for the
cook line, but not overpowering in the restaurant.

The design shall also include means to reduce noise levels being transmitted to adjacent
dining spaces.

When the kitchen is not open for display cooking, provide a vestibule with separate automatic
entry and exit doors into the kitchen. The design of the transition between the restaurant and
kitchen must be designed to minimize sound, light and unsightly views into the heart-of-house.

A sample layout for a MH&R Gourmet Kitchen is included under Appendix 7.

2.4 Lobby Lounge and Lobby Bar

The Lobby Lounge / Lobby Bar will be located adjacent to and at the same level as the main
Lobby with great lighting and views, a variety of seating arrangements and special
enhancements such as a water feature, fireplace, and/or art and artefacts in accordance with
the ID intent.

This area will include multiple seating areas and a service pantry to support various food
offerings including afternoon tea and light snacks.

An attractive stool bar may be included based on project location.

Design of Lobby Lounges located in atrium spaces should incorporate some form of sound
containment to minimize noise build up.

2.5 Three Meal / All Day Dining Restaurant

The All Day Dining Restaurant will be the primary outlet for breakfast, as well as for lunch and
dinner and shall be designed with the table settings and décor to evolve from casual and
energetic in the morning to more elegant and intimate at dinner. The space should be designed
to handle large volumes at breakfast and smaller groups for lunch and dinner. The design
shall incorporate natural lighting and great views. In warm weather climates, outdoors seating
oriented to the best views is important. The restaurant shall be able to be locked when not in
use.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 45
The Three-Meal Restaurant shall have direct access to the Main Kitchen with convenient
access to public washrooms and heart of house without crossing public circulation. The entire
space shall be well illuminated for night cleaning.

The room finishes shall be selected to achieve a balance between sound absorptive and
reflective surfaces and match the guest visual experience with appropriate room acoustics.
The project acoustical consultant shall verify that the interior design will allow for guest
conversations at normal levels while background noise build up is kept at minimum.

Various sample layouts for areas in the MH&R Main Kitchen are included under Appendix 7.

2.6 Specialty Bar

The Specialty Bar is typically a full bar and may include limited food service, dance floor,
entertainment area/stage and wall-mounted Flat Screen TV(s). The design will typically be
“higher energy” than the Lobby Lounge. Excellent sound and vibration attenuation between
the bar and the other public areas and guestrooms is essential. Food will be prepared at the
main kitchen and delivered to a service pantry without crossing guest circulation. Provide
millwork service stations with power, telephone and data, as required. There should be
convenient access to public washrooms.

2.7 Specialty Restaurant

The Specialty Restaurant shall provide a fine dining or cuisine themed dining experience for
hotel guests and visitors coming from the surrounding community. It is important that the
design of the restaurant create a warm and welcoming ambience. Typically, the entry doors
are a signature feature that accentuate the style of the room and showcase the restaurant
during off hours.

The restaurant should have a direct link to either the main kitchen or its own dedicated kitchen
without crossing public circulation. Service vestibule, service stations, maitre d' station, coat
check and table mix requirements similar to Three Meal Restaurant.

The location of the Specialty Restaurant shall be easily accessible for guests staying at the
hotel and where possible, have a separate outside entrance to create an identity and attract
visitors from off property. The design and location of the restaurant shall take advantage of
any exceptional view opportunities.

The room finishes shall be selected to achieve a balance between sound absorptive and
reflective surfaces and match the guest visual experience with appropriate room acoustics.
The project acoustical consultant shall verify that the interior design will allow for guest
conversations at normal levels while background noise build up is kept at minimum.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 46
2.8 Gourmet Café

In some locations, the hotel’s food and beverage program will include a Gourmet Café; often
where residential components are part of the project program. The design concept shall give
the impression of a high-end gourmet outlet that is uniquely different than the rest of the hotel.

The Gourmet Café may offer a wide variety of handmade or pre-packaged hot and cold
entrees, bakery goods, picnic baskets, hot and cold beverages, ice cream, gourmet specialties
and other high-end grocery and gift products all in a fabulous display. Casual dining seating
may be located within or near the Gourmet Café for guest use. The Gourmet Café is typically
adjacent to the main kitchen and bakery or is supported by a fully functional pantry.

A sample layout for a MH&R Gourmet Kitchen is included under Appendix 7.

2.9 Pool Bar and Grille

In some locations, the hotel’s food and beverage program may include a Pool Bar and Grille.
Depending on the size and location, the Pool Bar and Grille may include a sit down bar, display
kitchen, covered seating, service pantry, and function storage.

A sample layout for a typical MH&R Pool Bar Kitchen / Pantry is included under Appendix 7.

2.10 Meeting Rooms Communal Coffee Break Area

MH&R have developed a concept to provide our conference Guests with a more interactive
Coffee Break experience rather than the traditional experience that exists in many hotels,
during the development of the Food & Beverage concepts for the project this concept will be
shared with the project Team

2.11 Coffee/Wine Lounge

MH&R have developed a transformational concept to provide our Guests with a Coffee
experience during the day which develops into a Wine experience in the late afternoon or early
evening during the development of the Food & Beverage concepts for the project this concept
will be shared with the project Team

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 47
2.12 Examples of Actual MH&R Restaurants & Bars

Mövenpick Hotel Colombo, Sri Lanka

Mövenpick Hotel Jumeirah Beach

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 48
Mövenpick Hotel Zürich-Airport

Mövenpick Hotel Ankara, Turkey

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 49
Mövenpick Hotel Jumeirah Lakes Towers Dubai

Mövenpick Resort & Spa Cebu

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 50
Mövenpick Hotel Zürich-Regensdorf

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 51
3. Retail

3.1 Retail Shops

The design concept and finishes for these outlets shall be developed to a level consistent with
the destination and design of the hotel. The original interior designer should be consulted and
preferable commissioned to undertake the retail design.

For retail outlets operated by Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts, the use of natural light, display
windows, accent lighting and high-end finishes should be designed to maximize the visibility
and appeal of the retail offerings. Preferably the store should be designed with only one public
entrance. A separate entrance to the storage room from the back-of-house may be
considered. A combination of built-in and freestanding display units should be incorporated
into the design to provide the greatest amount of flexibility.

The following guidelines shall be considered when designing the retail space:

- Base cabinets with locking drawers

- Adjustable display wall shelves
- Nesting tables and product towers with lockable storage
- Jewellery display counter with high strength tempered glass top
- Full length mirror
- Recessed lighting, accent and spot lighting
- Multiple wall and floor outlets for dispel and housekeeping
- Background music volume control, recessed speakers

Locate the checkout desk in an area that has a clear view of all parts of the store but away
from the main entrance. Position the desk to avoid the public from seeing behind it. When
designing the checkout desk include power and telephone, POS, computer, cash drawer, and
credit card verification. Provide drawers, cabinets and under counter shelves for product and
supply storage and adequate counter space or a pull out shelf for gift-wrapping.

A changing room is required where clothing is sold. Provide good lighting, a full-length mirror,
a small bench, two robe hooks.

Provide a storeroom in manager’s work area. The work area requires a desk or work counter,
power, telephone and data provisions. Provide adjustable shelving in the storeroom for
product storage.

Dimmable light controls and controls for background music will be located in manager’s work
area.

Each designated retail space to be leased shall remain as shell and core space and left
unfinished until an agreement among a tenant, the Owner and Mövenpick has been reached.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 52
The interior design concept is to be approved by Mövenpick Hotels and Resorts prior to
completion of the contract.

The CCTV security cameras, if specified for retail, shall be wired back to hotel security system.

Provide low-level background music throughout the circulation and hotel-operated shops in
the retail areas. Each shop and area will have its own volume control.

4. Ballrooms and Meeting Rooms

4.1 General Requirements

A flow diagram indicating movement and connections between the ballrooms and meeting
rooms in the conference facilities of MH&R is included under Appendix 9.

Ballrooms and Meeting Rooms shall be designed to handle multiple groups of varying sizes
for business meetings and conventions, as well as social functions. If the Ballroom is not at
the same level as the Lobby, guests shall arrive via a grand staircase, dedicated escalator or
elevator.

A public access foyer and corridor will serve as the main arrival and circulation area, as well
as a control point to the conference facility. The design of the banquet spaces shall include a
business corner, an office for the meeting planner, a coat checkroom, and public washrooms.

All function areas are to have interesting architectural or interior design details; i.e. views,
exterior terrace, a garden, water feature, a grand staircase, etc. as focal points. Natural light
and windows are preferred.

The design of all doors must be sensitive to fire code, sightlines and noise to ensure the best
experience for attendees inside the rooms. Provide magnetic hold open, electronic door locks
and peep holes (viewed from service side) on all doors that access guest areas.

All permanent walls separating Ballrooms and Meeting Rooms from pre-function and service
corridors shall have a sound isolation performance equivalent to NIC54 or better.

Ballroom double operable partitions shall be manually operated and have a sound isolation
performance equivalent to NIC50 or better. The manufacturer shall provide Field performance
guarantee. Compliance to isolation requirements must be field verified by the project
acoustical consultant, under no circumstances should a “Pass” door be installed in the
operable partitions.

All walls, floor slabs separating Ballrooms, Meeting Rooms, and pre-function spaces from
mechanical rooms shall be designed such that transmitted sound energy is below the noise
criteria for the receiving space.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 53
All mechanical equipment in rooms adjacent to public areas must be isolated from the building
structure. Mechanical noise in Ballrooms, Meeting Rooms, and pre-function spaces shall be
within the limits of the applicable Noise Criteria refer to Section I: Mechanical Systems for
more detailed information.

Surface treatments should be designed to provide appropriate acoustics and enhance guest
experience and productivity. The combination of room shape, finishes, and built-in sound
system should result in STI (Speech Intelligibility Index) of 0.66 or better. The project
acoustical consultant shall verify this requirement in-situ for unoccupied spaces using
standards-based measurements for RaSTI (Rapid Speech Transmission Index) or STI-PA
(Speech Transmission Index for Public Address Systems).

The ceiling shall have cove lighting and pendant light fittings. General and decorative lighting
shall be controlled with a dimmer panel. Conceal and integrate grilles, diffusers, access panels
and sprinkler heads into the coffered ceiling design.

Concealed ceiling hanging points shall be provided, with a dead weight handing load of
1000kg, so as to ‘fly’ audio visual equipment. Ceiling heights must be maximized minimum
600cm. The ballroom and meeting rooms must be pillar-less.

Where heat-producing equipment is located adjacent to the public areas, a special insulating
wall or ceiling shall be provided to prevent heat transmission to these areas.

In all service corridors adjacent to meeting rooms provide two standby power reserves rated
at 380V, three-phase, 400A at a fused disconnect. Refer to Section M - Audio Visual Systems
for Event Technology system requirements.

4.2 Ballroom Pre-function / Foyer

The Ballroom Pre-function area must be designed as an extension of the Main Ballroom. The
Pre-function area provides group reception and breakout space for the Ballrooms. The Pre-
function area must be private and separate from the general hotel circulation areas. Each
section of the Pre-function shall be accessible from the public circulation.

The Pre-function space shall accommodate a group registration area. The group registration
desks are portable but the location should be planned so that floor and/or wall mounted duplex
receptacles and telephone/data outlets at each station can be located. A Meeting Planners
Room may be located here.

The design of the Pre-Function space shall include a coffee and beverage station. The station
may be portable, built in millwork or a multi-use furniture piece. Provide access into the Pre-
function from the service corridor.

Each section of the Pre-function/Foyer shall include the following technology and room control
features:

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 54
 - Full individual temperature and air volume control
- Two 220V, single phase, 50A receptacles, Two 380V, three phase, 200A receptacles
- Multiple floor and wall receptacles, 220V, 20A
- Four-plex data jacks
- Two line telephone jack
- Light dimming controls
- WiFi throughout

4.3 Main Ballroom

The Main Ballroom will be divisible by thirds and/or half depending on size. Dividing operable
partitions shall be top supported, manually operated, individually suspended rolling panels
(each equipped with two trolleys); floor tracks are not allowed. Partition tracks should be steel,
not aluminium - steel tracks can be used to accommodate temporary track hangers for AV
equipment.

The track detailing must include a true acoustic isolation wall above the track to the slab above
with no unsealed penetrations. The partition panels shall be stored in a concealed enclosure.

The partition storage pocket doors must not be relied upon to provide acoustical separation.
Instead, seal the partition to the rear of pocket at continuous solid blocking to avoid flanking
transmission. The far end seal must be an extrusion; the door should not simply place a bulb
seal against a wall. Block the far-end seals/extrusions to avoid bowing. To further ensure
adequate acoustic separation, double operable partitions, plenum closure and acoustic
insulation above the finished ceiling are mandatory.

Pass doors in operable wall partitions are to be avoided whenever feasible.

Access doors to the Pre-function and service corridor should be solid wood (or sound rated
metal doors) with acoustic seals for head, jamb and bottom. Bottom seals need to be
coordinated with proposed floor finish material.

Room finishes should be selected so that the Reverberation Time (RT60) in the empty
Ballroom (with all operable walls in the storage pockets) is between 0.8 and 1.2 seconds.
Sound absorptive and diffusive materials should be incorporated in walls and ceilings to (1)
allow for portable sound systems to complement the built-in system in large events, (2) reduce
the detrimental hard reflections and slap echoes, and (3) reduce overall noise levels during
social functions.

The minimum treatment consists of acoustical panels installed from 110cm to 310cm above
finished floor (AFF) and cover 50-60% of available permanent wall surfaces. Operable
partitions should be covered with sound absorptive fabric (specially designed for this
application) that is easy to clean and replace plus being fire retardant.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 55
The project acoustical consultant shall help the design team achieving a proper balance
between sound absorption and diffusion Whenever Ballrooms are immediately above other
function spaces, impact noise isolation must be IIC65 or better.

A minimum of 6.0m clear height under light pendants and lowest ceiling level is required.
Ceiling design must incorporate adequate hanging points and power for lighting and special
scenery, banners, projection screens, speakers, light trusses and other production equipment.
For very large ballrooms, ceiling heights may need to be increased.

Food is prepared or finished in the banquet kitchen and served through a service corridor that
also acts as a quiet zone between the kitchen and ballroom. Alcoves and vestibules shall be
included in the design of the Ballroom to eliminate direct sightlines into the back-of-house.

The service corridor and one set of doors must provide oversized service access for vehicles
and heavy wheeled equipment into the ballroom. Live load criteria will generally exceed code
minimums to meet the functional needs of the facility. The width of the service corridor behind
the Ballroom will be between 370cm - 550cm depending on the size of the Ballroom. The door
layout shall allow for separate entrance and exit for each section of the Ballroom from the
service corridor.

Provide a freight elevator if direct service access from the loading dock or exterior is not
available.

Provide a centralized control room with adjacent storage areas for audiovisual supplies. The
system shall be divisible and operate in all ballroom sections and pre-function areas according
to operable wall layouts. All interior lighting in ballrooms and meeting rooms shall be dimmable
with individual controls. The dimmer panel must have pre-setting capabilities for video
projection, conference setting, banqueting and cleaning.

A motorized projection screen is required at each end of the ballroom. The screen and the
retaining box shall be mounted above the ceiling so that the screen is completely concealed
when not in use. The switch operating the screen will be mounted on the wall in the adjacent
control niche.

The audiovisual and lighting systems shall be wired so they can be managed from the central
projection/sound/lighting control room if applicable to size of ballroom. Each ballroom
subdivision must be able to function and be controlled independently. Refer to Mechanical,
Electrical, Audio Visual Systems and Technology Section (Sections I to M) for more
information.

Depending on the specific project requirements, each subdivision shall include the following
technology and room control features:

- Full individual temperature and air volume controls

- Two 220V, single phase, 50A receptacles on each wall
- One 3800V, three phase, fuse disconnect rated for no less than 100A on two of the
walls.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 56
Downstream of this disconnect, terminate all three phases, the neutral and the ground into a
“cam lock” try configuration.

- Standard 220 V, 20A wall receptacles per code

- 200 A disconnect power supply panels
- 4-plex media outlet for 2 Cat 5e Data (RJ-45), and 2 Telephone (RJ-11C) connections
- Four-plex data jack (RJ-45, Cat 5e), Two-line telephone jack (RJ-11)
- 25 pair RJ-11 telephone cable with first pair terminated on 6 - plex RJ11 block
- 4 strand multi-mode fibre optics with SC connector terminated in fibre optic wall plate
- 3-way light switch between service corridor and lighting control station
- Baseboard access panel for power, telephone, data, fibre optics, CATV, and AV 4.4

4.4 Meeting Rooms

Meeting rooms shall have dedicated pre-function areas located adjacent to the public
circulation routes and banquet service corridor. A minimum clear height of 3.7 m is required
at the lowest point in all rooms.

Marker Boards / Cork Boards are to be built in and concealed behind door panels (designed
by the interior designer). The marker boards are to be white porcelain surfaced steel for use
with magnets and markers. The boards will include a full-length ledge. Room finishes should
be selected so that the Reverberation Time (RT60) in the empty room is between 0.6 and 0.8
seconds. Acoustical treatment materials should be incorporated in walls and ceilings to
achieve proper balance between sound absorption and diffusion. The project acoustical
consultant shall help the design team achieving a cost-effective solution. The minimum
treatment consists of acoustical panels installed from 42 to 120 inches above finished floor
and cover 50-60% of available wall surfaces.

Provide wall-mounted rail for supporting presentation boards. Motorized projection screens
will be recessed into the ceiling.

Meeting rooms can be interior designed with comfortable sofas, easy chairs and coffee tables.

4.5 Business Corner – More relaxed and casual area

The Business Corner provides self-service computer workstations for guests. Each
workstation shall have excellent task lighting, ergonomic work surface and chair, as well as
adequate power and telephone/data outlets conveniently located above and below the work
surface. In addition, the Business Corner may include a reception desk and a space for
printing, copying and faxing. Full service secretarial help and laptop rental may be available.

The Business Corner should have direct access to public circulation and be located adjacent
to the meeting and banqueting areas as applicable to the project scope.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 57
Space should be provided to allow a guest or delegates to use their own device and connect
to printing facilities. Refer to Section S (IT) for more details.

4.6 Boardrooms

Boardrooms shall provide function spaces for executive meetings. They have upgraded
interior finishes, including an elegant conference table and ergonomic armchairs. A separate
service pantry should be adjacent to the Boardroom. Provide a Millwork cabinet for flat screen
TV, AV, whiteboard and presentation material. Coordinate ceiling height, fixture size and
ceiling detail to avoid having the decorative lighting interfere with visual presentations.

Room finishes should be selected so that the Reverberation Time (RT60) in the empty room
is between 0.6 and 0.8 seconds. Acoustical treatment materials should be incorporated in
walls and ceilings to achieve proper balance between sound absorption and diffusion. The
project acoustical consultant shall help the design team achieving a cost-effective solution.

The minimum treatment consists of acoustical panels installed from 42 to 120 inches above
finished floor and cover 50-60% of available wall surfaces. Provide an executive quality video
teleconference facility with complete presentation systems, if applicable for the project.

Boardrooms can be interior designed with comfortable sofas, easy chairs and coffee tables.

4.7 Meeting Planners Office

Incentive groups may send a meeting planner with each group to coordinate with the hotel
and manage the group’s activities. Each office will have a secured storage room and wall-to-
wall adjustable shelves. The Meeting Planners office shall be located adjacent to the main
meeting rooms.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 58
4.8 Examples of actual MH&R Banquet Halls and Meeting Rooms

Mövenpick Hotel Colombo

Mövenpick Resort and Spa Cebu

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 59
Mövenpick Hotel City Star Jeddah

Mövenpick Hotel & Apartments Bur Dubai

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 60
Mövenpick Ambassador Hotel, Accra, Ghana

Mövenpick Hotel & Resort, Lausanne

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 61
Additional support areas

4.9 Bellman’s Stand

The Bellman’s Stand should be located at the Porte Cochère with convenient access to the
luggage storage room. The Bellman’s Stand shall include a well-light work surface, lockable
drawers, power, and telephone and data outlets. Allow for storage for refrigerated water
bottles, hand towels, umbrellas, printed collateral and trash.

4.10 Parking Valet/Cashier

Depending on the type of hotel and its location, valet parking may be required in addition to
the bellman’s stand. The valet stand will be designed similar to the bell station and shall have
lockable drawers and key rack, power, telephone and data outlets.

The Pre-opening / Operational team will determine the final security requirements for parking
procedures and cash transactions. If a secured cashier booth is required, it shall be located
near the Porte Cochère and shall include an alarm button wired to Security and the Telephone
Operator’s ‘One-Stop-Shop’ room.

4.11 Luggage Room

Luggage will be taken from the guests at the Porte Cochère and transferred to a secured
Luggage Room or directly to the hotel room via a service elevator &/or carts. The Luggage
Room shall have direct access to the service elevators and be screened from the guest’s direct
view. It shall provide wall shelving, lockable cabinets and closet rods for hanging garment
bags, as well as power, telephone and data outlets. Lighting shall not appear different or
brighter than the lobby or nearby areas.

In resort locations, additional capacity and rolling racks for golf and other sports equipment
may be required. The layout shall include space for the convenient storage of bell carts to be
concealed from public view.

A working desk may be required for large or busy hotels, with power, telephone and data
points provided for.

4.12 Guest Service Center (Telephone Operators)

Mövenpick Hotels and Resorts have created the Guest Service Center as a department
designed to deliver 24/7 service excellence for the guests. The Guest Service Center shall be

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 62
located in the central back of house area near the housekeeping, repairs and maintenance or
the staff dining room as applicable.

4.13 Food and Beverage Support Areas

Service pantries shall be located at the Lobby Lounge Bar, Gourmet Café, Specialty Bar, and
Pool Bar & Grille where the outlet is not directly attached to the kitchen. The service pantry
shall include:

- Liquor storage and lock up

- Refrigeration
- Counter space for food pick-up and prep
- Lockable cabinets and open shelving
- Ice machine
- POS, power, telephone/data
- Lighting and dimming control
- Background music volume control
- Glass washing equipment
- Alcohol and soda dispensing equipment

A sample layout for a MH&R Service Pantry is included under Appendix 7.

4.14 Banquet Storage

Ample space must be provided for furniture and equipment storage for the ballrooms and
meeting facilities. The storage room is located at the Ballroom level and is separate from the
housekeeping, laundry, Food and Beverage, and general storage space.

The storage Area should be minimum of (25%) of the total meeting Room area

4.15 AV Support and Storage

Provide independent spaces for AV offices and AV equipment racks separate from the
audiovisual equipment storage rooms. Provide audiovisual equipment storage on each level
where event spaces are provided.

4.16 Janitor’s Closets

Provide a Janitor’s Closet and heart-of-house storage as required and includes the following:

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 63
 - Floor sink with 1.7m AFFL back and side splashes extending beyond the sink and mop
rack mounted at 1.5m AFFL over sink
- Hot and cold water faucets with hose attachment
- Adjustable shelving for storage of cleaning products
- A lockable storage cabinet, dimensions, 0.6m wide x 0.5m deep x 1.8m high with six
(6) adjustable plastic laminate or stainless steel shelves for secured storage
- Resilient vinyl floor and rubber base, washable epoxy paint wall finish and heavy-duty
bumper rails and corner guards

4.17 Staff Toilets

Provide staff toilets as required by local code and in remote areas of the building where it may
take excessive time to return to the staff change rooms for use.

For projects that have a high volume of personal or third party drivers or remote service points,
provide a driver’s toilet at the loading dock / parking area so as to maintain security and yet
provide convenience to those drivers.

A staff toilet should be provided on each guest floor in order to minimize the time that a
housekeeping staff member is away from their work area.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 64
Section D: Guestroom Areas
1. Standard Guestrooms

1.1 General Requirements

The standard guestroom is a one-module unit that provides an upscale environment with zones
for sleeping, relaxing, grooming, refreshment and working. The design is intended to convey a
high quality residential feel separate from the public spaces. The orientation and planning of
guestrooms should take advantage of the most desirable views.

Typically, the standard guestroom type is approximately 85% of total key count with the
remaining 15% in one and two bedroom suites. Unless otherwise indicated, there shall be one
Specialty Suite. Approximately 20% of the standard keys and suites will have connecting doors.

1.2 Entry Door / Connecting Doors

All entry and connecting doors are to be fire & acoustically rated solid core doors with a stone
threshold.

1.2.1 Entry Door

- Shall have a noise reduction rating of -42dBA and include:

- Drop seal with both sides lowering mechanism
- Door closer embedded into the door. Doors shall close automatically from any position
– fire rating not to be compromised.
- Proximity lock (Vincard or equivalent) with emergency mechanical lock option
- Viewer ‘peephole’ at 150mmAFF
- Door security (recommended type: Häfele model number 911.59.089)
- Fire rated as per NFPA requirements
- Evacuation plan on the back of the door using MHR specified text.

Where connecting doors are located in a shared vestibule, each guestroom will have its own
entry door and an additional door, normally a double door, at the main entry of the vestibule.
All three doors of the two rooms will have the entry door hardware as specified above.

1.2.2 Connecting Doors (in common wall)

If connecting doors are required to be located in a common wall, there will be two doors, one
for each guestroom. In addition to the designer specified and required hardware, provide the
following:

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 65
 - Provide a thumb turn lock (for guest security)
- Single sided latch with lock and/or separate keyed door bolt (master key for bell staff
and housekeeping)

1.3 Guestroom Modules

The project specific Design Brief will define the exact dimensions for the typical guestroom
module, based on location and type of hotel. Unless otherwise indicated, the following general
rules shall apply:

- Minimum clear width of 4.5m

- Minimum clear length of 8m for urban projects
- Minimum clear length of 9.5m for resort projects
- King rooms in a resort projects are typically 43m2
- King rooms in an urban project are typically 36m2 (inclusive of bathroom, closet, and
interior partitions)
- Minimum ceiling height is 2.7m in the bedroom
- Minimum ceiling height is 2.3m at the entry vestibule

1.4 Bedroom

The project specific Design Brief will define the room requirements for the typical guestroom
module, based on location and type of hotel.

Including the following general conditions:

- A single king size bed with two nightstands or two queen beds with a single centre
nightstand. Nightstands can be of different designs, shapes within the same room.
- A desk with drawer(s), inclusive of an ergonomic desk chair, a swivel chair is preferred.
- A dresser with three drawers minimum (optional)
- A minimum 49” flat screen TV, 60” flat screen TV’s in suites
- A lounge chair with a side table and / or a love chair.

Provide the following light sources in the entry and guestroom bedroom area:

- One decorative or recessed ceiling mounted fixture at entry

- One table lamp at the desk
- Lamp(s) at seating area(s)
- One decorative lamp at each nightstand
- Two LED reading lights at headboard or recessed at ceiling (diagonal throw to
reduce spill over of light). Dimmable, each with its own switch.
- Console lamp near flat screen TV (optional)

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 66
1.5 Beds

In conjunction with Intercoil (Simmons) MH&R have developed the “Simmons Beauyrest
Movenpick Mattress with Evernu” with the following requirements;

Mattress Height 32.5cm

Coil Gauge 14.75
Coil Count Density 1056
Coil Support Energy Foam
Top Support Convoluted Foam
Bottom Support Convoluted Foam

Include a zipper-off Topper with 3 layers including firm foam and top layer of FP Fibre

- 2 Rows of 13.25ga edge support

- Warranty of 10 years

The Standard Dimensions of MH&R beds are as follows:

1) Twin: 120 x 200cm (2 beds per twin room)

2) Queen: 160 x 200cm
3) King: 180 x 200cm
4) Super/Grand King 200 x 200cm

- The total bed height including bed base & mattress is approximately 60cm
- The box spring frame should be covered with decorative removable fabric
- The feet of all beds at the Headboard end must have rollers to facilitate moving the bed
for cleaning
- King size beds must have additional support feet

1.6 Wardrobe

The closet is to be a minimum clear length of 1.8m and a clear interior depth of 0.7m and
include the following:

- Built in wood shelf unit 1.88m height x 0.46m width x 0.5m depth with open shelves and
drawers
- 0.4m deep slotted shelf mounted at 1.8m AFFL
- Electronic safe mounted securely on shelf unit at 1.2m AFFL (no gaps). The size of the
safe shall be able to accommodate a 17” laptop computer.
- One pair of swing hinge or sliding doors per 1.8m closet section
- Closet light to operate automatically when opening/closing both doors

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 67
 - Power Source and hanger for iron and ironing board
- Movable luggage rack
- Hardware as specified by Interior Designer

1.7 Mini Bar Area

The Refreshment Centre may be located in the built-in wardrobe and will include the following:

- The minibar should be absorption type to eliminate noise.

- The refrigeration unit being well ventilated in accordance with minibar manufacturers
guidelines, adequate storage space for coffee maker and electric tea kettle, ice bucket,
cups and glasses, coffee maker and dry goods
- Electrical outlets for refrigerator at 0.5m) and at 1.1m usually incorporated into the
cabinet for coffee maker and for counter use. Verify ventilation requirements. In
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
- Units shall be designed with a stone counter top at 0.9m AFFL, matching splash,
shelves, mirror or art, and recessed ceiling light.

The following are the currently MH&R approved minibar brands;

• Dometic
• Hartman
• Indel B

Should the project intend to specify a minibar brand that is not included in the list above then
approval will be required from MH&R

1.8 Guest Bathroom

The design will be based on minimum four points with marble, stone flooring, lighting, fixtures,
and accessories. The minimum ceiling height shall be not less than 7’- 8” (2.3m) at the lowest
point.

It is acceptable to have a shower only with no bath however a minimum of 15% of the rooms
should be equipped with a bath.

The bathroom will feature a vanity with basin(s) and sufficient space for amenities, cast iron
bath with ledge, a separate frameless glass shower with rain shower and flexible hose, a
separate enclosed toilet and bidet (per country code) and decorative mirror. See Section J:
Plumbing Systems, Chapter 2, for approved plumbing fixtures and accessories and minimum
product requirements. Approved vendors include but are not limited to: Kohler, Toto, Villeroy
& Boch, Grohe, Duravit, likewise qualities.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 68
The architectural finishes / design shall include:

- Anti-slip marble stone floors at 0.6 slip coefficient

- Stone / tile bath surround and bath walls
- Coffered or flat ceiling

The lighting and electrical design shall include:

- A ceiling mounted light in the centre of the room

- LED MR16 down light centred over each sink and decorative wall sconces at vanity
- A recessed or semi-recessed water resistant ceiling fixture within the shower enclosure
- Anti-fog illuminated make-up mirror at 1.5m on centre line AFFL
- Light switches to be located at 1. 2m AFFL on entry wall of bathroom. Dimmers are
permissible
- Light switch control for bathroom to have a night-light incorporated
- GFI duplex outlets at vanity for shaving point
- Hard-wired speakers and television volume control

The shower design shall include:

- A minimum 1m x 1m shower enclosure separate from the tub with stone tile floor, walls
and ledge for amenities
- The shower enclosure if glass is used should be tempered safety glass.
- A grab bar aesthetically integrated into shower design
- Single lever thermostatic control mixing valve at 1.2m to centre line of valve AFFL with
fixed rain head and hand held adjustable shower
- Shower head to be directed away from the door
- Shower pan and curb to be designed to prevent overflow on bathroom floor. Shower
floor sloped from door to floor drain in the opposite corner
- Linear drainage system to be used
- Exhaust grille located in shower enclosure
- 0.5m towel bar on outside of door and two double robe hooks on wall immediately
adjacent to shower door
- Soap dish
- Steam shower is considered optional

The bath design shall include:

- Tub spout to be 0.50m to centre line above the floor level

- 0.15m ledge along the length of the tub
- A towel bar
- A grab bar beside tub
- Soap dish

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 69
If the bathroom cannot accommodate a standalone shower cubicle, then the bath can be joint
used as the shower, as listed below:

- The bathtub height should be maximum of 0.45m from FFL.

- Bath width should be a minimum of 0.7m
- Bath length should be a minimum of 1.7m
- Overhead shower, with flexible hand shower, as much as possible flat bottom and have
a hand shower on hook (no rail) as well as a shower ceiling mounted and mounted at
40cm from the extremity of the bathtub
- The water will be directed to the hand shower, the shower or bathtub spout via a 3-way
mixer
- Hand held adjustable shower
- The 3-way mixer shall be mounted accessible when standing outside the bath and
when under the shower but not directly under one of the showers
- No shower curtain
- Glass shower door, to be open able for ease of access and cleaning

The plumbing accessory design shall include, item description mounting height to centre line:

- Towel rails 1 at bathtub 0.8m, two at vanity

- Toilet roll holder 1 per bathroom 0.7m x 0.8m to centre line from back wall
- Spare toilet roll holder placement to be determined
- Double robe hook 1 on wall in WC room and 2 on bathroom wall adjacent to shower
1.7m, plus one hook at 1.2m in handicapped bathrooms
- Soap dish (Shower and bath)
- Waste basket
- Bath and shower grab bar 0.3m long. Mounted horizontally at 0.9m AFFL at one end of
tub, vertically in the shower

1.9 Rest Rooms and Dry Vanities

The vanity design may be either built-in or a freestanding unit. Provide at a minimum, a 1.8m
vanity with a single basin for urban hotels, and a 2m vanity with double basins for resorts and
urban double queen rooms and include the following:

- Adequate counter space for hotel amenities and personal toiletries

- 15cm back and side splashes
- Mirror over sink with appropriate down lighting for makeup application
- Storage for additional towels
- Stone vanity counter, mounted at 0.9m AFFL. Slab to be minimum 2cm thick x 60cm
deep with 4cm thick edge and 15cm high x 2cm thick backsplash
- Electrical power points for hairdryers

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 70
1.10 Toilet (WC) and Bidets

Provide separate water closet and include the following:

- One-piece, elongated toilet bowl

- One-piece, elongated bidet bowl, mixers to match interior design on bathroom
- Toilet paper holder and spare holder
- Wall mounted slim line telephone at 3’ 12” (1.20m) AFFL, this should be designed in a
way to have a rear entry for the cable to ensure the cable is not exposed
- Ceiling mounted decorative or recessed light fixture
- Artwork

1.11 Bathroom Doors

- The interior designer will determine the design and selection of the bathroom doors
particular attention should be paid to the acoustic protection of the WC door.
- Doors to be undercut by 2cm above floor finish
- Stone threshold to be provided
- Provide a full height framed mirror with bevel edges on the back of the door or in a
dressing area
- Provide door stop (floor or wall) and other hardware as specified

1.12 Windows and Sliding Glass Doors

- Double glazed operable windows with low “E” coating are required in all guest bedroom
windows
- Casements must be provided with a device to limit the maximum opening of the window
to 10cm without using a key or physically overriding the built-in safety measures to
unlock and tilt the window for cleaning
- Double glazed lockable sliding balcony doors with external insect screen, where
required, shall not be less than 2.4m wide x 2.4m high
- Based on the design direction from the interior designer, provide flame retardant
designer drapery with black out lining, flame retardant decorative sheers, tie backs, and
track hardware or sliding operable wood shutters
- The curtain pelmet cove should be LED back light
- Warning decals shall be applied to the glazing at adult and children’s levels

1.13 Balconies / Terraces

- Provide a table and two chairs at minimum

- Minimum clear width from door to railing is 1.8m

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 71
 - Railings shall be designed to meet safety code and minimize visual obstruction when
on the balcony or in the room.
- Non-slip floor finish with floor drain, as required.
- Provide waterproof duplex outlet and decorative wall sconces and ceiling fan where
appropriate.
- Wall switches for these devices will be located inside the room and shall not be
obstructed by the window treatments.

1.14 Mechanical and Electrical

(See Sections I: Mechanical Systems and K: Electrical Systems for additional information)

- Access to the control valves, fan motors and filters will be through a 0.5m x 0.8m return
air grille. The grill must be decorative and NOT industrial styled
- The horizontal fan coil unit is to be designed with a three-speed motor and sized so the
unit will provide the required heating or cooling output when the motor is running at
medium speed
- The unit sound level is not to exceed NC30 at slow speed and NC35 at medium speed.
The fan coil unit motor must run continuously at the selected speed and may cycle off
when the desired temperature is achieved
- Provide “smart” thermostat, to monitor room occupancy and control FCU when the
room is not occupied
- Thermostat to be mounted at 1.40m AFFL with optional expansion features to connect
to the hotel PMS and building automation system
- Incorporate switch in frame of balcony door to shut down FCU when door is opened.
- Electrical and telephone/data outlets in common walls of adjacent rooms shall be offset
by at least 0.3m to maintain specified sound ratings
- Electrical and telephone/data wall outlets to be mounted 0.3m to centre line AFFL. Light
switches to be mounted at 1.2m to centre line AFFL
- Locate an additional duplex outlet at desk for lighting
- Provide an additional outlet either as part of the nightstand or next to it for charging of
cell phones. Outlet above finish height of the nightstand, visible yet discreet
- Install doorbell to all suites and guestrooms that have an extra-long entry foyer
- Provide three-way switching at guestroom entry foyer. Locate one switch at entry door
and second switch cantered on night stand (furthest from entry door) at 0.9m to
centreline AFFL
- If applicable, ceiling fan to be 1.2m in diameter with variable speed. Control mounted
at 1.4m to centreline AFFL (next to thermostat) in resorts as applicable
- Special attention to be made with ducting and airflow through grills
- Centralized In-Room management system that relays the “DND” and “Make-Up My
Room”. Large properties relay to a central location (i.e. housekeeping)
- One spare power outlet for vacuum in the bedroom area

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 72
 - IP Telephones: one on bedside table [on window side], one on the desk and one in the
bathroom (simple model in the bathroom)
- Reading lights LED type attached to the bed head with own switches
- Ambience lighting (i.e. behind headboard, cove at curtains, etc.) to be on dimmer
control
- The setup box will generally be located in the console below the LCD TV set or in a
hidden (but accessible) part of the wall mounted panel
- The TV signal cable (CAT6) will be connected to a RJ45 socket wall mounted at the
back of the setup box location
- Adequate power sockets wall mounted will be provided at the back of the setup box
and LCD set
- Connection from the LCD back wall to the bathroom monitor
- Wi-Fi coverage in all rooms
- The whole room and bathroom shall be protected with ELCB of 30mA

Bathroom:

- Telephone in the toilet

- Metallic parts in bathroom have to be earthed including piping
- Shower drain to be linear styled, not circular

Desk Area, to include as listed:

- Provision must be made for multinational power outlet at the desk.

- The desk telephone and Internet connection must be wall mounted and located below
desk at 55cm AFFL to avoid hanging cables
- The Internet provider must provide also the connection cable with cable holder placed
on the desk
- Desk light: must be connected to the power outlet linked to the master switch. The
power outlet will be positioned beside the telephone and Internet sockets below the
desk at 55cm AFFL

1.15 ADA Room Accessibility Requirements

Planning must be in accordance with the recommendations of Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA). Extraordinary measures must be taken during design and construction to ensure that
all accessible rooms are equally usable as standard rooms.

Provide the correct number and type of accessible guestrooms per applicable building codes.
As part of the prescribed number of ADA rooms, provide a minimum of one King and one
Double Queen ADA compliant guestroom. All ADA guestrooms shall have a connecting door
to an adjoining Double Queen room.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 73
The entry door shall be a minimum width of 0.9m. Provide additional entry door viewing device
at 1.1m AFFL.

Closet shall have fold down shelf at 1.45m AFFL and hanging rail at 1.35m AFFL.

Provide and locate all fixtures, hardware, and accessories in accordance with ADA
requirements.

Ensure all installed devices, switches, and fixtures are fully ADA compliant. Provide ADA
compliant telephone and vibrating devices for fire and life safety requirements. Verify all audible
and visual emergency alarms are located and provided in accordance with ADA requirements,
NFPA and the local authority having jurisdiction.

Minimum of 1.5m diameter turnaround clear space is required in the bathroom and toilet stall.
Doors in any position other than the handicap toilet room shall not encroach into this space.

Provide roll in showers with fold down seat and adjustable height hand held showerhead. Grab
bars, tub and shower seats are to be designed for 140kg load. Provide an additional floor drain
in bathroom floor for shower overflow.

The top of the vanity shall be 0.85m AFFL. Total depth of clear space, toe space and knee
space below the lavatory shall be in accordance with ADA requirements. Hot water drainpipes
shall be insulated against body contact.

Included as Appendix 10 are sample layouts and images of guestrooms and bathroom facilities
modified for ADA access.

2. Suites

2.1 General Requirements

The suites shall be located with the best possible views. All suites shall be designed with an
upgraded FF&E package, special amenities and state of the art audio visual components.

The case goods and architectural finishes may be the same as the standard guestrooms;
however, the living room and dining room case goods shall be of higher quality and
appearance.

Additionally, separate schemes are required for the superior suites with distinctive and unique
furniture, fixtures and accessories. For residential appliances used in the suites, select Energy
Star rated appliances where applicable.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 74
2.2 Module Requirements

One Bedroom Junior Suite

The One Bedroom Suite (1.5 modules / 1 key) includes a typical single module Master King
Bedroom and bathroom (provide double vanities) with a walk-in closet and dressing vanity.
The living room area will typically include a hide-a-bed, visitor wash room, and a 1.80 m closet
off the entry foyer.

Two Bedroom Suites

The Two Bedroom Suite (3 modules / 2 keys) includes a single module Master King Bedroom
and bathroom (provide double vanities) and walk-in closet and dressing vanity, and a separate
1-module living/dining area with visitor wash room and a closet near the entry.

The second 1 module typical guestroom is a queen double room connected to the living area.

Specialty Suite

The Specialty Suite (4 to 6 modules / 3 keys), includes a large Master King Bedroom and
bathroom (provide double vanities) with a walk-in closet and full dressing area and a separate
living/dining/study area of three (2) modules (or greater) with a two-fixture powder room and
closet near the entry. Two additional guestrooms shall be connected through the living area so
that the suite can be rented separately or in combination with the two additional keys.

3. Executive Lounge and Guestrooms

3.1 General Requirements

The Executive lounge is a private hotel-within-a hotel concept for business and leisure
travellers with upgraded rooms and suites and a relaxing, residential lounge offering
complimentary buffet breakfast, afternoon snacks, honour bar and private computer
workstations. If the Business rooms are located on multiple floors, provide an interconnecting
staircase near the Executive Lounge.

The Lounge will include the following areas:

- Entrance and Foyer

- Reception area with supporting work area
- Baggage storage
- Lounge & dining area
- Service pantry
- Private washroom

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 75
The lounge should also act as a quiet area for business guests to work and should provide

- Wifi
- Scanner
- Printing facilities

3.2 Entrance

The entrance to Lounge shall be positioned to provide easy access from elevators and to all
business guestrooms. Provide directional signage as required and provide doors at the
entrance of the Lounge (secured when not in use).

3.3 Guestrooms

Typically two levels of guestrooms totalling approximately fifty (50) keys will be designated as
Executive class rooms. Preferably all rooms shall be on the same floor; however, as
determined by the design of the hotel, the floor immediately above or below may be used to
meet the required key count for these guestrooms. The floors should be accessed by a
dedicated staircase near the entry of the lounge.

The functional requirements for the guestrooms are similar to standard guestrooms. Upgrade
of furnishings, fixtures, finishes and amenities, services will be the distinctive factor.

3.4 Reception Desk

Provide a Reception Desk for staff to greet guests as they arrive at the Lounge. The desk may
be located either inside or outside the lounge. Allow for all necessary equipment to
accommodate registration, light clerical and Business services.

3.5 Support Work Area

Provide a secured work area with open shelving, file cabinets and adequate outlets for fax,
copy, telephone and data include audio and lighting controls. Provide an additional secured
storage room for luggage.

3.6 Food and Beverage offering in Executive Lounge

The Lounge shall be located in a premiere location within the hotel. The Lounge will feature a
built-in buffet and a self-service honour bar. The buffet shall have refrigerated cabinets, a stone

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 76
countertop for hot and cold food presentations with hard flooring in buffet area. Depending on
the interior design of the space, credenzas or display tables may be used to support the buffet.
The buffet will be serviced from the pantry.

The Executive Lounge shall be designed in a residential style to accommodate working, eating
and quiet socializing. Provide seating for groups of 2 to 6 persons with approximately 70%
table seating and 30% lounge seating.

Total number of seats is related to the number of business keys (typically 50% for city hotels
and 100% for resorts). Exterior balconies and terraces should be designed for warm weather
seating.

Wifi connectivity is crucial in this area a newspaper and magazine display; a house phone and
a private restroom with discreet access from the lounge. Flat screen TV’s are optional.

3.7 Service Pantry

The service pantry shall be adequately sized to accommodate food service preparation, dry
and refrigerated storage, cleaning supplies and wet / dry trash handling. The pantry shall be
located with direct access to both the service elevators and buffet area. Other features to
consider in designing the service pantry include the following:

- Refrigerator and wine cooler

- Ice machine
- Coffee / Espresso maker
- Three-compartment sink with garbage disposal
- Microwave/convection oven
- Open shelving and lockable cabinets

4. Corridors and Related Areas

4.1 Guestroom Corridors

The guestroom corridors shall include the following public and service areas:

- Guestroom circulation
- Public and Service Elevator Lobbies
- Mechanical / Electrical Closets and Telephone / Data Closets
- Ice Machine Room (if required by Owner), Maid’s Rooms, Storage, Janitor’s Closet and
Staff Toilets
- Exit stairs

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 77
The minimum corridor width shall be 1.8m for single loaded and 2m for double loaded corridors,
at landing spaces directly in front of a set of guest room doors the corridor should be widened
to 2.2m; the minimum corridor height shall be 2.6m. Provide gypsum ceiling, moulding, paint
and/or vinyl wall covering, and wood/or stone skirting. The guestroom doors shall be setback
in an alcove of minimum 0.3m. Provide recessed lighting at door drops as well as decorative
overhead lighting, and/or wall sconces. Introduce natural light and exterior views where
possible. The air in the corridor needs ventilation and conditioning to get rid of odours.

Doors to service areas are to be recessed to prevent obstruction of guest traffic flow. Service
doors are to be finished to match guestroom entrance doors and open from the service area
into the guest corridor.

Provide duplex electrical power points every 12m at 30cm AFFL for maintenance and cleaning.
Provide additional duplex electrical power points as shown on the interior design drawings for
FF&E.

Provide corner guards at all outside corners 4cm x 4cm PVC (height to be determined by
baseboard and ceiling heights) or as determined by Interior Design.

Length of corridor at dead-end condition shall comply with International Building Code and the
authority having jurisdiction.

4.2 Elevator Lobby

The Elevator Lobby is to be central to the circulation of the corridors but located in alcoves to
minimize noise transmission. The minimum width of the Elevator Lobby shall be 3.1m and the
minimum height of ceiling 2.6m.

The interior design will determine the extent of detail and features that will be included. The
design will likely include decorative ceiling fixtures, recessed lighting, decorative cove
moulding, stone trim around the elevator entrances, millwork, wall covering, upholstered wall
panels, area rugs on hard floors or carpet and painted or etched design on elevator doors.

Provide console for house phone and some seating. Coordinate power and telephone outlets
with the interior design plans and elevations.

Provide adequate treatment to elevator shafts and adjacent guestrooms to reduce airborne
and structure-borne acoustics to acceptable levels and minimize guest disruption during night
time.

When design constraints prevent guestroom walls from being attached to elevator shafts, these
must be mechanically isolated from each other. The project acoustical consultant shall advise
the design team on the most cost-effective method to achieve appropriate isolation.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 78
Provide adequate acoustic treatment and vibration isolation around the elevators to minimize
disruption to adjacent guestrooms.

Fire doors as required at the elevator lobby and corridor shall be recessed with concealed
hardware. The door finish shall match the surrounding surfaces when in the open position.

4.3 Ice Machine Room

Provide guests with a convenient and accessible room for a self-service water-cooled ice
machine (Scotsman or equal).

The ice service room shall include the following:

- A solid core door similar to the guestroom doors.

- Resilient vinyl or ceramic tile floor and base extending 0.60 m in front of the ice machine
with the remainder of the area carpeted. Provide floor drain under machine.
- Full height millwork access panels, hinged on the walls, mounted flush with the front
face of the ice machine.
- The room is considered a public space for guests and therefore shall be finished and
lighted accordingly by the interior designer. Florescent fixtures are not acceptable.
- Acoustic ceiling tiles above the ice machine and painted drywall ceiling with wood trim
in the remainder of the area.
- All necessary plumbing and electrical services required for operating the ice machine.
- The room shall be located and designed with all necessary acoustical treatments to
avoid disturbance to guests. These include de-coupling all plumbing from the structure,
sealing properly any penetration in walls or to the slab, using flexible connections
between the equipment and related pipes or fixtures.

4.4 Service Elevator Foyer

The service elevator foyer must have a minimum 2.5m clear in front of the elevators. Service
elevators shall not open directly into the guest corridor. Provide 0.80m diameter linen chute
near the housekeeper’s room – normally to high rise, large key count hotels only).

House phones to be provided within service elevator landings.

4.5 Housekeeping Storage Room

Provide a lockable Housekeeping Storage Room (one room per every 24 keys) or 1 per floor
adjacent to the service elevator foyer on each floor for carts, linen storage, housekeeping
appliances and trash management. It shall include contain the following:

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 79
 - Washable epoxy paint wall finish and heavy-duty bumper rails and corner guards.
- A 0.76m wide x 0.60m deep work counter at 0.90m AFFL with duplex receptacles and
telephone /data outlet for wall mounted house phone and PMS connection.
- A 3.0m long linen cabinet with 0.45m deep adjustable shelves (for every 24 keys).
Lockable cabinets are to be keyed alike.
- A 0.6m wide x 0.5m deep x 1.8m long lockable storage cabinet with six (6) adjustable
plastic laminate shelves for personal bar supplies and housekeeping appliances (for
every 24 keys). Lockable cabinets are to be keyed alike.
- 1.0 m coat rod at 1.8 m AFFL and robe hooks on 0.45m backing at 1.8m AFFL
- Resilient vinyl floor and rubber base
- Bulletin board

4.6 Janitor’s Closet (can be included within the HK storage room)

A Janitor’s closet is required on every other floor and includes the following:

- Floor sink with 1.7m AFFL back and side splashes extending beyond the sink and mop
rack mounted at 1.5m AFFL over sink
- Hot and cold-water faucets with hose attachment
- Adjustable shelving for storage of cleaning products

4.7 Staff Toilet (where possible)

A staff toilet is required on every other floor and includes the following:

- Toilet and hand basin

- Toilet accessories, including double robe hook
- Vanity mirror
- Duplex electrical socket outlets for service

4.8 Electrical and Communication Rooms

Separate mechanical, electrical and communications service rooms are required on each floor.
All electric sub-panels are to be located in service areas and are to be lockable.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 80
5. General Design Conditions

It is important to provide a high level of sound attenuation to ensure guest privacy. All walls
between guestrooms, public corridors, elevator shafts and heart-of-house areas shall have a
minimum NIC 52 or better. Impact noise isolation for stacked Guestrooms must be IIC65 or
better. Mechanical noise should be within the limits of the applicable Noise Criteria on Section
I: Mechanical Systems.

Disguise access panels, electrical closets and similar devices. All exposed grilles, diffusers,
sprinkler escutcheons, speakers, etc. shall be factory painted to match adjacent surface as per
designers’ specifications. Paint all public area ductwork behind grilles and diffusers flat black.

Provide exit lights, recessed fire hose cabinets and fire life devices as required by code. Select
and locate devices to enhance overall aesthetics.

Acoustical spray-on ceilings or acoustical tile ceilings are not permitted in guest areas.

Guestrooms and Suites, carpet shall be installed by the General Contractor. Carpet and under
pad are typically installed as stretch-in-place method. Site measurement for all areas required
to be verified by installer. Seaming diagrams to be reviewed and approved prior to carpet
installation. All carpet to be installed with adhesives /materials as per manufacturers guidelines.

Guestroom Corridors, Elevator Lobby / Elevator Cabs carpets shall be installed as coordinated
by the General Contractor. Carpet and under pad (refer to FF&E Standards for specific area
requirements) are typically installed via the double glue down method. Some cases may
require a stretch in place installation depending on specific site conditions. Site measurement
for all areas required to be verified by installer. Seaming diagrams shall be provided for Design
and Construction review and approval. All carpet to be installed with adhesives / materials as
per Manufacturers guidelines.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 81
6. Examples of actual MH&R Guestrooms and Suites

Mövenpick Resort Aswan, Egypt

Mövenpick Hotel, Jumeirah Beach, Dubai

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 82
Mövenpick Hotel, Gammarth, Tunis

Mövenpick Hotel Colombo, Sri Lanka

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 83
Section E: Spa and Fitness
1. Introduction

Mövenpick Hotels and Resorts offer categories for spa and fitness at a property based on the
project size, location and target market.

The Spas can have a wide variety of sizes and facilities depending on the market and location.
A key differentiating and mandatory feature in the Spa is a space where the guest can spend
time outside of the treatment rooms. A place for relaxation as well as for connection either with
friends or a mate based on a typical size for a resort. The size of the Spa will depend on the
hotel size and occupancy as well as on design, layout, and how the Fitness and full-service
Salon are incorporated into the footprint.

Based on a typical size for an urban property, the Spa is generally smaller than at a resort with
approximately three to four treatment rooms.

2. Fitness Centre or Spa or Fitness Centre and Spa

Hotels may have a Fitness Centre and a separate Spa, each having a variety of facilities, or
there may be a Fitness Centre and Spa with shared facilities.

Where a Fitness Centre and a Spa cannot be co-located, they will be referred to separately as
a Fitness Centre or Spa and each will have to have the minimum locker and amenity facilities
outlined in this section.

The purpose of such Fitness Centre is to provide guests with a variety of cardio and weight
equipment in a comfortable, professional environment with a club atmosphere.

The purpose of the spa is to provide the guest with a variety of therapeutic experiences in a
relaxed atmosphere.

Although hotel pool access is desirable, it is preferred that the change rooms for Fitness Centre
/Spas should not be shared with hotel pool change areas as Fitness Centre / Spas are
considered adult only areas and only open to guests eighteen (18) years of age and older. Pool
areas will require separate toilets and outdoor/poolside shower per the design guidelines in
subsequent sections.

The Fitness Centre will include an arrival area with desk, towel issue area; drinks station,
reading material location, retail, lockers, changing rooms, showers with private change, toilets,
and a steam and sauna. The shape and size will depend on the hotel design, size and local
market conditions.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 84
3. Spa

3.1 Spa Design Flow

The spa experience evolves from more activity / sound to relaxing / quiet, from areas that
require the most clothes to areas that require the least clothes and from stimulating to restful.

The cycle starts first at the reception / arrival area; second are the change rooms (men’s and
women’s); third are the wet area/sauna/showers; fourth are the treatment rooms; and fifth are
the rest / quiet areas (lounges). Co-ed mineral pools or other water features are located through
or adjacent to the ladies and men’s areas. The spa experience takes the guest deeper and
further away from the outside world as the guest progresses through it.

The fitness area and studio can be close to the arrival and change rooms and not considered
part of the “quiet” spa experience. However even with an adjacent location, careful layout may
be required to maximize the acoustical isolation. The project acoustical engineer shall advise
the design team on the issue as necessary.

The salon (hair, make-up, manicure, and pedicure) is located adjacent to the public areas as
a guest may be in street clothes. Direct access to women’s lockers is preferable.

The final part of the cycle takes the guest back to the arrival, now the departure area, and a
retail store area.

The guest moves through a serene environment from dry to wet areas. It should not be
necessary to cross the wet areas in street clothes. Servicing from the back-of-house must be
efficient, invisible and not cross public areas.

In order to insure the quiet nature of the Spa, special attention must be given to the architectural
acoustics and noise / vibration control issues.

All walls (and floors in two story structures) shall have sound isolation performance equivalent
NIC52 or better. Impact noise isolation for two story structures IIC65 or better.

A flow diagram indicating work flow in the typical MH&R Spa is included under Appendix 9.

The Hotel Background Music System should be installed in the Spa with a separate volume
control for the Reception and Common areas as well as for each treatment room

Mechanical rooms shall be addressed to insure proper airborne structure – borne noise
isolation. Mechanical noise shall be within the limits of the applicable Noise Criteria in Section
G Mechanical Systems.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 85
3.2 Features and Facilities

The following features are mandatory in the MH&Rs Spa:

- Arrival / Reception Area

- Offices and Reservations
- Fitness Area
- Spa Change Rooms and Lounges for Male & Females
- Fitness Change rooms - Ladies and Men’s separate rooms recommended where
memberships on offer
- Wet Areas
- Back of the house dispensary, linen storage, staff room – Mandatory

The following features are recommended in the MH&Rs Spa:

- Sauna / Steam / Whirlpool

- Swimming Pool (see water feature section)
- Shower / Inhalation / Hammam / co-ed relaxation lounge / resting area
- Retail
- Salon, hair, manicure, pedicure
- Water Feature (therapeutic)
- Treatment Rooms for massage, body, facial, wet, suite with two tables
- Yoga Area / Meditation Room
- Counselling / Programming Office

3.3 Spa Arrival / Reception

The Reception Area will serve as the main arrival and control point for the facility. It should
accommodate waiting, reception and registration areas.

The arrival area should make a statement visually and be seen from the hotel public circulation
area.

The Reception Area reflects a change in the atmosphere from the rest of the hotel as soon as
the doors are opened. The décor connects immediately to a sense of place and connects to
the natural surroundings of the area.

The interior design concept shall incorporate sound absorptive materials (concealed as
necessary to match the intended aesthetics).

Arrival / reception area designs with 100% sound reflective material shall be avoided. The
arrival atmosphere shall reflect and create an anticipation of the spa experience about to
unfold.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 86
The Registration area will include a Front Desk (similar to the front desk of the hotel) and will
have following:

- Desk space should be approximately 1.2m per station (depending on configuration,

storage and technology requirements)
- It accommodates at least one station per eight revenue stations (including salon and
treatment rooms) and is large enough to handle group arrivals
- One phone outlet per station
- Desks are ergonomically designed for standing comfortably on both sides for colleague
and guest
- Standard working height for staff is 0.9m – 1m; guest counter height is 1.1m - 1.2m)
- The floor treatment selected behind the desk shall reduce back and leg fatigue. A foot
rail is recommended
- Computers will be equipped with a variety of software including Spa soft, front office,
P.O.S., accounting, etc. Flat screen monitors to be built into desk so they are not visible
to the guest; and computer keyboard platforms are adjustable to the height of the agent
at standing level
- Cash drawers are built in; keyed separately; situated between workstations
- Brochure and check-in folder “slots” should be placed between each workstation and
located under the working counter top
- Duplex electrical outlets and telecom outlets should be available within reach of each
station, and should support the appropriate number of workstations; add two additional
outlets
- Buzzer for emergencies connected to hotel security or management offices. A buzzer
from emergency button at steam and sauna rooms will ring in this area
- Lockable drawers and storage cabinets with adjustable shelving for Willow Stream
collateral, retail bags, and other standard materials
- Garbage and recycling disposals between two stations
- In some spas, where a high percentage of guests are not staying at the hotel, up to
twenty (20) safety-deposit boxes may be required or small safes can be incorporated
into the lockers
- Adjacent to the reception desk there should be a display area or table for product to
enhance retail sales
- Avoid back counter behind desk

As the project progresses, millwork concept drawings will be issued with specific layouts and
measurements.

3.4 Administration Offices for Spa

In a typical large resort spa, offices are required for the Spa Director and Assistant, plus a two-
person office and a workspace for an Administrative Assistant.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 87
In urban or small resort spa locations, an office is required for the Spa Director, as well as a
two-person office and a workspace for an Administrative Assistant.

These Administrative offices are considered back-of-house facilities, but should be suitable for
meetings with guests.

- A small pantry is required

3.5 Retail

The location shall be incorporated into the arrival and departure experience. It is preferred that
the Retail area is visually part of the lobby, with minimal barriers. It should flow into the lobby
without the appearance of doors, yet it is lockable and secured when closed. Provide direct
access from outside as well as Spa Lobby, if possible. Natural light is preferred.

Moveable display areas will be part of the millwork so the store can be altered with the products
featured (i.e.: display tables, nesting tables, etc.)

For the shelving and counters, include the following:

-Part of the checkout counter adjacent or behind the POS station is to have a drawer for
storage of signature shopping bags, with a pull out drawer to allow tissue paper to lie
flat for wrapping
- The amount of wall shelf space and storage areas must be maximized. The wall shelves
may be a combination of glass and/or millwork, depending on design
- Multiple 45 cm glass shelves must be adjustable to accommodate 30 cm vertical
spacing. At least 50% of the shelving will have mirrored walls behind, and must be
supported every 75 cm minimum to prevent sagging
- Base cabinet is 60 cm deep and 90 cm high with a mix of drawers and cupboards below
(in a ratio of 50/50)
- Storage drawers should be on full extension, heavy-duty glides with proper pull
hardware commensurate with weight and size of drawer
- Separate counter or table dedicated to display facial products; minimum 90 cm wide
with an electrical outlet and storage drawers below
- A make-up area is recommended with decorative mirror; makeup lighting; high bar
chair with back rest.
For the display areas, include the following:

- A minimum of two tables of different sizes on the interior and two rolling display areas
on the outside of the retail doors to be provided at 80cm to 90cm high. One will be a
jewellery display area incorporating a glass top;
- Where storage is limited, these display tables should provide storage below;
- There will be two free standing product towers provided by others, requiring an area of
0.18m2 with room to circulate and an area for these will be planned in the space;

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 88
 - There will be one area to display a robe on a mannequin, either free standing or within
the millwork, and an adjacent shelf/cabinet for displaying robes, bathing suits and
clothing;
- Electrical for the counters and display areas will include: concealed lighting, down
lighting at cash register and counter, power for jewellery display lighting and duplex
(UPS) outlet.

For the retail lighting requirements, include the following:

- A combination of fixed recessed lights and adjustable spotlights for displays;

- Lighting controlled by programmable dimmer system
- Adequate electrical outlets at ground and counter levels, with additional outlets for POS
stations;
- Additional floor outlets for table display areas;
- Avoid extension cords and exposed cabling.

For the Point-of-Sale/Check-out requirements, include the following:

- Checkout station will require room for recessed computer, credit card terminal, printer,
telephone and ATM processor;
- Station must have drawers and cabinets to store product samples, supplies, collateral,
wrapping and tissue paper, and a lockable cash drawer;
- Counter space for wrapping and bag storage must be incorporated into or beside this
area;
- Sightlines from outside to be such that the guest cannot see behind the desk.

3.6 Fitness Area and Studio

The Fitness Area will relate to the size and type of property based on estimated use. Where
membership will be accepted from outside the hotel, larger facilities may be required. The
fitness area will include cardio area, full range of strength machines, aerobics studio, fitness
assessment office, and equipment storage.

Minimum ceiling height is 3.2m.

Provide a reception desk in the Fitness Area to serve the multi-purpose functions of check-in,
towel distribution and head set dispensing. It will have a telephone outlet, computer terminal,
printers, and duplex electrical outlets.

The fitness area will have a drink station with drawers and cupboards below with adjustable
shelves for storage, duplex electrical outlets, and a built-in bar style glass window refrigerator
for water bottles.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 89
A self-serve towel station will be located near the entry with shelves for clean towels and a
built-in bin for dirty towel drop.

A magazine and newspaper station or wall rack will be integrated into this area. Provide a large
wall mounted clock and a visible panic button.

Cardio machines shall never be closer than 20cm to each other from the widest point of the
equipment Cardio and strength-training equipment will be of the highest quality.

Recommended brands are as follows;

- Technogym
- Life Fitness/Cybex
- Matrix
Cardio equipment will have built in entertainment units that will require both electrical and data
cable connections. The floor in the fitness area shall be carpet or wood with rubber mats under
specific equipment as required.

Provide a mirrored wall in the free weight area.

The floor in the yoga/aerobic studio is to be a pre-engineered cushioned hardwood floor system
with two-mirrored walls. One mirrored wall to have a bar at 90cm AFFL. Provide storage for
aerobic equipment.

An outdoor yoga/meditation garden can be developed, where climate permits.

In case of two story structures or the fitness area located over another portion of the hotel, a
floating floor system may be necessary. The project acoustical consultant shall specify the
appropriate solution and advise the design team accordingly.

The Hotel Background Music System should be installed in the Fitness Centre with a separate
volume control located in the reception area, in addition to this there should be a facility for a
Guest to connect their own music.

3.7 Salon (Hair Styling, Make-up, Manicure, Pedicure)

The Salon will be an integral part of the spa with easy and direct access from the main
circulation. Street level access to the Salon is strongly recommended in an urban setting.

The Salon will include:

- A small waiting room for salon customers only. A dedicated change room, a
refreshment bar with duplex electrical outlets and cupboards with adjustable shelves
and bathrooms
- A separate small reception and retail area with P.O.S. and one computer terminal

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 90
 - A coat closet will be near reception and used to hang coats, jackets and tops of guests
not using the entire spa
- Where hair services are provided, there will be one (1) washing station per two (2)
styling stations and one (1) drying station per four (4) hair styling stations
- Pedicure stations will be designed to offer some privacy or separation between stations
- Manicure areas will be comfortable, well-lit and have the same luxury feel as the rest
of the spa
- A private grooming room can be in Salon for men’s treatments
- Waxing room is recommended in urban settings
- Linen storage, staff toilet, and staff backroom is required if located a distance from spa
back-of-house
- A small dispensary with a sink and ample lockable storage is required
- Provide hard surface flooring throughout

3.8 Lockers, Areas, Wet Areas and Relaxation Amenities

This sanctuary has to engage all the senses and will invite the guest to linger and relax.

Wet areas shall be kept separate from the dry areas and there should be discreet access to
the back of the house for movement of staff, linens and products.

The facilities are created equal for men and for women with only minor exceptions.

In most locations, an attendant station will be located just inside the entrances to these areas.
If noted on the program, these areas will include a counter, cupboard, computer terminal and
telephone.

3.8.1 Locker & Grooming Area (Dry Areas):

The number of lockers is dependent on whether there is a membership group, if fitness is

included in the spa and the number of treatment rooms or other revenue stations.

Lockers shall be designed to hang a robe; have a place for slippers, water, and personal
effects; and shall have two hooks, one hanger bar and a shelf.

Some lockers will have mini-safes on the inside, particularly where a high proportion of guests
are not hotel guests.

Locker aisles shall be a minimum of 2.4m apart to allow adequate circulation and sitting bench.
No locker should be located within 30cm of any corner. The locker area is designed to allow
maximum privacy without site lines from grooming or wet areas. For privacy, there are no
mirrors in the locker/changing area. Mirrors in the grooming areas should not reflect back into
the change areas.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 91
A spacious dry grooming area is required with good lighting one station per five treatment
rooms for Women and one station per ten treatment rooms for men. Also provide the following:

- Keyless locks
- One private change room with lockers is required in the ladies locker room (in some
cultures more may be required).
- Duplex electrical outlets required at counter for hair dryers, curling irons and other
electrical (at each station)
- Multiple stations for clean towels and used linen drop off
- Provide LCD television in men’s locker area.

3.8.2 Showers:

Slip-resistant tile and stone, adequate floor drainage and attractive high-end finishes are
required. Marble is not permitted. Floor for the entire shower area including the dry-off area
must be sloped towards the shower floor drain. The size of the drain will vary from 4cm to 10
cm waste line, depending on the selected shower feature. Construction must ensure that the
dry off area is free from any standing water.

- Shower stalls with lockable privacy door should include a 1.20m x 1.20m shower
compartment, and a 1.20m x 1.20m private dry-off area with a bench. Consider built in
amenity shelves in shower to accommodate four products
- Multiple showerheads and large rain shower head with additional hand held is required
- Maximize exhaust and adequate negative pressure to reduce humidity transfer to dry
areas
- Multiple hooks for towels and robes in dry off area.
- One wall-mounted swimsuit dryer (20A, 220V) in a niche is recommended in this area.

3.8.3 Vanities:

- Include one hair-washing basin with hand held rinse in the Women’s wet area
- Include one shaving station in the Men’s area with shaving mirror and duplex electrical
outlets for hot towel cabinet and hot lather machine
- Ample counter space around the sinks to allow space for amenities. Provide cut-outs
in counter for waste and towel drops
- Counter space required for cloth hand towel dispensers. No wall mounted paper towels
in guest areas

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 92
3.8.4 Toilets:

- Toilet count depends on the size of the spa and local codes, with a minimum of one per
five treatment rooms
- Full length floor to ceiling toilet enclosures with lighting, hardware and finishes similar
to public area restrooms
- Superior ventilation and quiet flushing devices required
- Urinals with stone privacy screens

3.8.5 Wet Areas:

The wet area or thermal suite is connected directly to the change area and grooming area (Dry
Area).

A relaxed sense of space and a high level of finishes are important. Features listed are
considered minimum requirements.

Similar to the locker rooms, there will be one wet area for women and a separate area for men.
A minimum of five amenities is required with a mix of hot and cold-water features.

In favourable climates, some amenities may be located outside. If so, increased deck space
and seating is preferred.

All floor surfaces to be finished in non-slip stone or ceramic tiles in all areas. Marble is not
permitted. Adequate slope and floor drains are essential to keep floors dry. Include the
following:

- Millwork cabinets for towels, hangers, and trash

- Hooks for robes and towels
- Water stations and cold cloth stations outside saunas, steam and whirlpool areas
- Provide hose bibs for maintenance.

3.8.6 Saunas:

The Sauna interior shall be finished in high quality select cedar with at least two tiers of seating,
each 0.60m wide.

The double-glazed entry door has a wooden handle, both sides; it is to open out. Adjacent to
the door, provide a temperature control, robe hooks, and an emergency buzzer connected to
the reception desk. Provide seating at exterior, near entry.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 93
3.8.7 Inhalation Room (may be in lieu of Sauna on Women’s side):

The door will be the same as described in the sauna above. The interior millwork to include:

- Bench seats (millwork) with pads and pillows

- Aromatherapy diffuser, either electrical or decorative and wall mounted
- Room heated to body temperature 36ºC
- Drywall and paint or wall covering.

3.8.8 Steam (Hammam)

There are a range of steam options from basic steam rooms, aromatherapy steam rooms,
tepidarium and full Hammams. Where a full Hammam is planned, a separate Hammam
designer should be considered.

Walls and sloped ceiling shall be finished in a smooth stone or ceramic tile. Slope to be 5cm
per 30cm design ceiling to minimize dripping on guests.

The floor and seating areas are to have non-slip stone or ceramic tile finish. The floor is to
incorporate a floor drain. Seating can be bench style but individual seating is preferred. A hand-
pull deluge, cool showerhead is provided in the steam room.

A tempered glass entry door with a wooden handle on both sides is to open out in order to
reduce condensation dripping from the top of the door frame an added frame is preferred.

Adjacent to the outside of the entry door will be the temperature control, robe hooks and the
emergency buzzer connected to the reception desk.

Provide seating at the exterior, near entry.

Location of steam generator room is to be remote and enclosed to prevent any sound transfer
into the area or treatment rooms. The room shall be located and accessible such that the locker
rooms are fully operational during any maintenance or repairs, as the steam source requires
regular maintenance. Hose bib for maintenance should be provided.

3.8.9 Jetted Water Features

Jetted water features are in-ground, where possible, and require a minimum 1.2m wide deck
for circulation. Water Feature design shall meet all local code requirements.

Allow a minimum of 0.37m2 per guest at one guest per every four treatment rooms.

Maximum depth of Whirlpool shall be 1m and with a water depth of 0.86m. Stairs to be 20cm
riser and 30cm tread or provide a sloped entry without stairs.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 94
Built-in seating height from top of seat to top of pool: women at 55cm and men at 60cm.

The water temperature is to be regulated to 39ºC with a maximum of 40ºC. This water feature
will have multiple stations with jets at various heights at each station to provide a circuit. An
additional 50% extra aerator outlets shall be installed in the whirlpool in addition to minimum
quantity recommended by whirlpool equipment suppliers to provide a lavish aeration system.
These outlets should be mounted 15cm and 30cm above the seat or in areas for therapeutic
massage.

Whirlpool aeration control shall be by means of a 15-minute timed switch located near the
whirlpool at 1.5m to centreline above finished floor level. Where the switch may not be located
near the whirlpool, due to the local code requirements, it shall be in a clearly visible position.

Dry niche underwater lights are to be provided at least equal to local code requirements but
not less than one.

All built in accessories are to be stainless steel. Refer to Section F: Pool and Leisure Activity
Areas for further pool and water feature safety requirements.

3.8.10 Cold Plunge Pool (Optional)

The Plunge Pool shall have the water temperature regulated between 16 to 27ºC and be of a
suitable size for one person. Provide steps into Plunge Pool.

Underwater lights are to be provided at least equal to local code requirements and not less
than one in each plunge pool. Dry niche underwater lights are preferred.

This feature may be substituted for an ice fountain (see Water Feature design package for
further details).

Refer to Section F: Pool and Leisure Activity Areas for further pool and water feature safety
requirements.

3.8.11 Swiss Shower or Experience Shower

Swiss/Experience shower is 1.5m x 1.5m minimum with a minimum of a stack of three (3)
shower jets on each of the three walls, plus an overhead shower. Provide a frosted door, sloped
floor and a curb to prevent overflow.

Additional features such as sound, light and scent may to be incorporated (see Water Feature
design package for additional details).

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 95
3.8.12 Men’s and Women’s Private Lounges

There are both small wet lounge areas (by the wet features) and dry Relaxation Lounges. The
wet lounge shall be adjacent to the steam room. Jetted water features and usually contains
two heated tiled lounge chairs.

The relaxation lounges shall be spacious, luxurious and residential in feel and provide a
number of places to sit comfortably and wait for treatments, for reading, stretching out and
relaxing. Urban spas may have less space.

Similar to the locker rooms, there will be one lounge for women and a separate lounge for men.
All materials must be comfortable and able to withstand oils, wet towels and bathing suits.
Avoid circular arrangement with guests looking at each other. Emphasize views or special
features such as fireplaces.

In large spas, space for retail may be incorporated here or close to the facial treatment rooms.
There shall be a number of self-serve stations for water, lemonade, signature teas and fruit
bowls. A small under the counter refrigerator is required with duplex electrical outlets. The
lounge shall have racks and tables for books and magazines, as well as areas to display spa
products.

Provide telephone outlets; duplex electrical outlets; and central music system with ceiling audio
speakers.

The men’s area is similar to the ladies change room and lounge, with the exceptional décor
and some amenities. It shall feel like a high-end golf clubhouse with comfortable furniture and
masculine colours; it shall feel less like a “spa” and more like a club than the rest of the facility.

Provide individual chairs and even “lazy boy” recliners, versus a couch or chaise. Men’s
Lounge will have a high-definition wall flat screen television.

The interior design concept shall incorporate sound absorptive materials (concealed as
necessary to match the intended aesthetics). Lounge area designs with 100% sound reflective
material shall be avoided. In warm locations, the lounges shall continue outdoors.

3.9 Social Lounges (Optional)

It is a multi - purpose area for guests to meet their partners or friends between treatments, for
guests to rest before or after treatments and for day spa guests to enjoy their lunches. In larger
facilities, a separate eating area may be provided.

This room shall be authentically local, have an interesting focal point and have natural light and
be designed to incorporate the landscape views of the region. The design concept for the room
shall tell “the story".

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 96
The interior design and lighting will reflect a quiet but upscale feel that reflects the style of the
spa and the local environment by using materials indigenous or inspired by the region for
construction.

The interior design concept shall incorporate sound absorptive materials (concealed as
necessary to match the intended aesthetics). Social lounge designs with 100% sound reflective
material shall be avoided.

This area is intended for reading or contemplation and will be connected directly to the Outdoor
Pool and Relaxation area and include the following:

- All furniture and features should be planned for wet clothes or towels
- Seating is determined at a ratio of 1.5 to 2.0 seats per treatment room
- Individual seating with some ottomans rather than couches or loveseats is
recommended
- Juice bar/food and refreshment area is mandatory. It must have a pantry for ease of
serving and clearing
- Restrooms are required near here
- Telephone outlets; duplex electrical outlets; and a central music system with ceiling
mounted speakers.

3.10 Outdoor Spa Pools, Water Features and Relaxation Areas

Will have a number of unique outdoor water features that may include mixed-use thermal pools,
pools with therapeutic water stations, waterfall features, and whirlpools with multiple stations
for jets at various locations and strengths. The number and nature of these features will be
determined by each project.

Each feature must have a therapeutic value and a mix of temperatures. These features are
usually outdoors. (See Water Feature design package for further details).

The outdoor mixed-use pool area may include a sea mineral based lap pool, waterfall pool,
thermal suites, cabanas, deck space for lounges and a towel station. Refer to Section F: Pool
and Leisure Activity Areas for pool code requirements.

- One water surface is to be approximately 60m2 or as required by the specific program

requirements. Maximum pool depth to be 1.3m. The water temperature to be regulated
to a maximum of 32ºC
- The pool deck design and paving finish are very important. Adequate space must be
provided for chaise lounges, tables and cabanas such that a sense of privacy is
provided. Provide one (1) table for every two (2) chaise lounges. Cabanas should be
provided for 50% of the chaises
- Access to sunny locations and exterior view is important
- Shade only areas are also to be provided

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 97
 - Wall-mounted emergency telephone and wall-mounted house phone are required
- The wall surrounding the swimming pool area in indoor pools must be carried up to the
structure and sealed to prevent migration of chlorine odours and moisture to adjacent
areas.
- There should be a minimum of one (1) service cabana. It should contain a 1.2m x 1.5m
x 0.60m counter with under-counter cabinets to store sixteen (16) towels per chaise per
day, plus two (2) lockable drawers 10cm deep. There should be also two (2) telephone
outlets, as well as space for a dirty towel cart, trash, cold-water dispenser and small
refrigerator.
- All service cabanas must have a good access route to and from the back of house
- Provide shower and footbath on pool deck and/or from pathways leading from beach,
as required
- Proper windbreaks, glass screens, and rain cover awnings must be provided to shelter
portion of the deck

Mineral Pool, Experience Water Features or Water Circuits

A Mineral Pool could be created where natural mineral springs do not exist. It is a jetted pool
between 5.5 and 13m2, depending on number of treatment rooms, and includes the following:

- Temperature should be regulated to 40ºC

- Pipes, drainage and filter to withstand salt/mineral content of pool water
- Seating on two sides at 55cm or 60cm, from top of seat to top of pool 55cm for women
and 60cm for men
- 15º slope on back of seat
- It can have a series of alcoves with a sloped incline and multiple jets for aquatic
massage. Each station or alcove on the circuit to focus on different body areas.
- Other water experience features may be included in the outdoor area such as mineral
pools, pool circuits, soaking or floating pools, experience showers and outdoor saunas.

3.11 Treatment Rooms

There are four categories of treatment rooms:

- Multipurpose rooms (standard, facial, deluxe)

- Wet treatment rooms (with tub and shower and/or Vichy)
- Suites
- Experience Rooms

Each spa will have a program that includes at least one of each of these categories of treatment
rooms.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 98
Natural light and private patios/balcony are recommended for each room type wherever
possible.

The number and variety in each category will depend on the market and the spa program.
Other categories/concepts may be added to some spas.

The interior design concept shall incorporate sound absorptive materials (concealed as
necessary to match the intended aesthetics). Treatment room designs with 100% sound
reflective material shall be avoided.

3.11.1 Multi-Purpose Rooms:

Standard Multi-Purpose Room

Treatment rooms shall be designed to allow for the maximum variety of treatments, able to
perform massage, body treatments or aesthetics. Each room is to be equipped with a
multipurpose, electric hydraulic, four legged padded table usually 80cm x 180cm. A minimum
90cm of space must be allowed around all sides of the table.

All lights shall be dimmable, LED and indirect. Provide two wall sconces. Add one (1) attractive
ceiling mounted light fixture over the treatment table. Provide one (1) task light under cabinet
over countertop. Place control for this light at countertop location. All controls shall be “low
tech” and simple to operate.

Each room shall have a volume control for the central BGM sound system. A volume control
shall indicate level with an off position. Speakers shall be high quality, recessed in the ceiling.

All rooms must have sinks and counters equipped with locked cupboards, built in towel bins,
built in appliances, and covered wastebaskets.

Countertops shall be standard 90cm high and have at least 1.20m of surface area. The surface
should be stain resistant, have a smooth surface and be easily cleaned. Deep sink shall be
under-mounted, with either lever handles or one handle temperature controls with spout 20 cm
height above sink top. Hot towel cabinets shall be built into the cupboard or on the shelf; and
in some cases, built into the tables. Also provide the following:

- Minimum room dimensions are 3.35m x 4.65m including millwork

- Allow for natural light with blackout window treatments wherever possible. Each room
is to be individually controlled with adjustable cove lighting on a dimmer switch;
thermostat and music control
- Each room must have independently controlled HVAC. Linear diffusers are preferred.
Ceiling access panels must be concealed
- Supply grilles and airflow must be directed away from the treatment table
- All rooms require a custom three-tier trolley on wheels to match millwork that should be
0.90m x 0.75m surface on three shelves in materials to match millwork

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 99
 - Number or name signs on each door with indicator or hanger hook for occupied status
- Solid core doors to have silent door closers
- Minimal power electrical outlets will include two (2) duplex 220V, 15A GFCI outlet at
counter; one 220V, 15A under the centre of the treatment table; 220V, 15A 12” AFF on
sidewalls.

Facial Multi-Purpose Room

The Facial rooms shall have all the fixtures of the Standard Multi-Purpose Rooms except:

- Counter tops may be designed to desk height 76cm high and have at least 2.40m
surface space.
- The surface shall be stain resistant, have a smooth surface and be easily cleaned. This
is only recommended where high number of facial demand and the room can be
dedicated to facials
- All equipment must be able to be rolled into cupboard.

Deluxe Multi-Purpose Room

The Deluxe Multi-Purpose rooms shall have particularly nice views or interesting features and
decorative furnishings, including a chair and small table. These rooms will be used for the
signature treatments and should have an outside private balcony or patio for portable massage
and/or meditation. These rooms should have all of the features of the Standard

Multi-Purpose Rooms with the following exceptions:

- Minimum room dimensions are 3.65 x 4.2m including millwork, with a 1.20m x 1.20m
shower with a frosted glass door
- A minimum of 0.60m of tile required in front of shower stall.
- Add two 5cm drains in shower stall if Swiss Shower is specified

3.11.2 Wet Treatment Rooms:

Wet Treatment Room (with tub and shower)

- Minimum room clearance dimensions are 3.65m x 4.20m, including millwork, space for
the specified tub and clearances, with a 1.20m x 1.20m shower and a frosted glass
door
- These rooms have all the same features as the multi-purpose room, but are tiled on the
floor and walls to 0.90m AFFL
- These rooms include a multi-purpose table with a hydraulic foot pump, a shower and a
hydrotherapy and/or feature tub
- Heated floors are recommended (especially in colder climates)

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 100
 - Wet rooms will have ceiling heat lamps that can be lowered over the treatment table
- A privacy screen or curtain will be incorporated around the tub.
- Hose bibs for maintenance should be provided
- Tub must have a drain and fill capability of ten (10) minutes, which may require a double
drain and fill kit.

Wet Treatment Room (with Vichy Shower)

The Wet Vichy room has the same size and features as the Wet Treatment room without the
tub/shower.

The room also has a central floor drain under the position of the table with floor, sloping towards
the drain.

3.11.3 Suites

The Suites have all of the same features as the Deluxe Multi-Purpose room. In addition, the
following will apply:

- A suite can have one or two tables

- The shower will be a steam shower or experience shower with a minimum of a hand-
held and overhead pan showerhead
- A jetted feature tub (in a single suite this will most often be a stand-alone hydro tub and
in a double suite this will most often be a feature built in tub) tubs must have drain and
fill capacity of 10 minutes that may double the drain and fill kit.
- A two-person suite will include a private changing area, closet and toilet
- An outdoor patio, sized for outdoor massage, outdoor shower, lounge seating and
fountain or fire pit, should be included.

3.11.4 Experience Rooms

Men’s Only Rooms (Men’s Grooming Rooms)

- These rooms are to be the same size and contain all of the features of a multi-purpose
room
- The table is centrally drained with a jetted water-well in the table with the required drain
and electrical under the table.
- The room is carpeted except for the area under the table, which is tile
- A wall-mounted flat screen T.V. and wireless headset connection is required.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 101
Other Experience or Feature Rooms

Experience rooms are considered feature rooms and are tailored to the location. These rooms
contain:

- All the features of a multi-purpose suite

- A feature steam shower, usually with a reclining lounge in the steam/shower
- A therapeutic tub

Asiatsu, Thai, and other Specialty Rooms

- Some programs may call for special feature rooms such as Thai massage.
- These rooms shall have the same design requirements and features as a multipurpose
room.

3.12 Back of House

This area is designed to service all areas of the Spa. It includes a dispensary, secured linen
storage, a staff lounge with lockers, a staff toilet and shower, a central music and lighting
control room. It has direct access to the hotel and laundry department.

3.12.1 Spa Therapist’s Office

The office for Lead Spa Therapist’s Office is to be located in or near dispensary or staff lounge,
and equipped with appropriate desk, chair, telephone, computer terminal, printer, electrical
outlets, filing cabinet and any other items necessary to fulfil daily tasks.

3.12.2 Spa Dispensary

The Spa Dispensary must be easily accessible to the treatment rooms. This is a high activity
area and its location should not jeopardize the quiet of the treatment zone. A second, satellite
preparation counter and computer station will be required near the treatment rooms if the
dispensary has to be located at a distance or if the spa has a large number of treatment rooms.
Requirements include the following:

- Dishwasher, refrigerator, oversized sink, hot and cold taps with high-arc fill spout
- Eight linear feet of counter for preparation area
- 220V, GFI20 A outlets every 1.20m along counter top
- Provide secure storage for products
- Small linen storage
- Computer terminal and phone access for therapists to communicate with front of the
house

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 102
3.12.3 Pantry

Provide an area to prepare juices, teas and other food productions for spa.

For sanitary reasons, it should not be incorporated into the Dispensary.

- Provide staging area for room service carts

- Provide dishwasher, refrigerator, coffee maker and ice machine for food service. Area
above coffee maker should be at least 80cm clear
- Provide drawers and locked cupboards.

3.12.4 Linen Storage

Spa linen handling is a major operational consideration. The size of laundry bins to be used
and the movement and storage of both clean and dirty linen will be determined on the location
of the laundry (on-site or off).

Double door access to the linen area is required and the size of the area must accommodate
the turning radius of large laundry bins. If spa is situated on multiple floors, linen handling is
required on each floor.

3.12.5 Secured Storage

Storage of other spa products is required and the products are often large and bulky, such as
portable tables.

Retail storage is required separate from other storage areas or on separate key lock system.

3.12.6 Housekeeping and Janitor Closet

A small area for night cleaner equipment storage is required as well as a minimum of one (1)
janitor rooms is required for the spa. If on two (2) floors, two spaces are mandatory. Ideally,
the Janitor Closet should contain the following features:

- Floor sink with hot and cold service sink faucet; ceramic tile surround
- Adjustable shelving
- Mop rack
- Vinyl floor and vinyl baseboard
- Wall mounted telephone

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 103
3.12.7 Staff Areas

A dedicated staff area for break times, rest, and meetings will require the following:

- One round table with chairs, plus 4-6 lounge chairs

- Change areas are only required if there is no access to property staff facilities
- Small lockers for personal items
- A staff washroom

3.12.8 Music and Lighting Control Area

The spa will be zoned for music and lighting levels from a central location. Zones for music will
include: fitness area; public spaces; ladies and men’s lounges; outdoors; co-ed lounges; salon
and retail; and all treatment rooms. All treatment rooms will have their individual volume control.
Lighting will be able to be set by time of day and zone.

The fitness studio and yoga area will be on separate systems for individual programming and
located in the room.

Some water and experience features may require separate sound and lighting settings.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 104
4. Examples of actual MH&R Spas & Fitness Centres

Mövenpick Resort & Spa Tala Bay Aqaba

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 105
Mövenpick Resort & Marine Spa Sousse

Mövenpick Hotel & Resort, Lausanne

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 106
Section F: Pool and Leisure Activity Areas
1. General Swimming Pool Requirements

The water purification system shall be a Chlorine Automatic Feed System with modular
cartridge filters or approved equal. Provide a vacuum cleaning system, accessories connected
to pool water circulation system and a water testing kit.

Any vibration arising from the swimming pool and whirlpool mechanical equipment shall not be
transmitted to the building structure.

Swimming pools, whirlpools and plunge pool to be finished with non-slip surface.

Appropriate Safety Rules to be clearly displayed at all pools in languages appropriate for the
locations

Maximum depth of pool to be 1.4m

Depth markings indicating 0.9m, 1.2m and 1.4m are to be located on the pool deck and pool
sides adjacent to pool edge on all sides of pool no further thru 6m apart. Lane and turn
markings shall be in tile, in accordance with international standards.

Water depths shall be as follows:

- Main / Adult Pool Shallow-end 0.9m

- Main / Adult Pool Deep-end 1.2m
- Swimming lanes minimum depth 1.1m
- Main / Adult Pool Depth at drain 1.4m (1/3 of pool length at deep end)
- Whirlpool Maximum depth 1.1m
- Plunge Pool Maximum depth 1.2m

Underwater lights are to be provided per local code requirements, at a minimum with no fewer
than two fixtures in the swimming pool.

All built-in accessories, including access ladders at each end of swimming pool / plunge pool
and handrails at the whirlpool entry are to be stainless steel. A removable handicapped lift is
required at all pools.

Provide wall mounted emergency telephone, alarm button and wall mounted house phone at
service cabana or in a visible location near the Main Pool.

Lifeguard grab hook and pole, life rings and wall mounting supports are to be provided in
accordance with current NFPA codes.

All indoor pools shall be heated and air-conditioned to maintain a constant air temperature of
27ºC. These pool areas shall be de-humidified to minimize damage from condensation. The

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 107
walls surrounding the indoor swimming pool area must be built up to the underside of the
structure and sealed to prevent migration of chlorine odours and moisture to adjacent areas of
the building and property.

Sound absorptive materials should be applied to the underside of the structure to control sound
built-up.

2. Swimming pools, whirlpools and decks

Provide swimming pools and whirlpool facilities per the project specific Design Brief
(consideration for indoor / outdoor pools to be determined in relation to project location /
climate).

At large properties provide access to a dedicated guest elevator for the pool and spa / fitness
area so that guests are not required to walk through the main lobby or other public areas in
order to access the pool and other recreation areas.

2.1 Main / Adult Pool(s)

Water surface is to be approximately 150m2 to 1,000m2 as determined by the specific program

requirements.

Maximum pool depth is to be 1.4m. The water temperature is to be regulated to a maximum of

29ºC. Provide a lap lane within the Main or Adult Pool, where needed within the design.

2.2 Children’s Pool

A separate pool area shall be provided for children at resort locations. The water surface area
is to be approximately 80m2 with water level from 0.4m to a maximum of 0.6m deep. The
children’s pool shall incorporate an area for young children with a maximum depth of 0.3m.
The children’s pool area shall be located remotely from Adult / Main Pool(s) to minimize
disturbance of adult guests. If this is not possible a physical barrier needs to be installed
between the 2 pools.

Sun-shading to be provided.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 108
2.3 Whirlpools/Plunge Pools

The Whirlpool shall be approximately 20m2 to 25m2, large and unique in shape, rather than
circular. The whirlpool is to be located adjacent to, yet separate from the Main / Adult Pool. If
in direct view to the Main Pool, the Whirlpool may be at a higher elevation to minimize views
to chair legs and foot traffic.

The water temperature shall be regulated to a maximum of 40ºC.

150% of the minimum quantity required aerator outlets should be installed in the whirlpool as
recommended by Whirlpool equipment suppliers to provide a top quality aeration system.
These outlets shall be mounted at 15cm and 30cm above the seat. Whirlpool aeration control
shall be by means of a 15-minute time switch, located near the whirlpool at 1.5m AFFL.

If the switch may not be located near the whirlpool due to local code requirements, it shall be
located outside the pool attendant’s office in a clearly visible position.

Dry niche underwater lights are preferred.

One underwater light is required at the plunge pool in spa and guestrooms.

2.4 Pool Deck and Related Amenities

The Pool Deck shall be designed in such a way so as to provide ample space for the chaise
lounges, umbrellas, dining tables, cocktail tables, cabanas with circulation and landscaping.

50% of Pool Deck area shall be shaded by cabanas, trellis, umbrellas, and/ or landscaping.
While poolside seating is important, additional areas that create a sense of privacy for smaller
groups of seating is also desired.

Locate some chaise lounges on grass areas. One cocktail table is required for every two chaise
lounges.

Within the Main Pool deck, provide an area that may be separated or closed off for private
functions. A service area, with discreet access, plumbing and power is required for this area
function.

2.5 Cabanas

If the Interior Designer deems the inclusion of Cabanas then the following should be included:

A minimum 2 chaise lounges and a small cocktail table. The Cabana design shall provide
guests with a certain level of privacy and exclusivity. Provide power and, if possible a telephone
outlet.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 109
2.6 Pool Support Services

Provide weatherproof speakers throughout pool deck with volume control at Pool Bar or
Service Cabana, as applicable. Provide Pool Toilets as required by local codes.

A shower and footbath are required at all pathways leading from the beach to the hotel,
restaurant or pool areas.

A hose bib is required at 45m centres for washing the pool deck together with a waterproof
duplex electrical power outlet.

If necessary, due to climate conditions, proper windbreaks such as glass screens, landscaping
berms shall be provided to shelter the pool deck.

Wind direction shall be taken into consideration when sighting waterfalls, fountains, etc.

3. Outdoor recreational facilities

In resorts, there may be numerous outdoor activities that may include, but are not limited to
the following:

- Golf Course, putting greens, mini golf

- Tennis Court(s) with a duplex electrical outlet is required at each end of court, for ball
machine
- Basketball Court(s)
- Volleyball Court(s)

All courts shall be lit using the latest technological non-glare lighting fixtures, the lighting
consultant and supplier will make recommendations.

A plastic-coated metal fence 3m high with a 1.2m wide access gate, to surround each court.

Where two courts are adjacent, fencing between courts shall be removable for possible
tournament seating for private tented events.

Hose bib is required for wash down and court maintenance.

3.1 Comfort Station

Provide a small comfort station as defined in the project specific Design Brief and include the
following:

- Waiting area (10m2)

- Washrooms

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 110
 - House telephone
- Refreshment area with a small refrigerator and counter
- A storage unit for clean towels and receptacle for used towels
- A secured staff and storeroom with lockable shelving

3.2 Pro Shop

Provide a Tennis and / or Golf Pro shop, per project specific Design Brief, approximately 40m2
with retail area, office, workroom for restringing, etc. (clear view of tennis courts is essential).

4. Beach Activities

Resorts that are located on a beach shall have one central property access point. A Beach
Pavilion and outdoor showers shall be located at this point.

The access route shall be clearly separate from the pool area and pool bar, so that beach traffic
does not compromise these areas. Service accesses to the beach for maintenance equipment,
supplies, etc., to be completely separate from the guest access.

4.1 Beach Pavilion

A Beach Pavilion shall be located adjacent to the main access route from the hotel to the beach
with a good view of the entire beach area. Provide one Pavilion per 300 m of beachfront. The
Beach Pavilion shall have space for the following:

- Water sport activities

- Lockable drawers and cupboards for beach related items (suntan lotion, glasses, etc)
- Telephone outlets and duplex electrical outlets (some UPS), computer systems outlets
- Under counter refrigerators for cold water and facial towels
- Clean towel storage 1m2 per one hundred 100 beach chairs and used towel carts (allow
approximately 0.9m x 0.9m)
- For seasonal, weather related and temporary storage, allow approximately 20m2
adjacent the pavilion for beach chairs and beach activity related equipment.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 111
 5. Indoor Recreational Facilities

Facilities may include, but not limited to:

- Billiard / Pool Room / Darts

- Bowling Lane(s)
- Movie Theatres, Movie Rooms
- Table Tennis room
- Racquet / Squash Courts
- Internet Café
- Board games

These facilities may be located near the central recreation areas so as to share staff and a
guest reception / control point.

The project Acoustical Consultant shall advise the design team on the location and layout of
these facilities taking into account sound generation and transmission by these games and
their participants. The acoustical consultant shall also issue specific information regarding the
Movie Theatre requirement. Noise factors and sound transmission by these games and their
participants shall be taken into consideration when locating these facilities.

6. Children and Youth Centres

A Children and Young Adult’s program may be developed as an added attraction at the
property. The program will include both indoor and outdoor organized activities with full-time,
professional qualified staff.

The facility for this program shall be located near the Children’s Pool area (as applicable)
and/or in a location remote from the guestrooms.

The area will be separated into age- appropriate areas with age-specific furnishings and
amenities. Design the space with natural light incorporated into the play areas and include:

- A check in desk with coat rack, if appropriate

- Bench and cubbies for shoes, towels etc.
- Shelf for craft and activities for public display and pick up
- Play area with cubicles with age appropriate toys for children
- Game / Arcade room with a large screen TV / DVD player and computers with
interactive games for youth
- Age-appropriate toilets for each area
- Sleep / quite area
- Ample open storage for crafts, books, games and toys

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 112
 - Pantry (lockable) with full-size refrigerator, sink, ice machine, microwave, dishwasher
and lockage storage
- Additional lockable storage for crafts and equipment
- Provide a shaded exterior play area if applicable to resort project

7. Departure lounge

In remote resort properties, a Departure Lounge may be required for guests arriving before
their rooms are ready, or whose flights departures are after normal checkout times.

The lounge shall also provide a quiet area for guests to read or just relax. It will include small
locker rooms and showers shall enable guests to freshen up, change and use the hotel facilities
even though their room is not available.

It may be located adjacent to the Spa / Health Club reception area and requires the following
features:

- Large comfortable lounge with TV with DVD / Computer with Internet access, game
tables, games, books, magazines, etc.
- Seating for 15-20 guests
- Telephone outlets and duplex electrical outlets plus USB charging facility
- Central stereo system with ceiling audio speakers
- Small refreshment centre with under counter refrigerator
- A luggage storeroom shall be located adjacent to the Departure Lounge with the
following features:
1. Heavy duty shelving 0.8m wide (full length of two sides of the room) for guest
luggage, golf clubs, etc.
2. Hanging rod at 2.5cm diameter x 1.8m long for hanging garment bags.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 113
8. Examples of Actual MH&R Leisure Areas

Mövenpick Hotel & Marine Spa, Sousse, Tunisia

Mövenpick Resort & Spa Tala Bay Aqaba Jordan

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 114
Mövenpick Hotel Beirut

Movenpick Resort Bangtao Beach Phuket

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 115
Section G: MH&R Branded Residences
1. The MH&R Branded Residences Concept

MH&R Branded Residences follow a modern contemporary design, to ensure international

quality assurance, standardised furnishings and the prestige associated with a branded
product.

The typical project is ideally to have a minimum of 80 branded residential units, and:

- can be part of the hotel building, adjacent or as a stand-alone development

- are fully furnished according to Mövenpick standards and meets overall market
positioning criteria
- can be serviced daily, weekly or on demand as per the guest request
- can be rented on a daily, weekly, monthly and annual basis
- can consist of studio apartments; one, two or three bedroom apartments and villas or
a mixture thereof.

The design of the MH&R Residences product should include the following:

- Reception, lobby with small lounge and concierge; mail boxes and bellman trolleys to
be available in lobby
- Large storage space for bell desk
- Administration offices: GM and Secretary, Sales and F/B departments. (Include
Finance x 1 office)
- Back of House to accommodate:
1. Housekeeping
2. Engineering
3. Main kitchen including room service
4. Accounting
5. Small receiving area
6. Garbage room
7. Small staff change rooms and canteen
- Guest services on offer to include:
1. Room service
2. Shopping delivery service for basic grocery items, i.e. milk, bread etc.
3. Apartment servicing and maintenance
4. Housekeeping and laundry dry-cleaning service
5. Car-wash service
6. 24-hour security
7. Recreational club
8. Maid and child-care services
9. Residential management and owner’s association

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 116
 - Liquor license, a preference but not a must across the Middle East
- Depending on the clientele, children facilities such as playground, kids club, crèche,
bunk beds could be added
- Additional lockable storage space for long term guests is to be made available on a
rent per square metre basis, accessible by an electronic proximity reader basis.

2. F&B Concepts

A gastro-pub/bar is found to be more preferable to the residents than a themed restaurant and
is more frequented as the Residents “Local”.

Further F&B facilities are to include:

- One all day dining restaurant or café with minimum capacity 100 guests, preferably with
an entrance at street level
- It is important that a “take-away” product offering is available to MH&R Residences
residents / tenants, i.e. coffee/muffin in the morning on their way to work
- Basic room service
- One themed restaurant is a preference but not a must, although a gastro-pub/bar is
more preferable
- The provision of WiFi service is seen as a way in which to attract customers to these
F&B facilities, and must thus be provided

3. Banquet, Meeting Rooms and Business Centre Facilities

In a property that has both a MH&R Hotel as well as Branded Residences, these facilities are
shared and thereby enjoy the benefits of a diversified potential user/customer group and the
economies of scale of shared costs.

The Business Center is to be located on the same floor as the conference / meeting rooms and
boardroom facilities. The Business Centre is to be a 24 hour facility and offer a small reception
/ concierge, car rental, guest services and small retail convenience shop. All other retail such
as hair salon, etc. to be contracted out, fixed income.

The features of these facilities must include:

- 3 or 4 number meeting rooms and/or boardrooms centralized on one floor to

accommodate 10 to 75 delegates
- One meeting room is to be provided per 100 residential units. Capacity of each room is
to be between 10 to 25 pax
- Large daylight foyers, with fixed counter for coffee, tea breaks
- High tech equipment

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 117
 - Meeting rooms should have access to day light
- Small pantry is to be provided should the facilities not be located on the same floor as
the main kitchen
- Small banquet storage and back of house space
- Gents/ ladies bathrooms

4. Retail and Concessionaires

Small gourmet retail facility must be included and should be combined with business center.
This facility could include:

- Beauty salon and hairdresser, preferably with outside access; space to be leased out
- A small high standard convenience shop / mini market (run by Mövenpick) for essential
items e.g. milk, sugar, small snacks, etc.

5. Apartment / Suite Features and Configuration

5.1 Standard Features

Standard features to be accommodated in all MH&R branded residential apartments / suites

are to include:

- City / park / sea / lake views etc.

- Double / king-size / twin beds and bedside tables
- Working desk with multi-sockets
- Coffee tables and standalone lighting
- Dining table & chairs
- Casual seating
- Overhead lighting
- Walk-in / built-in closets with shelves
- Insulated and double glazed windows
- Flat screen TVsFridge
- Electronic safety box
- Thermo-controlled heating and air-conditioning

The bathroom to the MH&R branded residential apartments / suites is to include the following:

- Quality vanities with granite tops

- Mirrors and vanity lighting
- Ceramic accessory package to match bathroom design
- Safety glass shower enclosures
- High quality mixer taps

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 118
5.2 Apartment / Suite Configuration

It is recommended to have as many connecting apartments / suites in the configuration as can

be accommodated in order to allow flexibility in selling a one bedroom suite or a two bedroom
suite and also in renting interconnecting rooms.

Min. Room Size

Unit Description Mix Asia / Africa
Europe
/ ME

Studios 40% 40m2 45m2

1-Bedroom Apartment:
50% 55m2 65m2
Kitchenette concept with living room, guest bathroom
2-Bedroom Apartment:
Kitchen concept with living room and guest bathroom 5% 70m2 90m2
Could also be interconnecting Apartments
3-Bedroom Apartment: 150m2
Semi-open kitchen concept with living room and guest (incl.
5% 110m2
bathroom (and maid’s room in GCC region) maids
Could also be interconnecting Apartments room)

Villas n/a n/a n/a

5.3 In-room Kitchen / Kitchenette Concepts

All MH&R Branded Apartments / suites kitchens / kitchenettes are to be of an appropriately

high-quality standard (benchmark reference is made in this respect to Bosch, Siemens and
Whirlpool) with the following standard features:

- First class kitchen equipment including 2 hotplates or full oven with 4 hot plates for 2
and 3-bedroom units, air filter / extract, cupboards, sink, microwave, water kettle, small
working space, fridge/freezer (not mini-bar), toaster, dishwasher, small operating
equipment (SOE)
- Selected granite tops
- Twin bowl stainless steel sink with quality mixer tap
- Microwave, small oven, hot plates
- Basic cutlery and crockery
- Recess lighting

Set up to include a 2 to 6 place setting depending on the Apartment size as follows:

- crockery service (plates, side plates, small dishes, large dishes)

- cutlery service (knives, forks spoons, teaspoons)

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 119
 - glassware service (old fashion glasses, tumblers, wine glasses)
- presentation dishes
- can / bottle opener
- cutting board
- kitchen knives
- pots / saucepans with lids and frying pan
- Small dish rack

5.4 In-Room Laundry Facilities

Washer dryer in a closet in every room, or alternatively a large laundry facility is to be located
in the basement with industrial machines operated by smart cards.

5.5 In-Room Technology

Refer to IT Section S.

5.6 Life Safety Systems

Life safety systems (smoke detectors, alarms, gas detectors, automatic sprinklers, sprinkler
flow detectors, etc.) for the Apartments / Suites are linked to a centrally located point of control.
In a property that has both a MH&R Hotel and Residence, this location is the Hotel’s Security
Control Room. In a stand-alone MH&R Residence, this location is also the Security Control
Room. Compliance with local authority regulations may require the provision of a duplicate
alarm panel suitably located on the same level as the Main Entrance for easy and rapid access
by emergency personnel responding to an event.

Irrespective of local authority requirements, the minimum standard acceptable to MH&R is a

linked smoke detector alarm located in the kitchen area of the unit, the provision of a suitable
and regularly maintained portable fire extinguisher located appropriately within each unit and
the provision of a suitably sized fire blanket, also located appropriately within each unit.

6. Leisure and Recreational Facilities

The following recreational facilities are to be included in the design (specification same as hotel
section)

• Small reception
• Heated / cooled swimming pool preferably outdoor with sundeck and pool bar
• Sauna with Jacuzzi pool

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 120
 • Steam room
• Small changing room
• Relaxation area
• Large fitness room ideally with daylight and state of the art equipment

7. Parking

Underground or shaded parking for up to 65% of the number of keys, ideally with gate operated
on the room key with room accessibility directly from the parking. The number of bays provided
is dependent upon the tenant business mix and if a large percentage of the tenants are long-
term, it is suggested that parking bays are available for 70-75% of number of keys. Compliance
with the prevailing local regulations may impose a higher standard than those described herein.

8. JOP – Jointly Owned Properties

Some MH&R products will include mixed use developments which are made up of a number
of components (e.g. Hotel, Commercial, Retail and Residential) some of which have jointly
owned property (JOP), all of which have their own interests but need to operate under common
‘building rules’.

The JOP is normally the Residential component. It is the responsibility of the Developer to
develop a sufficiently detailed and accurate financial model that captures and apportions all
capital and operating costs for shared facilities or common areas of properties. MH&R must be
given appropriate levels of input into the development of this financial model, and must agree
to the mechanisms of cost apportionment.

For such Products, the following aspects need to be considered in the planning and design
stage of the Project:

8.1 Utilities

This is an area which can cause a lot of debate and conflict in regards to cost allocation for
Common Elements and will occur where transformers or meters are shared over 1 or more
components. As a rule, the responsibility to pay for the cost of utilities consumed by a branded
residential unit is and must remain the responsibility of the owner of that unit. At no point in
time will MH&R assume a role in the receipt of utilities billing, payment thereof, and recovery
of dues from unit owners and the financial administration of these costs.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 121
8.1.1 Electricity

Where ever possible each component should have its own Transformer and hence Main
Distribution Board (MDB). This will result in the charges being raised by the energy provider
that relates to a specific component and does not require an allocation made over several
components.

Where this is not feasible sub meters should be installed per component connected to the
MDB, this means the allocation can be done on actual instead of estimated usage.

One Transformer/ MDB should be allocated for the buildings Common Elements only, such as
Plant Rooms, Mechanical Rooms, MDF Rooms, Pump Rooms, Emergency Back-up,

Fire Stairs, etc. Although an allocation will still need to be made since this is the MDB for all
Common Elements it will be more than likely based on ‘built up area’.

8.1.2 Water

Provisions should be made for sub meters for each component and Common Elements.

8.1.3 Cooling

Provisions should be made for sub meters for each component and Common Elements.

8.2 Elevators & Lift Lobbies

Refer to Section P

8.3 Hotel Rental Pool Apartments

In many developments Apartments will be sold as residential but in many cases the developer
will also sell some apartments with hotel spec furniture purely as investment properties. These
apartments are sold on the proviso that they form part of the hotel inventory as part of a Hotel
Rental Pool or Programme.

The location of these apartments must be determined at the design & development phase.

If the Hotel is located on Level 3 to Level 14 and from Level 15 – 36 will be Apartments, the
developer should allocate the floors directly above the Hotel component as the Rental Pool /
Programme Apartments so the infrastructure already in place for the hotel can be extended in
a cost-effective manner:

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 122
 - Elevator shafts – Guest & Service
- IT Cabling
- Telephony provisions
- Linen Chute
- Garbage Chute
- Room Management System

In addition, the same hotel operational requirements should also be mirrored on these floors:

- Housekeeping Pantry
- Mini Bar Stores
- Used IRD Tray / Trolley Pantry
- MEP
- Way finding signage

8.4 Residential Move-in & Move-out Considerations

With any building that has a significant residential component there is a considerable amount
of traffic and potential disturbance created by residents moving belongings and furniture in and
out of the building.

With the correct planning at design stage this disturbance can be kept to a minimum to the
other components especially the Hotel.

There must be a dedicated area that is specifically designed for this purpose which provides
for access to removal vehicles, includes a loading bay that is adjacent to a room (min 42sqm)
where belongings & furniture can be unloaded or stored until loaded. ‘Move in/out Room’.

Inside this room is the BOH elevator used for moving residents in/out as mentioned previously
in 8.2 above.

This is also the means that residents can receive ad hoc deliveries, fridges, furniture, etc and
eliminates disturbance in common areas, their own component and other components.

8.5 Leisure Facilities

Separate swimming pools (including pumps & filters) and changing facilities should be provided
for Residential and Hotel.

It is strongly recommended that the location of the Residential Swimming pool is not visible
from the Hotel component.

As can be appreciated a Resident sees this as their home, and rightly so. Therefore their
behaviour can be very different from that of a Hotel guest. This will also ensure that any
disturbance from the Resident’s Pool to the Hotel component is kept to a minimum.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 123
The Resident’s Pool may be located on the roof or on a recreational floor sandwiched between
the Residential component.

Separate Gyms could also be provided for both the Hotel & Residential components.

As a revenue generating idea for the Hotel it is worth considering developing a larger gym
footprint for the hotel component and a small ‘basic’ gym for the Residential component.

This will allow the hotel to upsell memberships to the residents to a comprehensive Gym as
well as external memberships in the surrounding community. This will help the hotel recover
operating costs and turn a traditional underutilized hotel cost centre into a revenue generator
and more than likely a profit centre.

The resident’s memberships could be sold at a discounted rate to create a ‘base’, similar to
airline crew business and then yield off external memberships.

It is important that this arrangement in regards to Gym Membership is made clear to investors
in the Sales & Purchase Agreement (SPA) to avoid misunderstandings.

8.6 Integration between Residential Intercom & Hotel Telephony System

The mindset behind this recommendation is to provide residents a direct link to hotel services
from their apartment. As well as a great function for residents its true potential is to drive
revenue for the Hotel.

This will give an apartment resident a direct ‘hot key’ link to purchase services that the hotel
can provide and generate revenue from, such as In Room dining / Food delivery,
Housekeeping Services, Handyman Services etc.

8.7 Convenience Store / Takeaway Coffee

A provision should be made for a small Convenience Store with a strong takeaway coffee
element.

This outlet should to be located on the residents (and commercial if applicable) journey from
their car park to their elevator. This will quickly become the place where they pick up their
morning coffee, newspaper or their last minute necessity items.

Historically in residential buildings these type of outlets perform very well and require minimal
manning.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 124
8.8 Car Parks

It is essential that the Hotel has its own car park and does not share this facility with any other
component as a ‘right’. As is normal practise the size of the hotel car park needs to consider
its requirements based on number of Rooms, Conference & Banqueting Facilities, Food &
Beverage Outlets and the ‘drive’ market the Hotel is likely to attract.

It is recommended however that once this figure is calculated that additional car parking over
and above the requirements for the Hotel is added.

The additional parking spaces can then be leased to other components requiring additional car
parks, generating revenue for the Hotel

This will be very popular to residents of the apartments as often under their SPA they are
allocated 1 car park per bedroom however their requirements are often more.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 125
9. Examples of actual MH&R Residences

Movenpick Residences at Bangtao, Phuket

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 126
Mövenpick Hotel Apartments Al Mamzar Dubai

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 127
Section H: Design and Construction Standards
1. Back of House (BOH)

1.1 Office Areas

Staffing numbers and types and responsibilities vary based on hotel type, size and location.
Each separate office area shall include staff washrooms, coat closet, file storage, mail, copy
and a small coffee / break room. MHR can provide a generic list of office requirements.

All office partitions must meet a minimum STC rating of 48 with the exception that the following
areas must meet a minimum STC rating of 54, including the Executive Offices, perimeter walls
of offices adjoining public areas, washrooms adjoining offices, Director of Human Resources
and HR interview room.

Provide moderate quality open office systems furniture for all administrative assistants and
accounting open office areas. Provide file storage and open shelving at each workstation. Each
workstation shall be equipped with multiple power, telephone and data outlets to support the
specific operational needs. Provide uninterrupted power supply (UPS) to computer and critical
office areas in locations subject to frequent power outages.

Provide excellent task lighting in all offices. Provide natural light and exterior views for the
benefit of the Staff, wherever possible. Offices and staff areas with exterior windows visible by
the public must have incandescent lighting and window treatments (per interior designer) to
match the guestrooms and public areas.

The coffee/ break room shall include a built-in counter with upper and lower cabinets, stainless
steel sink, water purifier, residential size refrigerator, convenience outlets, wall phone, and
trash/recycle accommodations.

Specify “Energy Star” equipment for office and pantry areas.

Welded, hollow metal frames and doors and frames are required in all back-of-house areas.
All metal doors and frames shall be painted in accordance with the architects finish schedule.
Doors that exit to public areas shall be decorative wood doors to match the interior design of
the public spaces. All double doors connected to the service corridor shall have a single glass
vision panel. All offices must be fitted with glass windows, for easy view into and out of the
spaces.

Heating and air conditioning of multiple rooms from a single AHU shall be equipped with zone
dampers and variable fan speed controls to optimally regulate room temperature.

All grilles, fire hose cabinets and access panels shall be flush mounted and painted to match
the adjacent surface in these areas. The ductwork behind grilles in the executive offices shall
be painted matt black.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 128
Mechanical noise should be within the limits of the applicable Noise Criteria on Section H -
Mechanical Systems.

Below is a generic list of Office Requirements for a typical property, it should be noted that this
will vary from project to project.

MP Generic Office Requirements

Persons Area m²

GM 1 25

GM Meeting Room 35

PA to Exec office & Reception area 1 20

Front Office Manager 1 15

Asst. Front Office Manager 1 9

Reservation Manager 1 12

Reservation Team 4 35

Director of Revenue 1 15

Executive Housekeeper 1 12

Security Manager 1 12

F&B Manager 1 15

F&B Team 4 35

Room Service Order Taker 1 9

Executive Chef 1 12

Chief Steward 1 9

Guest Service Agent 1 12

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 129
DOSM 1 15

Sales Team 5 45

Laundry Manager 1 12

Financial Controller 1 15

Finance Team 5 50

Receiving Clerk 1 9

Purchasing Manager 1 12

Purchasing Team 2 20

IT manager 1 12

HR Director 1 12

HR Team 3 25

Time Keeper 1 9

Chief Engineer 1 15

Engineering Team 3 30

Spa Manager 1 12

1.1.1 Executive Offices

The Executive Offices shall be conveniently located for guest access and shall have upgraded
finishes and furnishings as specified by the interior designer. For efficiencies in staffing and
space planning, it is preferable to locate the Executive Offices near the Front Desk and Front
Offices. The Executive Offices typically include the General Manager and several director level
positions plus admin staff.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 130
Locate the meeting room, coat closet and coffee station adjacent to Reception for visitors and
staff. Locate the copy, mail, washrooms and storage in this area convenient for staff usage.

1.1.2 Front Offices

The Architect of Record is responsible for all other support offices and related areas. The Front
Office shall be adjacent to the Front Desk.

Provide a separate workspace, not visible to the public, with a stand-up counter with computer
stations, cabinets and file storage to support the front desk activities.

Provide a private office for the Front Office Manager and the Rooms Division Manager in close
proximity to the Front Desk. Where possible, the Front Office, and Administration Offices
should be located together for maximum efficiency.

1.1.3 Administration Offices

The Administration Offices are typically heart-of-house facilities located near the Front /
Executive Offices with direct access from the service corridor. They include Catering, Sales
and Marketing, Food and Beverage and Public Relations support offices and are typically
located adjacent to the Executive Offices.

1.1.4 Accounting Offices

The Accounting Offices are back-of-house facilities are typically adjacent to the Administration
Offices. These offices include the, head cashier, controller and all other support offices.

The Head Cashier room will be accessed through the main accounting office with a safety
glass viewing panel and a small pass-through in a hollow metal frame. In the wall provide a fire
rated drop safe for after-hours deposits and cash pick-up. Provide CCTV, duplex outlets,
telephone and data ports, and a duress alarm button wired to Security and PBX in both rooms.

The IT Manager may be located either in the Accounting area or at a remote location in the
back-of-house connected to the computer room.

Provide a 2.4m minimum built in counter with two stations and multiple power and data outlets
above and below the work surface. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical sections for more
specific information, i.e., dedicated air conditioning, and UPS.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 131
1.2 Reservations and Telephone Operator Rooms (Guest Service Center)

As it is essential that Reservations and Operators work in a quiet office environment, yet central
to the back of house near the housekeeping, repairs and maintenance or the staff dining room
as applicable.

The Reservations room shall include 4-6 station and 2 small offices with the window for the
reservation and revenue manager to monitor the activity.

The standard stations shall include a built-in counter, computer and monitor, PBX consoles
and outlets for power, radio base, telephone and data. Additionally, a wall clock, white board,
shelving, lockable file cabinets are provided in the room. Provide noise reduction workstations
with ergonomic chairs and equipment.

The Operators provide prompt guest service for Front Desk, Restaurants, Spa (as applicable),
Room Service, Housekeeping, and Engineering, reservations overflow, as well as the typical
operator services. The Telephones Operators Room shall include a number of stations and a
small office with a window for the Operator Manager to monitor the work activity. Additionally,
Reservations may be located in this office as required by the program.

As this area is manned 24 hours a day, it is important to locate this room in a secure and active
area in the back-of- house administrative support area for integration with the staff and support
services. For this area, it is critical that lighting and power be connected to the emergency
generator. Natural light is preferred.

The standard stations shall include a built-in counter with a shelf above, computer and monitor,
PBX consoles and outlets for power, radio base, telephone and data. Provide noise reduction
workstations with ergonomic chairs and equipment. Provide one area with smoke and fire
alarm annunciation panel, CCTV monitors, security alarm indicator panels, and the above
standard items. Also, provide a network printer, copier/scanner; fax machine, wall clock, white
board, shelving, and lockable file cabinets.

Secured ‘Lost and Found’ storage may be located in the Operators’ Room.

1.3 Human Resources

Typically, the Human Resources office is located adjacent to the Staff Entrance and Security
Office with direct access to the main service corridor. Refer to the project Design Brief for
specific area requirements.

If these areas are located remotely from the staff entry, locate the Interview Room near the
entry for easy, pre-security access by applicants. The Interview Room shall be furnished with
a table and four chairs. Provide power and data outlets.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 132
Depending on the size of the hotel and specific project requirements, two semi-private
workstations in the reception area may be required for completing applications.

In some regions, payroll distribution may be managed through a Payroll Office adjacent to
Human Resources. Provide a glazed pass through above the counter into corridor alcove, a
desk, and safe and lockable file cabinets.

The Training Room will also function as the staff meeting room and shall be located in the
Human Resources area to permit flexible use for a variety of training and related personnel
activities. The room shall be designed for classroom set up and will include a motorized
projection screen or flat screen TV, marker board, display rail and usable wall surfaces,
secured storage for audio visual equipment, power and data outlets for computer work stations,
and good lighting.

1.4 Security Manager’s Office / Security Control Room

The Security Office and related areas shall be located at the staff entrance and adjacent to
Loading Dock and Human Resources to monitor activity entering and leaving the hotel through
the back-of-house. Provide for a time attendance biometric recorder immediately inside the
staff entrance doors. A large laminated glass window with a pass though opening shall be
located in direct line with the staff entry. Also, provide a Dutch door into the Security Office. If
the staff entry and loading dock are located in different areas of the project, an additional office
may be required. Refer to the project Design Brief for the location(s) and specific requirements.

The Security Control Room is normally staffed 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, and serves as
the hub for security dispatch and monitoring of fire alarm, CCTV and the security alarm system
and will include:

- Built-in work counters with drawers and multiple power outlets above and below the
counter for radios, battery chargers and equipment
- Multiple telephone and data outlets at work stations
- Remote fire alarm panel
- CCTV monitor and recording devices
- Remote door alarm console
- Alarm and duress warning light console
- Open shelving and lockable cabinets, including key racks
- Button to operate electric strike on main staff entry door
- All power outlets shall be on UPS/emergency power so the systems will continue to
function normally in the event of a power failure. Wiring and cables are to be concealed
in walls or behind a tamper-proof wiring chase.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 133
1.5 Staff Facilities

1.5.1 General Requirements

All metal doors and frames shall be painted in accordance with the architects finish schedule.
Doors that exit to public areas shall be decorative wood doors to match the interior design of
the public spaces.

All double doors connected to the service corridor shall have a single glass vision panel.

Full height stainless steel corner guards should be provided to all external corners. Provide
5cm thick by 030 m high wood or plastic rub rails at 1.1m AFFL on all exposed walls.

Where corridor widths exceed 250cm, road side curbs should be used as wall / corner
protection.

Minimum Finished Ceiling Heights are as follows:

- Service corridors: 2.7m

- Back-of-House areas: 2.4m
- Loading dock and compactor room: 5m
- Laundry: 3.7m
- Kitchens: 2.9m

Back-of-house lighting should be of the low energy type. All fluorescent fixtures throughout
the hotel shall be warm white with rapid start premium electric type for T-8 lamps. Fixtures in
damp locations such as employee work area, storerooms and food service areas shall be rated
accordingly and in compliance with local health and safety codes. All storerooms and offices
shall have room lighting controlled by local switches located inside the entrance door. Fixtures
subject to damage from equipment and carts in maintenance, food service areas and storage
rooms shall be supplied with wire guards, as required.

Where a room has more than one entrance, three way switching shall be provided. Fixtures in
fire escape stairs shall be mounted on main landings only unless otherwise stated by local
code.

1.5.2 Staff Entrance

The staff entrance shall be located at the service / back of house area for the hotel with direct
pedestrian pathway from a public right–a-way. Visually separate the staff entrance from the
Loading Dock to avoid circulation conflicts and to provide the staff with a positive arrival
experience.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 134
The staff entrance leads directly to the back of house service corridor and is to be in close
proximity to Human Resources. Provide a smart card entry system and CCTV on entry door
for security to control access into back of house.

1.5.3 Service Corridors / Vestibules

The service corridors provide primary circulation from the loading dock and staff entrance to
all other areas in the main building and banquet facilities.

The main service corridor shall be a minimum of 2.4m wide.

Secondary service corridors shall be a minimum of 2.0m wide, except for the banquet corridors
that shall be a minimum of 3.7m to accommodate the movement of vehicles and oversized
equipment as described in Section C. The ceiling height in service corridors shall be a minimum
of 2.7m. Dimensions are net, clear of equipment, columns or obstructions.

The floors shall be sealed concrete, except in the banquet corridor that shall have abrasive
resistant tile and cove base or carpet and cove base depending on location and adjacency to
the banquet access doors. Protect the walls with two sets of 15cm rub rails located
approximately 23cm and 0.9m AFFL. Provide washable, accessible acoustic ceiling tile in the
banquet corridors to meet applicable food and health standards. Corridors immediately
adjacent to public areas and circulation shall be finished in dark colours and with incandescent
lighting so as to not impact the public areas.

Provide telephones and data ports at all service elevator and other significant vestibules.

1.5.4 Men’s and Women’s Locker Rooms

The Men’s and Women’s changing rooms should be in close proximity to the Staff Entrance,
connected directly to the primary service corridor and located adjacent to the Uniform Issue.
Great attention is paid to attracting and retaining outstanding staff and therefore quality finishes
in all staff facilities are very important; the men and women’s locker facilities each shall have
individual colour palettes. Stone countertops and premium fixtures and accessories are
preferred to reduce long-term maintenance requirements. Include the following features:

- Barrier free facilities toilets, urinals and lavatories in compliance with local codes.
- Dry and wet grooming stations with multiple outlets
- Showers with dressing area and towel drop (one shower per 100 Staff members)
- Benches and hooks in staff changing plus lockers
- Full-length mirror, shoe buffing machine and bulletin board located near the entrance
- Janitor closet and floor sink with direct access to the service corridor
- Pay telephone with a shelf in an alcove

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 135
1.5.5 Staff Dining Room

Attention should be paid to the ID of Staff Dining Room; it is recommended that this is included
in the ID’s scope. To minimize travel time for the staff, it is desirable to locate the Staff Dining
Room in close proximity to the staff locker rooms and uniform issue. It shall be connected to
the primary service corridor and preferably to the main kitchen. Allow for tray and utensil pick-
up, hot food serving line, self-serve salad, dessert station, a beverage line, dish drop, recycling
station and wash area. Allow for non-fixed tables and chairs (5% six tops, 75% four tops and
25% two tops). Provide natural lighting, if possible.

Layout provided of food services.

Provide power and CATV receptacle TV. Provide ceiling speakers and volume control for
background music.

Adjacent to the Staff Dining Room, provide an alcove with wall mounted bulletin board, power
for vending machines and computer station with power and data connections for staff use.
Provide computers with internet accessibility for staff use.

1.5.6 Staff Movement

An illustration is included below illustrating entrance and movement of Staff through the hotel:

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 136
1.6 First Aid Office

In some regions, a barrier-free First Aid office staffed by a doctor or nurse may be required for
first aid.

The space shall include a private examination room with a single bed, secured storage for
medical supplies, a nurse’s office with desk and two guest chairs, toilet room and reception. If
the First Aid office is intended for employee use only, it should be connected to the back-of-
house and located near Human Resources.

If the First Aid office is to serve guests and employees, the location will allow for separate
public and staff entrances and waiting rooms. Hotel guests shall have convenient access to
the Medical office from the public corridor.

2. Housekeeping, Laundry and Valet

2.1 General Requirements

The Laundry may range from an on-site, full-service facility, including dry cleaning and a 24-
hour valet service to a minimal guest laundry and basic valet service only. The minimum full
service laundry room ceiling height shall be 3.5m and metal false ceilings must be fitted.

Floors shall be quarry tiled with skirting to match, or may be a powder floated surface. Wall’s
may be block work and painted plaster. All doors & frames to be metal, fire rated. Rooms to be
air-conditioned and not to exceed 27°C.

2.2 Laundry

The design shall allow for the quantity of laundry produced with 70% to be processed in an 8
hours shift. The Laundry will be designed to process all the hotel’s textiles and also to provide
same-day full guest laundry, seven days a week.

The laundry facility should be located adjacent to the housekeeping and service elevator
core/laundry chute and should be easily accessible from main service corridor and loading
dock.

The access corridor from the truck dock to the laundry shall be 3.0m wide with a 1.8m wide
pair of entry doors into the laundry. The Valet, Housekeeper’s Office and related storerooms
shall all be entered off the main housekeeping area.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 137
Hot water supply to washers must at 70°C in adequate volume to fill the washers in the required
time period. Water hammer arresters must be used on washer water lines. The hot and cold
water lines to the laundry and valet areas should be softened to a range of 0-2 grains of
hardness.

All compressor air-lines to have quick disconnects and automatic moisture traps with a water
leg and drain valve. The dryer exhaust duct is to have a lint filter and thermal insulation outside
the dryer enclosure to the lint filter room. All dryer ducts must have clean-out panels every 6m
of horizontal length. Extreme care must be taken to ensure that vibration and acoustics
ramifications are fully resolved. Flooring shall be quarry tiled or an epoxy floor finish behind
washers and dry-cleaning machines.

All large washer/extractors units should be equipped with internal suspension system to reduce
vibration transmission to be structure during extraction mode. Standard noise control practices
should be observed when installing the laundry equipment. These include de-coupling all
plumbing from the structure, sealing properly any penetration in walls or to the slab above,
using flexible connections between the laundry equipment and related pipes or fixtures.

Chemical supplies and detergent to be stored in separate laundry chemical room.

Provide a laundry chute in hotels with high rise multiple floors (typically urban projects) to the
Laundry's Soil Sort Room. Provide a sorting slide at the termination of the chute. Allow for cart
stacking at both the soiled sorting and folding areas. Where hotels have long corridors,
additional linen chutes may be required to reduce travel distance for the maids. The chute
should be accessed from a service room on each floor. Any remote termination rooms are to
be on the same level as the laundry. The linen chute is to have the following features:

- A 0.8m diameter, 18-gauge aluminium or galvanized steel linen chute is required to

serve all guestroom floors and discharge into the laundry soiled linen area.
- Stainless steel intake doors with a bottom hinged, self-closing hopper with a clear
opening 2’ 0" 0.6 x 0.6m; complete with lock, bar support and “soiled linen” name plate
- Bottom of linen chute (chute discharge point) shall be located at 2.6m AFFL
- Door discharge section shall be supported on a pipe pedestal mounted on the floor or
similar means
- The bottom “turning” section of the chute shall be suitably reinforced to resist damage
caused by bottles or similar items being inadvertently dropped down the chute
- The chute support brackets shall be securely fixed to the various floor slabs However,
the chutes themselves shall be mechanically isolated from the floor slabs and
surrounding walls to minimize noise transmission to adjacent rooms
- The chute securing brackets shall be securely fixed to the various floor slabs However,
the chutes themselves shall be isolated from the floor slabs to minimize noise
transmission to adjacent rooms
- The chute itself should also be insulated to minimize vibration and sound transmission
- Provide vent and protected sprinkler heads as required
- Provide chute wash-down system including drain

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 138
 - The Soil Sort Room to have the following features:
1. A duplex electrical outlet located at 1.7m on centre line AFFL and floor sink
2. Chute to be as manufactured with a truncation at 2.6m on centre line AFFL
3. Soil sort table width and length to suit hotel volume and manufactured of plastic
laminated. Height to slope from 0.9m at back to 0.3m at front to move work to front
of platform.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 139
A sample layout for a typical MH&R Laundry is included hereafter, as well as in Appendix 8.

Figure: Typical Laundry Layout for a Laundry to a 300 Key MH&R Hotel:

Key:

1 Arrival of dirty laundry

Dirty Laundry Sorting Area

2 Laundry chute
3 Built-in scale
4 Dirty laundry carts
5 Sorting table

Dirty Laundry Storage Area

6 Double soaking sink
7 Storage units

Dry Cleaning Area

8 Dry cleaning machine (12kg)
9 Guest laundry washing machine (7kg)
10 Guest laundry rotary dryer (7kg)
11 Trouser press
12 Finishing table
13 4-station vacuum
14 Mannequins
15 Dry cleaning press

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 140
16 Stain removal table
17 Clean guest laundry storage

Laundry Area
18 Detergent store
19 Washing spinning machine (100kg)
20 Washing spinning machine (40kg)
21 Rotary dryer for form linen & small flat items (45kg)
22 Towel folding machine
23 Ironing dryer with 2 rollers for larger flat linen
24 Automatic folding machine
25 Sheet stacker
26 Table for large flat linen
27 Table for form linen
28 Press and folding unit for 2 operators
29 Laundry supervisor’s office
30 Technical room

Clean Linen Storage Area

31 Linen marking unit
32 Sewing machine
33 Clean linen carts
34 Linen room
35 New linen storage
36 Uniform storage

Housekeeper’s Area
37 Maintenance products
38 Guest supplies
39 Lost-and-found
40 Head housekeeper’s office
41 Housekeepers space
42 Key distribution window
43 Uniform distribution window
44 Clean linen exit toward service elevators

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 141
2.3 Valet

The valet dry cleaning equipment is to be in a separate room accessible from the dryer end of
the wash line and by Housekeeping for after-hours service. The valet will provide full dry
cleaning and pressing of guests’ clothes, staff uniforms, drapes and blankets seven days a
week. One hour pressing of guests’ clothes will be offered generally between the hours of 7am
and 8pm seven days a week as well as overnight pressing.

The valet area shall incorporate the following features:

- Duplex electrical outlet and telephone at valet’s desk location

- Duplex electrical outlet at sewing machine location
- Duplex electrical outlet and telephone at shoe shine location
- Special exhaust duct system over dry cleaning unit
- Blocking in ceiling for support of slick rails for valet equipment
- Allow 1.9m2 for perc drum storage
- Guest check-in table/bins unit
- Dry cleaning machine to be enclosed and provided with separate extraction system.

2.4 Housekeeping and Uniform Issue

Provide a Housekeepers Office and an Assistant Housekeepers Office each with cork bulletin
board 0.6 x 0.9m, electrical outlets, one duplex electrical outlet (UPS), and computer and
telephone outlets. An assembly area will be located near the offices and will have additional
computer stations. Provide the following items within the main housekeeping area:

- Duplex electrical outlets (if not located in valet area)

- Telephone outlets
- Soaking sink
- Lost and found cabinet (may be located in the operator’s room or security office)
- Housekeeping counter
- Uniform issue counter
- Seamstress station and dressing room with full length mirror

For uniforms, there are two options; one a full service uniform issue with a walk up counter that
is manned for both pick up and drop off of uniforms and an electronic uniform distribution
system. With the electronic system, provide the required number of doors in an alcove so that
staff may access the uniforms without disrupting the traffic flow. If the second system is and
the counter is not manned full time, provide a secured soiled uniform drop slot in the wall where
laundry carts may be positioned on the other side.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 142
2.5 Stewards Room

The stewards storeroom is to have direct access from the service corridor and will include the
following features:

- Floor sink with hot and cold water, hose bib and tile surround to 1.7m AFFL and mop
rack at 1.5m
- Floor drain
- Heavy duty shelving 1.8m x 0.9m and full room height
- Waterproof duplex electrical outlet
- Wall mounted house telephone

3. Kitchen and Food preparation.

Movenpick Hotels & Resorts are renown for the quality of Food & Beverage products and
services provided to our Guests around the world, a fundamental principle that we follow is that
good Food Safety & Management practices must be followed regardless of the geographic
location. To underpin this principle, we follow the HACCP (Hazard Analyses Critical Control
Point) system which was originally developed for the NASA Space programme.

It is recommended by MH&R that an experiences Kitchen & Laundry Designer be appointed to

the project as early as possible and that they should be familiar with HACCP requirements,
MH&R can provide a list of Kitchen & Laundry designers that we have worked with in the past.

3.1 General Design Criteria

All kitchens must be designed in order to meet HACCP standards. Provide kitchen space for
the Hotel and Function area needs. A single main production kitchen is preferred but may be
subdivided into different preparation kitchens when the Restaurants or the Ballroom and other
Functions spaces are on different levels. Separate preparation areas for fruits & vegetables,
chicken, meat and fish.

Wall finishes around hot kitchen equipment, e.g. ranges, fat fryers, etc. shall be stainless steel
fixed to a heat resistant backing. All other walls in kitchens shall be full height tile with no
exposed gypsum. Floors shall be resistant to acid, oil and caustic solutions.

All walls to floor joints shall be flush coved with a radius and meet local code requirements.
Provide full-length corner guards flush with tile finish. Ceiling shall be constructed based on
local code requirements.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 143
All MEP equipment is to be located above the ceiling except as governed by local codes. All
kitchens shall be equipped with air-conditioning and are to be designed with negative pressure
from surrounding areas.

The Kitchen consultant is only responsible for the fire suppression systems that are directly
related to the cooking equipment. All other fire suppression systems required by the local codes
are the responsibility of the MEP consultant.

Where high temperature equipment is located below public spaces, additional ceiling insulation
shall be provided to prevent heat transmission to the public spaces above.

3.2 Main Kitchen / Banquet Kitchen

Provide separate internal circulation between the different kitchen areas with close proximity
to the receiving area and to the service elevator.

Service stands are to be located near food preparation and pick-up lines.

Sample layouts of MH&R Kitchens are included under Section C, Item 2 – Food & Beverage
of these Guidelines.

3.3 Walk-in Refrigerators / Freezers

The concept for the cold rooms shall be based on prefabricated insulated wall and ceiling
panels with a composite insulated floor. The design and specification of this equipment shall
incorporate the highest level of hygiene, heavy-duty design, reliable condensers, fan coil units
and door mechanisms. Doors are to be designed without thresholds and have knobs operable
from the inside for safety / emergency situations.

It is imperative that the floor or the walk-in refrigerator and freezer are the same level with the
kitchen floor to allow easy movement of the trollies.

3.4 In-Room Dining

The purpose of this area is to provide room service set-up and an office for room service orders.
This area shall be part of the main kitchen, separated from the main production line and located
close to service elevators.

Allow space for order preparation, cart set-up/tear-down.

In-Room Dining order takers office shall have the following features:

- Two duplex electrical outlets (UPS)

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 144
 - Two “point of sale” stations (UPS)
- Three 220V 15A duplex electrical outlets and three telephone outlets all mounted 0.80m
on centre line AFFL (credit card related equipment)
- Built-in counter 3.0 x 0.8 x 0.9m with lockable drawers under each end
- Intercom between cashier’s office (microphone) and room service set up (loudspeaker).
- One Shelf at 23cm x 60cm x 1.5m on centreline AFFL with duplex electrical outlet 15cm
above top of shelf (pagers and charger)
- Microphone and loudspeakers at both locations

3.5 Flower Work Room

The Flower Workroom is to have the following features:

- Air conditioning / Refrigeration to 18°C

- A double compartment stainless steel sink
- Full height reach-in refrigerator
- Stainless steel work counter with drawers underneath
- Duplex electrical outlets
- Telephone outlet

4. Loading dock, receiving, purchasing and storage

4.1 Loading Area

The loading dock is where loading and unloading hotel supplies, food, furnishing and other
related items take place. Truck access should be completely concealed from guest view and
hearing.

The project acoustical consultant shall advise the design team on the most favourable loading
dock location to minimize noise transmission to guestrooms and function spaces.

Provide a minimum of two service bays. Provide security gates or doors if there is visual impact
on the site; protect overhead door guides and vertical door edges with bollards. In colder
climates, the truck dock is to be heated.

The overhead clearance for the service bays is a minimum of 4.3m from any services in the
ceiling. Height of dock may vary due to building floor elevations. A 1.2m wide ramp should be
incorporated for hand trucks as well as an access stair for general circulation.

Locate near service elevator core and service circulation areas and preferably close to the
kitchen dry and cold storage. The loading dock area shall incorporate the following features:

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 145
 - Weight Scale
- Floor drain adjacent to weight scale
- Cold water hose connector for washing down
- 220V 20A electrical outlet (separate circuit) adjacent to hose connector for high
pressure water wash down unit
- Truck bumpers at edge of dock
- Electric dock levellers
- Weatherproof duplex electrical outlets
- CCTV cameras
- All exposed vertical edges to have 7.6cm x 7.6cm x 0.6cm thick x 1.4m long steel angle
for corner protection
- Protect exposed overhead door guides with bollards
- Intercom from exterior of truck dock gates to receiver’s office
- Horizontal 5cm x 30cm solid wood or plastic rub rails, mounted 1.1m to centre line AFFL
on all exposed walls
- Wall mounted house telephone adjacent to intercom at truck gate and at truck dock
receiver’s office.
- Driver’s toilet (if applicable)

4.2 Support Offices

Provide space for security, receiving and purchasing. The purchasing office shall be located
near the loading dock with the dock security adjacent to the loading dock and linked to other
heart of house activities by the main service corridor.

At the entrance to the receiving and storage area, provide a receiving office with two
workstations and a guest chair.

4.2.1 Storage

All main storage areas to be close to the production Kitchen and located between the Receiving
Dock and the Kitchen receiving space. If not immediately adjacent, provide additional
temporary storage (dry, refrigerated and freezer) at the loading dock.

Within the main storage room area, provide a weight scale and ice machine.

Provide separate storage areas for secured beverage, dry, refrigerated and frozen goods.
Provide modular walk-in freezers and refrigerator.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 146
4.2.2 Garbage Area

Provide an additional truck bay for the trash compactor/container. With the international
concern for the environment and a philosophy as a “Green” company, extra attention shall be
paid to the recycling and distribution of trash and related materials. The specified equipment
shall be coordinated with the local waste management company and the city ordinances for
trash collection and recycling. At a minimum, provide areas for cardboard recycling, can wash,
and bottle storage or a bottle crusher. The refrigeration unit for this room is to maintain an air
temperature of 15°C. The room will have electrically operated insulated overhead door as well
as man doors for access. Provide a pair of 1.1m wide entrance doors with weather strip,
threshold and door closer with 90 degrees hold open. The overhead door will have an extra
set of controls in the receiver’s office and the trash room will include the following:

- 60Amp electrical power supply mounted 1.5m on centre line AFFL (connection to
compactor)
- 220V x 15A duplex electrical outlet mounted 1.8m on centre line AFFL (air purifier)
- 220V x 15A weatherproof duplex electrical outlet mounted 1.4m on centre line AFFL
(maintenance)
- 220V x 15A electrical outlet mounted 1.8m on centre line AFFL (fly killer equipment)
- 1.3cm Hose connector, connected to disinfectant wash down system
- Bottle wash area to have a 1.3cm high pressure cold water supply and shut-off valve
and 7.5cm diameter “wet” floor drain
- Trench drain at doors with sectional removable cover

4.3 Repairs and Maintenance

The Repairs and Maintenance area should be located near the loading dock for moving
materials, supplies and equipment, adjacent to the central plant for monitoring building
systems, and close to service elevators for convenient access to guestrooms and public areas.

Access to the Maintenance area shall have a clear path of travel from the loading dock through
a pair of hollow metal doors or an overhead door.

Within the maintenance area the following spaces should be provided.

- Offices of ± 12m2 to 15m2

- Archive room ± 9m2
- Storeroom ± 30m2
- Workshop space of ±70m2

Provide office furniture, power, telephone and data outlets to support the operational needs.
Provide suitable floor corner in the office areas. In addition, provide for the following items in
the general maintenance area:

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 147
 - Hardwood and/or metal top work bench with lockable cabinets and along two walls
- Open storage shelving with bins
- Wall mounted telephone
- CATV outlet and power for TV repair
- Work station to monitor the Building Management System
- Cleaners service sink (single deep basin with a gooseneck faucet with hose thread
option)
- Eye wash station
- Multiple power outlets located at the workbench including 2No. 220V 20A circuits and
1No. 380V, 30A three phase outlet

The Carpentry Shop and Paint Shop shall include a work bench; material storage racks,
storage and cabinets, and a single basin sink on a floor mounted frame and wall-mounted
faucet with swivel spout and hose attachment. Provide an exhaust and air filter system
specified by the mechanical consultant to maintain an excellent level of indoor air quality.

Power outlets of various voltage and amperage shall be determined by the electrical consultant
to meet the needs of the equipment and repair facilities.

All receptacles shall be clearly labelled and distributed in sufficient quantity and height to meet
the operational needs.

Provide additional storage rooms for Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing supplies as well as
storage for miscellaneous bulky items.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 148
Section I: General Project Conditions
1. Introduction

The following section includes the efforts related to the design through construction phases;
mock up room; pre-opening offices; punch list and FF&E installation, early occupancy and
project takeover. The Pre-opening Offices and mock up room are considered part of the project
scope and shall be included in the project timeline and agendas.

2. Design and Construction Requirements

2.1 Project Technical Services

The Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts (MH&R) Area Office team will support the client and
consultants from the design phases through construction phases of the project.

The MH&R team will provide guidance through participation to ensure the minimum Brand,
Design and Construction and Operational Standards are met through meeting attendance and
on-going discussions; document mark-ups; collaboration of specific documentation from the
related departments (including but not limited to Spa, Food and Beverage, Technology and
Operations); and onsite observation.

Neither the MH&R technical services team nor any of the departmental groups coordinated
through the Technical Services Department will complete any architectural or related contract
documentation for the project.

The MH&R team will support the client where requested in the selection of qualified specialist
consultants including but not limited to:

- Architect, Architect of Record

- Project Management Company
- Cost Consultant
- Interior Designer
- Kitchen and Laundry Consultant
- Technical Spa Consultant, Fitness Consultant
- Interior and Exterior Lighting Designer
- Landscape Designer
- Audio Visual and Acoustics Consultant
- Signage and Graphics Designer
- Art Consultant
- Security Consultant
- Hardware Consultant

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 149
 - IT (Technology, low voltage)
- Global Security and Risk Control – if applicable to project
- Environmental (LEEDS) Consultant – if applicable to project

The design and construction process is an evolutionary process. Specific requirements will be
determined at each design phase, construction and turnover of the project. The project
specifics are to be reconfirmed at each stage of the project.

The regional MH&R may modify the standards, deliverables, or the process as warranted for
the specific project.

2.2 Project Records

The Architect and its Consultant team will provide MH&R with the following information during
the design and construction phases of the project:

- Meeting minutes from all coordination meetings

- Milestone documentation packages
- Architectural Specifications
- Specialist Consultant Reports (i.e. Elevators)
- FF&E Specification Books
- Submittals, Shop Drawings and Logs

2.3 Substantial Completion Documentation

Upon substantial completion the Contractor will provide the Hotel Engineer with the following:

- Three hard copy and two electronic versions of the completed As-Built plans and
specifications including, but not limited to civil, architectural (permit), structural,
elevator, mechanical, plumbing, electrical, spa, kitchen, laundry, special systems, IT,
ELV and interior design
- One hard copy of all final approved submittals and shop drawings
- Contact list of all subcontractors and vendors with complete contact information
indicating trade, materials and equipment provided
- Three sets of operating and maintenance manuals for all equipment including but not
limited to Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, Fire Life Safety, Kitchen, Laundry, Spa and
Fitness, Electronic locking systems, AV, ELV and IT
- Three hard copy sets and one electronic copy of manufacturers recommended cleaning
and maintenance procedures for FF&E and all special finishes
- One bound copy of all warranties
- One hard copy and one electronic version of the final HVAC test and balance reports
for both dry and wet side equipment

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 150
 - Two valve charts listing each valve by number, system and function
- Two hard copies and one electronic copy of all electrical panel schedules
- List of attic stock and materials for repairs and maintenance.

2.4 Attic Stock

The Contractor will develop a detailed list of items for approval prior to delivery. The typical
quantities will include the following:

- Wall and floor stone and tile, roof tile: 50m2 or 2% of each type (whichever is less)
- Carpets: 10% of each type
- Paint: 5gals of each colour
- Wall covering: 5% of each pattern / colour
- Fabrics: 10% of each type minimum of 5m2
- Wood Crown and Base Moulding: 30lm of each type / size
- Plumbing Fixtures and Accessories: 5 sets each type
- BOH and Public Built-in Light Fixtures: 10 sets each type
- Public Area Decorative Light Fixtures: 3 sets each type, except chandeliers
- Acoustic Ceiling Panels: 50m2 or 2% of each type (whichever is less)
- Door Hardware (all types): 10 sets each type
- Electrical Devices, switches, faceplates: 1% of each type
- Thermostats: 10 of each type
- Bathroom Ceramic / Porcelain Fixtures: 5 of each type
- Decorative Handles, Knobs and Finials: 10 sets for each type of furniture
- Light Bulbs: 2% of each type
- Replacement filters for FCU’s: 2% or each type

Guarantees: The Contractor shall guarantee the building free from defects for a period of no
less than one year with the exception of items included in these Design Standards for which a
longer guarantee period is specified.

3. Mock up Rooms and Pre-Opening Offices

3.1 Mock up Rooms and Corridors

The Contractor shall construct two mock up guestrooms consisting of a typical King and Queen
along with a representative section of corridor spanning both rooms specific to the project.
Each room shall be finished in the approved colour schemes. The mock up rooms and corridor
shall be completely finished and furnished with electricity and operating HVAC; water supply
and plumbing. The mock up rooms shall be completed as soon as possible, after designs have
been approved and ideally 24 months prior to the hotel opening in a convenient and off-site

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 151
location, preferably close to the pre-opening offices and project site. The purpose of
constructing a mock up room is to create a prototype with approved colour schemes of soft
goods and casework and to ensure that the colour schemes work, that the furniture is in scale
and the quality of the finish as well as the quality of the overall construction workmanship, noise
/ vibration isolation and architectural detailing are approved. All construction detailing, finishes
and furnishings will be revised as required to represent the approved design in the final FF&E
specifications and the construction documents.

The final approved mock up rooms and corridor shall be maintained as a quality control
reference for the Designers, Contractors and Purchasing Agents in addition to being utilized
by Operations and Sales and Marketing during the construction of the hotel.

The Architect and Interior Designer shall coordinate and prepare a reference manual to be
used during the mock up room acceptance and final punch list process. It will include the
following information:

- Architectural layout
- Mood boards
- Electrical plans and electrical equipment cut-sheets
- Data / Communication schematics and rough in-locations
- Hardware schedules and cut-sheets
- Plumbing and Accessories schedules and cut-sheets
- Door and Window cut-sheets
- Finish schedule; paint, carpet, marble, etc.
- Fan coil schedule and cut-sheets
- Lighting fixture schedules and cut-sheets
- Fire protection schematic and cut-sheets
- Furniture plan and specifications
- Millwork detail shop drawings
- FF&E schedule and cut-sheets, mini bar, room safe, etc.

3.2 Pre-Opening Offices

Typically, hotel staffing will commence up to 12 months prior to the hotel soft opening.
Therefore, fully functional offices are required off-site until the administrative offices in the hotel
are available for occupancy. These offices shall be located in close proximity to the hotel during
construction and fully furnished and include the following:

- Reliable power, water, telephone and High-Speed Internet Access

- Fully operational, compliant HVAC and fire life safety systems
- Code compliant washrooms and janitors closet
- Safe and convenient parking

Provide necessary power in the copy room for all equipment including copiers, fax machine,
shredder, mail machine, and binding machine. Provide a staff kitchen / Beverage area with a

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 152
full size refrigerator, sink, coffee maker, microwave and dishwasher. Provide a coat closet
(where applicable) and some additional locked storage.

If there is an additional marketing component, the reception, secretary, meeting rooms,

washrooms, copy and beverage rooms can by combined. Once areas are available for
occupancy in the hotel, offices can be relocated.

4. Punch list Procedures and Project Takeover

4.1 General

The takeover process begins with the Contractor assigning a Quality Control Representative
to develop a detailed quality control plan that describes the procedures necessary to meet the
Brand and Design and Construction Standards and the contract documents.

4.2 Guestrooms, Residential Units and Corridors

As the guestrooms or residential units and corridors approach substantial completion, the
Contractor will perform a pre-punch List of the areas before requesting a final construction
punch list inspection. The final construction punch list involves a detailed inspection,
documentation and verification of corrective work.

The Owner’s Representative, Contractor, Architect, Design Consultants and the Brand / Design
and Construction consultants will inspect a representative sample of rooms to verify substantial
completions and compliance with the pre-approved Model Room and Design Standards.

The project acoustical consultant will test two pairs of representative conditions (side by side
and stacked) to verify compliance with airborne and structure-borne noise transmission and
mechanical noise criteria.

Based on approval, the Architect and Contractor are responsible for preparing a detailed
construction punch list for all rooms and corridors before installing FF&E.

Following FF&E installation, the Interior Designer, Purchasing Agent, Installation Contractor
and Brand / Design and Construction consultants will inspect the same representative sample
of rooms to establish the criteria for final acceptance of FF&E.

With all the prior inspections and approvals, the Client Representative will coordinate the
completion of all guestrooms and corridors in a phased sequence for takeover.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 153
4.3 Public Areas and Heart-of-House

The Architect and Contractor shall be responsible for developing a similar quality control
program to ensure that all areas of the hotel meet Brand and Design and Construction
Standards.

4.4 Construction Punch List Criteria

The construction punch list for the public and back of house areas will generally follow the
process as described above. Inspection criteria for construction shall include, but not be limited
to the following:

- Architecture and Interior Design

- Compliance with construction documents
- Doors, frames, and hardware
- Wall, floor and ceiling finishes
- Stone, tile, carpet, windows and glass
- Built in and applied millwork and trim
- Construction details including, caulking, waterproofing and backing
- Access panels, grills, cover plates, fixtures and accessories
- Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing

HVAC

- Industry standards and code compliance

- Noise Criteria compliance
- Access panel location and appearance
- Filters, valves tags, condensate, insulation, wiring, etc.
- Thermostat location, aesthetics and function
- Supply and return grills
- System test and balance
- Fan operating speed and acoustic levels
- Dehumidification as specified
- Toilet exhaust
- Make-up air
- Building automation and controls

Plumbing

- Compliance to code, construction documents

- Noise criteria compliance
- Hardware and fixtures location and mounting
- Toilet, sink, tub shower operation, including mixing valves drains and stoppers
- All porcelain and ceramic fixtures are clean and free from defects

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 154
 - Hot and cold water lines, including location, insulation, shut off valves
- Access for maintenance and repair
- Hot water temperature
- Disinfect and certification of domestic water quality
- Fire and Life Safety
- Compliance to code, construction documents and industry standards
- Location, type and aesthetics of all devices, including sprinkler heads, alarms, smoke
detectors, fire extinguishers and cabinets
- Certification and testing of distribution lines and fire suppression systems including,
sprinklers, strobes, alarms, smoke control, speakers, communication wiring, etc.

Electrical

- All switches and outlets located and function as designed

- Lighting, power and low voltage switches, devices, systems and identification
- All cover plates clean, level and secure
- Label panel schedule and circuit breakers
- GFI and low voltage installations per specification
- All light bulbs and fixtures are functional and properly installed

Exterior

- Architecture finishes and details

- Roofing and waterproofing
- Landscape and hardscape
- Irrigation and drainage
- Lighting and power
- Signage

5. Early Occupancy, FF&E Installation Requirements and Pre-Opening

5.1 General

For the purpose of training, staffing, storage and installation of FF&E, the hotel transition, pre-
opening and operation teams shall be permitted to occupy the building in stages as it receives
occupancy permits.

At least six (6) months prior to substantial completion, a detailed takeover program will be
prepared that identifies major milestone dates leading up to early occupancy of critical spaces
including construction completion, construction punch list, FF&E installation and final cleaning.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 155
Following final cleaning and written notification that the permits are in place for early
occupancy, the Design and Construction consultants along with the Owner’s Representative
will conduct a final inspection and acceptance of the areas designated for occupancy.

Prior to occupancy, the contractor shall ensure that the spaces can be secured and that all
health and safety requirements are operational and compliant, including but not limited to fire
and life safety, domestic and potable water, HVAC indoor air quality, storm and sewer.

5.2 Installation Requirements

The following installation procedures are required as follows:

- Prior to delivery of FF&E and OS&E, provide a site plan clearly identifying loading,
staging, secured storage, refuse locations and major access routes throughout the
property.
- Provide uninterrupted heating, cooling and humidity control to protect the FF&E during
temporary storage and final placement.
- Provide additional security, fire watch and temporary fire protection, as required.
- Remove and dispose of all packing materials.
- Allow exclusive use of elevators as required for delivery and installation of FF&E and
OS&E including elevator protection and cab operators, as required.
- Adjust and focus interior lighting under the direction of the lighting consultant prior to
turnover.
- Deliver all areas, including guestrooms, corridors, public areas and back-of-house in
like new condition.

The contractor and installation company are responsible for repairing all damage after the
complete installation of FF&E. Any damage shall be repaired by the contractor to its original
condition, at no additional cost before final acceptance. They are also responsible for deep
cleaning and polishing all areas of the building prior to turnover, including doors and windows
(interior and exterior), fixtures and accessories, floors, walls, ceiling and concealed surfaces.

5.3 Start-Up and Testing

The contractor is responsible for coordinating with the specialty equipment contractor vendors
to ensure that hotel’s operating personnel are fully trained, as well as equipped with all
necessary spare parts, tools and instructions required to operate and maintain the facilities and
equipment.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 156
All equipment must be thoroughly cleaned, connected, tested, and fully operational when
handed over, including but not limited to:

- Food and Beverage

- Spa and Fitness
- Laundry and Valet
- Telephone, Computer and Technology systems
- Security and CATV systems
- Audio Visual systems
- Garbage compaction
- Pools and Water features
- Fire and Life Safety
- Central plant, Emergency Generator and Building Maintenance
- Elevators
- Lighting and Dimming
- Operable Partitions (acoustical testing)
- HVAC System (acoustical testing)

5.4 Schedule of Early Hand Over and Occupancy

All areas must be handed over completed, punched, cleaned and ready for occupancy. The
Contractor and Owner’s Representatives shall ensure all essential FF&E and temporary
occupancy permits are in place as required for the areas as follows:

5.4.1 Areas to be handed over 18 Weeks Prior to Soft Opening

- Executive Offices
- Human Resources, Accounting and Administration Offices
- Loading Dock
- Engineering Offices
- Security
- Purchasing & Receiving
- 50% of all Storage Areas

5.4.2 Areas to be handed over 12 Weeks Prior to Soft Opening

- Service Elevator to Ballroom and Guestrooms

- Main Ballroom (substantially complete for storage and staging of hotel FF&E and
OS&E)

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 157
 - Guestrooms, corridors and service areas (20 % ready at 12 weeks and 20% more ready
for occupancy every two weeks such that all 100% are turned over two weeks prior to
Soft Opening)

5.4.3 Areas to be handed over 10 Weeks Prior to Soft Opening

- Computer, AV, PBX, IDF’s and CATV Equipment Rooms

- Laundry and Valet Housekeeping Stewarding and balance of all Storage Areas
- Balance of all Storage Areas
- Main Kitchen, In-Room Dining and Staff Dining Room

5.4.4 Areas to be handed over 6 Weeks Prior to Soft Opening

- Spa Facilities, including Public Areas, Salon, Treatment Rooms & BOH
- Staff Locker Rooms and balance of BOH facilities
- Restaurants: 3 Meal and Specialty Restaurants
- Remaining Central Plant Areas
- Banquet Kitchen, Service Stations, Pantries, balance of Kitchen Areas
- All other major installations ready for training
- All M&E areas, fully commissioned

5.4.5 Areas to be handed over 4 Weeks Prior to Soft Opening

- Reception Desk, Front Office and Porte Cochère

- Smaller / Secondary Food and Beverage Outlets
- Meeting Rooms and Pre-function areas
- Pool and Water Features cleaned, circulating and chemically balanced

5.4.6 Areas to be handed over 2 Weeks Prior to Soft Opening

- Lobby and Lobby Lounge

- Concierge
- Retail
- Balance of all Public Areas
- Passenger Elevators
- All areas

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 158
Section J: Mechanical Systems
1. General Requirements

Although it is understood that local codes will govern, the following internationally recognized
codes form the basis of design and must be followed if the local code has a lower requirement;
ASHRAE and NFPA.

Work shall be completed in accordance with the standards published by the following list of
authorities ANSI/ASHRAE, NFPA, BS and UL.

All heating and cooling calculations are to be made using the ASHRAE standards and a
recognized energy analysis computer program.

The design is to consider both latent heat gain and dehumidification performance of the air
conditioning system. Humidification is required in cold climates.

Special attention must be given to the aesthetics of all public area devices, grilles and access
panels. Special attention must be given to space planning requirements for service and
replacement of major equipment and individual fan coil units.

All spaces within the building shall be air conditioned. This includes: Lobby, Public Spaces,
Guestrooms, Residential Units, Restaurants, Spa and Fitness, Back-of-House areas, Offices,
Kitchen’s and Laundry, all plant rooms. Positive pressurization of the rooms is required relative
to outdoor temperatures.

Where the project is located in a warm climate and many of the public areas are located in
large covered open areas, provide spot air-conditioning in locations where guests or staff will
spend lengths of time (i.e. registration desks, dining).

Specialty consultants shall be required to provide design documentation for systems and
installations to meet local code and international standards, i.e., fire life safety, kitchen, laundry,
acoustic, low voltage, testing and balancing.

Where applicable, specify Energy Star appliances as applicable for guest use areas or
residential style amenities.

1.1 Air Conditioning Systems

A centralized water-cooled chiller plant is the preferred option as it best addresses the
concerns of noise, unsightly view of rooftop condensing units, reliability and life cycle operating
costs and the most favourable initial capital cost.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 159
Heat tracing is required on all piping systems susceptible to freezing.

Where individual residences or villas exist, there is an option to provide localized decentralized
split systems within the footprint of each residence or villa providing the cost; acoustical
requirements and appearance can be adequately addressed. This option consists of separate
air-cooled variable refrigerant volume (VRV) heat pump systems for each residence to provide
heating and cooling. The project consultant is to evaluate the total cost of equipment,
installation and energy usage to determine if sufficient capital savings justifies this system in
lieu of a centralized water-cooled system for residences/villas.

1.2 Centralized Chiller Plant

The equipment shall be designed to operate twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week.
Multiple units with sufficient spare capacity, i.e., redundancy, is required to maintain guest
comfort in the event one chiller is taken out of service based on 2 x 67% or 3 x 33% of the total
load serving the hotel.

The chiller capacity and selection will be determined by space requirements and cooling tower
selection. The project consultant will verify if screw type chillers are preferred over centrifugal
chillers.

Each refrigeration machine shall be provided with a constant volume chill water pump and a
constant volume condenser water pump. The pumps shall be piped to allow cross use. The
chiller refrigerant shall be R134a refrigerant. Refrigerant leak detection and leak
evacuation/exhaust system are to be provided for the chiller plant room.

1.3 Cooling Towers

The consultant will select the cooling tower based on reliability, service, cost and space
available. The cooling towers shall be arranged in a multicell configuration (one cell for each
refrigeration machine) allowing each cell to be operated independently of the others. Chemical
treatment shall be provided for the condenser water circuit. If cooling towers for the air
conditioning plant does not operate year-round, then a separate cooling tower is required for
the refrigeration plant and icemakers. Cooling towers must be located so that their radiated
noise will not be objectionable to hotel guests. The project acoustical consultant shall work
closely with the design team to achieve a cost-effective solution. Cooling tower vibration
involves low-frequency vibration of the relatively slow turning propeller-type fans as well as
high-frequency impact noise from falling water, thus appropriate mechanical isolation is
mandatory.

Whenever possible, vibration isolation system should be located near columns or above load-
bearing walls to achieve better structural support. When it is not be possible to rigidly support
the motor, drive shaft, gear reducer, and propeller while having the support element isolated

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 160
from the tower, large-deflection steel springs and ribbed neoprene mounts are suggested. The
project acoustical consultant shall work closely with the design team to achieve a cost-effective
solution.

In cold climate locations, the design should use methods and materials to protect plumbing
systems in winter conditions. In tropical and salty environments, cooling towers are to be
constructed of rust resistant stainless steel. Fibreglass structures are not permitted. In locations
where water is a premium, alternatives to evaporative cooling towers may be considered,
including gray water collection, seawater cooling, ground source cooling, or dry coolers.

1.4 Chilled Water Distribution

Primary-secondary-tertiary pumping shall be utilized to distribute the chilled water throughout

the hotel and outlaying buildings. Large pumps are to be horizontally split case, double suction
type.

Smaller pumps are to be vertically spit case, end suction type. All pumps shall have shut off
valves and strainers in the suction side and check valves and throttling valves on the discharge
side. The design pressure for each pump must be at least equal to one and a half times their
working pressure.

Separate distribution loops shall be provided to supply, isolate and meter the hotel from the
residences (if applicable). The distribution piping shall be insulated steel piping within the
building with a vapour barrier. Distribution piping outside the main building shall be
underground, prefabricated insulated piping with welded joints and prefabricated fittings. Field
fabricated fittings are not allowed.

Chilled water shall be available year round. Chilled water piping systems are to be designed
with balancing capability. Secondary and tertiary chilled water loops should be provided with
VFD operation for energy conservation.

All chiller pumps shall be mounted on inertia bases on vibration isolators. For pumps on floors
on grade, neoprene mounts with a static deflection of 0.5” should be initially selected. For
pumps supported on floors above grade, steel spring isolators with 1” static deflection should
be initially selected. The project acoustical consultant shall verify all mounting conditions and
advise the design team on the appropriate mounting system on a case-by-case basis.

1.5 Special Systems

Computer, PBX and similar rooms shall be provided with independent air conditioning systems
on emergency power.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 161
Water-cooled kitchen refrigeration equipment shall be served from either the chilled water or
refrigeration plant condenser water systems. Ice machines shall be served from the return loop
of the chilled water system.

Specialty areas such as wine cellar coolers, chocolate prep rooms, pastry shops, recycling and
trash rooms etc. will have independent refrigeration systems specified by the food service
consultant.

Provide manual by-pass for water-cooled condensers in the event of chilled water condenser
water failure.

1.6 Elevators & Lift Lobbies

Vertical transport in a hotel is an important area that is often overlooked or under estimated, if
not done correctly at the time of designing the hotel, it is virtually impossible to rectify at a later
stage, over specifying can also lead to unnecessary construction cost.

When determining the number and sizes of elevators for a property the following criteria should
be used;

Average interval between elevators 40-45 seconds

leaving the main lobby in seconds
5-minute handling capacity 12% of population of hotel at 100% occupancy
30%
Car loading factor
Average waiting time in second <30 seconds
Occupancy factor 2 persons per guest room for a Resort
1.2 persons per guest room for a city hotel
Long waiting ≤ 3% for 2-way peak traffic

Obviously the elevator shafts form the early stages of the construction process and
retrospective changes can costly and / or not feasible. Below are a few recommendations to
consider:
- Try to keep lift lobby’s and elevators separate for each component especially
between the Hotel & Residential
- All elevators should have Access Control System installed, and this must be the
same system as used in the Hotel where the property is part of, adjacent to or
integrated with a MH&R Hotel
- The Hotel service elevator should access residential floors so that hotel can
efficiently service the residential component – Housekeeping, Engineering and a

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 162
 residential specific In Room Dining / delivery. All these can generate strong
incremental revenue for a Hotel.
- There should be an elevator included specifically for residents moving in and out of
the residential component. The dimensions of this elevator cab should be a minimum
of 2000 (l) x 2200 (h) clear door opening allowing it to be able to accommodate
household furniture and appliances. This elevator should be located in BOH of the
Residential component and have permanent protection.
- The residential lifts should stop with access on the Hotel ‘outlets’ floors eg) Spa,
Restaurants, Bars, however these lifts should not stop, be visible or have a ‘call point’
on the hotel accommodation floors.

2. Steam and Hot Water Boiler Plants

2.1 Centralized Boiler Plant

Direct fired hot water boilers are the preferred choice of equipment and system for meeting the
hotel heating requirements. The hotel boiler plant equipment is to be designed to meet the
specific load requirements based on the following criteria:

- Boiler plant expansion tanks

- Chemical treatment for water
- Dependability and quality of local fuel supply
- Daily and seasonal variations of the load
- Operator skill, hours and license requirements
- The need for winter heating and utilization of steam during cooling season and air
conditioning refrigeration plant.

Water heaters, reheat for humidity control, direct heating and air tempering is to be supplied
with a pressure of 5 to 10 psi.

The boilers are to be sized to meet the anticipated peak load and must be selected to provide
sufficient excess capacity to permit one unit to be removed from service for repairs and
maintenance without seriously affecting the operations of the hotel.

Centralized boiler plants are to be based on either 2 x 67% or 3 x 33% of the total load serving
the hotel. Boilers are to be insulated to reduce heat loss and must have their own circulating
pump.

Separate steam boilers should be installed for laundries, located as close to the operating
areas as possible.

The project acoustical consultant shall verify boundary conditions and selected equipment to
advise the design team on the appropriate airborne and structure-borne noise isolation
measures.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 163
All equipment must be acoustically treated and vibration-insulated to meet industry standards
(45NC, STC-55).

If boilers are to be oil fired then the capacity of the fuel storage facilities must be designed to
accommodate a two-week supply.

Steam pressure reducing valve stations are to be provided wherever high pressure steam
needs to be reduced to a lower pressure. The reducing valves may be either self-contained or
air pressure operated, designed for the highest steam inlet pressure. The station should consist
of two reducing valves in parallel, one sized at 1/3 the total capacity and one sized at 2/3 the
total capacity. Provide a manual by-pass valve, inlet strainers, safety relief valve and pressure
gauges with alarm contacts.

The partially decentralized option i.e., centralized boiler plant for the hotel with smaller separate
boiler plants for fractional and residences, is based on creating smaller, modular, gas fired
boiler plants close to the residential/villa loads they serve. Boiler plants should be integrated
near service spaces such as housekeeping/service rooms. The decentralized facilities must be
designed to protect the guest experience from unsightly equipment and noise.

The decentralized option such as a centralized boiler plant for the hotel and fractional with VRV
heat pumps to private residences/villas is preferred. The VRV heat pump unit selection in the
decentralized approach requires further investigation by the project consultant to ensure
satisfactory heating for outdoor winter design conditions and a complete cost benefit analysis
of the total capital and operating costs.

Boiler plant shall be properly ventilated, well lighted and provided with building automation and
alarm devices, as required.

2.2 Hot Water Distribution

Primary-secondary pumping shall be utilized to distribute heating water throughout the hotel
building. Separate distribution loops shall be provided for hotel air handling units, hotel
guestroom fan coil units, as applicable.

The distribution piping shall be insulated steel piping within the building with a vapour barrier.
Distribution piping outside the main building shall be underground, prefabricated, insulated
steel piping with welded joints for high temperature distribution.

Heating water for the hotel shall be available year round. Testing and balancing pressure units
should be provided as required to ensure a properly balanced heating system. By-pass
connections, designed to avoid pressure fluctuations are not approved. Provide VFD on
secondary heat pumps.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 164
2.3 Laundry Steam Boiler Plant

A high-pressure steam plant shall supply steam to the laundry and possibly to the hotel air
handling unit’s humidifiers. The design of the steam plant should be sized with fire tube type
steam boilers and 100% standby.

The boiler plant shall include a condensate receiver and pump set, deaerator, feed water pump
set, flash tank and blow down tank.

A water softener shall be provided to supply the feed water system.

Laundry and valet equipment, unless otherwise specified by the equipment manufacturer is to
be supplied with a steam pressure of 150 psi. Pressure reducing valves (PRV) will be required
for equipment using lower steam pressure. Kitchen and dishwashing equipment, unless
otherwise specified by the equipment manufacturer is to be supplied with a minimum pressure
of 12 psi and a maximum of 30 psi.

2.4 Humidification

The project consultant is to evaluate if humidification is required to maintain 30% relative

humidity. If so, humidification systems are required for comfort and to protect interior finishes.

Gas fired steam humidification is recommended. Where multiple air handing units are located,
a decentralized steam boiler is recommended.

2.5 Central Air-Compressor Plant

The plant will consist of at least two compressors, a receiver, water cooler, moisture and oil
elimination and reducing station. Discharge air pressure’s to be a minimum of 100 psi (7
kqf/cm2). A separate air compressor is to be designed and installed for laundry and valet.

2.6 Heat Exchangers

Heat exchangers are to be mounted in cast iron or welded steel cradles on structural steel
frames or concrete piers. Plate type steam-to-water and water-to-water heat exchangers are
to be of the shell and tube type, with a steel shell and removable U-bend copper tube bundle.

Consider a fouling factor of 0.001 for the selection of the heat exchanger.

Provide glycol heat exchangers and fill stations in cold weather locations.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 165
3. HVAC Guidelines

3.1 General Air Handling Units and HVAC Criteria

The hotel building shall be generally maintained under positive pressure to prevent infiltration.
Ductwork, excluding kitchen exhaust ductwork, shall be provided in accordance with ASHRAE
“HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible”. Kitchen exhaust ductwork shall be
NFPA 96 compliant.

Ductwork outside of the kitchen shall be enclosed in a fire enclosure or if approved by the
Authority, provided with a 2-hour fire rated, UL listed and labelled wrap. If approved by the
Authority, ductwork downstream of the ecology unit may be HVAC grade ductwork. All exposed
ductwork shall be stainless steel.

Unless advised on the contrary by the project acoustical consultant, sound attenuators
(silencers) shall be provided on supply and return air ductwork to air handling units and on
dedicated exhaust system ductwork. Return air ductwork shall be extended to within 15m of
the furthest return air grill, when the ceiling spaces are used as a return air plenum. Grilles
shall be ducted in smoking areas.

The following vibration isolation criteria shall apply to all HVAC equipment and associated
ductwork and piping:

- Vibration isolators with static deflection shall support ductwork and piping and be the
type equal to those used for the associated equipment for the first three support points
either side of the equipment. Beyond this, provide vibration isolators with static
deflection equal to one-half the first three support points for a minimum of 10.
- Provide flexible canvas connectors (5 cm long minimum) between fans / air handler
units and ductwork.
- Provide flexible couplings at suction and discharge pipe connections to pumps and
chillers.
- Electrical connections to mechanical equipment shall use flexible electrical cables
- Wall and floor penetrations shall be isolated from the building structure to prevent
transmission of vibration, and to prevent leakage of sound through cracks around the
penetrations.
- All roof-mounted equipment subject to wind loading may require special vibration
isolation mounts. The lateral and vertical anchored restraints must be selected carefully
and installed so that the vibration isolation system is not short circuited
- The project acoustical consultant shall develop parametric specifications for acoustical
requirements and isolation systems as necessary to meet international industry
standards.
- Dehumidification process and controls shall be provided to ensure that the humidity
level with the building do not exceed these standards. Pumps or glycol heating coils
are required to circulate water to prevent a chance of coil freezing in cold weather
climate.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 166
 - Mechanical rooms shall be located as close as possible to the areas that are being
served to avoid long duct runs, shafts and lowered ceilings.

Specifications for acoustical requirements and isolation pads must be developed by qualified
consultants and included in the project scope.

Provide vibration isolation as required to meet international industry standards.

Linear diffusers shall be provided in all public spaces and shall be carefully coordinated with
the interior designer. All mechanical devices such as variable air volume boxes, drainage
cleanouts and isolation valves shall be provided with access that have been coordinated with
the interior designer. Individual temperature control shall be provided for all areas with varying
usage profile or exposure.

Unless otherwise advised by the project acoustical consultant, there shall be no rotary
equipment located in the ceiling spaces or on the roof above any function room (Ballrooms,
Meeting Rooms, Boardrooms, etc.).

Variable air volume systems shall be provided with variable speed drives (VSD) and VSD duty
fan motors. Where power quality is a concern, a full voltage bypass shall be provided. Cartridge
type filters shall be provided for VAV systems. Multi-zone dampers shall be low leakage type,
double skin airfoil type complete with jamb seals and blade edge seals, maintenance free
bearings and internal linkage.

All air-handling units shall be provided with economizer features to provide airside free cooling
when the outdoor air enthalpy is lower than the indoor air enthalpy. Air handlers shall be
factory-assembled units of G90 galvanized steel panels with factory applied rigid insulation on
the interior and a rigid steel frame. Coils shall be corrosion resistant aluminium fin, copper tube
construction suitable for both normal and salty conditions. Coils shall be designed with
corrosion resistant Fans shall be DWSI backward inclined airfoil blade type. Filter sections shall
be complete with filter racks, 30% efficient pre-filters and 85% efficient cartridge type filters.
Adequate maintenance access shall be provided for air handling unit servicing.

Return and exhaust fans shall be SWSI centrifugal or tubular type with backward inclined airfoil
type wheels and complete with 200,000-hour L50 rated bearings with extended grease lines,
high efficiency electric motor and adjustable v-belt drive secured to a structural steel base on
a spring type vibration isolators selected by project acoustical engineer.

Central air conditioning systems shall have high efficiency; high capacity bag type filters with
pre-filters.

Ventilation systems serving utility areas are to have disposable filters. Where disposable or
replaceable type filters are used, one set of spare filters is to be provided in addition to the new
filter being installed.

Fusible link fire dampers shall be provided where ductwork passes through fire rated
construction. The position of the fusible link must be visible to clearly show the position of the

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 167
damper. Access doors shall be provided immediately upstream or downstream of each smoke
and fire damper.

Public washrooms shall be provided with air conditioning in addition to exhaust. A minimum of
2cfm per square foot or 10.11 l/s/m2 shall be exhausted. An exhaust grille shall be provided for
each full height stall within public washrooms. High-rise hotels to be provided with toilet exhaust
rooftop fans (to shut down or limit speed during midday and night time).

A separate exhaust system for a paint booth shall be provided in the maintenance area.

3.2 Miscellaneous Operating Equipment

The following criteria shall apply to all circulating pumps:

- Motor driven, centrifugal type

- Large pumps are to be horizontally split case, double suction type
- Smaller pumps are to be vertically split case, end suction type
- All pumps to have shut off valves and strainers in the suction side and check valves
and throttling valves on the discharge side
- The design pressure for each pump must be at least equal to one and a half times their
working pressure
- Pumps must be installed on spring-isolated concrete inertia blocks, etc., to ensure that
noise and vibration are not be transmitted to the building structure
- Chilled water and condenser water pumps are to have factory mechanical seals
installed
- Each chiller is to have a minimum of one chilled water pump and one condenser water
pump and shall be piped to allow cross-use. Standby pump is suggested within the
design.
- Each boiler is to have one circular pump.
- Provide flexible couplings at suction and discharge pipe connections to all pumps.
- All pumps shall be mounted on inertia bases on vibration isolators.
- For pumps on floors on grade, neoprene mounts with a static deflection of 0.5” should
be initially selected.
- For pumps supported on floors above grade, steel spring isolators with 1” static
deflection should be initially selected.
- The project acoustical consultant shall verify all mounting conditions and advise the
design team on the appropriate mounting system on a case-by-case basis.

The following areas must be air conditioned when outside design criteria for summer is above
24° dry bulb and 18° C wet bulb:

- Kitchen to have a required temperature of 27° C dry bulb at 60%

- Bake shop, pastry shop, laundry and valet to have a required temperature of 27° C

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 168
 - Garde Manger, chocolate shop, butcher shop and beverage stores to have a required
temperature of 18° C
- Computer room to have a required temperature of 22°C
- Telephone equipment room to have a required temperature of 26° C.
- The VAV systems are to be designed using the following criteria:
- Maintain absolute minimum total system static
- Maintain minimum duct velocities in accordance with applicable codes industry
standards.

These services as per guidelines must be verified by the mechanical consultant:

- For the hotel bedroom and general offices – 1000 FPM; Boardrooms – 1200 FPM
- Meeting rooms, ballrooms and pre-function areas – 800 FPM; Restaurants – 1500
FPM; Spa and Fitness – 1200 FPM
- Unless otherwise advised by the project acoustical consultant, ducting layout should
avoid components such as mitred elbows, conventional and acoustical turning valves,
bullhead tees, etc. in order to ensure that noise is kept to a minimum.
- Ducting should avoid components such as mitred elbows, conventional and acoustical
turning valves, bullhead tees, etc in order to ensure that noise is kept to a minimum
- The air distribution ductwork must be sized on the basis of the Static Regain Method
(SRM)
- Pressure-independent low-pressure VAV regulators must be selected to serve each
occupied space
- Supply duct connection must be either galvanized metal or a maximum of five feet of
bonded aluminium flex with no more than a 45° bend. Flex ductwork shall be avoided
wherever possible
- Terminal ceiling diffusers or booted-plenum slots specifically designed for VAV air
distribution from the standpoint of minimum “dumping” action at reduced air volumes
and from the standpoint of sound levels at maximum cfm delivery is to be selected.
- Unless otherwise advised by the project acoustical consultant, there shall be no VAV
boxes located in the ceiling spaces or on the roof above any function room (ballrooms,
meeting rooms, boardrooms, etc.)

Quiet operating centrifugal fans are to be designed as follows:

- Rated in accordance with ASHRAE procedure.

- Class I, II or III as recommended by ASHRAE based upon both operating pressures
and maximum tip speed
- Blades continuously welded to hub and inlet rim are to be backward inclined from the
direction of the rotation for non-overloading power characteristic
- Bearings are to be precision anti-friction, pillow-block, either ball or roller type with an
average minimum life of 60,000 full load hours
- Vibration isolators are to be provided as per the guidelines from the project acoustical
consultant

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 169
 - With cabinet type air supply units, design and specify the fans to be Centrifugal non-
overloading silent type with double-inlet, multi-blades.
- Also, allow for maintenance access.

Steam coils are to be designed and specified to meet the following criteria:

- Coils to be of the steam distributing type, within a tube construction with heated return
headers
- Coils are to be provided with an outlet for complete drainage of condensation
- Where temperatures fall below freezing, preheat coils are to have a minimum of two
steam traps
- Each section of preheat coils is to have an individual control

Water-cooling and heating coils are to be designed and specified to meet the following criteria:

- Water heating and cooling coils are to be of the continuous tube type with vertical fins,
tested to 300 psi (21.1 kqf/cm2) pneumatic pressure and provided with positive methods
of draining and venting
- Electric heating coils are to have finned tubular heating elements and are to be
resistance wire cantered in copper plated steel tubes
- Direct expansion coils are to have fins copper bonded to the tubes by hydraulic
expansion of the tubes and tested to 300-psi (21.1 kqf/cm2) pneumatic pressure.

Electric motors are to be designed and specified to meet the following criteria:

- Motors and controls driving heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment are to
be supplied and installed by the Mechanical Contractor. The wiring for this equipment
is to be supplied and installed by the Electrical Contractor
- All motors are to be of the quiet operating type and preferably should be from one
manufacturer
- Exhaust fans for dishwashers are to be wired so that the fan only works when the
dishwasher is in operation
- Motor starters, motor control centres and related accessories shall be engineered and
installed to meet international recognized standards.
- Ducts are to be designed and specified to meet the following criteria:
- Kitchen range hood exhaust ducts are to be manufactured from 16 gauge black iron
and are to be provided with clean-outs at each bend, every 3.0 m feet horizontally and
every 6.0m vertically
- Dishwashers and laundry flat ironers are to be manufactured from stainless steel for a
minimum distance of 8 m from the equipment
- Horizontal ducts from dishwashers are to pitch toward the equipment at 2.5cm per 3m
- Swimming pool supply air ducts are to be manufactured from aluminium, while exhaust
ducts are to be manufactured from stainless steel
- Laundry dryer exhaust ducts are to be manufactured from galvanized steel with
watertight joints and the interiors are to be smooth and free from any intrusions

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 170
 - The inside of supply and return ducts and plenums in public areas are to be painted
matte black for any portion visible through the grille.

Sound levels due to air conditioning and ventilation equipment, pipes, ducts, etc are to be
designed to not exceed the following criteria:

- Boardrooms, meeting rooms: NC25~30 or RC25~30 (N)

- Ballrooms, executive offices, massage rooms: NC30~35 or RC30~35 (N)
- Public spaces, pre-function corridors, lobby lounge, main dining and general offices:
NC35~40 or RC35~40 (N)
- Guest rooms, suites and residential units: NC 30 (N) night time with FCU on low speed
- Staff cafeteria, swimming pool and health club: NC40~45 or RC40~45 (N)
- Kitchen and laundry: NC 50 or RC40.

Unless otherwise advised by the project acoustical consultant, neoprene or vinyl coated
fibreglass of 0.5kg density acoustic duct lining of at least 25 mm thickness is to be provided
and installed to the following areas:

- Discharge and intake ducts of every low-pressure handling unit for a minimum distance
of 4.6m
- Insulating materials shall be provided and installed to all piping, mechanical equipment,
ductwork, etc.
- Neoprene or vinyl coated fibreglass of 0.5kg density acoustic duct lining of at least
25mm thickness is to be provided and installed to the following areas:
- Discharge and intake ducts of every low-pressure handling unit for a minimum distance
of 4.6m
- Insulating materials shall be provided and installed to all piping, mechanical equipment,
ductwork, etc.

3.3 HVAC for the Guest Unit

Horizontal four-pipe fan coil units are required in the guestrooms and residential units for
heating, cooling and air distribution.

In tropical environments where heating is rarely required and energy consumption justifies, a
two-pipe system with electric reheat may be considered.

If vertical FCU’s are considered, the unit will need to be fully ducted sound dampening and air
supply location at the bulkhead over the entry.

For 4-pipe FCU’s, the system will directly control a 3-speed line-voltage fan motor with rating
of up to ½ HP. The system will also control two line-voltage valves that regulate the cold and
hot water flow. The system will provide automatic switchover from heating to cooling operation

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 171
at each room. Provision shall be made to prevent the system from switching repeatedly from
cooling to heating and back while attempting to maintain a constant target temperature.

The HVAC Control Strategies are as follows:

Humidity Control

- The system in the room shall have the option to be equipped with a humidity sensor
and logic capable of maintaining a set level of humidity through activation of the room
air conditioning unit on a pre-defined duty cycle.
- Both humidity control and refresh cycle will activate in unoccupied rooms only.

Fan Speed Control

- Fan speed shall be selected automatically by the system to match the heat gain/loss in
the room. Fixed-fan speed operation shall also be available to the guest.
- Fan coil unit selections shall be based on the fan operating a medium speed with NC
levels of 35 for daytime and low speed with NC levels of 30 for night time operation.
- The make-up air shall be humidity controlled in balance with the air-conditioned supply.

Energy Conservation / Guest Room Management System (GRMS)

- The system shall provide optimized energy conservation measures with minimum
inconvenience to the guest. At least four setback strategies shall be employed.
- The system shall obtain rented status automatically from the PMS. No manual data
entry shall be required by the hotel to update the room rented status.
- The system shall determine room occupancy specifics automatically. The system shall
keep the room status as occupied even while the guest is asleep.
- A night setback may be implemented to further reduce energy consumption while the
guest is asleep.
- The system will also implement set back strategies or cycle off FCU equipment based
on door and window switches that indicate an open condition for longer than a 2 minute
period (programmable). Switches will be applied to all active windows and doors. They
can be either wired or wireless.

The system may have the option of an “eco” option button or environmental awareness function
to allow the guest to activate a variety of hotel defined energy conservation and eco-friendly
practices. The “eco” button shall be available on the system thermostat or as a switch in the
room connected to the system.

The quantity of make-up air supply must be sufficient to offset the toilet exhaust while
maintaining the guestroom and / or residential units at negative pressure relative to the corridor.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 172
The corridors shall be positively pressurized relative to the guestroom and the guestroom shall
be slightly positive relative to the outdoors.

Outdoor air shall be supplied from the make-up air unit in the immediate vicinity of each fan
coil unit intake for delivery throughout the guest suite. Outdoor air shall also be supplied into
the enclosed corridors.

Linear supply air diffuser within the guestroom and / or residential units shall be located in the
room wall such that that the supply air stream is directed away from the bed. Supply air
diffusers shall be double deflection decorative grilles with no visible screws; finish specified by
interior designer. Return air grilles or slots shall be provided. Return air grilles shall have no
visible screws; finish to be specified by interior designer. The design must not be of a
commercial nature.

Unless otherwise advised by the project acoustical consultant, acoustic lining for a minimum
of 1.5m length shall be provided on the discharge ductwork of all fan coil units.

Access doors for each fan coil unit shall be coordinated with the interior designer. The unit is
to be located over the entry vestibule or in the closet.

The location of the unit must allow for adequate space to access and service filters, pans, drain
and water connections, valves and controls.

Valves and controls must be located directly over the pan. Provide galvanized condensate pan
under FCU with pan extension below chill water valves and controls.

FCU shall be provided with spring isolation system to be determined by the project acoustical
consultant.

Guestroom bathrooms shall be provided with one exhaust grille for the shower and one exhaust
grille for the toilet / water closet.

Guest toilet exhaust fans are to be designed to maintain negative pressure with respect to
adjacent rooms and positive pressure with respect to outside air.

Make up air for toilet rooms and other exhaust systems should be designed to be continuously
conditioned air and not filtrating outside air, or natural ventilation.

Toilet exhaust systems for each water closet shall exhaust 75cfm directly to the outdoors.

The system shall be capable of supporting multi-room suites, where the rooms are not
separated by a door, yet each room has its own FCU.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 173
3.4 Intelligent Thermostat for Guestrooms

The thermostat controlling the guestroom HVAC system shall be a multipurpose DDC
thermostat with the capability for expansion as part of a centrally controlled “intelligent
guestroom”. The intelligent thermostat shall be complete with a server and graphics package
to identify room temperature, FCU status, and any other options as applicable. This is
discussed further in the IT Section.

3.5 Corridor Air Conditioning and Pressurization

To restrict smoke migration in the event of fire, corridor airflow is to be positively pressurized
with airflow from the corridors into guestrooms.

Corridor extraction to the exteriors via fire fans and dedicated ducting is acceptable.

3.6 Public Areas Cooling and Heating

Public spaces, including large volume living rooms, shall be ventilated and air-conditioned by
means of individual air handling units. Conditioning of multiple rooms or zones from a common
AHU should be equipped with zone dampers and variable fan speed controls. The heating and
cooling system for public areas shall be connected to the building automation system to allow
the units to switch to an energy conservation mode based on occupancy and demand. Low-
pressure air handling equipment, ducted air distribution systems and linear diffusers should be
used. Perforated false ceilings with a pressurized plenum above are not accepted.

The amount of outside air ventilation shall be demand-controlled based on indoor air quality
and CO2. Where return air is used, an economizer system with outside exhaust and return air
dampers for free cooling shall be provided.

Centrifugal blower type heaters are to be used at entrances, where applicable.

Propeller type heaters are to be used at loading docks and equipment rooms, where applicable.

Base radiators and convectors are to be designed for full height windows in cold weather
environments. Heating units in unconditioned spaces are to be designed to handle the entire
heating load, while in conditioned spaces they are sized to operate in conjunction with the air
conditioning system. Hot water is preferred as a source of heat.

The project consultant is to confirm final capacities and equipment selection once lighting
design and interior design is complete.

All public areas shall have tamper-proof temperature sensors placed discreetly in the each
zone. The operator from the BMS monitor system shall define all set points.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 174
3.7 Spa HVAC

The Spa will be conditioned with a centralized VAV air handling system.

Each treatment room will be on its own zone. The private lounges will also be on their own
zone control. Individual design requirements shall apply for heating, cooling, ventilation and
humidity control for all unique conditions, i.e., wet treatment, sauna, steam, inhalation and
relaxation rooms.

The cooling load from the exercise area is to be calculated on a basis of the room being fully
occupied with guests doing a vigorous workout.

3.8 Kitchen HVAC

Kitchens shall have a dedicated make-up air system complete with cooling to maintain the
desired space temperature. Kitchen areas shall be maintained under a negative pressure to
ensure there is no migration to adjacent areas.

Only conditioned outside air shall be supplied at a rate not to exceed 90% of the exhaust air
rate. Supply air should be provided to the space by means of grilles or linear diffusers on the
side opposite the exhaust hoods. Total airflow depends on input from the food service
consultant for heat gain and exhaust loads.

The kitchen consultant shall provide the design for the stainless steel exhaust hoods. All
exhaust hoods; ducts and ventilation systems shall meet NFPA requirements. The consultant
shall determine special requirements for grease filters, extractors and UV oxidation lamps, as
required. Where exhaust discharge above the roof is not feasible or where odours are a
nuisance, a kitchen ecology unit shall be provided with a high efficiency filter systems and
grease/odour reducing module. Spot cooling shall be provided for hot cooking areas as
required.

A separate, stainless steel exhaust system shall be provided for the dishwashers.

The project consultant will prepare a cost / benefit analysis for the addition of UV hoods to
minimize grease accumulation, reduce odours, fire hazards and to lower the operational costs
for periodic cleaning of the duct and ecology unit grease filters.

3.9 Underground Parking / Loading Dock

Underground parking areas shall be ventilated in accordance with the requirements of the
International Building Code.

Exhaust fans will be located such that the arrangement shall provide cross ventilation to the
entire area. Carbon monoxide and nitrogen dioxide concentration monitoring systems shall

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 175
initiate exhaust fan operations in the garage to maintain the CO and N2O levels within
acceptable limits.

If free air movement to remove car exhaust gases is not guaranteed at the Loading Dock then
a separate air system controlled by a carbon monoxide control system must be provided.

3.10 Mechanical and Service Areas

The boiler room shall be supplied with a sufficient amount of outdoor air to maintain proper
combustion and set point temperature. Transformer and switchgear rooms shall be adequately
ventilated to maintain a maximum temperature of 30ºC.

Elevator machine rooms shall be air conditioned as required to maintain a maximum

temperature of 30ºC

If air cooled condensers are used for refrigeration, the room shall have a sufficient amount of
air supply and exhaust air movement to dissipate the heat emitted by machinery. Air-cooled
condensers should be installed outside the building in a location that does not impact the guest.

3.11 Laundry

The laundry consultant shall provide requirements for cooling and ventilation. Single zone air
handling unit for heating and cooling is acceptable. Separate exhaust ducts must be provided
for washers, dryers and ironer. Tumbler exhausts shall be equipped with efficient lint filters.

Careful review of termination location is required to avoid unfavourable effects to guests and
equipment. Untreated make-up air may be used for dryers.

In cold climates provide a booster coil to heat the make-up air. Spot cooling in valet and ironer
may be required.

A separate air compressor is to be designed and installed for the laundry and valet.

3.12 Building Management System (BMS)

The primary function of the building management system is to allow the operator to overview
and interface to the entire system including:

- Performing energy management functions

- Printing (immediate) and recording of alarms and reports
- Visualization of all installation
- Changing set points based on project, client or location requirements

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 176
 - Maintaining historical trend data
- The areas to control as a minimum are as follows:
- Guestroom HVAC system / intelligent room system (refer to section above for specifics)
- Chiller and boiler plants
- Air handling units
- Pumping systems
- Critical mechanical systems based on the consultant’s recommendations
- Electrical equipment

The system shall include:

- Distributed data gathering panels located in mechanical room

- Third party integration devices for connection to manufacturers control panels,
- Application specific controllers coupled with a building management server, graphics
packages, printer and web.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 177
Section K: Plumbing Systems
1. General Requirements

The entire plumbing system and its associated equipment shall conform to the latest edition of
the International Plumbing Code (IPC) and Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC). Where more than
one law applies, the most stringent shall govern. The plumbing design shall focus on efficiency,
quality and reliability. Refer to the previous sections for area specific plumbing requirements.

1.1 Hot Water Supply and Treatment

The water supply, including storage tanks where necessary, must be adequate for both the
daily total water requirements and the instantaneous peaks. Minimum water storage shall be
two (2) days. Fire water supply requirements are to be included when sizing the water storage
tanks.

The consultant shall confirm final treatment system process and equipment requirements after
review of water analysis from a recognized, specialist laboratory.

If water treatment is required, the design of the system will be based on reliability, service and
quality. Current technology may include one or more of the following systems; chlorination,
high efficiency sand and/or carbon filtration, ozone, reverse osmosis, demineralization,
softening.

Depending on the local conditions and the water analysis results, water softening may be
required for the laundry steam boiler make up system, and the laundry and kitchen domestic
hot water system.

1.2 Domestic Cold Water Distribution

Cold water is distributed via a riser system throughout the building to all fixtures, equipment
connections and valve outlets. Water to all domestic fixtures shall be potable.

Water pressure supply to all fixtures shall be between 30 psig (207 kPag) and 80 psig (550
kPag). Pressure reducing stations shall be provided to maintain a maximum of 80 psig (550
kPag). Where special fixtures and or equipment require higher or lower pressure, the system
is to be modified to accommodate those pressures.

Automatic pressure booster pump sets shall be provided for the building domestic water
supply, for the softened domestic water supply, and for the residential units, as required.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 178
Dedicated isolation valves shall be provided within each hotel and residential unit. The location
of access doors shall be coordinated with the ID drawings.

Pressure balancing mixing valves shall be provided for showers.

Thermostatic valves are not recommended.

1.3 Domestic Hot Water Distribution

Hot Water supply shall be delivered at 49 C throughout the property, with provision for 72 C at
the laundry and 60 C at the kitchens. The kitchen domestic hot water to dishwashers shall be
boosted to 82 C at the dishwasher with a booster heater.

Separate storage tanks shall be provided for domestic hot water for the Main Building, Kitchen
and Laundry. Tank storage will include a redundancy to ensure no downtime in the event of
tank failure.

The laundry consultant will evaluate if a separate hot water booster is preferred over a separate
storage tank for laundry equipment.

Dedicated isolation valves for domestic hot water and domestic hot water re-circulation shall
be provided on the risers and at each guestroom unit.

1.4 Storm Water Disposal

Storm water disposal involves collecting the water from all roof and foundation drains to avoid
accumulation of water above and below grade.

Any storm water drainage that is collected from the building that cannot flow by gravity will flow
into a sump and be pumped into the drain leaving the building.

The use of pumps for disposal of storm water collected on the site is undesirable. The site shall
be designed to drain into catch basins and though storm pipes into the storm or sanitary system
as designed by the consultant and approved by the local authority having jurisdiction.

Reasonable water conservation measures will be incorporated into the design of the project,
i.e., storm water catchments and retention for irrigation.

1.5 Sanitary Waste Disposal

Typically all sanitary drainage will be discharged to municipal services for treatment off site. If
sewage treatment is required, the civil engineer and professional consultants specializing in

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 179
waste treatment shall design a system of secondary treatment, i.e., a bio disk or an extended
aeration/activated sludge plant.

The sanitary system for the buildings within the project shall be provided with a complete vent
system such that each plumbing fixture and group of floor drains is vented separately from the
soil pipe.

Water conservation and recycling is desirable. A cost benefit analysis for grey water reuse
should be evaluated for the project.

1.6 Swimming Pool Circulation and Filtration

Consultants specializing in pool, water features and spa water systems will design the specific
filtration system, pumps and water treatment applicable to each system. To ensure the highest
level of health and safety, the most stringent standards from the local health officials, building
department and international codes shall apply.

The mechanical contractor will provide the heat exchangers, connected to the boiler plant, for
heating the swimming pools and whirlpools.

Whirlpools will have their separate filtration and circulating pump systems.

1.7 Gas Distribution

Gas, when available, is provided to the kitchen and pantries. Where economically feasible, gas
may be used for space heating, refrigeration, hot water heating, and laundry equipment. The
gas supply is either from public distribution mains or from bulk storage facilities. Bulk storage
facilities must be sized to ensure a reliable and constant source. The bulk storage facilities
shall be located away from the building on grade and in their own safe enclosure with adequate
access for service. Storage capacity for 4 days use is required.

1.8 Diesel Fuel Storage

Diesel fuel, when available, is provided to the boilers and emergency generator. The fuel
supply is either from public distribution mains or from bulk storage facilities. Bulk storage
facilities must be sized to ensure a reliable and constant source. The bulk storage facilities
shall be located away from the building on grade and in their own safe enclosure with adequate
access for service Storage capacity for 24 hours on full load is required.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 180
1.9 Special Systems

For the kitchen areas, each commercial kitchen shall be provided with grease interceptors to
prevent grease from entering the building sanitary system. Connect dishwasher, floor sink and
any other fixture or drain that conveys grease-laden effluent to localized grease traps or a
central grease interceptor. The economics of traps versus interceptors will be evaluated and
presented to the owner/stakeholders for their consideration.

For the laundry areas, the equipment shall be provided with mechanical services such as
vacuum, compressed air, domestic hot and cold water, chilled water, etc. at the capacity
required by the equipment manufacturer and laundry consultant. Compressed air shall be
provided for the Valet area equipment.

1.10 Fire Protection, Sprinklers and Standpipes

Refer to Section L: Fire Protection and Life Safety Systems.

1.11 Water Meters

Flow meters and check valves are to be installed on the following services:

- Main incoming water supply

- Kitchen hot and cold water supply
- Laundry hot and cold water supply
- Domestic hot and cold water supply
- Cooling towers
- Irrigation
- Pool water make-up

1.12 Insulation

All piping subject to freezing is to be insulated and if necessary, provided with electric heating
cables/tracing. All water piping, fittings, valves and metal tanks not buried are to be insulated
with a minimum of 25mm of fibreglass insulation.

1.13 Noise Control Guidelines

For plumbing systems serving guest areas that have defined noise criteria, the following
requirements should be observed:

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 181
 - Water velocity should not exceed 2 meters per second, and pipe sizes should be
adjusted for this maximum velocity.
- Waste and water supply lines should not be installed in any walls enclosing the
Boardroom, Meeting Rooms, and the Ballrooms.
- Vertical drainpipes should not be installed within interior or on the exterior walls of the
Boardroom, Meeting Rooms, and the Ballrooms.
- The number of pipe transitions (tees, elbows, Y connections, etc.) should be kept to a
minimum.
- Regulators should be installed as required to ensure that the water pressure is no
greater than 50 pounds per square inch (344,000 Pa) in the main water supply lines.
- Water-hammer arresters should be placed close to quick-acting valves and should be
installed at the end of plumbing lines over 10 m long.
- Plumbing penetrations on opposite sides of any sound-rated partition assembly should
be separated by a minimum distance of 400mm.
- Select plumbing valves of the ball-type that exhibit minimum noise when in use.
- Select showerheads for a maximum fluid flow of 13 litres per minute.
- Select faucets and taps with fully ported nozzles and equipped with aeration or anti-
splash devices.
- Waste piping and water supply piping shall be isolated from the building at points of
contact with resilient sleeves, vibration isolators, or a minimum of 6.4mm of resilient
material such as soft neoprene, rubber, felt padding, etc.

2. Plumbing fixture minimum requirements.

For public areas and guestrooms, the preferred manufacturers include, but are not limited to
Kohler, Villeroy & Boch, and Toto. These specific manufacturers are identified to establish a
standard for quality and pricing. Other manufacturers / models may be used provided they are
equal in quality as those listed above. Refer to the other related sections for area specific
requirements.

2.1 Public Areas

The faucet is to be automatic with 0.5 GPM flow sensors. Toilets for public washrooms shall
be automatic flush wall-mounted with 1.28 GPM with an option for 1.28 GPM sensor flush-o-
meters as applicable.

Urinals shall have 0.5 GPM with 0.5 GPM sensor valves.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 182
2.2 Guestrooms

Provide hand towel bars, and related hardware. The toilet (located in a water closet) shall be
one-piece elongated wall hung bowl toilet where applicable with water saving flush controls
(dual flush, low flow) where the flush type and water usage is determined by the project
parameters.

The bathtubs are to be deep steeping tubs made of cast iron at a minimum of 1.7 length m x
0.90 m wide with drain pipes. Wall mounted hand shower to be provided. Chrome soap and
sponge basket are to be provided. Provide a 46cm long grab handle per ADA code
requirements.

If a jetted tub is proposed, only air-jetted tubs are allowed for sanitary reasons. No internal
pipes are to be specified. Sanijet is considered a preferred vendor; provide product
specifications for approval if alternate tub are considered. These tubs may be acrylic with a
textured bottom to prevent slipping. Acrylic material is to have continuous colour throughout.

A separate shower stall is to be fitted with pressure balancing valve body, Kohler (Rite-Temp)
pressure balancing valve or equal. Shower trim is to be coordinated with the faucet fixtures.
Shower pan and curb to be designed to prevent overflow onto bathroom floor. Shower floor
sloped from the door to floor drain in the opposite corner. Drain is to be located off centre,
under the showerhead, or at the rear of the shower with linear design and not conventional
round drain covers.

Shower stall to be frameless clear safety glass with a 0.60 m wide x 2 cm thick frameless glass
door with a towel rack and handle.

Polished stainless steel frame to be used at perimeter of shower glazing only. Provide a wall
mounted fixed shower. An overhead rain shower and a hand showerhead are required. Provide
a soap basket and grab bars (per ADA code requirements) and towel bars.

2.3 Staff Areas

In the staff locker rooms, premium fixtures and accessories are preferred to reduce long-term
maintenance requirements. The architect shall make an attempt to use the same brand as in
the public area for ease of maintenance

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 183
Section L: Electrical Systems
1 General Requirements

Work shall be completed in accordance with all applicable local and regional building codes,
as well as the following internationally recognized codes: NFPA National Electrical Code,
NFPA Fire Alarm Code and NFPA Life Safety Code.

Care shall be taken to avoid noise, fumes, emissions, and vibrations from any electrical space
to any public, guestroom or residential unit areas. All equipment shall be properly ventilated to
compensate for ambient heat, humidity, or similar conditions that may affect operations.

Where applicable, specify Low Energy appliances as applicable for guest use areas or
residential style amenities.

Refer to the previous sections for area specific electrical requirements.

1.1 Power Supply and Distribution

The main distribution system using at least two transformers, secondary and/or primary tie or
transfer switches, standby cable or equivalent, is to be designed and specified to prevent total
loss of power in the event of maintenance or a failure of any single piece of equipment, bus or
cable in the primary and main secondary distribution. Panel boards are to be designed and
specified to meet the following general criteria:

- Branch circuit panels are to have a minimum of 20% spare or bussed spaces
- Power and distribution panels are to have a minimum of 15% spare or bussed spaces
- Main switchboard is to have a minimum of 10% spare or bussed space
- In order to eliminate adverse effects from electric systems operating at low power
factor, automatic power factor correction equipment is to be designed and specified in
such a way that it increases the power factor to the desired value of 0.95
- All wires and cables for power, control and lighting distribution, telephone and low
voltage system are to be run in electrical metal conduit or uPVC tubing, appropriately
rated for the intended use and per the applicable electrical codes. All cabling and
bussing shall be copper. Aluminium is not permitted.
- Voltage drop shall not be more than 5% from the transformers to the final distribution
point except where approved by local codes.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 184
1.2 Emergency Generator

An analysis of the reliability of the normal power supply is required in order to determine the
extent of standby power. The generators shall be housed in an acoustically treated room or
enclosure. The standby power plant shall be located as close to the Main Electrical Room as
possible and shall be designed to minimize air and noise pollution to guest occupancy areas.

On-site fuel/oil storage for the emergency generator shall be sized for continuous, full load
operation based on the reliability of the normal power supply.

A minimum of twenty-four (24) hours of fuel storage will be provided.

Emergency lighting shall be integrated with the dimming system such that 20% of the light
fixtures go to full intensity on power failure and will include the following areas:

- Front Desk and Lobby

- Telephone operator’s room
- Cashiers Office
- Heightened risk work areas; mechanical and electrical rooms, kitchens, laundry
- Security Office
- Fire control room/ CCTV monitoring Room
- Public restrooms
- Ballroom and pre-function
- Meeting rooms
- Spa and Fitness

A standby emergency generator and power distribution system is to be designed and specified
for the following:

- Fire alarm system including voice communication

- Fire pumps, jockey pump, fire protection and life safety equipment
- Emergency egress lighting and exiting signage at stairs and corridors
- Automatic transfer equipment to bring all elevators to the main lobby level, each one at
a time, while at the same time keeping the fireman’s elevator continually operational
- Telephone, communication and paging systems, security systems, including CCTV
- Freezers, refrigerators and circulation pumps for refrigeration cooling; selected
receptacles and appliances in the kitchen
- All computer equipment and computer room HVAC equipment
- HVAC equipment used for smoke control, stairwell and elevator shaft pressurization
- Uninterrupted power supply
- Selected receptacles in the emergency generator and switchgear rooms
- Oil heaters for chillers
- Flood, sump and sewage pumps
- Domestic water supply pump

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 185
 - Gas booster pump
- Automatic door and roof warning lights
- Guestrooms and Corridors

1.3 Lighting and Dimming

All public area lighting is to be designed by a specialized lighting consultant. Lighting design
shall be based on quality, energy efficiency, and sustainable design practices and aesthetics.

The following public area FF&E fixtures are designed and selected by the interior designer and
lighting consultant:

- Chandeliers
- Hanging decorative fixtures
- Wall sconces
- Floor and table lamps
- Fixtures contained in items of furniture

Public area lighting shall be controlled by an approved dimming system. The design shall
incorporate the latest technology to automatically turn lights off in areas when not needed.

Dimming equipment is to be the latest Lutron panel system or equivalent - and shall be
designed and specified by the lighting consultant.

The main dimmer rack is to contain a phase-to-phase coil magnetically held, multiple, double-
throw transfer relay to automatically transfer at least one general lighting circuit in each room
to an external emergency supply in the event of a power failure to the dimmer.

Selector switches are to be provided in each ballroom, meeting room console to allow control
of general lighting from individual room stations.

Restaurants, entertainment areas, bars, main lobby, foyers and corridors are to have pre-sets
for breakfast, lunch, dinner and housekeeping at a minimum, working to the lunar clock’s
timings. Activation of these pre-sets shall be connected to the building automation system.

Ballrooms, pre-function areas, foyers, and meeting rooms are to have individual controls for
each subdivision with one central master multi-lighting control panel. Each circuit shall have a
minimum of 3 light levels and dimming.

Lighting systems shall be designed to meet the following minimum foot-candles criteria (lumens
per square feet / lumens per square meter):

- Main Lobby 35 (376)

- Concierge and Front Desk 50 (538)
- Executive, Administration Offices 60 (645)

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 186
 - BOH offices (at desk level) 60 (645)
- Ballrooms and Meeting Rooms 50 (538)
- Ballroom Foyers 35 (376)
- Assembly and Circulation 25 (269)
- Food and Beverage Outlets 20 (215)
- Kitchens 50 (538)
- Spa 20 (215)
- Health Club 30 (322)
- Fitness Areas 30 (322)
- Locker Rooms 20 (215)
- Elevator foyer and guest corridors 10-20 (108–215)
- Guest Door Foyers 10-20 (108–215)
- Laundry Valet and Housekeeping (ambient) 50 (538)
- Laundry Valet (task) 100 (1075)
- Maintenance Areas 50 (538) (With 75 (810) on all work surfaces)
- Mechanical and electrical equipment areas 20 (215) (With 75 (810) task lighting at
panels and switchboards)
- Garages 30 (322)
- Employee Lockers and Staff Facilities 30 (322)

Public area fixtures and bulbs shall be selected for dimming and three-way control as required
by the Interior Designer.

In back-of-house areas, the use of energy LED’s we encouraged.

In mechanical rooms, or LED light fixture is to be mounted at each motor control centre and is
to be on emergency power system.

The emergency lighting system can be either part of the regular lighting system or entirely
separate. In all cases, the installation must comply with applicable local codes and regulations.

Light fixtures with battery lighting unit or on emergency supply shall have LED indicator and a
test switch for routine maintenance check.

Outdoor parking, landscaping and gardens and street lighting are to be evaluated in terms of
code, local ordinances and maximum energy efficiency. Exterior weatherproof switches and
receptacles are to be either galvanized steel, stainless steel or uPVC.

1.4 Emergency Lighting

The Emergency Lighting system should be a centralised battery system and should provide a
minimum of 60 minutes of illumination in the event of a power outage.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 187
1.4 Exterior Landscape Lighting Requirements

All landscape lighting specifications shall be completed with the most energy efficient type of
lamp available such as a 24,000-hour mercury vapour high intensity discharge or 50,000-hour
light-emitting diode (LED).

The longevity of these line voltage lamps will keep maintenance costs to a minimum and, at
the same time, produce the most lumens-per-watt available.

1.5 Lightning Protection

The consultant is to perform an analysis of the lightning risks in the geographical area to identify
the extent of lightning protection for the buildings. The system will be designed by the electrical
consultant and is subject to the approval of the architect and local jurisdiction.

The hotel shall be provided with lightning protection in keeping with NFPA design and shall
include air terminals, copper grid cabling on the roofs and grounding conductors routed to the
lowest level of the building.

All lightning fixture enclosures must be fixed to an un-interruptible, continuous grounding circuit
with direct connection to a sub-surface grounding mat.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 188
Section M: Fire Protection and Life Safety Systems
1. General information

The design of the Fire Protection and Life Safety systems shall generally be based on NFPA,
however, it is recognized that local authorities having jurisdiction may have amendments that
supersede NFPA. Follow governing laws, codes and regulations or NFPA, whichever is more
stringent. Design and installation of fire protection and detection shall conform to the latest
applicable editions of the National Fire codes published by NFPA. The following systems are
to be provided based on the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) requirements:

- Sprinkler Systems and Standpipe System

- Smoke detectors
- Fire Alarm and Integrated Emergency Voice Communication System (EVC)
- Central Alarm and Control Facility (CACF)
- Smoke Control and Smoke Venting in High Rise Buildings

For all projects, consult with the local authority to confirm acceptance of NFPA Standards as
the basis of design.

Any reduction or deviation from NFPA and FHR Standards requires a life safety study and
compliance report by a certified code consultant. The MH&R team shall approve any variation
of these guidelines. Prior to installation of systems, submit the following for review and approval
to the Fire Life Safety Code consultant and MH&R:

- Fire alarm system diagrams, shop drawings and equipment product sheets
- Exiting and occupant load diagrams
- Automatic sprinkler system shop drawings, hydraulic calculations and equipment
product sheets.
- The Sprinkler Contractor shall be a licensed automatic sprinkler contractor.

Before the hotel can be opened to the public, the Fire Protection and Life Safety systems shall
be completed and operational. The systems must be tested under simulated emergency
conditions in the presence of the local fire authority; the Owner’s Representative, and MH&R
or its nominated representative.

Each hotel must have a current fire certificate and operating license issued by the responsible
authority before the hotel is opened.

Refer to other sections in the Standards for specific requirements, i.e., Mechanical, Electrical,
Kitchen Equipment, etc. Advise MH&R in writing of apparent conflicts or items requiring
clarification.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 189
1.1 Automatic Sprinkler System

All enclosed areas of the building(s) must have sprinklers installed unless excluded by local
code requirements (e.g. transformer rooms). All sprinkler head locations in Guestrooms and
Public Areas are to be fully coordinated with the interior design.

It is imperative that concealed sprinkler heads be used in public areas. In front-of-house

locations with acoustical tiles, position heads in centre of tiles. Sprinkler zoning is to be limited
to a single floor or partial floor, depending on the size of the zone.

Provide fire pump, jockey pump, supervised valves, flow switches, fire department connection,
etc. and integration with the fire alarm system to provide a NFPA hydraulically designed
combination wet pipe sprinkler and standpipe system throughout the development. Confirm
exact standpipe and fire hose requirements with local authorities.

Fire protection design must be reviewed with MH&R and the Owner’s insurance underwriters.

The jockey and the fire pump should be connected to the emergency generator in case of loss
of power, in addition a diesel-powered fire pump should be provided in case of power cut or
loss of generator power.

1.2 Miscellaneous Fire Suppression Systems

In the Computer and PBX Room, provide dry-pipe pre-action sprinkler or FM-200 (or
equivalent). For all kitchen hoods, provide a NFPA approved fire suppression system integral
with hood. Walk in Coolers and Freezers should be protected with dry pendent quick head
response rated at 57ºC.

Provide dry pipe sprinklers in attic and unheated areas where subject to freezing. Wet sprinkler
piping covered with attic insulation or heat tape is not considered freeze protected. Do not
protect guestrooms, corridors, public areas or occupied staff areas with a dry system.

1.3 Fire Alarm System

Provide a state-of-the-art, addressable, two-stage, integrated emergency voice communication

and fire alarm system based on NFPA requirements. Provide integrated EVC paging and fire
alarm controls at the CACF with an additional mimic control in a location, which is manned 24
(twenty-four) hours a day. Review the extent of the EVC based on high-rise requirements, size
of development and local authorities. Do not combine EVC and background music systems
due to limitations in zoning and concern over non-UL listed amplifiers and components in the
music system.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 190
Provide smoke detectors and pull station requirements to meet NFPA. Review the extent of
the smoke detector coverage and pull station locations with the local authorities having
jurisdiction.

The guestroom smoke detector shall have an integral audible alarm with central annunciation.
No other functions are initiated unless an additional device (smoke detector, sprinkler, pull
station) is activated.

The two-stage sequence of operation will be dependent on whether the building is a high-rise
tower or low-rise resort, and is to be reviewed with local authorities having jurisdiction.

Review the extent and location of fire fighter’s handsets or jacks with local authorities.

A “Cause & Effect” Matrix for the Fire Alarm System must be provided by the contractor, verified
by the consultant and tested during the simulated evacuation prior to opening

1.4 Smoke Control and Smoke Exhaust

It is anticipated that smoke control and smoke venting will be provided in high-rise buildings
and is some low-rise applications. Provisions will be dependent on local codes, but may
include:

- Pressurization fans for stair shafts and/or elevator shafts (or lobbies)
- Smoke extract fans
- Base building return fans used for smoke exhaust or venting, fed from emergency
power
- Individual switches and L.E.D. indicating lights at CACF for fans, dampers, etc.
- Fire protected conductors for life safety equipment

Prior to testing smoke control systems, HVAC systems shall be contractor tested and balanced.

Public areas, atriums, guestroom corridor smoke exhaust, and stairwell pressurization systems
shall be operational and tested to clear “cold smoke” so that exit signs are visible within 5 (five)
minutes of activation.

1.5 ADA Visual Indicating Devices

Review the extent and location of fire alarm strobes. Coordinate the colour of the faceplate with
the interior designer.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 191
1.6 Standby Power, Emergency Power and Lighting

Diesel generator shall be operational and tested to automatically activate upon loss of normal
incoming power and to provide standby and emergency service to operate emergency lighting,
exit lighting and specified systems, including fire alarm and voice communication, fire
protection equipment, elevator for use by fire-fighters, smoke control and life safety systems.
Refer to Section H - Electrical Systems for more information.

1.7 Evacuation Signage

Provide code compliant signage in accordance with local authority and NFPA requirements
including elevator lobbies, guestrooms, self-contained illuminated exit signs and fire equipment
cabinets in accordance with the fire evacuation plan.

1.8 Portable Fire Fighting Equipment

Portable type multi-purpose fire extinguishers are to be installed in recessed cabinets in public
areas and wall hung in back-of-house area per local code requirements. Special hazard areas
will require special hazard type fire extinguishers. Fire blankets should be provided in
designated areas in the kitchen and mechanical rooms.

1.9 Carbon Monoxide Detectors

Install CO detectors with sounders connected to the Fire Alarm Control Panel in rooms under
car parks and areas containing fuel burning appliances and equipment, including gas and wood
burning fireplaces.

1.10 Fire Command Station

The fire command stations are part of the annunciation panel. Their location must be
determined in accordance with the local authority and the design of the hotel but are generally
located near the main entrance and/or an area which is manned 24 hours a day. Depending
on the location, repeater panels may be installed in the engineering, security &/or front office
areas.

Provide point address at annunciation panel to indicate floor, room name &/or number, device
and type of alarm for all fire alarm actuating devices, including manual pull stations, duct smoke
detectors, smoke detectors, heat detectors, tamper switches, fire riser and fire sprinkler water
flow detectors.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 192
1.11 Supervisory Devices

Tamper switches are installed on all sprinkler standpipe and fire standpipe system valves.
Activation of these devices, caused by closing a valve, will create a visual trouble indication
signal at the annunciation panel.

Removal of an actuating device such as a smoke detector will cause the same result. The main
annunciation panel and all repeater panels will contain all alarm zone and trouble indicators
and each will be clearly identified.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 193
Section N: Mechanical; HVAC; Fire, Life & Safety
and Electrical Checklists
1. Mechanical Plumbing and Fire Protection Checklists

DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO

1. MECHANICAL
1.1. General Overview
1.1.1. Do the design criteria meet Brand and Design and Construction
Standards and current applicable ASHRAE?
1.1.2. Do the outdoor design dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures meet or exceed
the greater of the ASHRAE fundamentals handbook or local climactic
data?
1.1.3. Have all public spaces been based on current and applicable ASHRAE
occupancy rates for load calculation purposes? (The furniture layout shall
not be used to establish occupancy as it may change).
1.1.4. Are the lighting and equipment loads consistent with the interior
designer/lighting consultant drawings?
1.1.5. Do the noise criteria meet with Design & Construction Standards?
1.2. Air Handling Systems/ Air Conditioning Systems
General
1.2.1. Have all areas except mechanical plant rooms been air-conditioned?
1.2.2. Are air-handling units located relatively close to the areas they serve?
1.2.3. Is the air handing unit casing construction not less than No. 18 gauge hot
rolled sheet steel?
1.2.4. Have return fans been provided to allow for free cooling and appropriate
pressurization?
1.2.5. Are the air-handling units equipped with economizers, so that free cooling
may be utilized? (Providing the local climate warrants).
1.2.6. Have silencers been provided for supply and return ductwork to all air-
handling units?
1.2.7. When the ceiling is used as a return air plenum, have the return ductwork
been extended to within 150 ft of the furthest return air grille?
1.2.8. Have stack effect issues in high-rise projects been addressed
appropriately?
1.2.9. Have mechanical devices such as VAV boxes, drainage cleanouts and
isolation valves been provided with access, which have been carefully
coordinated with the interior designer?
1.2.10. Has adequate maintenance access been provided for air handling unit
servicing?
1.2.11. In humid climates, has dehumidification been provided?

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 194
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
1.2.12. Have the cooling load calculations been performed for each room? Are
adequate and reasonable air quantities provided?
1.2.13. Does each air-handling unit have high efficiency filters and pre-filters?
Public Areas
1.2.14. Do the ballroom, prefunction and banquet rooms each have independent
systems? Has zoning to suit moveable partitions been provided?
1.2.15. Do the ballroom, prefunction or banquet room areas have dedicated
zones?
1.2.16. Have meeting rooms greater than 650 ft2 (60 m2) been treated as a place
of assembly in lieu of standard meeting rooms?
1.2.17. Does each restaurant have a dedicated constant volume system?
1.2.18. Are there any private dining areas within the restaurant?
1.2.19. If yes, have measures been provided for independent temperature
control?
1.2.20. Does the lobby have a dedicated VAV system?
1.2.21. In cold climates, has the main entrance vestibule been provided with
heating?
1.2.22. Does the bar have its own zone controls?
1.2.23. Are administration offices provided with a VAV system?
1.2.24. Has a VAV system been provided for each meeting room?
1.2.25. Does the health club and spa have a dedicated VAV system?
1.2.26. Has special attention been given to health club and exercise equipment
loads and carefully reviewed with the interior designer? (See Note # 3 for
preliminary lighting and power load estimates)
1.2.27. Has individual temperature control been provided for areas, which may
have a varying usage profile or exposure?
1.2.28. Have the thermostats locations been approved by the interior designer?
1.2.29. Have all the public washrooms been provided with air conditioning in
addition to exhaust?
1.2.30. Has an exhaust grille been provided for each full-height toilet stall in the
public washrooms?
1.2.31. Has the indoor swimming pool been provided with a dedicated system
complete with dehumidification?
1.2.32. Is the indoor swimming pool ductwork constructed of aluminium?
1.2.33. Has a cut sheet of the thermostat and/or sensor cover been reviewed by
Brand / Design and Construction consultants and the Interior Designer?
And approved by them? Has the Interior Designer signed off on
thermostat locations for public spaces?
1.2.34. Have linear diffusers in public space areas been coordinated with the
interior designer?
Heart of House Areas
1.2.35. Have individual temperature controls been provided for areas that may
have varying usage profiles or exposures?

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 195
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
1.2.36. Does the banquet kitchen have a dedicated make-up air system?
1.2.37. Do the kitchen exhaust hoods have dedicated make-up air system?
1.2.38. Do the back-of-house areas have dedicated VAV systems?
1.2.39. Has spot cooling been provided for hot spot areas i.e. laundry area,
chef’s office and valet?
1.2.40. Does the computer room have an independent air conditioning unit?
1.2.41. Is the computer room unit on emergency power?
1.2.42. Has a dedicated/independent air conditioning unit on emergency power
been provided for the PABX room?
1.2.43. Is the garbage room refrigerated?
1.2.44. Is the bakery / chocolate room refrigerated?
1.2.45. Has the grease room been provided with a separate exhaust system?
1.2.46. Is a paint booth required? Has it been provided with a separate exhaust
system?
1.3. Hot Water Plant
1.3.1. What is the redundancy factor for the hot water boilers?
1.3.2. When sizing the boilers, has only a partial credit been taken for all air-to-
air heat re-claim systems (if applicable)?
1.3.3. Have the internal gains from lighting, power and people used to reduce
the size of the boiler plant? (They should not be).
1.3.4. Is there one hot water pump for each boiler?
1.3.5. Is primary/secondary pumping being utilized?
1.3.6. Have energy-conserving features such as variable speed pumping been
utilized?
1.4. Refrigeration Plant
1.4.1. What are the chiller redundancy factors?
1.4.2. Does each chiller have a condenser water pump?
1.4.3. Is the location of the source of condenser water, i.e. cooling tower, dry
coolers etc. located so that the noise generated by this equipment will not
be objectionable to the occupants of the hotel?
1.4.4. Is the refrigerant environmentally friendly?, (i.e. R-134a or R-123)
1.4.5. Has hydronic winter free cooling, utilizing a winterized cooling tower, been
provided to avoid operating the chiller during the winter months? (Note
that this applies to climates with cooler winters).
1.4.6. Have refrigerant leak detectors and a leak evacuation/exhaust system
been provided for in the chiller room?
1.4.7. Have dedicated pumping systems been provided for all hotel suite fan coil
units, air handling units, or any equipment that requires year-round
cooling?
1.4.8. Is chilled water available for year-round cooling?
1.4.9. Has the capacity of the plant been confirmed, i.e. have block load
calculations been performed and reviewed?

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 196
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
1.4.10. Have energy-conserving features such as variable speed pumping been
utilized?
1.4.11. Has chilled or condenser water been provided for the ice machines on the
guest floor?
2. PLUMBING
2.1. General
2.1.1. Does the domestic hot water load for the suites reflect the following: 38 l.
- Storage per bedroom 57 l. - Recovery rate per bedroom
2.1.2. Has additional domestic hot water tanks been provided for the Laundry,
Kitchen, Suites and Public space areas respectively?
2.1.3. Do the temperatures for domestic hot water correspond to the following:
50 C - for bedrooms, public areas 60 C - for kitchens 70 C - for laundry
2.1.4. Has cold water storage been provided where the water source is
unreliable or required by local authorities?
2.1.5. Has adequate water softening been provided?
2.1.6. Has adequate water treatment been provided as required by world health
organization standards?
2.1.7. Has the domestic hot water system been provided with a re-circulation
system to maintain temperature throughout the system during low usage
periods?
2.1.8. Have dedicated isolation valves for DHW and DCW been provided within
each hotel suite for the respective suite?
2.1.9. Do the types of plumbing fixtures comply with the Brand Standards? Have
the fixtures been provided as indicated?
2.1.10. Have showerheads been provided with a minimum flow rate of 9 (6.8 for
low flow - green design) LPM?
2.1.11. Have pressure balancing mixing valves been provided for showers?
2.1.12. Is the water pressure as provided in each hotel suite as required by the
showerhead manufacturer?
2.1.13. Have DCW and drainage piping been provided for ice machines?
2.1.14. Has the can wash equipment been specified?
2.1.15. Is the drainage piping for the hotel guestrooms cast iron?
2.1.16. Has at least one drain been provided for each public or back-of-house
washroom area?
2.1.17. Has the maintenance workshop and the paint shop areas each been
provided with a sink?
2.1.18. Has the loading dock and porte-cochere been provided with a hose bib to
serve a power spray wash?
2.2. Hotel Guestrooms
2.2.1. Are the fan coil units serving the guest suites capable of three-speed
operation and temperature control as per Design and Construction
Standards?
2.2.2. Are the fan coil unit sizes for guest suites based on medium speed, with
NC levels of 35 for daytime operation, and low speed, with NC levels of

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 197
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
30 for night time operation? (High speed must be provided for quick cool
down)
2.2.3. Is the sizing of the hotel suite fan coil units in accordance with the Design
and Construction Standards?
2.2.4. Has a return air grille complete with filter been provided for each hotel fan
coil unit?
2.2.5. Has acoustic lining been provided on the discharge ductwork of all hotel
fan coil units?
2.2.6. Has a reverse return piping arrangement for the hotel suite fan coil units
for chilled and hot water distribution been provided? (This will reduce
noise at automatic control valves particularly in high-rise buildings).
2.2.7. Have access doors been provided for all fan coil units located within the
hotel guestrooms and coordinated with the interior designer?
2.2.8. Do the fan coil units for the hotel guestrooms meet Design and
Construction Standards, in terms of control and construction?
2.2.9. Have the access doors for isolation valves been carefully coordinated with
the interior designer to ensure the access is not visible, i.e. behind wall
picture or under counter?
2.2.10. Have dedicated isolation valves for heating water supply and return and
chilled water supply and return been provided within each suite for each
respective FCU?
2.2.11. Are the hotel guestroom floors maintained under positive pressure relative
to the suites?
2.2.12. Are the guestrooms maintained under a positive pressure relative to the
outdoors?
2.2.13. Is the quantity of exhaust air in the guestroom bedroom equal to or larger
than 2 CCM?
2.2.14. Does each of the guestrooms have a minimum of two (2) exhaust grilles
(one exhaust grille for the shower and one for the water closet)?
2.2.15. Have all pantries been provided with sinks and kitchen appliances with
appropriate exhaust?
2.2.16. Is the make-up air supplying both the hotel guestroom and the corridor?
2.2.17. If yes, are reheat coils and smoke dampers provided on the main branch
ductwork so that the appropriate temperature and humidity can be
maintained?
2.2.18. Is the make-up air supplying the guestrooms and corridors dehumidified?
2.2.19. Has the make-up air to the hotel guestrooms been provided to the ceiling
space vestibule?
2.2.20. Is the air quantity serving the corridor capable of handling the loads in the
corridor?
2.2.21. In cold climate conditions, have washrooms located on exterior walls or
windows been provided with heating?
2.2.22. Is the location of the double adjustable supply air diffuser within the hotel
guestrooms been located such that the supply air stream is away from the
bed?

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 198
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
2.3. Laundry
2.3.1. Are steam boilers being provided to serve the laundry area?
2.3.2. Are the steam boilers serving the laundry sized for 100% stand-by?
2.3.3. Do the steam pressures suit the pressures given for the laundry
equipment (multiple pressures are required for different equipment)?
2.3.4. Are barometric dampers utilized for laundry exhaust? If not, how is partial
load operation being handled?
2.3.5. Has a dedicated make-up air system been provided for the laundry area?
2.3.6. Is the laundry make-up air system complete with cooling in order to
maintain design conditions?
2.3.7. Have the dryers been provided with lint filters prior to connecting to the
laundry exhaust system? (Lint filters should be located as close to the
source of lint as possible).
2.3.8. Has compressed air been provided for the laundry equipment?
2.3.9. Does the laundry exhaust terminate up-blast at high levels, away from the
air intakes?
2.3.10. Has the laundry been provided with a trench drain complete with a lint
screen?
2.3.11. Has the type of ductwork provided for the laundry in accordance with the
Design and Construction Standards?
2.4. Kitchen
2.4.1. Are all kitchen areas maintained under a negative pressure (to ensure
there is no odour ingress to other areas)?
2.4.2. Does the kitchen have an independent, water-cooled refrigeration system
for all refrigerators, freezers and cold rooms?
2.4.3. Has a separate exhaust system been provided for the dishwasher?
2.4.4. Has the type of ductwork provided for the kitchen in accordance with
Design and Construction Standards?
2.4.5. Does kitchen exhaust terminate at high level away from intakes in lieu of
ecology units? (Requires ductwork extending up through the building).
2.4.6. Are grease traps provided for kitchens as required with floor access in an
appropriate location for ease of maintenance?
2.4.7. Is the kitchen make-up air system complete with cooling in order to
maintain design conditions?
3. FIRE PROTECTION
3.1. Are the sprinkler heads for public spaces the concealed type?
3.2. Have hose bibs been provided in all washrooms (typically located beneath
the counter out of sight)?
3.3. Have sprinklers been installed throughout the building?
3.4. Has the building been provided with a standpipe system?
3.5. For fire protection, are NFPA, International and Movenpick Hotel & Resort
Design and Construction standards followed?

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 199
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
3.6. Has fire protection water storage, which is non-depletable from the DCW
system, been provided if the region has an unreliable water source or is
required by the local authorities?
4. MISCELLANEOUS
4.1. Has electric tracing been provided on pipe work in areas where there is no
heating and has the potential of freezing?
4.2. Have the steam rooms within the fitness centre been provided with
dedicated stand-alone steam generators?
4.3. Do the pipes and ducts have insulation?
4.4. Has a building management system utilizing DDC complete with computer
graphic workstation been provided? (Workstations to be located in the
assistant chief engineer’s office).
4.5. Has an outlet, connected to the building management system, been
provided within the maintenance workshop for access to the service and
maintenance computer program?
4.6. Has a modem for offsite connection been provided to DDC?
4.7. Are spare parts adequately specified?
4.8. If a parking area exists below grade, has mechanical ventilation been
provided?
4.9. If a parking area exists, is the exhaust fans controlled by CO/Nox detectors?
4.10. Has mechanical ventilation been provided to the golf club parking areas (if
covered)?

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 200
2. Electrical Checklists

DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1. Will the power distribution design follow local code standards?

1.2. Will the design of the fire alarm system be based on NFPA Standards?

1.3. Are illumination levels based on Brand / Design and Construction Standards?
2. SYSTEMS
2.1. Dimming System
2.1.1. Has an electronic, solid state dimming system been specified for the control
of all public and circulation areas?
2.1.2. Confirm the following controls: Pre-sets in main lobby, restaurants, and
bars and entertainment areas? Local controls in “control niches” with
capability of “combining rooms” in meeting rooms and ballrooms? Two-way
cleaning switch in ballrooms and meeting rooms?
2.1.3. Has emergency lighting been integrated with the dimming system?
2.1.4. Have dimming schedules, with lighting control zones, been prepared?
2.1.5. Is there an interconnection to the dimming system to raise levels of dimmed
controls if a fire alarm signal is activated?
2.2. Background Music and Local Sound Reinforcement System
2.2.1. Confirm the following arrangement of background music systems:
a) Main background music for circulation spaces such as: Lobby Public
corridors Public washrooms Spa/fitness centre/pool Staff dining.
b) Does each area served by the main sound rack have individual volume
controls?
2.2.2. Have local sound reinforcement systems with interconnection back to main
(circulation area) rack been provided for: Each restaurant, lounge or bar
Each restaurant, lounge or bar Each meeting room Each ballroom
2.2.3. Are there provisions for combining sound systems for interconnected
meeting rooms and ballrooms?
2.2.4. Is there a portable, wireless, integrated lighting and volume control for each
ballroom for lectern or table top use?
2.2.5. Have audio inputs and microphone jacks been provided in baseboard “AV”
units in meeting rooms, ballrooms and prefunction areas?
2.2.6. Are there residential sound systems for the Two-Bedroom and Presidential
Suites?
2.2.7. Are the residential built-in stereos are to be provided in FF&E?
2.2.8. Is there an interconnection to the sound systems to override the music if a
fire alarm signal is initiated?
2.3. Fire Alarm System
2.3.1. Has a two-stage fire alarm system with emergency voice communication
provisions been provided?

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 201
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
2.3.2. Is the fire alarm system sequence of operation based on the “floor
above/alarm floor/floor below” evacuation with an alert signal elsewhere?
2.3.3. Confirm that the system automatically goes into evacuation mode if not
responded to within a predetermined period of time?
2.3.4. Confirm that fire alarm system smoke detectors have been provided
throughout the hotel (i.e. everywhere except where false alarms are
possible such as laundry, kitchen, etc.).
2.3.5. Is the fire alarm system based on analogue addressable devices or
hardwired type? (Analogue addressable is preferred).
2.3.6. Confirm that guestroom smoke detectors have local audible alarm only with
central annunciation. Smoke detector to be identified at central panel.
2.3.7. Is there remote fire alarm annunciation in the telephone operator’s room
and main security office? Where is location of main enunciator?
2.3.8. If background music speakers are used for life safety, then ensure that
cabling is suitable for a fire alarm system.
2.3.9. In a high rise building, have the following smoke control provisions been
provided: Individual fan control switches at main fire alarm control location?
Automatic start of pressurization fans and smoke exhaust fans? Smoke
control and smoke venting fans fed from emergency power?
2.3.10. Have fire fighter’s handsets been provided or are they not recognized or
used by the local Fire Department?
2.3.11. Are special requirements necessary for the physically challenged?
2.4. Structured Cabling System for Voice and Data Communication Systems
2.4.1. Has a structured cabling system been provided based on Category 5E
cabling for voice and data?
2.4.2. Confirm that the basic distribution is a “star” originating from the computer
room for data and telephone equipment room for voice.
2.4.3. Have “Intermediate Distribution Frames” (IDF’s) been provided in the
following location: Administration Ballroom/Meeting Room Typical
guestroom floor (required on each floor)
2.4.4. Has the maximum distance requirement of 295 ft from each LAN room to
outlet been maintained?
2.4.5. If the building is very large or a high rise, does the distance between LAN
Rooms and main computer room and telephone room exceed 90 m, such
that a fibre optic backbone is required?
2.4.6. Confirm that the quad faceplate outlets for administration have 1 x 4 pair
Category 5E (voice) with two pair punched down on each RJ11C and 2 x 5
pair Category 5E (date) cables.
2.4.7. Confirm that the two double outlet faceplates for the guestrooms have 1 x
4 pair Category 5E (voice) with two pair punched down on each RJ11C and
2 x 4 pair Category 5E (data) cables.
2.4.8. Confirm that a fax patch panel has been provided in the telephone
operator’s room.
2.4.9. Have P.O. S. power and data outlet locations been coordinated with the
Food Service consultant and Interior Designer?

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 202
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
2.5. Telephone Systems
2.5.1. Verify that the telephone switch and handsets are provided in the general
contract based on Design and Construction Standards.
2.6. Card Access and Door Alarm Security System
2.6.1. The preferred method for card access control is to integrate door alarm
points and hardwired card reader locations into the “Time Lox” or equivalent
electronic door locking system.
2.6.2. Card readers controlling electric strikes along with door alarm contacts to
monitor forced entry are required at the following locations:
a) Staff entry (with remote release from security office, door alarm
contacts may be deleted).
b) Access doors from parking garage into back-of-house corridors for
frequent use by employees.
c) Access doors from the loading dock into back-of-house service
corridor.
d) Access door into valet cashier’s room (if direct access from exterior).
e) Any other secure location that has access from an unsecured area
and where employees require frequent access (silver storage, liquor
storage, etc.).
2.6.3. Have magnetic door alarm contacts been provided at unsupervised exterior
perimeter doors?
2.6.4. Have Category 5E data cable rough-in provisions for electronic card key
encoding equipment been provided at the following locations? Front desk
Security office Concierge office
2.7. Pushbutton Alarm and Assistance Systems
2.7.1. Have the following systems been provided?
a) VIP arrival system consisting of pushbutton at front desk (1) and each
bellman’s stand with a buzzer annunciation in general manager’s
office. (Number of pushbuttons varies depending on length of desk
and number of workstations).
b) Help/Assistance request buttons at each front desk registration
location and at the front desk cashier location (if separate) with a blue
flashing light in the front office manager’s office.
c) Bellman’s Help/Assistance request buttons at each bellman’s stand
with a buzzer annunciation at the concierge desk.
d) Concierge Help/Assistance system with button at concierge desk
and a buzzer in the concierge workroom.
e) Alarm pushbuttons (with separate flashing red lights in the telephone
operator’s room) at: Front desk cashier’s locations Main cashier’s
office Staff safety deposit box room Valet or parking cashier’s room.
2.7.2. Cashier’s VCR Activation System consisting of a pushbutton in the
cashier’s office to start the VCR connected to the CCTV camera
automatically for one (1) hour.
2.7.3. Sauna or Steam Emergency System consisting of pushbuttons inside or
outside steam and sauna rooms with buzzers in Health Club Reception

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 203
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
Desk. (The pushbutton systems shall be interconnected to the buzzer via a
latching panel that sends a signal to a flashing light in the telephone
operator’s room if the alarm is not responded to within 30 seconds).
2.8. Security, Closed Circuit TV and Audio Monitoring System
2.8.1. Since there are numerous cameras providing output signals to TV monitors
in a variety of locations, a matrix switching arrangement provides the
optimum solution. Has a microprocessor based matrix switcher been
provided for the CCTV system?
2.8.2. Have the following minimum quantity of cameras been provided?
2.8.3. Have the following colour TV monitors been provided?
a) Approximately 4-5 monitors in both the security office and telephone
operator’s room in sequential switching mode for entire system (i.e.
one monitor for 4 cameras).
b) One (1) holding monitor in security office to view any one selected
camera on full-time basis.
c) Duplicate monitor and switcher for Health Club exercise room and
pool in health club desk.
2.8.4. Have time lapse VCR’s (both recording and playback) been provided in the
security office along with a separate VCR for the cashier’s office?
2.8.5. Has an audio monitoring system complete with microphone control at the
security desk been provided?
2.8.6. Has a remote microphone and speaker been provided in the Health Club
and Spa Reception desk for the pool area CCTV camera?
2.9. Intercom System
2.9.1. Has a “room service intercom” system between the room service office and
set-up area been provided (additional intercom to kitchen hot line if line not
visible)?
2.9.2. Has a “loading dock intercom” system between the receiving office and
loading dock entrance door been provided?
2.9.3. Has a “staff entrance intercom” system between the security office and staff
entrance been provided?
2.10. Television System
2.10.1. Either an underground cable television system or satellite/terrestrial
antenna system may be used to provide television signals for the hotel.
2.10.2. Channel selection shall include the minimum of:
a) Local channels
b) Cable channels
c) English speaking channels (NBC)
d) CNN
e) Movie channels
f) In-house safety movie g) h)
2.10.3. Have TV outlets been located in the following locations:
a) All guest bedrooms and living rooms

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 204
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
b) All public area bars and entertainment areas
c) Ballrooms and meeting rooms in the “AV” baseboard provision
d) Exercise Room, on each piece of Cardio equipment
e) Staff dining
f) Staff meeting room and training room
g) In TV repair area
2.11. Miscellaneous Communication Systems
2.11.1. Have the following communication systems been provided under the
general contract?
a) Portable handheld radios including repeater station, microphone
control console and transmission line. (Approximate quantity of 11
for city hotels and 20 for resorts).
b) Portable pagers including transmitter, base station and transmission
line. (Approximate quantity of 20 keynote and 10 Bravo for city hotels;
32 keynote and 15 Bravo for resorts).
c) Wireless remote sound system for the hearing impaired in the large
ballroom as per Local Code requirements.
2.12. Power Distribution System and Electric Service

2.12.1. The power distribution system design shall comply with the applicable Local
Code, however, the following minimum requirements should be provided:

a) Two (2) main power transformers with secondary switchboard

interconnections with a tiebreaker.
Ideal design is each transformer loaded 50% with full redundancy;
however, 66% loading with generator in the event of transformer
failure is acceptable.
100% loading of transformers is acceptable only if transformers are
utility-owned with rapid replacement in the event of failure.
b) Power factor correction capacitors for main switchboard.
c) Distribution panels and motor control centres located adjacent to
large loads such as kitchens, laundry, function rooms, mechanical
plant, etc.
d) Separate automatic transfer switch for fire pumps as per International
standards as listed within.
e) Separate automatic transfer switch for fire-fighter’s elevator in high-
rise buildings.
f) One-hour fire rated conductors (MICC) for life-safety equipment in
high-rise buildings.
g) Reduced voltage starters shall be provided for motors 20 HP and
larger unless local codes are more stringent.
h) Total voltage drop from electric service to final branch outlet device
shall be 5% or 4% to suit local code.
2.12.2. Is there redundancy in the number of high voltage services serving the main
substation (i.e. more than one)? Two services in a looped configuration are
recommended.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 205
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
2.13. Emergency Power System
2.13.1. Is the emergency power generator serving essential equipment?
2.13.2. For high-rise hotels, is the emergency generator suitably sized with
capacity to service the smoke-control and smoke-venting fans?
2.13.3. In resort areas or areas where power outages are frequent or longer than
four (4) hours, has emergency power been extended into guestrooms and
other important areas?
2.13.4. In third world countries or other locations where power is very unreliable,
have provisions been made for 100% emergency power?
2.13.5. Does the emergency generator room layout and design include acoustic
plenums and silencers on the intake and exhaust to limit noise?
2.14. Lighting Systems
2.14.1. Depending on the project, lighting system equipment is generally divided
into the following responsibilities:
a) Back-of-house utility lighting specified by the electrical engineer,
supplied and installed by the electrical contractor.
b) Front-of-house lighting (such as down lights) specified by the
electrical engineer, supplied and installed by the electrical contractor.
c) Decorative and architectural grade front-of-house lighting specified
by the interior lighting designer; supplied and installed by the
electrical contractor.
d) Exterior decorative lighting specified by the exterior lighting designer;
supplied and installed by the electrical contractor.
e) Custom decorative chandeliers, wall sconces and guestroom lighting
specified and/or selected by the interior lighting designer after tender;
supplied by FF&E or in general contract, assembled and installed by
the electrical contractor.
2.14.2. Has the split in responsibility been agreed with all members of the design
team and construction team?
2.15. Special Audio/Visual Equipment
2.15.1. Review the tables in Section T for compliance throughout the project.
2.15.2. Is all equipment such as projectors included in FF&E or in general contract?
3. CONSULTANT CHECK LIST
3.1. Front-of-House Areas
3.1.1. Front Desk
a) VIP pushbutton(s) (to General Manager)
b) Help/Assistance pushbutton (to front office manager)
c) Alarm pushbutton (to telephone operator’s room)
d) Normal (IG) and UPS power
e) Telephone outlets
f) Credit card verification outlet (telephone line)
g) Data outlets

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 206
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
h) Data cable rough-in for electronic card key encoder
i) CCTV camera
3.1.2. Concierge Desk
a) Buzzer annunciation from bell stand for Help/Assistance
b) Help/Assistance pushbutton (to concierge work room)
c) Normal (IG) and UPS power outlets
d) Telephone
e) Data
f) Credit card verification outlet (telephone)
g) CCTV camera
3.1.3. Concierge Work Room
a) Buzzer annunciation from concierge desk
b) Facsimile
c) Data/telephone for airline tickets
d) Normal (IG) power outlets
e) Quadplex voice/data
f) Location of volume controls for circulation spaces (optional)
g) Photocopier power
h) Dimmer control location for lobby (optional)
3.1.4. Porte Cochère
a) CCTV camera (as required)
b) Power for pressure washer
c) Miscellaneous power
d) Bellman’s stand(s) with power, voice/data, VIP pushbutton and
Help/Assistance pushbutton
e) Snow melting and radiant heating (as applicable)
3.1.5. Lobby
a) Two (2) telephone outlets for guests
b) CCTV camera
c) Power for table lamps as per interior designer
d) Background music speakers
e) Illuminated display cabinets (as applicable)
f) Reception desk and concierge desk
3.1.6. Bars, Restaurants and Cafe
a) Dimmer controls and background music controls adjacent to service
stand
b) Independent sound system with interconnection to main background
music rack
c) Service stand with local lighting, UPS and normal (IG) power, data

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 207
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
(POS), telephone and credit card verification outlets
d) Maitre D’ position with quadplex voice/data, power and local lighting
e) Power for cleaning outlets, table lamps, etc. as per interior designer
3.1.7. Prefunction Areas and Ballroom Areas
a) “AV-1”, “AV-2”, “AV-3” GR and 200 amp power panels in ballroom,
meeting rooms and prefunction areas
b) “AV-2”, “AV-3” and “AV-4” panels in meeting rooms depending on
size
c) Control niches for telephone, lighting, volume and screen controls in
each room and associated prefunction area
d) Independent sound systems with capability for “combining” into one
room
e) Lighting bar and ceiling power in ballroom with dimmer in control
niche
f) Door hold-open devices
g) Power for food warming carts in service corridor
h) “Do Not Disturb” light in service corridor of function room
i) Separate electrical room and sound system equipment room
3.2. Spa/Fitness Centre
3.2.1. Reception Desk
a) Workstations with power and computer outlets (usual quantity of 2)
b) Power and computer outlet for printer
c) Telephone outlets for guest and staff use
d) Miscellaneous power supply
e) Power for battery chargers
f) Volume control for background music system for circulation space
g) Buzzers for sauna and steam emergency alarms
3.2.2. Exercise Area
a) Separate circuit for each piece of equipment
b) Power and TV outlet at base of each piece of equipment
c) Local music volume control
d) CCTV camera
e) Emergency telephone
f) Two wall-mounted TV signal and power outlets
g) Portable sound system
3.2.3. Sauna and Steam
a) Emergency pushbutton to alarm at reception desk
b) Sauna temperature control outside of sauna room
3.2.4. Treatment Rooms
a) Dimmer control for lighting

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 208
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
b) Local volume control to ceiling speaker for background music
c) Power above shelf for portable cassette/CD player
d) Wall telephone
e) Three duplex power outlets at low level and above counter
3.2.5. Locker/Showers
a) House phone
b) Power for hair dryer
c) Cleaning receptacle
3.3. Typical Guestroom Provisions
3.3.1. Power, telephone, lighting and TV outlets as per interior designer.
3.3.2. Confirm if 120 volt (US) outlet is required at desk.
3.3.3. Handicapped provisions such as strobes, vibrating pillow, etc. as per local
code.
3.4. Guest Corridor
3.4.1. Cleaning receptacles on 12 m centres
3.4.2. Power for table lamps and picture lights as per interior designer
3.4.3. House telephone at elevator lobby
3.4.4. Life-safety and fire alarm devices in unobtrusive location. Includes smoke
detectors, EVC speakers, pull station and fire fighter’s handsets
3.4.5. Decorative lighting as per interior designer
3.4.6. Are cable trays located in corridor ceiling? If so, what access provisions
have been made?
3.5. Maid’s Rooms
3.5.1. House phone
3.5.2. Separate lighting switch
3.6. Ice Machine Room
3.6.1. Incandescent lighting with separate switch
3.6.2. Two separate circuits for ice machine
3.7. Electrical and LAN Closet
3.7.1. Separate room for LAN equipment
3.8. Special Guestrooms Sound System
3.8.1. Residential stereo conduit rough in for Two-Bedroom and Presidential
Suites. Includes two systems; two speakers in master bedroom and four
speakers in living room and dining room. Home run location in console unit
in each room.
3.9. Pool Area
3.9.1. CCTV camera and speaker
3.9.2. Minimum two underwater lights in pool and minimum one light in whirlpool
3.9.3. Underwater speakers in pool (Resort only)
3.9.4. Emergency telephone

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 209
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
3.9.5. Separate times switch for whirlpool
3.10. Heart-of-House Areas
3.10.1. Loading Dock & Garbage Area
a) Rodent sentry and fly eliminator
b) Miscellaneous power for compactor and dumper
c) Overhead door(s) with control in receiving office
d) Special mounting heights of devices
e) Power for refrigeration unit for garbage room
f) Power for pressure washer
g) Payphone and house phone
h) Intercom to receiving office
i) CCTV
j) Card access for security
k) Cart wash “jet” washer connection
l) Baler and crusher connection in recycling
m) Cold temperature ballasts for lighting (if applicable)
n) Power for dock leveller (if applicable)
3.10.2. Staff Entrance
a) Intercom to security office
b) CCTV camera
c) Card reader access to electric latch with additional remote release
pushbutton in security office
3.10.3. Security Office
a) CCTV monitors integrated into millwork along with CCTV controls
and VCR’s
b) Audio monitoring console and microphone (for CCTV)
c) Door alarm and card access system printer (from electronic card
locking system)
d) Remote fire alarm printer
e) Intercom to staff entrance
3.10.4. Staff Lockers and Washroom
a) Hand and hair dryers
b) Outlet for shoe shine
c) Shaver outlets in men’s washrooms
d) Payphone and house phone
e) Waterproof lighting in showers
3.10.5. Staff Training Room
a) Motorized projection screen
b) Power and signal for TV/Video centre

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 210
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
c) Quadplex voice/data
d) Multi-level switching of fluorescent lighting
e) Wall phone
3.10.6. Staff Dining Room
a) Background music system for circulation space source with local
volume control
b) Power and signal for TV
c) Power for vending machine
d) Two payphones and house phones
e) Power outlets for housekeeping
f) Kitchen equipment connections
g) Incandescent lighting in lounge area
3.10.7. Back-of-House Offices
a) Quadplex power adjacent P.C. plus additional duplex
b) Quad voice/Data
c) Individual switch for control of lighting
d) Fluorescent lighting (except where visible from exterior).
e) UPS power where described in Design and Construction Standards
3.10.8. Maintenance and Engineering Area
a) Power and signal outlets for TV in work bench
b) 15amp, 30amp and 50amp power required in general work area as
per Design and Construction’ Standards
c) Separate exhaust system in paint/ carpentry shops
d) Connection to radial arm saw, compressor, moveable table saw, drill
press in carpentry shop
3.10.9. Computer Room
a) Contains hubs and network servers in shelf or rack mounted
configuration (minimum 16 duplex outlets in UPS)
b) Room contains floor mounted UPS and separate air conditioning unit,
all on emergency power
c) Interconnection to PBX equipment room and telephone operator’s
room
d) Termination point of all fibre or copper backbone cabling from hubs
3.10.10. Telephone Operator’s Room
a) Lighting and emergency power
b) Each workstation with normal and UPS power, Quad data/voice
outlet, 25 pair telephone cable outlet and paging telephone outlet
c) CCTV monitors and audio monitoring controls, digital recorder
d) Red alarm lights for front desk, main cashier office, staff safety
deposit box, valet/parking cashier, sauna and steam

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 211
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
e) Remote fire alarm printer or enunciator
f) Master pocket paging station
g) Walk-in cooler/freezer alarm annunciation
h) UPS power and data outlet for POS printer
i) Power bar for battery chargers for portable radios and pagers
3.10.11. Luggage Storage
a) CCTV camera
b) House phone
c) One power outlet
3.10.12. Valet/Parking Cashier
a) UPS power
b) Quadplex voice/data
c) Alarm pushbutton (to telephone operator’s room)
d) Card access entry (to be reviewed on each project)
3.11. Interior Parking Areas
3.11.1. Lighting levels for security purposes
3.11.2. Telephone at every stairwell
3.11.3. CCTV at foyer (as applicable)
3.11.4. Card access for security
3.11.5. Upgraded lighting and power at car washing area, if applicable
3.11.6. Miscellaneous power throughout the parking area
3.11.7. Power and signal connection for payment and parking control system
4. SPECIFICATIONS
4.1. Power Distribution
4.1.1. Have copper conductors and bus been specified?
4.1.2. Has electrical equipment been suitably demarcated for temperature in
areas where ambient temperatures are in the range of 40ºC?
4.1.3. Have concealed conduit and devices been specified in all front-of-house
areas and back-of-house areas except storage and service rooms?
4.1.4. Have nameplates been specified for all equipment?
4.1.5. Is the interrupting capacity of all distribution panels and switchgear been
specified to ensure that the equipment can safely withstand the available
fault current?
4.1.6. Have one or all of the following wiring methods been described?
a) Enclosed bus duct for main transformers
b) Multi-core armoured cables or cables in conduit for large feeders to
distribution pads, motor control centres and branch panel boards
c) Small branch circuit wiring in conduit or unarmed double insulated
cable in tray for devices in ceiling space or in hollow cavity walls

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 212
DESIGN CRITERIA YES NO
4.2. Emergency Power
4.2.1. Does the generator specification include a statement for “the generator to
handle a 100% load step”?
4.2.2. Does the transfer switch specification include bypass provisions in order to
avoid shutting down the load or maintenance?
4.2.3. In certain locations, local codes require a central battery or inverter to
supply power to designated emergency luminaries for the 10-second
outage during which the generator starts. Is this specified?
4.3. Lighting
4.3.1. Lighting fixture selection shall be based on Brand / Design and Construction
Standards and on input from the interior lighting designer, however, the
following minimum requirements should be met:
a) Fluorescent luminaries shall be energy efficient type with T-8 lamps
and electronic ballasts. Ballasts shall be HPF type with low harmonic
content.
b) Fluorescent back-of-house luminary selection shall be based on the
lowest cost for the local region; however, 2.5cm x 10cm and 3cm x
10cm are recommended.
c) Line voltage, architectural grade, open reflector down lights shall
have standard lamps.
d) Low voltage luminaries shall be specified with integral transformers.
4.3.2. Does the electrical specification include the dimming specification and
lighting “cuts” from the interior lighting designer?
4.4. Fire Alarm System
4.4.1. Have smoke detectors in guestrooms been specified with their own local
audible alarm?
4.4.2. For high-rise buildings, has a fire rated riser cable been specified?
4.5. Lightning Protection System
4.5.1. Two systems are available – Are USA / NFPA I.e. based with independent
copper down conductors in conduits, or are EU standard’s being followed
i.e. where the structural steel may be used as down conductors. Which is
specified?
4.5.2. If upright air terminals are specified at the top of the building, are they
visible? The alternative is a flat copper tape.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 213
Occupancy requirements & lighting / equipment load estimates

Areas Serviced Recommended Load

Lighting/Equipment
Occupancy Notes
Range
Bedrooms 2P 1250 w Refer to (1)
Restaurant 1P/1.4m2 45-65 w/1m2

Banquet Hall 1 P/0.8m2 108-135 w/1m2

Bar 1 P/1m2 30-55 w/1m2

Meeting Rooms < 65 m 2 1 P/2m2 55-75 w/1m2

Meeting Rooms > 65 m2 1 P/1m2

Shops 1 P/5.1m2 30-55 w/1m2

Offices 1 P/10.2m2 30-55 w/1m2 Refer to (2)

Lobby 1 P/3.5m2 55-65 w/1m2

Reception Hall 1 P/1.7m2 55-65 w/1m2

Spa/Fitness Centre 1 P/5.1m2 30-55 w/1m2 Refer to (3)

Review with
Computer Centre
Technology
Personal Dining Room 1 P/1.4 m2 30-55 w/1m2

NOTES:

The following occupancy rates should be followed for the areas listed below:

- Presidential Suites living/dining area: 1.4 – 1.8m2 per person

- Two Bedroom Suite living/dining area: 1.4 – 1.8m2 per person
- One Bedroom Suite living area: 4 persons

1 The preliminary lighting and power load estimate used in corridor areas typically range
between 35 – 45 w/1m2.

2 The lighting and power loads in office areas typically range between 30-55 w/1m2 for
lighting with electronic ballasts and 55-75 w/1m2 for lighting with standard ballasts.

3 The cooling load for Fitness Centre exercise rooms should be calculated based on a fully
occupied room with guests doing a vigorous workout. The Spa and Fitness Centre lighting
and power loads should range between 30-55 w/1m2. However, for the exercise rooms
located within the Fitness Centre, lighting and power loads typically range between 100-
160-w/1m2. This is primarily due to the heat generated from the number of exercise
machines located in these rooms.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 214
The activity level for each person is a function of the usage for the specific area served. A
substantially greater quantity of heat is dissipated in activities like dancing or exercising as
opposed to sedentary type of activities. Current and applicable ASHRAE Standards should be
followed.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 215
Section O: Security Systems
1. Security and Assistance Systems

MHR strongly recommend the appointment of a qualified Security Threat and Risk Consultant
to carry out Security Threat and Risk Assessment study. The following standards are
considered the minimum requirements. If the proposed project has additional components such
as fractional or whole ownership residences or if it is part of a mixed-use project, the Owner
may require a more extensive security system or the hotel security system may be integrated
into a larger system.

The security consultant must ensure the local authority requirements are complied with, as well
the Jurisdiction of Authority

The internal hotel security system can be designed in a number of different formats. Closed
circuit TV may be used to continuously monitor entrances and exits, boundaries, and public
areas.

Elevator lobbies, parking garages, front desk, swimming pools, loading docks and cashier
areas shall be of special consideration for guest safety.

Passive infrared sensors may be used in areas in the project where it is desirable to detect
activity during unoccupied times. Magnetic or mechanically actuated switches on doors and
windows can be used to detect unauthorized passage at these points.

Wiring and security devices included in this section shall generally be inaccessible and tamper-
proof. Cabling shall be in metal conduits. All security systems components shall be connected
to the U.P.S. or provided with their own back-up power supply so the entire system will continue
to function in the event of any power failure.

1.1 Security and CCTV Monitoring Office

A closed-circuit television system with monitors is to be located in a special display unit in the
main security office. It shall be staffed 24 hours a day. The colour monitors with the capacity
to divide the screen into multiple different pictures simultaneously shall be provided as follows:

- One for every 12 cameras, connected to sequential switcher for automatic switching
- One for holding image on any selected camera
- One for replaying from video tape player
- One in General Manager’s office with switcher to select camera.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 216
1.2 Public Areas

Each front desk cashier’s position, cashier’s office and safety deposit box room is to have a
silent alarm system, comprising a push button to illuminate a flashing red light and siren in
security office and CCTV monitoring room.

2. Global Security and Risk Control

The safety and security of our guests and staff and the protection of the property and assets
of our Owners, is of the utmost importance to us. Reviews early in the process will ensure that
compliance with the Design and Construction Standards, cost effectiveness and desired
aesthetic are achieved. The Design & Construction team will work with security and loss control
mitigation consultants and advisors to review proposed plans appointed by the Owners.

2.1 Global Security

Based on the specific project or region, the project shall be evaluated for appropriate security
and safety features and loss control mitigation via third party consultants employed by the
Owner and the project team. Required work will generally include:

- Site plan review

- Floor plans
- Security schematics & systems review,
- Site visit – mandatory for all properties deemed high risk

2.2 Risk Control

For all new developments and major renovations, Security and Risk consultants shall be
engaged to ensure plans are in accordance with necessary general liability for building, fire
and security requirements. A comprehensive review will generally include the evaluation of the
following:

- Site plan
- Floor plans
- Kitchen cooking range
- Electrical/mechanical installations
- Ventilation systems
- Fuel fired equipment
- Generator details

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 217
 - Fire protection and detection system designs including water supply, automatic
sprinklers, fire alarm systems, and distribution of hand held fire extinguishers and hoses

2.3 Draw Down of MHR Security Guidelines

Secure and direct access from the parking into the hotel.

Safety and security provide sufficient CCTV camera coverage.

A separate entrance must be provided for employee’s leading via timekeeping and security
offices to personnel areas and changing facilities.

All security devices shall be cabled with fire proofed material. The cables must be fire resistant
for minimum 1 hour.

Uninterrupted power supply (UPS) shall be provided for sensitive equipment such as process
controls, security systems and computers.

Access control by a Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) non-contact badge system shall be
provided between security zones. The change into the direction of the “higher” security zone,
e.g. from staff only to selected staff only shall be depending upon a positive identification of
the employee.

The selected system shall be compatible with other door access systems.

“The server room is the heart of the hotel telecommunication services and the appropriate
safety and security measurements are paramount”

Main entrance scanners are required for guests and luggage.

Security check point for all vehicle checks safe distance away from the property with scanner
facilities.

Local security codes must be met.

Security consultant must be employed by the Owners during the design stages.

2.4 CCTV Equipment

Location, number and type of cameras with event- or motion detector should be determined by
an independent security advisor in consideration of emergency exits and intercoms.
Technologies of current technical standard are to be used.

The following areas are to be monitored (list is subject to amendment, additions and
alterations):

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 218
 - All public entrances or exits
- Main lobby
- Front desk and concierge (located behind the desk to view guest faces)
- Porte Cochère, car park entrance and exits
- Fitness Room
- Swimming pool and deck
- Safety deposit box room
- Lift Lobbies

2.5 Heart of House Areas

Wall or ceiling cameras located in the following heart-of-house areas:

- Staff entrance
- All service entrances or exits, including fire exits
- Selected Food and beverage storage rooms
- Cashier’s desk and drop safe rooms
- Truck dock/receiving area

- Façade
- All entrances and exits, including emergency exits
- Lobby
- Foyer
- Reception
- Lift Lobbies
- Guest corridors
- Underground car park in sub areas, including entrance and exit
- Cash handling locations
- And any other area that may require monitoring in accordance with Local Authorities
requirements

2.6 Master Key System

Doors of guest and conference rooms, maids, offices, store rooms, offices, workshops,
telephone, server rooms and a number of special doors etc. should be equipped with an offline
key card system with an emergency cylinder such as Vincard. The remaining back of the house
doors receives hard key mechatronic locks. For doors in special areas MH&R has to be
consulted. The supplier should be able to prove the fire resistance according to the given law
and standard (T30/F30 certification). MH&R needs to be consulted about the master key
system.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 219
Each door needs to be fitted with a mechanical cylinder, a security lock and a panic opener for
any reason that might be occurring. All doors shall individually be monitored and the controller
be interfaced to the central alarm server for transmitting the exact door number or its
designation.

The hotel wide key card lock system should not consist of different systems and it should be
possible to integrate the time recording of the employees. It should be possible to acquire key
cards from any independent producer. Card readers need to be installed in guest elevators.

An illustrative MH&R Key Flow Diagram is included hereafter:

2.7 Electronic Door Locks

A system shall be installed for all rooms and special areas of the hotels. The software of the
CPU shall be compatible as per MHR I.T. design guidelines. A linked system (offline) shall be
installed for the guest rooms and the relevant back of house doors. Preferred brand being
Vingcard.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 220
Requirements:

- Electronic Card Locks for the rooms

- Contact less System (RFID- System)
- Online System (wired)
- Interface to the Hotel Office System (PMS such as Opera version 5.)

2.8 Two-Way Radio System

Hand held two-way radios or a Deck telephone system are required to provide instant voice
communication between designated groups within the hotel, usually security or Duty Manager
Maintenance and front office in case of a fire alarm or any other incident.

3. Life Safety and Security Systems

3.1 General Considerations

Fire Protection and Life Safety considerations are of the highest priority in any Mövenpick
property.

Therefore, Mövenpick requires that the standards set out in this section, which are recognized
and accepted internationally, be fully met. This section should be read together with national
and / or local fire codes. Should higher standards than described in this section be required,
then they should be complied with.

3.2 Security Systems

Internal hotel security can be in a number of different formats. Closed Circuit Television (CCTV)
must be used to constantly monitor entrances, elevator lobbies, exits, front desk, swimming
pools, loading docks, parking garages, areas where money is accumulated or stored or the
personal safety of guests and staff is a consideration.

Passive infra-red sensors (PIR's) can be used in areas of the building where it is desirable to
detect activity during unoccupied times and magnetic or mechanically actuated switches on
doors and windows must be used to detect unauthorized passage at these points. All systems
will usually be monitored from a central point(s) within the building, usually at a dedicated
security centre, telephone operator’s area or other location which may be staffed on a 24 hour
basis. Wiring and devices included in this section should generally be inaccessible and tamper-
proof to prevent the device or system being made inoperable and systems should have a
polling feature which will alert the operator to the presence of faults.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 221
Every event has to be stored onto a Hard Disk system on “First-In-First-Out” principle easily
accessible and requires event locator software. The Quality of the stored Video streams has
to be of good quality for Police Research demands.

All security system components must be connected to the UPS (refer to chapter 3.5.6) or
provided with their own back-up power supply, that the entire system will continue to function
normally in the event of a power failure.

The System should be fully IP CCTV and based on Category 6 Infrastructure.

3.2.1. Burglar Alarm System

All external doors shall be connected to a burglar alarm system allowing to surveillance of
these doors on a time channels bases. It must be interfaced with the alarm server.

3.2.2 Guestroom Safe

Electronic safe mounted securely on shelf unit at 1.2m AFFL (no gaps). The size of the safe
shall be able to accommodate a 17” laptop computer. The following are currently MH&R
preferred brands;

• El-Safe.
• Dometic
• Hartman
• Viro
Should the project intend to specify any brand that is not on the list above then approval will
be required from MH&R

3.3 Security Office

A closed-circuit television system with monitors is to be located in a special display unit in the
main security office. A duplicate set of monitors may to be provided in the telephone operator’s
room. It shall be staffed 24 hours a day. The colour monitors with the capacity to divide the
screen into four different pictures simultaneously shall be provided as follows:

- One for every 12 cameras, connected to sequential switcher for automatic switching
- One for holding image on any selected camera
- One for replaying from video tape player
- One in General Manager’s office with switcher to select camera.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 222
3.4 Global Security and Risk Control

The safety and security of our guests and staff and the protection of the property and assets
of our Owners, is of the utmost importance to us. Reviews early in the process will ensure that
compliance with the Design and Construction Standards, cost effectiveness and desired
aesthetic are achieved. The Technical Services team will work with security and loss control
mitigation consultants and advisors to review proposed plans to ensure they meet the
necessary insurance requirements.

3.4.1 Global Security

Based on the specific project or region, the project shall be evaluated for appropriate security
and safety features and loss control mitigation via third party consultants employed by the
Owner and the project team. Required work will generally include:

- Site plan review

- Floor plans
- Security schematics & systems review,
- Site visit – mandatory for all properties deemed high risk

3.4.2 Risk Control

For all new developments and major renovations, Security and Risk consultants shall be
engaged to ensure plans are in accordance with necessary general liability for building, fire
and security requirements. A comprehensive review will generally include the evaluation of the
following:

- Site plan
- Floor plans
- Kitchen cooking range
- Electrical/mechanical installations
- Ventilation systems
- Fuel fired equipment
- Generator details
- Fire protection and detection system designs including water supply, automatic
sprinklers, fire alarm systems, and distribution of hand held fire extinguishers and hoses

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 223
Section P: Elevators
1. General Requirements

The below Specifications are intended to minimise the Guest waiting time and provide a
smooth comfortable ride.

Brands that are currently approved by MH&R include the following;

• Otis
• Schindler
• Thyssen Krupp
• Mitsubishi
• Kone
Should the project intend to use a manufacture that does not appear on the above list then
approval from MH&R is required.

When selecting the type of elevator to be used in the project it is crucial that the selected
manufacturers after sales support is considered to be able to maintain the elevators

A vertical transportation consultant must be employed

1.1 Public Elevators

Each car is to have operating panels with floor selection buttons, digital floor indication and
direction, emergency call button and intercom, close and open-door buttons, emergency roof
hatch, interface with electronic Guest Room card readers and descriptive engraving for public
floors, back ground music speakers, flush mounted LED TV screen linked to the hotels IT
systems, air conditioning and an exhaust fan (sound level to not exceed NC 30).

The 2.6m minimum high car interiors will be based upon the interior designer’s drawings
incorporating a handrail, mirrors, lighting, millwork, stone work and possibly advertising panels.

The following criteria should be used when determining the size and quantity of elevators
needed for the Hotel:

- Average waiting time of less than 30 seconds

- Load factor of approximately 30%
- Total trip time of less than 70 seconds (For the purposes of calculating the above
parameters, assume an average of 1½ persons per room for an urban hotel and 2
persons per room at 100% occupancy for a resort.)
- Duty to be 1,580kg

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 224
 - Speed for a hotel of less than ten floors to be 107m per minute and exceeding ten floors
to be 152m per minute
- Every guest or public floor is to have a stop
- Public area floors are to have 1.1m centre opening, flush doors, decorative door options
will be via the interior designer
- Guestroom floors are to have 1.1m centre opening, flush doors with decorative door
design via the interior designer
- Door frames are to be concealed filler frame type with decorative painted finish
- Door sill to match finishes and be selected via the interior designer
- Hall lanterns to indicate floor and direction with chimes and located adjacent to the door
frames
- UPS connection connected to FACP
- Door opening time should be adjustable to suit operational needs
- The car is to incorporate emergency power with automatic selection and automatic
levelling.

- All Elevators to interface with the Fire Alarm in the event of an emergency they will go
directly to the pre-determined floor.

1.2 Service / Freight Elevators

Specifications are to be based upon Otis Elevator Company equipment to establish a level of
quality. Similar equipment manufactured by other elevator companies is acceptable, subject to
approval.

Provide a minimum of 2 (two) service elevators or 75% of the public elevators whichever is
greater accessing all public and heart of house levels.

Each car is to have a single stainless-steel operating panel with emergency call button and
intercom, emergency roof hatch, close and open buttons, extract fan, lighting floor indicator
and direction.

The 2.6m high car interior is to have wall protectors, 30 cm x 30 cm dark collared rubber floor
tiles or industrial seem-less floor, handrail and cart rail and hooks for protective pads. The
service elevators are to have the following features:

- Duty to be 1,815kg
- Speed to be 150m per minute
- Every floor to have a stop and a 1.1m wide opening
- The car is to incorporate emergency power with automatic selection and automatic
levelling.
- UPS
- Connected to FACP
- Door opening time

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 225
Provide a freight elevator as required for the project. The car interior is to have stainless steel
panels with 30cm x 30cm dark collared rubber floor tiles, metal floor, or similar, a handrail and
cart rail and hooks for protective pads. The elevator is to have the following features:

- Duty to be 2,500kg
- Speed to be 30m per minute
- An extra wide opening to accommodate vehicles or other large items
- A stop at the loading dock level and any other levels required per the Architect’s design
- The car is to incorporate emergency power with automatic selection and automatic
levelling.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 226
Section Q: Electronic Locking Systems

1. Electronic Locking System

2.1 General Requirements

The locking system shall be online, card activated hotel room entry system. The system shall
use an RFID type lock and store a minimum of 2,500 events.

Store the system components, including locksets, in a dry temperature controlled environment.

The following Brands are currently approved by MH&R,

• Ving Card
• Salto
• CISA
• Messerschmitt
Should the brand proposed for a project not be on the above list then approval is required from
MH&R.

2.2 Hardware and Software

The system shall be based on a central server running on a Microsoft Windows platform. The
system shall include the following:

- An interface to the Property Management System

- An Interface to the Guest Room Management System
- All necessary user licenses for the Lock system as well as the Microsoft Operating
system
- At least one hand-held device for programming and interrogating the locks
- All encoders are to be IP/Ethernet based for communications.
- Server hardware for system

The system shall have encoders at the following locations:

- One at each front desk station, unless otherwise indicated

- One at Guest Relations
- One at Security
- One at IT
- One spare

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 227
2.3 System Features

The system shall also include the following features:

- Shall have a minimum of eight failsafe cards per room (in the event of power failure,
property will continue to be able to check guests in)
- Shall have a minimum of thirty (30) user types (or levels) and a minimum of 256 (two
hundred and fifty-six) user groups (employee access areas) and shall be able to issue
up to ten thousand user cards
- A custom-built configuration per property requirements
- Have a system access to the system operations with a password and operator card
protection, and user defined by property with regards to what functions can be done
with what security level
- Key card encoding information must be in an encrypted form
- Guest cards must have a start time, end time and issue time encoded at the time the
card is encoded
- Guest cards must be able to be encoded in advance to start at a specific date and time
in the future
- Must be able to issue unlimited number of master key cards
- Shall have a device for elevator control, whereby certain hotel floors can be access by
both date and time.
- Lock vendor to supply appropriate number of blank key cards, customized with specific
Hotel artwork to cover the first twelve months of operation.

2.4 System Locations

When locksets are located on exit doors, furnish locksets with panic release where the deadbolt
and latch are automatically retracted by the inside handle for easy egress in emergency
situations.

Provide 12 or 24V AC or DC access control remote readers at all access control opening that
cannot accept mortise locks or battery powered access control exit devices.

The following public area doors shall be connected to the system:

- Guestroom and Suites

- Meeting rooms
- Ballrooms
- Business Centre
- Elevators
Fitness Centre

Sensitive back of house areas should also be provided with electronic Locks, these include but
not limited to the following:

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 228
 - IT Server Room
- CCTV Monitoring Room
- General Managers/Administration Area
- Back office of Reception
- TV Head End room (If not in Server Room)
- Accounting offices

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 229
Section R: Signage & Graphics
1. Introduction

Effective way finding plays a crucial role in setting the stage for a positive guest experience,
increasing comfort level and enjoyment. Provide a comprehensive integrated graphics
package that complements and reinforces the hotel’s architectural and functional features to
include, but not limited to the identifying devices for the following areas:

1.1 Exterior Signage

Exterior signage includes valet, primary and secondary guest entrance and exit, lobby
entrance, restaurant entrance, ballroom and meeting room access, outdoor amenities including
beach, pool, spa, tennis, etc. receiving area, and employee entrance.

1.2 Interior Signage

Interior signage includes navigational / directional signage such as Front Desk, Concierge
Desk, toilets, coats, and elevator identification. Destination signage includes retail shops, food
and beverage outlets, ballroom and meeting rooms, guestrooms and suite numbers, spa
recreational amenities, administrative and back of house support rooms. Code required / life
safety signage includes directional and emergency exiting, environmental and smoking
requirements, guestroom policy, and spa and pool safety. Temporary / informational signage
includes events kiosks, posters, elevator cases, and guest room rates.

1.3 Traffic Signage

Guest vehicular entrance, exit and guest parking, handicapped parking, staff parking, truck
loading dock area, employee entrance, public transportation, and bikes.

1.4 General Requirements

All interior and exterior public area or “guest contact” signage shall be prepared by Interior
Designer in coordination with Signage Consultant. The public area signage design and related
materials is to be reflective of the overall design concept, hotel architecture and regional
authenticity, including the Banqueting and Guestroom Suite names.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 230
All Back-of-House signage shall be prepared by Architect in coordination with Signage
Consultant. Directional and code related signage and graphics to meet or exceed local codes
for ADA and Fire and Life Safety requirements. All signage locations are to be coordinated with
other disciplines and system / mechanical equipment.

A comprehensive package of Signage / Graphics detailed including type and locations to be

provided for approval.

Corporate Identity Standards and the corporate logo are the most recognizable and important
part of the hotel’s identity; it expresses the hotel’s personality and position. Because of the
importance of the logo, great care must be used when applying or using the logo. The font size
and style, typography, colours are distinctive to the brand and are not to be redrawn or altered,
these are detailed in our Signage Brand Guidelines which are provided by MHR as a separate
document upon request

1.5 Food and Beverage

The signage for the Food & Beverage outlets should be done by the Interior Designer, signage
will be specific to the project and may or may not include a specific logo for outlets

1.6 Spa and Health Club

The graphics package for the spa /health club shall match the properties signage, where
requested the interior signage may blend with the interior design of the space.

1.7 Visual Display Systems

Manually or Electrically Operated Projection Screen: refers to projection screens that retract
into housings either in the ceiling or in valences mounted on the wall. The dimensions of the
screen will vary according to (1) the size of the room, and (2) the aspect ratio of the image
(both 3:4 and 9:16). The vertical dimension of the image height is usually one sixth of the
distance from the projection screen to the furthest viewer. Wall-Hung Flat Panel Display: refers
to current technology flat panel displays, typically with built-in speakers. These displays are
used in public areas for digital signage purposes, and are also provided in certain specified
food and beverage venues and function spaces. These displays may be visible in more
utilitarian rooms, and are concealed in higher finish rooms. These flat panel displays are only
practical for small to medium sized rooms, due to size limitations of the displays currently
available.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 231
2 Graphics

The graphics package for the Food & Beverage outlets shall be developed in conjunction with
the Food and Beverage Concept Brief and approved by the local operational and pre-opening
teams.

2.1 Digital Signage / Electronic Way-finding

2.1.1 Public Area Way-Finding Displays

Describes the provision of larger, current technology electronic visual displays with meeting
and event information located throughout the public entry and circulation areas, particularly at
“directional decision points” leading to the function spaces of the property. These are flat-panel
displays and are integrated in millwork framings with the way-finding “You Are Here” map
graphic displays provided by the signage consultant.

2.1.2 Public Area Amenity Promotional Displays

Refers to the use of digital signage to promote the hotel’s guest amenities such as a themed
restaurant, spa facilities, or other amenity features. These are frequently integrated with the
way finding displays and may be used independently in retail areas.

2.1.3 Door Side Way-Finding Displays

Refers to the use of a smaller flat panel door-side display adjacent to each function space or
meeting room that provides the pertinent details of the current or next event to be held in that
space. These displays are integrated in millwork framing or other architectural feature that also
displays the room names.

2.2 Front Desk and Concierge Areas

Since verbal communication and privacy is critical in these areas, care must be taken to not
position background music speakers directly above the Front Desk or Concierge Desk. It is
important to provide coverage in the immediately adjacent area to provide an intelligibility-
masking function with the music. Provide large flat-panel displays for electronic signage
showing event information, and where practical, to promote hotel amenities. These displays
shall be carefully integrated with the interior design and graphic signage designs. These

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 232
displays shall be visible from both the Front Desk and Concierge staff positions. Each property
needs are to be considered.

2.3 Elevators

2.3.1 Elevator Lobbies

Provide flat-panel displays for electronic signage showing event information, and where
practical, promoting hotel amenities. These displays shall be carefully integrated with the
interior design and graphic signage designs. Each property needs are to be considered.

2.3.2 Elevator Interiors

Provide background music in elevator cabs serving guestroom floors in high-rise hotels. For
conference hotels, provide flat panel displays in the elevator car to show event information and
promote hotel amenities. These displays shall be carefully integrated with the elevator cab
design.

3 Electronic signage and way-finding system requirements.

For most hotels, the minimum requirement is to provide pre-wiring and power service to
accommodate the future provision of electronic signage and way finding systems.

For Convention Class Hotels, provide complete electronic signage and way finding systems.
These shall include large flat-screen displays located at each directional decision point leading
from the main hotel entrances and guest elevators to the event spaces and F&B venues.

These displays may be vertical or horizontally oriented, and shall include built-in or accessory
speakers.

Also, provide door-side displays connected to the electronic way-finding systems.

Where complete electronic signage and way-finding systems are indicated, provide signage
and way-finding head-end equipment located in the Sales and Convention Services offices to
accommodate information and content input.

The equipment and software will integrate with the property’s event space management system
to permit information sharing so that the staff does not have to enter event information into both
systems.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 233
Section S: Audio Visual & Background Music
1. Introduction

The Audible experience that a Guest has when they enter a Hotel is as important as the visual
experience that they have, it is therefore important that good quality suitable music is provided
which matches the venue, experience and the time of day, it is also important that the music is
delivered at the correct volume level. This experience is provided either through the
Background Music System (BGM) or the Audio Visual (AV) systems, both of these need to be
designed specifically for each property by a suitably qualified AV consultant. The following will
act as a guide on how to design the system to match MH&R’s requirements.

1.1 Background Music

The Background Music System will distribute the music content to various public areas, the
Hotel will be split into a number of zones depending on the layout of the property, however as
a general rule the following will apply

Zone 1
• Port Cochere
• Lobby
• Lobby Lounge
• Corridors
• Meeting Room Pre-Function Area
• Lobby Toilets
• Elevator Lobbies
• Elevator Cabins

Zone 2
• Spa Reception
• Spa Corridors
• Treatment Rooms (All rooms to have separate volume controls)
• Spa Toilets
• Relaxation Areas

Zone 3
• Gym (Facility also to be provided to play Guests own Music)

Zone 4
• All Day Dining Restaurant & Terrace

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 234
Zone 5
• Specialty Restaurant
• Toilets

Zone 6
• Pool Bar
• Pool Deck

As each property is different and will have unique features it is important that the AV consultant
prepares a BGM Concept that ensures all appropriate areas are covered and that they ensure
a Guest cannot not hear 2 sources of BGM at the same time

As a rule, BGM should not be provided in Guest room corridors or inside meeting rooms

1.2 Background Music Equipment

The BGM system is a centrally controlled system with the equipment being located either in
the IT Server room or the TV Headend room. The equipment will comprise of Amplifiers that
are suited for string music provided electronically via the internet.

Speakers will be located in the various zones at a spacing determined by the AV consultant
and should be of a high quality product and matching the Interior Design\

1.3 Volume Control Panels

Each zone should have a separate volume control panel that is located in an area that is not
easily accessible by a guest, it is acceptable to fit the control panel within a reception desk.

1.4 Music Content

The music content will be provided by a specialised music curating company that will ensure
the music content matches the desire mood, this content is regularly updated and provided via
an internet connection. The current approved suppliers are as follows;

• Music Concierge
• Music Styling

No facilities should be installed that allows the provision of music content from Tapes, MP
Players or CD’s

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 235
 2. Audio Visual

The Audio-Visual requirements of a property can vary massively depending on the Meeting
facilities that a property has, it is strongly recommended by MH&R that an AV Consultant is
engaged to ensure that suitable up to date equipment is specified and provided to the project
as this type of technology advances at great speed.

As a rule, the Audio Visual system should not be connected to the BGM system however it
may make economic sense to allow the speakers of both the BGM system and the AV system
to deliver any emergency announcement via an interface with the emergency annunciation
system should the local authorities allow this, the Fire Life & Safety consultant for the project
will need to confirm this.

2.1 Meeting Rooms

Dependent on the size of the meeting room each meeting room should be provided with either
a projector that can be stored into the ceiling and dropped down when required or alternatively
an LED screen which needs to be sized properly for the room. The projector or screen should
be connected to a control panel that allows a meeting delegate to connect their laptop for both
audio & visual content, the audio content should be played via good quality ceiling speakers.

The control panel should be positioned in a suitable position to allow the presenter to connect
their computer and also make their presentation, there should also be a facility to connect a
microphone to the control panel to ensure the presenter can be heard.

It is imperative that the meeting room speakers are switched off when an emergency
announcement is made.

2.2 Ballrooms

Generally, a Ballroom can be used as one large room or split into 2 or 3 rooms, therefore it is
imperative that each section is equipped to be used in isolation from the other rooms.

Each section of the Ballroom should be provided with a projector that can be stored into the
ceiling and dropped down when required. The projector should be connected to a control panel
that allows a meeting delegate to connect their laptop for both audio & visual content, the audio
content should be played via good quality ceiling speakers.

A control mechanism need to be included to have the Ballroom used as one space or to have
it split into 2 or 3 spaces

It is imperative that the Ballroom speakers are switched off when an emergency announcement
is made.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 236
2.3 Boardrooms

The Boardroom should be provided with a suitably sized LED screen, connected to a control
panel that should be embedded into the Boardroom Table that allows a delegate to connect
their Laptop for both audio & visual content, the audio content should be played via good quality
ceiling speakers.

It is imperative that the Boardroom speakers are switched off when an emergency
announcement is made

2.4 Training Rooms

The Training Room should be provided with a suitably sized LED screen, connected to a control
panel that allows the presenter to connect their Laptop for both audio & visual content, the
audio content should be played via good quality ceiling speakers.

It is imperative that the Training Room speakers are switched off when an emergency
announcement is made

2.5 Portable AV Equipment

Each property will have a unique Portable Equipment requirement depending on the design of
the property and the facilities it has therefore these requirements are discussed with the AV
consultant as the design of the property becomes more developed.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 237
Section T: Information Technology (IT)
1. Passive Infrastructure

1.1 Cabling Standards

Design Review:

Review the proposed cabling, network equipment, power and space planning design
documents during the design phases prior to construction contract award in order to minimize
changes.

Industry Standards:

- General: Materials and equipment utilized in the property’s cable plant are
manufactured, installed and tested as specified in the latest editions of applicable
publications, standards, rulings and determinations of the following industry standards.
- Testing / Labelling: Standards for post-installation inspection and testing of cabling
plant, cable labelling standards and documentation is found in Hotel Technical Network
Specifications.
- Reference Standards:

International cabling Standards were developed and approved by the following committees:

- American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

- Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) and Electronics Industry Association
(EIA)
- TIA / EIA-568-A-B, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
- TIA/ EIA-568-B.3-1, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard: Addendum
- Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 50 / 125-micron Optical Fiber
Cables
- TIA-492AAAC, Detail Specification for 850-nm Laser Optimized, 50-micron Cladding
Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers
- TIA / EIA-569-A, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces
- TIA / EIA-606 The Administration Standards for the Telecommunications Infrastructure
of Commercial Building
- TIA / IA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 238
 - Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrique (CENELEC)
- European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)
- Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
- American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM)
- Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI)
- Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
- FCC Part 15 (addresses electromagnetic radiation).
- FCC Part 68 (connection of premise equipment and wiring to the network)
- Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
- Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3ae, Media Access Control
(MAC) Parameters, Physical Layer and Management Parameters for 10Gb / s
Operation
- National Electric Code (NEC)
- National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA)
- National Fire Protection Association (NFPA70) m. Underwriters Lab (UL) n.
Governing Building Codes
- Note: Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts (MHR) uses these above mentioned standards.

1.2 Wired LAN (Local Area Network)

MHR requires a structured cabling (star topology) category 6A or higher for terrestrial
infrastructure and fibre optic (Multimode or single mode) for backbone cabling.

The elements of a structured cabling system are:

1. Horizontal Cabling
2. Backbone Cabling
3. Telecommunication Closet (Rack cabinets)
4. Administrative Areas, Guest Rooms, Meeting Rooms and Restaurants and other
public areas

Cable Types: Two general cable types are utilized for data and voice networking:
1. Copper
2. Fiber

Cable Selection: The commonly used cable types utilized at MHR hotels and associated
distance limitations are outlined in Table 1.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 239
Table 1 - Characteristics of Copper & Fiber
Cable Specification Distance Co
Type
Limitations m
m
Copper Category 6A 85 m (279 feet) from patch Shielded or plenum rated
or higher cabling is e utilized as
panel to outlet n
dictated by governing code
or applicable
t MHR
standards as outlined
previously in sthis Module,
whichever is of a higher
standard.

Fiber Multimode Distance limitations vary Used when distance

depending upon the light limitations for copper
source used, the light source cabling are exceeded but
wavelength (850 nm or 1310 distance limitations do not
nm), the fiber characteristics warrant use of single mode
(50μm / 125μm fiber or fiber.
62.5μm /125μ fiber) * and The fiber connector
potentially the speed of the type is determined by
connection (e.g., 100Mbps, the connector types
1Gbps, 10Gbps). supported by the
In general, if there is a equipment vendor on
difference in the distance the connected
limitations for 50μm / 125μm equipment.
vs. 62.5μm/125μm
multimode fiber, the 50μm /
125μm multimode fiber
covers a longer distance.
Consult specifications for
equipment manufacturers’
devices that are connected
to the fibers.

Fiber Single mode Distance limitations vary Only use when distance
depending upon the light limitations for multimode
source wavelength (1310
nm or 1550 nm) utilized in fiber are exceeded.
the equipment. Light The fiber connector
sources that operate at type is determined by
1310 nm are typically used the connector types
for short to moderate supported by the
distance applications, while equipment vendor on
light sources that operate at the connected
1550 nm wavelength are equipment.
typically used for long
distance applications.
Consult equipment
manufacturers
specifications for devices
that are connected to the
fiber.
Cable Length Calculations: When estimating cable lengths and limitations, make certain that
the vertical (floor-to-floor) component of the distance is included.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 240
1.3 Structure Cabling (Horizontal Cabling)

Approved brands: Belden, NXT, 3M, Leviton

Summary standard: Minimum category cat6A or higher with min 20 years’
warranty
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

A structured cabling system (SCS) is a set of cabling and connectivity products that integrates
the voice, data, video and various management systems of a hotel / building such telephones,
computers, printers, Closet Circuit television (CCTV) to control security cameras, Building
Management System (BMS) components, in room control systems, televisions, WIFI access
points, door locks, point of sale systems, credit card terminals, LCD/Laser projectors, banquet
room floor boxes, gym equipment, electronic / digital signage, etc.

1.3.1 The MHR concept:

All cables (generally CAT6A or Higher) originating from the different work locations are
terminated on a passive centralized patch panel in the network room e.g. MDF (Main
Distribution Frame) Room or Computer Room etc. Simple labelling and colouring mechanisms
provide for easy and quick identification of work outlets E.g. whether the port is used for Data,
Telephone, GRMS or BMS etc. (Contact MIND for patch cords colour coding). As a result, the
system provides for a single point for all administrative and management requirements.

1.3.2 Structured cabling elements:

Structured cabling is required (but not limited to) for the following services:

 Local area networks (LAN)

 Wireless LAN (W-LAN)
 Telephony (IP / Analog) system
 Building Management system (BMS)
 Property Management system (PMS)
 Food & Beverage outlet point of sale system
 IPTV system & Entertainment Systems
 Guest Room Management System (GRMS)

All components which are necessary, such as racks, plugs, patch panels etc. have to comply
with the mentioned standards of the relevant cabling classification. All distribution frames/racks
will be delivered with cable clamps; earth and uniform access locking system (see “Server
room” for detailed rack specifications). Sufficient space is to be provided within the racks for
the network equipment (reserve per rack 10 %). Connections have to be labelled according to
specifications by MH&R. All the connections will be put on labelled patch panels and a test
protocol is essential for each connection.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 241
With a flexible cabling infrastructure, a structured cabling system can support multiple voice,
data, video and multimedia systems regardless of their manufacturer.
Installing cabling during the construction phase is easier, minimizes damage to finished
surfaces and is reusable for the life of the structure when designed properly.

1.3.3 Cost Effective

It is far more cost effective to install structured cabling in a hotel than to have a non-structured
cabling environment. The reason being is that in a structured cabling environment you can run
MULTIPLE applications and services on the same cabling network using Virtual LAN (VLAN)
technology. Specifically, on the same CAT7 structured cable you can potentially run a myriad
of hotel applications and systems.
As user requirements change, the service provided on the outlets can be changed simply by
changing the logical switch configuration in the equipment room.
Note: MH&R standards require that the Administrative Network (IP range and VLAN) be
physically separated from any other local based network. This is a security requirement for
connectivity to MH&R’s Virtual Private Network (VPN) and Wide Area Network (WAN)

1.3.4 Cable Design & Management

1. Certification: Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) certifies cabling

design
2. Proof of design certification is presented to MIND when submitted for design review during
the construction document phase.
3. Approval: MIND approves the final design and placement of cable.
4. Provide twisted pair patch cables complying with the same standard and brand as the
structured cabling.

5. Patch Panels:
 At IDF locations, provide a MIND approved horizontal and vertical wire management
system.
 Layout drawings to be submitted to MIND for approval prior to execution
 Avoid installations with more than two patch panels in succession unless otherwise
approved
 Leave room in the rack immediately following the two patch panels for network
switches.
 When provided in twos, provide a wire manager, one on each end, to border both.
 Terminate cables at patch panels in an orderly and logical fashion.
 Provide cable labeling scheme consistent with the type of property (e.g Single or
Multiple building blocks, mixed used properties, etc.)
 Guest Room Patch Panel Labeling Scheme: (Room #) (Sequential Ethernet port within
room) Example: 300 02 (Room 300, 2nd Ethernet port in room).
 Wall Plate Labeling Scheme: (Floor # and IDF letter) (Sequential Ethernet port in
room) Example: 4A 02 (IDF 4A, 2nd Ethernet port in room).

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 242
Documentation: Place copies of connecting documentation within each distribution
closet on wall mounted slot for easy access and protection. Provide master documentation
(soft and hard copy) for all locations to Mövenpick IT New – Development (MIND)

6. Cable Management: Provide Velcro type tie wraps (preferred), screws, cross-connect
cable, support hardware, etc. and necessary components for complete cable management.
7. Cable Length Calculations: When estimating cable lengths and limitations, make certain
that the vertical (floor-to-floor) component of the distance is included.

1.3.5 Cabling Requirements & Scope of Work

All Category 6A / 7 cabling must be used in a structured cabling environment. This includes all
IP Telephone points for the Hotel and apartments. The points below outline the basic
requirements and please contact MIND to agree on project specific details.
 Horizontal cabling must be CAT6A / 7
 MDF & IDF Cabinets must be lockable, dust resistant and air conditioned/ventilated.
 All cabling ends and faceplates must be individually labelled using an effective
Numbering Scheme.
 Cabling is to be properly channelled through cable trays and cable ducts. No cabling is
to be run on the outside of external walls unless absolutely necessary.
 Cabling and Power Outlets must be built into the furniture and fixtures where applicable
to avoid ugly cabling running access the floors and causing a hazard.
 All data cabling must be separated from AC power and telephone cable unless
structured wiring.
 All faceplates, cable ends and racks must be labelled / numbered uniquely in a sealed
typed permanent manner.
 All jacks must be wired to meet international EIA standards.
 Electrical and other foreign cables may not be laid in the same piping and conduit ting.
E.g. Cat6A cannot be laid in the same pipe as Electrical etc.
 Rack mounted Category 6A or higher RJ45 patch panels must be used to terminate all
horizontal cable runs.
 Blueprints to be marked showing all MDF & IDF cabinets, cabling and RJ45 Outlets.

1.3.6 Backbone (Vertical Cabling)

Approved brands: No preference

Summary standard: minimum 12 core fiber + multi pair copper if required
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

To cover distances over 100 meters, fibre optic cables are to be used in multimode. A fibre
optic cable has a minimum of 12 cores. Fibre optic cables are typically used to connect the
server room with the IDFs on the floors, connect the main building server room with IDFs in
other buildings or bridge other large distances.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 243
Where required by national regulations / laws telephone providers a multi-pair copper
backbone cable needs to be installed in addition to the fibre back bone.

The backbone should have a minimum of min 20 years’ warranty.

Note: Vertical cabling must be minimum 8 Core Fibre Segments

2. Network Infrastructure

2.1 Convergence

Administration and Guests Network

MHR’s converged network services offers owners an opportunity to implement a more

streamlined low voltage cable plant and potentially eliminate various cables. Technologies that
support converged services are changing rapidly and individual network solutions vary from
supplier to supplier, and may vary by specific application. Both administration and Guest
network must be physically separated.
Hotel Technical Networking Specification documentation available by contacting MIND

Advantages: Deploying converged networks provides:

 Simplified network and vendor management
 Improved network security
 Greater flexibility
Implications: The deployment of a converged n e t w o r k impacts the following:
 Switch functionality
 Switch model selection
 Switch module selection
 Switch / switch module quantities
 Switch configuration
 Cabling types and quantities
 Power requirements in computer room / MDF / IDF
 Cooling requirements in computer room / MDF / IDF
 Generator / UPS requirements
 Increased technical knowledge of IT personnel supporting
infrastructure

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 244
2.2 Cellular Telephone Boosters

Approved brands: No preference

Summary standard: 100% coverage for all major cellular phone providers
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

Only the mobile network operators are licensed to use equipment that transmits in these bands.
Installation or use of repeater devices by anyone without a licence is a criminal offence.

Good external cellular coverage does not in any way guarantee good in- building coverage.
While proximity to a carrier’s tower is a major factor, a property’s size, the building materials
used to construct it (e.g., steel, reflective or hurricane glass), and the technology used by the
carrier can greatly impact the degree of RF signal penetration into the building.

Device used to boost the mobile phone reception by the usage of three units: a reception
antenna, a signal amplifier and an internal rebroadcast antenna. The latter is very much similar
to the mobile phone mast used for broadcasting by the network providers. The only difference
is they are much smaller and usually used in one building.
The boosters must not interfere with other networks.

The boosters remain within the license conditions of the mobile network which they boost –
this means that the mobile network must be able to control them (turn them on and off)

Multi- carrier cellular service coverage is required in all public areas, administrative areas,
guestrooms, meeting areas, and residences. Good cellular phone coverage is frequently a
consideration when meeting planners and guests select a property. Lack of good coverage is
costly in terms of lost revenues from discerning corporate clients.

Impact of Installation Timing on Cost: Since each property is unique, each property must be
assessed by a qualified wireless integrator to provide accurate capital costs and guidelines as
per national telecommunication regulators.

2.3 Next Generation Firewall (NGFW)

MHR provides a NGFW that meets MHR security Standards.

Summary standard: Minimum 10 Mbps synchronous burstable to 50 Mbps if available

Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 245
The access to the MH&R network will be provided using VPN technology across the global
Internet.
Appropriate bandwidth and service provider are to be defined.
MHR Internet access (VPN) minimum bandwidth recommendation: 10mbs leased line.

 The router provides the property with a connection to MHR’s data center and is
managed by MHR or an MHR assigned entity.
 The router is installed in the Computer / Telecom Room. Contact MIND representative for
installation and mounting steps.

2.4 Switches

2.4.1 Core switches (Network Components)

Approved brands: HP Aruba, Brocade and Cisco

Summary standard: Minimum of 2 Core Switches for redundancy
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

MHR recommend installing two redundant HP Aruba, Brocade or Cisco core switches at the
heart of the hotel network to support voice, data and TV channels broadcast. The core is the
backbone of the network. This layer is designed to be highly reliable, and stable. The core may
provide load balancing, fast convergence, and scalability. All core switches shall have minimum
10Gbps uplink access ports.
All servers, Network Area Storage (NAS) devices, and Wireless Controllers should be
connected to a core or dedicated centralized server switch at a minimum of 1Gbps speeds.
Multiple 1Gbps links are often used where load sharing to a server is required.

2.4.2 Edge switches (Network Components)

Approved brands: HP Aruba, Brocade and Cisco

Summary standard: Stackable switches are recommended, 1GB ports and minimum
2 SFP ports, POE+ ready, One 10Gbps uplink port
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

Obtain switch standards from the MIND. The Owner is responsible for purchasing switches
that comply with MHR specified Standards. Do not procure non-approved switch models. The

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 246
approved network provider or property systems manager is responsible for installing,
configuring and maintaining switches.

a. LAN Switches: Comply with MHR Standards. Discuss switch functionality requirements
with the MIND and verify that funds are budgeted in compliance with converged network.
(See Convergence)
b. Source: Purchase network switches through approved network providers. Obtain an
approved supplier list from the MIND.

The minimum design (for each cabinet) shall include 24 ports Gbps edge switch with 2 SFP
ports.

Switch allocation shall be as follows:

a. The general rule to determine required number of switches per floor: (Number of ports X
Number of rooms per floor) divide by 48 or 24.
b. For a cabinet requirement of less than 49 ports, there shall be 1 or 2 x 24 port switches
installed.
c. For a requirement of between 49 and 72 ports, there shall be 2 x 48 port switch
d. A standard hotel room configuration should not exceed 8 ports

Retention of existing switches

The decision as to whether or not to replace existing switching equipment should be based on
the following criteria:

a. All switched replacements shall be Layer 3 capable

b. Switches greater than 5 years old - replace
c. Switches with no management function or those based on web smart configuration
only- replace
d. Switches which do not support SNMP and/or MIBS - replace
e. Switches that are at EOL (end of life), outside of warranty and are no longer supported
by the manufacturer – replace

2.4.3 Cable Termination Points

Table 3 provides information on the minimum number of cabling access point or “drops”
needed per area to meet current IT infrastructure requirements. This table serves as a
guideline based on general IT demand and usage by area. The MIND assists in determining
the actual number of points necessary based on projected usage or utilization of each area.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 247
Growth:

It is extremely important to ensure that sufficient cabling is installed to permit growth,

particularly in back- office and administrative areas.

A growth factor of 20% is required for the cabling backbone (MDF to IDF connections).
Installing sufficient cabling for growth during initial construction is a minimum of 50% less
expensive than installing additional cabling at a later date (the “pay as you go” model).

Locations vary based on project design, construction and equipment layouts. The following are
typical cabling locations. Contact the MIND to clarify property specifics and required cabling
locations not listed.

Table 2 - Network Cabling and Power Outlet Termination Points Calculation

Calculation for minimum # of Termination
Location Points Examples of
Equipment
Network Connections Power Outlets Used

Back-of-House

Administrative 4 per workplace 4 per workplace Computer, Phone,

Offices Printer, Fax
Service center 6 per desk 6 per desk Computer, P.O.S.,
Phone,
Printer, Fax, Key
Encoder
Commercial Kitchen* 2 additional per counter* 2 per counter P.O.S. Printer, Phone
(extra to office space)

Receiving Area 4 per workplace 4 per workplace Computer, Phone,

Printer, Fax
4 additional in area for
Engineering* networked equipment* 4 in area Monitoring Equipment
(extra to office space)

4 additional in area for

Housekeeping / networked equipment* 4 in area Uniform Management
Laundry* (extra to office space) System

Housekeeping Stores 2 per area 2 per area Phone

on floor
Employee Dining 4 in area for networked 4 in area Phone, Computer,
equipment Time
Clock, P.O.S.
Employee Dining 2 in area for networked 2 in area Phone
Kitchen equipment

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 248
Training Room n+4 for the seating 2 each for the Computers, Phone,
capacity of the room seating Printer
capacity of the
6 additional for networked room IP VSS, Networked
Security Office* equipment* (extra to office 4 additional Equipment, Encoder
space)
Employee Entrance 2 data per location 2 per location Time Clock locations

Front of the House

Computer, Phone,
Front Desk 7 per station 7 per station Printer, Key Encoder,
workspace Credit Card
Terminal & Printer
Concierge workspace 6 per station 4 per station Computer, Phone,
Printer,
Encoder

Bell Man workspace 3 per station 2 per station Computer, Phone,

Printer

Restaurant Hostess 4 per station 4 per station P.O.S. Terminal

Computer,
Phone, Printer

Restaurant P.O.S. 5 per station 5 per station P.O.S. Terminal

Station Computer,
Printer, Credit Card
Terminal

P.O.S. Terminal
Bar per work area 4 per work area Computer,
Phone, Credit Card
Terminal, Printer

Service Bars 4 per work area 4 per work area P.O.S. Terminal
Computer,
Phone, Printer

6 per work area (extra to 6 per work area P.O.S., Phone, Printer,
Retail Shop office space) (additional (additional for Gift
for Bank Card Bank Card Card Terminal
Terminals) Terminals)
Spa* 2 additional per station* 2 additional per
(extra to station
office space)
Spa Front Desk 6 per station (additional 6 per station
for Bank
Card Terminals)

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 249
 Boarding Pass Printing: 1
Business Center & per PC, 1 per printer 2 additional per
Guest Business Guest Use: 1 per PC, 1 desk Computer, Phone,
areas* per printer Printer
Communal table: 1 per
table
7 per work area* (extra 6 per work area Computer, Phone,
Guest Floor Lounge to office space) Printer, Encoder
Reception*

Specialty Locations
Calculation for minimum # of Termination
Location Points Examples of Equipment
Network Connections Used
Power Outlets

Ballroom, Meeting & Refer to Event Space Design and consult Phone, Computer,
Boardrooms MIND for specifications Networked
Equipment

Guestroom Minimum 6 per room Individual 2 outlets Minibar, TV, WIFI.

however may behind TV stand, minimum - One Cat 6A
require more desk and 2 or higher at bedside
pending room Universal power with RJ45 jack for
features. sockets with USB analog telephone; two
charger bedside Cat 6A or higher at
table desk with one RJ45
and one locally
approved phone; One
Cat 6A or higher at TV
on RJ45; May require
additional cables for
suite phones, Energy
Management, in Room
Control, etc.
Computer Room 4 per work station +
as determined by 4 per work station
specification

Wireless Access 100% Connection as determined during

the wireless survey

Digital Signage Most digital signage requirements Review digital

conform with standard Ethernet cabling signage design with
requirements. your audio visual
consultant for
cabling
requirements.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 250
 Closed Circuit Connection as determined by For Video
Television (CCTV) closed-circuit television Surveillance System
requirements (VSS); coordinate
requirements with
security consultant
Audio Visual (A/V) Determined during the AV requirements. Coordinate A/V
(many systems use IP requirements with
for distribution) this Module.

Phone Only Locations – See Telecommunication module

Guest Elev. Lobby - all Conference Rooms Storage
floors General Area
Service Elev. Lobby - all Aerobics Room Purchasing / Receiving
floors
Fire / Engineering
House Telephones Exercise Room Command /
housekeeping pantries
Rooms
Lobby Lounge House Receiving Area Elevator Machine Room
Telephone
Men’s Lounge Spa
Lobby Lounge Pantries (House
Telephone)
Women’s Lounge Spa
Guest Floor Lounge Banquet Storage (House
House Tel. Tel.)

Pool Telephone Employee Lounge Store Rooms

Spa Reception Area Employee Locker Loading Dock

Room

* Termination points required in addition to the number of ports specified in

“Administrative Offices” specified termination points. Identify additional areas based on
the building diagrams.

3. Wireless LAN (WLAN)

Approved brands: Ruckus and Aruba

Summary standard: 100% coverage at -65dB controller based solution
supports 802.11ac Wave 2
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 251
General Note Wireless LANs are required to provide guests with Internet access throughout
the hotel premises. The selected vendor must ensure 100% WIFI signal coverage in guest
rooms, corridors, staircases, bathrooms, lifts, car parks, banquet rooms, restaurants, lobbies,
fitness centre, outside areas such as beaches and gardens, kid’s areas, pools, back office
areas such as offices, store rooms and workshops where employees with access to business
applications could access internet in public and back of house areas. Contact MIND for project
guidance.
WLAN engineering is required to support VoIP (e.g skype, etc.) services related to business
applications.

In converged networks, all wireless access points are considered capable of carrying associate
back office traffic, regardless of their physical location at the property.

The strength of the WIFI must be at least -65dB, enough for a smartphone. The WIFI system
controller is based and managed through a HSIA gateway. The MH&R administration WIFI
network must be fully virtually independent from the guest network.

WIFI in hotel cars and other vehicles will be provided through a carrier based WIFI solution
(e.g. 4G WIFI Router)

To ensure compliance for above, the approved vendor for WIFI will require completing and
providing relevant ‘heat maps’ and blueprints for WIFI topology. This will be conducted via a
Site Survey during the initial design and at the final stages of Hotel construction.

3.1 Site Surveys

Conduct two mandatory wireless site surveys by a qualified, MIND approved, wireless
integrator to ensure adequate signal throughout the project coverage area. Depending upon
the size of the property, the initial desktop survey can be performed using a passive (application
generated) survey of signal and noise statistics. The second physical survey must be
conducted following the completion of the wireless installation.

a. Initial Desktop Survey:

 Conduct the initial survey by computer modeling based on construction documents.
 Identify architectural and structural elements that obstruct or diminish wireless signal
strength.
 Conduct survey prior to completion of the low voltage drawing.

b. Physical Survey:
 Conduct the second survey on site following substantial completion of the exterior
building envelope (roof and walls) and interior partitions to account for the impact of
building materials (drywall and windows) and sources of EMI / RFI signal strength.
 Provide details on items not yet installed involving water and large metal objects.
 Consider the presence of special coatings or materials (e.g., UV) on windows if the
interior wireless access points are intended to provide coverage of exterior areas.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 252
  Physical Survey Report: Include the following information:
 Map of signal, noise and user performance; Coverage by SSID; Power level by access
point
 The physical survey provides frame data rates; packet retries and error rates.

3.2 Wireless Access Point Antennas

There are many types of antennas used with wireless access points. Use appropriate antenna
types (e.g., wireless access points located outside utilize antennas designed for exterior use).
Ensure that the Design Team is aware of the antenna dimensions used and accounts for
appropriate allocation in the de- sign. Contact MIND for specifications of approved Wireless
Access Point Antennas in accordance with requirements. Generic access points are not
acceptable.
Wireless Standards: Wireless access points at MHR properties support 802.11ac wave 2
detailed wireless standards are defined in the current version MHR 802.11 wireless
requirements.
Outdoor Wireless Connectivity: Wireless alternatives to wired connections to outlying
buildings (golf shops, beach bars, pool side, food outlets, maintenance buildings, etc.) can be
explored with MIND on a case by case basis.

Approved Wireless Vendors: Approved vendors are defined in the current version of the MIND
- Hotel Network Technical Specification.

3.3 Power over Ethernet (POE+)

Power must be provided to the wireless access points through the use of POE+ [IEEE standard
802.3af]
 The current standard for POE+ is outlined in the IEEE 802.3at standard.
 When POE+ is utilized, there is an impact on the LAN switch models / modules used
and therefore on the LAN switch infrastructure cost.
 The use of POE+ may impact power and cooling requirements for the IDF / MDF where POE
switches are located.
 If POE is not used, installation of additional power outlets in the vicinity of each wireless access
point is required and increases construction costs. Consult the MIND for more details.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 253
4. Internet Connection

Approved brands: No preference

Summary standard: minimum 100 Mbps synchronous burstable to 1 Gbps if
available
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

Note: MH&R standards require that the Administrative Network be physically separated from
any other local based network. Two main internet connections to subscribe to are:

a. Administration internet
b. Guest Internet

Layer 3 (routing) functionality is required for network connection to the Internet. Routing is
included in Layer 3 switches but is typically performed in a separate router for this particular
application.

4.1 High Speed Internet Access (HSIA)

A HSIA system service provides guests with internet on their personal computer or mobile
devices equipment from the guestroom or hotel public areas. Obtain an MHR approved guest
HSIA service provider from the MIND’s approved provider list.

4.2 Network connection

The MIND provides detailed network documentation for active network components and
software, and requirements for wired and wireless connections.
 Refer to passive Infrastructure section which addresses low voltage cabling requirements in
order to support the active components.
 Design low voltage cable plant considering all Ethernet network systems for guests,
employees, telephones, wireless access points, digital signage, IPTV, GRMS cellular
signal enhancement equipment and other building systems.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 254
4.3 Standards, Resources and References

 Consult with the MIND representative to obtain design supplements (High Speed
Internet Access Standards) that include relevant project documentation, active
networking equipment standards and current approved vendor list. The MIND assists
with design, budget estimating, and procurement of the active network system
components.
 Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc (BICSI) https://www.bicsi.org/ :
Comply with the design principles, design and implementation for the in-building
Ethernet service network.
 Consultant: MIND recommends engaging a qualified hospitality industry technical
design specialist who is a “Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD)
with BICSI”.

4.4 MHR VPN Primary Internet connection

Approved brands: No preference

Summary standard: Minimum 10 Mbps synchronous burstable to 50 Mbps if
available
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

The access to the MH&R network will be provided using VPN technology across the global
Internet.
Appropriate bandwidth and service provider are to be defined.
MH&R Internet access (VPN) minimum bandwidth recommendation: 10mbs leased line.

4.5 MHR VPN Backup Internet connection

Approved brands: No preference

Summary standard: Minimum 2 Mbps synchronous burstable to 10 Mbps if
available
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

MHR Global IT Network takes advantage of Virtual Private Network (VPN) technology to
create secure and private communications channels through the Internet. Operating across

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 255
three international nodes, it provides a robust backbone for a wide range of services and
solutions.

4.6 MHR Global Network Services (GNS)

Approved brands: Contact MIND

Summary standard: 2 routers in high availability mode (Primary/Backup)
Core / Optional: Core (Site Specifics)
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

MHR Next Generation Firewall (NGFW) is deployed to support MHR Global network services.
A NGFW must be delivered and installed in the hotel premises 5 weeks before the hotel
opening.
Note: Designing, building and supporting your own Global IT network can be a very complex
task. You would need to install specific and costly hardware, software, security and
communications solutions at your hotel and then constantly manage and maintain this
infrastructure to ensure it continues to meet the expectations of your business. Hotel
managers and owners can remove all this complexity and cost by subscribing to MHR’s Global
Network Services (GNS). Each hotel can select its own preferred
Internet Service Provider (ISP), enabling it to take advantage of the most competitive local
rates. Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts proactively monitors and supports its entire Global IT
Network 24/7 to make sure that it is performing optimally.

5. Data Center / Computer Room

Approved brands: No preference

Summary standard: Redundant power, cooling, fire suppression and physical
security
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

“The server room is the heart of the hotel telecommunication services and the
appropriate safety and security measurements are paramount”

The IT Manager’s Office should be a separate room away from the computer room.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 256
5.1 Location and Space Allocation

Provide the following:

 Safe and secure location for server, PBX, computer and networking devices.
 Stable and uninterrupted power supply is required to maintain equipment.
 A temperature and humidity controlled environment within the parameters indicated to
operate the equipment.
 Connectivity to other devices inside and outside of the Computer / Telecom Room.
 Secure Storage: Provide a safe and secure area, 2.5 m x 3 m (8 x 10ft) for equipment
storage.

5.1.1 Minimum Space Estimates:

The Computer Room requires 4m x 4m.

The IT Managers Office (ideally) needs to be at least 3m x 3m.
 Provide space for four standard work stations with continuous counter and accessible
overhead storage cabinets.
b. If System Manager’s office is adjacent to Computer Room, it must be separated from
equipment by soundproof window and door that limits office noise exposure to 90 dBA.
Discuss details with the MIND.

5.1.2 Location:

 Avoid locating Computer / Telecom Room against outside wall and exterior windows to avoid
unauthorized access.
 Account for flooding and locate above the flood plain or storm surge level; always above
the building ground floor.
 Avoid locations under housekeeping, kitchens, guestroom water pipes and areas that are
prone to water flooding.
 Avoid locating utility plumbing, heating sources and systems adjacent to this room that
present a risk to the normal operations of a Computer / Telecom Room.
 Avoid locations within 10 m (33 feet) of water pipes, except for fire sprinklers.
 Locate away from sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency
interference (RFI) such as electrical transformers, copiers, radio transmitters, sources
of microwave transmissions, electrical motors, electronic ballasts, etc.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 257
5.1.3 Flooding risk:

 The location is not subject to risk to natural flooding.

 There are no water / sewage pipes are in the vicinity of the Computer room.

5.1.4 Specifications:

The appropriate design is to be SUBMITTED and Approved by MIND for review.

5.2 Planning Considerations

 A main computer UPS will be required to be used to service the equipment in the
Computer room (see Power section of this document).
 The Electronic Door locking monitor system should be in a secured location other than
the Computer Room, accessible to Engineering/Systems Department/Front Office
Associates. If an interface to the property management is to be installed, cabling will be
required between the electronic door locking system PC and the computer room –
details to be specified by Electronic Door lock vendor and PMS.
 A raised floor [at least 150mm above concrete slab, but no more that 300mm is
required. The floor to have anti-static removable tiles which are to be tightly packed to
avoid dust penetration.
 Raised floor to ceiling requires at least 2.4 m (8 feet) to allow for the standard 42U racks.
 Provide adequate space and access clearance for equipment and personnel. Verify
area and location during design programming phase.
 Examples of Servers Room for 100 and 200 Rooms Hotel: It is featured with minimum
4 racks, raised floor, and adequate cable trays, Fire Fighting system, HVAC. For more
details, contact the MIND
 Computer / Telecom Room for 300 and above Rooms Hotel – it is featured with a
separate workshop space, Observation window ramp, raised floor, cable trays, HVAC.
For more details, contact the MIND.
 The entrance door to have a one-hour minimum fire rating, be self-closing, open
outwards and be dust sealed.
 Bright fluorescent lighting should be provided inside and outside the computer room.
 Epoxy paint to be used for the concrete slab below the raised floor to reduce dust and
facilitate cleaning.
 Minimum 700mm of access/ventilation space required around 42U LAN Server rack
units (allocate 1 square meter plus a second 1 square meter space [side by side] for
equipment footprint) (ideally placed in the center of the room).

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 258
  The incoming data station and services patch rack would be installed next to the LAN
server 42U rack unit.
 PABX voice tie cable access provision is required from the PABX room to the Computer
room wiring patch panel.
 No glass or windows to be installed, including within the doorway frame.
 Smoke detectors to be installed.
 Ground to ceiling height must be at least 2500mm to allow for the 42U rack.
(alternatively, if this is not feasible a 2 x 36U rack units can be used to house the
computer equipment but in this case the Project team will need to notify MIND prior to
procurement)
1. A minimum of 10 power receptacles are required directly under floor where the LAN
server 42U rack units are located in the Computer Room. A 70mm-access hole is
required in the floor.
2. The entrance door to display a sign in the local language and in English stating
"Authorized Entry Only”. No other signage to indicate purpose of location to be installed.
3. Pictorial wall signage indicating no smoking, no eating, and no drinking is required
inside the room located in the surroundings of the computer room.
 The preferred design is a single room with two main sections; one section for computer
equipment and one section for vendor supported equipment such as MATV, IPTV, WIFI
etc. This arrangement simplifies operational maintenance and provides ease of use in
converged networks.

 The telecom equipment and property computer equipment are secured in the following
ways:
a. Connectivity: If it is not possible to locate the telecom and computer equipment in the
same room, provisions for connectivity between the rooms, via conduit, are
required. Provide accessible conduit end points of sufficient size to allow for future
additional cabling.
b. Separation: Some local jurisdictions require the telecom equipment be separate
from the primary guest systems. If the property’s computer equipment and
telecom equipment are located in the same room, contact your MIND for local
segregation requirements.
c. Security / Access Control:
• Provide access doors to the Computer / Telecom Rooms with an interrogative
lock system with audit trail (i.e. magnet stripe type lock, able to provide access
records). PCI standards require audit logs for 90 days. If locks with a 90 days’
log cannot be procured, then purchase locks with audit logs that are
downloadable to a PC.
• Provide Video Surveillance System (VSS) camera; Place camera such that it
has a clear view of individuals accessing and working in the facility. Purchase
VSS camera system with 90 days’ video storage. Position camera so video

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 259
 can clearly identify a person entering and exiting the computer room and install
the camera so it is tamper proof.
• Avoid unnecessary ceiling and floor penetrations into the Computer / Telecom
Room. When cable runs are complete, firestop penetrations through fire rated
wall and floor assemblies and through acoustic rated walls and floors.
 Doors:
• Width: Use 1.1 m (3’-6”) door to allow for equipment. Do not use split doors.
• Provide with swing action, self-closing mechanism, and hinged on the interior.
• Provide with perimeter dust seals to maintain a dust free environment.
 Floors, Walls & Roof:
• PCI Standard: Provide solid walls, concrete or masonry, on all four perimeter walls
extending continuous from floor slab structure above and sealed to avoid
unauthorized access to room. If room includes an exterior wall, an additional wall
may be required.
• Do not permit floor and roof openings that could provide computer room access or
circumvent security systems and access controls.
 Window & Wall Openings: No external windows and other openings are permitted
within Computer or Telecom Room.
 Ramp: Provide ramp if raised floor grade change is required.

5.2.1. Facilities

 One hands-free digital speaker phone is to be installed.

 One chair with wheels is to be provided.
 At least one (independent from the Hotel main system) stand-alone air-conditioning
units to be installed.
 Air/air-conditioning ducts serving the hotel may not run through or into this facility.
 A humidity indicator and temperature gauge to be installed on the external wall.
 A portable hand operated extinguisher and fire blanket to be installed on the external
wall.
 A large whiteboard to be installed. (Applicable to IT Manager’s Office and Computer
Room).
 A fireproof safe for media to be installed in the IT Manager’s office.

5.2.2. Flooring

 Provide a raised floor with antistatic removable tiles tightly installed to avoid dust
penetration [20 cm (8 inches) above sealed concrete slab].
 Prior to installing the raised floor system, paint the concrete subfloor with epoxy paint
or quality deck paint to reduce concrete dusting and flaking.
 If a raised floor is not possible, cover floor with anti- static tile.
 Provide adequate drains below raised floor and non- raised floor areas. Slope floor to
allow proper drain-age and avoid standing water.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 260
5.2.3 Rack Systems

 Racks securing property systems are locked at all times. Computing equipment is
located in lockable racks.
 The minimum distance between rack rows is 1.2 m (4'-0″) and in front and back of
doors at least 0.9 m (3'-0″) free space. Racks allow for free-flow of air from front to
back.
 Place computer (Servers) and telecom equipment in separate racks.
 If a raised floor is not possible, install ladder racks for cable management within the
room.

5.2.4. Walls

 Design and provide exterior, above and below grade, wall construction that prevents
moisture penetration.
 Paint all interior walls.
 Cover telecom portion of the room with 19 mm (¾ inch) thick fire retardant plywood
for:
 The Telephone Company (Telco) Network / PTT (Post, Telephone, & Telegraph)
 Minimum Point of Entry (MPOE)
 Private Branch Exchange (PBX)
 Main Distribution Frame (MDF)

5.2.5 HVAC System Requirements

 Provide air conditioning to maintain room at constant temperature of 21° C (70° F) ±

and a humidity of 45% or less.
 Air conditioning system is dedicated to the Computer / Telecom Room and is
separate from other building systems.
 Design: Provide 2 air conditioning units sized to handle 65% of the peak load so that
the maintenance or short-term failure of one unit will not affect equipment
performance.
 Controls: Provide air conditioning system with a humidity and temperature gauge
connected to the Building Management System (BMS).
 Air conditioning is designed so the airflow flows from the front of the rack to the back.
 Detector: Provide moisture detection sensors connected to the BMS.
 Backup Power: Connect air conditioning system to backup power, separate from
Computer / Telecom Room power.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 261
5.2.6 Electrical

 Provide high and low voltage power for racks. Contact the MIND for specifics.
 Power for the Computer / Telecom Room is a dedicated feed from the emergency
distribution switchboard through one or more UPS units, treating and backing up the
feed for 20 to 30 minutes. This feeds a circuit breaker panel board within the
Computer / Telecom Room. Optional “whole room” UPS is recommended.
 Provide a separate power circuit for utility appliances. Provide three to four
convenience outlets for appliances (i.e. vacuum cleaners, fans, etc.) and label
accordingly.
 Refer to the IR Continental Supplement and contact the MIND for additional
specifications on power receptacle deployment for:
 Raised floor design
 Aerial cabling design
 Provide dedicated power with an isolated ground.
 Circuit breaker panel for Computer / Telecom Room is dedicated to the room.
 Provide the Telephone Utility demarcation point with a ground for net work facilities.
Install an accessible route between the external demarcation point and the
Computer/ Telecom Room to allow for additions.

5.2.7 Grounding

 Provide proper grounding in accordance with TIA / EIA-607 Telecommunications

Bonding and Grounding Standard, the current National Electrical Code and
applicable governing codes.
 Grounding is required for racks, cabinets, raceways, cable trays and associated
hardware that have the potential to act as a current carrying conductor.

5.2.8 Lighting

 Provide rooms and Guest Corridors with emergency lighting systems that last for a
minimum duration of 60 minutes.

5.2.9 Fire Protection & Life Safety

 Install FM200 Fire Protection & Life Safety measures,

 Provide wire basket guards over fire sprinklers to avoid accidental contact and
discharge.
 At larger Computer / Telecom rooms, consider providing an approved, dedicated
water mist sprinkler system to minimize water damage to equipment.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 262
6. Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF)

6.1 Function and Considerations

 IDF Closets house the wiring and electronic equipment used to connect user (guests,
administration, other network equipment) work stations to the MHR communications
network.
 These closets are designed and intended for the intra- building distribution of centrally
managed telephone, data communications and video & audio services and are not
used to support other building utilities. Locate closets so station wiring adheres to the
distance limitations imposed by the Ethernet standards.
 Locate IDF Closets with direct access from public or back of house areas and not in
guestrooms or other areas where access might disturb guests.
 Locate closets away from dust producing areas such as laundry, linen closets and
other potential areas of towel lint and fibers.
 Secure room with an electronic lock compatible with the guestroom system

6.2 Dimensions and Interior Finishes

 Size: the IDF room is sized on a case by case basis depending on number of outlets
to be supported
 Ceilings: 2.7 m (9 ft.) minimum in height; false ceilings not allowed.
 Door: 0.9 m (3 ft.) wide and 2 m (6.5ft) high minimum, open outward, with an electronic
lock.
 Dust: Provide interior finishes to minimize dust.
 Light: Provide light colored finishes to enhance lighting.
 Walls: Install C Grade 19 mm fire rated plywood on 3 walls.
 Minimum: 550 Lux (50 foot-candles), measured 0.9m (3 ft.) above the floor.
 Location: Install at 2.6 m (8.5ft) above floor at ceiling.
 Avoid wall mounted fixtures.
 This room shall not be shared with or used for any function other than legitimate
telecommunication systems. Each room shall be designed and located to minimize
the potential for water entry
 Allow a minimum clear working space of 1.2 m (4ft) from front and 1m (3ft) from rear
of data racks to the wall. Distances may have to be increased to account for
specialized equipment

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 263
6.3 Electric Power

 Use Power Distribution Units (PDUs) and are rack mounted.

 Electric circuits for network switches are supported by the UPS and property standby
generator (backup / emergency power). Consult with the MIND for local specifics.
 Labeling: Clearly mark service panel location and breaker positions.
 Grounding: Provide access to the main building grounding electrode.
 Additional Electric Power: May be required; determined in the review process.

6.4 Environment

 Temperature and Humidity: Maintain temperature between 18° C and 23° C with 40%
to 50% relative humidity.
 Continuous Operation: The ventilation system for the IDF Closet operates
continuously and is monitored by the Building Management System (BMS).
 Ventilation: Provide exhaust ventilation to dissipate heat generated by the equipment.
For example, an IDF serving 32 guestrooms may produce 5,000 BTU/hr. Actual
requirements vary depending on the project. Contact the MIND for specific network
design.
 Capacity: If the IDF Closet serves a large number of rooms, more than one floor or
additional equipment, a corresponding increase of ventilation or cooling capacity is
required.

6.5 Closet Penetrations

 Multiple IDF Closets: Closets are interconnected by horizontal cable pathways when
multiple IDF Closets are on a single floor.
 Drop Ceiling: If used, the IDF Closets are linked using cable ladder that is 300 mm
(12 inches) wide and 100 mm (4 inches) deep.
 Conduit Radius: Conduits entering the closet through a 90-degree bend from either
floor or ceiling have a bend radius of 0.46 m (18 inch) for 50 mm (2 inch) inside
diameter or less.
 Conduits with greater than a 50 mm (2 inches) ID have a radius ten times the conduit
ID.
 Pull Cords: Provide in all conduits.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 264
6.6 Fire Protection & Life Safety:

Provide wire basket guards over fire sprinklers / extinguisher to avoid accidental
contact and discharge.

7. Property Facilities

7.1 Main Lobby

The main lobby remains a central meeting area of the property. Based on the design of the
space, when the lobby or adjacent lounges have guest seating areas, provide ample power
outlets at each seating space for guests to ‘plug in’ their equipment. Install power sockets with
USB chargers in outlets with direct sight of the guest, and easily accessible. In addition, provide
wireless internet connection with optimum speed throughout the entire space.

7.2 Guestroom Layout

A generic guestroom cabling guide is available and you may contact the MIND for specific cable
requirements.

Cabling:
 Category 6A or higher run from the Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) cabling
supports the following systems:
• Voice Services (Analog Phones) - 1 RJ45 termination per telephone (desk, bedside,
bathroom, suite)
• WIFI Internet access point (with Minimum 4 RJ45 ports) managed by the wireless
controller and always registered by the HSIA gateway - consult MIND for project
requirements.
• Wired Internet access at convenient location near the guest working area / desk.
• Digital content TV – Minimum 100 TV Channels consult MIND for project
requirements.
 Provide Ethernet cable for IPTV
• Guestroom
• Suite
• Bathroom (option)
 Guestroom cable specifications follows the generic building cabling outlined Wired
LAN section
 The Connectivity Panel is a device that enhances the guest in room experience by
providing a consolidated connection between guests’ electronic devices and the
property’s in- room facilities in a visibly stylish and presentable way, thus enhancing
the perceived facility sophistication in the room. Connectivity Elements on the
Connectivity Panel are:

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 265
 • Power (based on individual country laws, provide multi adapter where allowed by
law)
• Universal Power sockets with USB charger - enhanced facility with ready to charge
mobile devices.
• Data Port (Option)
• Place the Connectivity Panel on the desk or wall in proximity to the desk where
the guest has easy access to the Connectivity Panel components.
• Consider placement so that it is not obtrusive, but easily located and usable by
guests.
• The conduit in the wall accommodates the cables (in some cases multiple conduits
are installed).
 Configure power outlet access to allow for simultaneous usage of large electronic
accessories and transformers.
 Equip guest with Wireless phone charger

7.3 Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) and power specification

Ensure UPS power locations in the following areas;

▪ Main Distribution Frame (MDF) cabinets / Closets
▪ Intermediary Distribution Frame (IDF) cabinets / Closets
▪ Computer on each work station
▪ F&B Point of Sale (POS) workstations
▪ Entire computer room

- Point of Sale (POS) Locations:

With the assistance of the hired IT consultant, must calculate UPS load requirements as part
of the power distribution. Typically, all POS stations will be linked back to a central UPS located
in the Main UPS Room.

- Computer/PABX Room:
A main Computer room UPS unit is to be calculated as part of the Computer specification
process. All devices in the computer room are to be connected to this UPS.

- Administration Office Locations:

UPS is provided from the centralized UPS unit located in the Main UPS room.
It is recommended that all PC’s and POS equipment need to be powered by a central UPS
power.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 266
7.4 Building Management System (BMS)

Approved brands: No preference

Summary standard: Server based, Web based Browser UI, PMS interface,
Guest Room Management System (GRMS) interface,
CAFM Interface
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premises)
MH&R strongly recommends the implementation of a Building Management System (BMS).
BMS is a computer-based control system installed in buildings that controls and monitors the
building’s mechanical and electrical equipment such as ventilation, lighting, power systems,
fire systems, and security systems.

Some BMS functionality, but not limited to are as follows:

 Illumination (lighting) control

 Electric power control
 Heating, Ventilation and Air-conditioning (HVAC)
 Security and observation
 Access control
 Fire alarm system
 Lifts, elevators etc.
 Plumbing, pumps,
 Closed-circuit television (CCTV)
 Other engineering systems
 Control Panel
 Public Addressing system
 Fire Alarm Monitor
 Security Automation
 Interface with Computer Aided Facility Management System (CAFM) Systems

7.5 Online Guest Room Management System (GRMS)

Approved brands: Contact MIND

Summary standard: Online in room control system (HVAC, Lighting, Moods,
etc.) and interfaced with the BMS, Door Lock System,
PMS. KNX protocol is “NOT ALLOWED”.
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 267
 No Required Functionality Mandatory
1 Define System Design & Protocols X
2 KNX cabling and related configuration protocols are “NOT X
ALLOWED”
3 Security & Level of encryption X
4 Energy Management System X
5 Water Management System X
6 Warranty Period X
7 Age of proposed GRMS Optional
8 Types of Sensors (Presence Sensors, Motion Sensors, etc.) X
9 Illustration of Fast Track of the system (Future Innovations) X
10 Support Details and Geographical presence X
11 Cost per Room (USD) for both CAPEX and OPEX X
12 ROI for 200 rooms hotel Specific
13 ROI for 400 rooms hotel Specific
14 ROI for 600 rooms hotel Specific
15 Report on Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditions (HVAC) elements X
16 Report on Lighting (Bulbs) X
17 Report on motorized curtains X
18 Report of modulated Valve X
19 Report on guest room status (Do Not Disturb & Make up my room) X
20 Report on guest presence in the room (light & AC On/off) X
21 Ready to Interface with OPERA V9 Property Management X
System (PMS)
22 Ready to Interface with CAFM (Computer Aided Facility X
Management System)
23 Ready to interface with an array of Building Management X
Systems (BMS)
24 Number of electrical Supported Zones X
25 Compatibility with older hotel systems X
26 Interface with Various Systems (vendor to share systems list) X
27 Ready for cloud solutions X
28 Daily energy saving reports in local currency & in (USD) X
29 Offer visibility on energy consumption of each room X
30 Recognize guest who consumed less energy Optional

7.6 Backup Solution

Approved brands: Barracuda Cloud Backup

Summary standard: Cloud backup and local appliance is hosted in the hotel
premises.
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: Barracuda Cloud and local site

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 268
Barracuda backup solution backups files in the cloud and on an appliance hosted in the hotel
computer room. It also offers a comprehensive protection for both virtual and physical
environments that you can manage from one intuitive web interface.

7.7 Server Operating System (OS)

Approved brands: Microsoft

Summary standard: 2 x Windows 2012 Standard / Data Center Edition
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

Note: If more than 10 Virtual Servers are to configured, MIND recommends Windows 2012
Data Center edition.
Having this operating System we can build, deploy, operate, and monitor applications on
premises and in the cloud.

7.8 ESX Host Servers

Approved brands: Dell Vertex with M630 Blade Server

Summary standard: Model as per MHR specs 64 GB RAM each
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)
ESX Server Hardware:
• VRTX with M630 Blade Server (Standard Configuration)
• 1 x Rack Chassis (Hot Plug Backplane)
• x M630 Blade Server
• Intel Xeon E5-2630 v4 2.2GHz 25MB Cache
• 64GB (4x16G) 2.400MT/s, Dual Rank
• 8 x Hard disk 600GB SAS 12Gbit HP
• Modular Setup
• ESX Storage Hardware:
• 1x MSA2324sa G2 Dual Controller Modular Smart Array 2.5” SFF (4x SC08Ge /
1x Snapshot 8 LTU)
• 8x HP 300GB HPL SAS HDD 2.5in SFF 6G

7.9 Virtual Servers

Approved brands: VMware Version 6

Summary standard: Standard edition
Core / Optional: Core

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 269
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

Most of property business applications are hosted on a Virtual environment and each
application has a dedicated Virtual Machine (VM). Contact MIND for VM ware Configuration
details.

7.10 Digital Video Surveillance / Closed Television Circuit

Approved brands: No preference

Summary standard: Closed Circuit TV (CCTV)
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

MH&R strongly recommends (and in compliance to a country’s statutory laws) the

implementation of Closed Circuit TV (CCTV). CCTV uses of High definition video cameras and
all keep locations to include hotels entry and exit points.

8. Workplace Configuration

8.1 Laptops

Approved brands: DELL Latitude E7370

Summary standard: Docking station and 24” monitor for selected staff only
(MHR specified model)
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

Ultra-thin, 14” screen with Intel Core m5-6Y57 Processor (4M Cache, 2.80 GHz), 34.6cm 13,3"
Full HD, Aluminum, Camera + Microphone, 8GB 1600MHz LPDDR3 Memory, 512GB Solid
State Drive. Network capable with Windows 10 and Office 365.

8.2 Desktops PCs

Approved brands: Dell OptiPlex 7050 Micro Form Factor (MFF),

Summary standard: 24” monitor (MH&R specified model)
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 270
HP Desktop (20 Inch, Intel Core i7, 16GB RAM, 500GB HDD, Windows 7) - Processor: intel®
Core™ i7-3240T (3.2GHz, 3MB cache, 4cores). Graphics: Intel HD Graphics. Monitor: 24″
OptiPlex 7050 Micro Form Factor (MFF):
• Intel Core i7-6700T
• Processor (Quad Core, 8MB, 8T, 2.8GHz, 35W)
• 8GB 2133MHz DDR4 Memory
• 256GB / 512GB Solid State Drive
• Mouse and Keyboard

8.3 PC Operating System

Approved brands: Microsoft

Summary standard: Windows 10 Professional 64 Bits
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

MH&R Operating system in Windows 10, 64bit professional. Update patch Release 2.

8.4 Office Automation and Collaboration

Approved brands: Microsoft

Summary standard: Office 2016 (Office 365 with Minimum E3 license) with
Windows Server, Exchange, SharePoint and SQL user
client access licenses
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Microsoft Cloud
Internal collaboration platform: Central, URL: http://move.movenpick.com

Platform that is accessible to all MH&R employees for company news, happenings and
Operating Standard Manual (OSM). It also allows sharing of operational best practices,
company news and insights accessible to MHR employees

8.5 Smartphones (Apple IOS)

Approved brands: Apple IOS

Summary standard: IPhone 6, 64GB RAM for selected staff only
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 271
IPhone 6 with retina display, 64mb disk space to include Facetime. Applications to be installed
are Skype, MH&R VPN Client and MH&R Push Mail.

8.6 Tablets (Apple IOS)

Approved brands: Apple IOS

Summary standard: IPad Air, 128GB RAM for selected staff only
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

Ipad Air series with retina display, 64GB disk space to include FaceTime. Applications to be
installed are Skype, MH&R VPN Client and MH&R Push Mail.

8.7 Key Locations & Componentry

8.7.1 Director of Engineering (BOH)

For the Facility Management an adequate software package (e.g. CAFM) with telephone (PBX)
Interface system and BMS shall be provided.
The technical manager’s office will be equipped with the following devices:
• 1x PC with 24” TFT screen
• 1x multifunctional color laser printer/scanner/fax/copier
• 1x work station BMS with 21” flat screen
• 1x protocol printer BMS
• 1x work station for access lock system and key encoder

8.7.2 Reception (Front & BOH)

Each working place (station) has to be equipped with the following devices:
• PC, 24 inch TFT-display
• Laser printer
• Key-encoder
• Telephone
• Credit card terminal
Additional Configuration:
• All workstations completely fed via UPS
• 1 remote BMS station for alerting
• Other technical specifications according to MH&R requirements

8.7.3 Front Desk, Concierge & Bell stand:

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 272
Because of the different computer equipment design and constantly changing form factor of
computers, printers and peripherals, contact the MIND for the current millwork document for
equipment sizes before finalizing dimensions and the desk design.
 Provide locations for the following technology related components.
• Computer
• Keyboard & mouse
• 24-inch screen monitor
• Printer
• Key encoder
• Credit card terminal / Point of Sale
• Phone (Depends on PBX hardware vendor. Contact the MIND)
• Other (such as parking equipment)
 Locate the equipment out of sight from the guest, but easy accessible and in a
good workable location for employees.
 Monitor: Provide a 45 degree viewing angle for the LCD screen.
 Ventilation: Provide ample airflow around the following components:
• TFT screen
• Printer
• Computer (most computer designs utilize front to back or side to side equipment
cooling).
 Design: Provide ample, dedicated space (to prevent overheating and to allow for
installation) and appropriate locations for the following:
• Keyboard: Locate with ample adjacent space for left as well as right handed mouse
operations.
• Monitor: Standard (space used accommodates a minimum 24 inches’ standard
screen).
• Station: One computer per station.
• Equipment: Space to accommodate MIND specified PC.
• Cables: Accommodate ample space at the back of the connected equipment.
Locate for easy access and connection point that is integrated into millwork.
• Standby Power: Local UPS connected to the computer, monitor and other critical
equipment. Review with MIND for requirement based on country situation.
• Printer: Large laser printer per station utilizing printers with 2 paper trays added with
access to front and back to change paper and toner and clear paper jams.

 Cable Tube: Provide a cable tube from the top of the desk (monitor, keyboard, mouse) to the
computer equipment, UPS location in the lower desk to properly arrange cables.
 Power: Provide a minimum of 7 power outlets above the work counter of the desk
for all devices (monitor, key encoder, credit card terminal and others) and at the
computer location (computer, UPS).
 Dot Matrix Printers: Provide an additional location for dot matrix printers in locations
where fiscal facturas / Fapio are a governmental requirement.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 273
  RJ45 Cable Termination Points: Provide per station: Refer to Cable Termination Points.
• Locate termination points at the upper half of the desk, out of guest sight, and
located where the cables can be connected to key card encoder, credit card
terminals, phones and other devices.
• Termination points are also located at the lower half of the desk for computer and
printer access.

8.7.4 F&B Outlets (BOH)

The number of devices depends on the size of the F&B Outlets and is to be determined in
consultation with MH&R.
Devices for each Point of Sales:
 Touch screen terminal
 Receipt Laser printer
 Bill Laser printer
 Credit card terminal (wired or wireless)
Devices for each guest transit area, especially outlet entry points:
• Touch screen terminal
• Receipt thermal printer
• Bill printer
• Credit card terminal (wired or wireless)
Devices for kitchen passage and at the beverage counter:
• Order-/Receipt thermal printers
Note: On terraces, large F&B Outlets and wherever long distances have to be covered
handheld terminals with credit card functions should be planned. Transmitting stations and the
relevant wiring has to be accounted for.

8.7.5 P.O.S. Restaurant

 Provide location for the following technology related components. Discuss with MIND
for details.
• Micros Workstation 6 (Minimum Requirement)
• P.O.S. Printer
• Credit Card Terminal
• Cash Drawer (option)
• Phone
 Locate the equipment out of guest sight, but easily accessible and in a good workable location
for the employees. Locate away from heat and moisture sources.
 Ensure ample airflow or cooling around the computer.
Most computer designs utilize front to back or side to side equipment cooling.
 Provide ample space for cables at the back of the connected equipment.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 274
  Provide a cable tube from the top of the desk (monitor, keyboard, and mouse) to the
computer equipment, UPS location in the lower desk to properly arrange cables.
 Provide a minimum of 6 power outlets above the work counter of the desk for various
devices (monitor, key encoder, credit card terminal, etc.) and at the computer location
(computer, UPS).
 Provide space for a local UPS connected to the computer, monitor and other critical
equipment
 Provide RJ45 cable termination points per station. Refer to Cable Termination Points.
 Locate termination points out of guest sight and at a location where the cables are
connected to P.O.S. terminal, credit card terminals, phones and other devices without
being visible to the guests.

8.7.6 Business Center (FOH)

Depending on the hotel and location, 2-6 work stations will be installed.
Each work station will be equipped with the following devices:
• 1 PC with TFT screen
• 1 telephone
• 1 Color printer
• 1 fax
• 1 copier

8.8 IT Security

Approved brands: Trend Micro Antivirus, TrustWave and mimecast,

Summary standard: Enterprise security for end points
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

Antivirus Server and Client PC protection at MH&R Enterprise level. Please contact Area VP
of Technology for implementation procedures and instructions.
• Advance Email Security and Threat Prevention
• Simplify PCI compliance efforts with an automated workflow that reduces the number
of questions you have to answer

8.9 Email

Approved brands: Microsoft

Summary standard: 1 Office 365 subscription per user Minimum E3

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 275
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Hosted by Microsoft

Email communication (internal and external) enabling the ability to have enterprise level high
availability with 50GB online storage. Push mail also included for mobile devices.

8.10 High volume printers

Approved brands: Hewlett Packard

Summary standard: Pay per copy / lease contract recommended
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

Networking capable HP top wide-format color laser printer provides high-volume printing up to
40 ppm. Print marketing materials up to 12 x 18 and banners up to 12 x 36.

Lightning-fast colour and black-and-white speeds up to 40 ppm letter size.

Expanded support for up to 12.6 x 36-inch paper lets you print for a wide variety of applications.
Simplify complex document production with duplexing and a paper-feeder cabinet for up to
500 sheets.

8.11 Individual printers

Approved brands: Hewlett Packard

Summary standard: For selected staff and Front Office only
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

HP Laserjet pro with minimum of up to 21 ppm. Network capable with additional paper tray

9. Telecommunications

9.1 IP PBX

Design system to accommodate property requirements for complete guest, administrative and
property operations.
 MIND confirms availability of adequate telephone service, service connection location
and name and address of telephone operating company representative.
 The Owner purchases the PABX telephone system.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 276
  Design Documents: Design Team documents include space, power, conduit and
environmental requirements coordinated with equipment suppliers.
 Requirements: MIND provides the Owner’s Systems detailed telephone system
requirements.

Approved brands: Alcatel, NEC, CISCO

Summary standard: Supports all hotel features
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise) or Cloud Based

The telephone system must be IP based and equipped with all standard hotel features such
as call accounting, voice mail and interfaces to the property management system.

MH&R strategic directive is that all hotels use of Internet Protocol Telephony (IP Telephony)
and thus advocates the afore mentioned.
The IP Telephony system must be a “state-of-the-art” switch and hardware with the latest
patches and releases.

 Platform must be Voice over IP (VOIP) ready or enabled for future use.
 The system must support open architecture and make provision for various interfaces
and value added products.
 Digital & Analogue capable PABX system.
 PABX and all other equipment offered shall be certified by Local telecom regulators.
 PABX and MDF earth shall be less than 3 Ohms.
 The system will offer an interface to a suitable call accounting system for correct
pricing and charging of guest and administrative calls. The interface will include the
following functionality as a minimum:
• Extension Number originating the call;
• Number dialed (without pin code details if used);
• Date and time the call started;
• Call duration;
• Number of meter pulse units where applicable;
• Trunk group / number the call was routed over;
• Pin numbers and account codes if in use;
• Call answer detection signal to ensure that only successful calls are billed to
customers.
 Software needs to include standard management software, debugging software, audit
log reporting, call reporting and extension reporting.

MHR criteria requirements for telecommunications focus on three functional areas;

telephone system, voice mail system and call accounting system.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 277
  Quality: Each system shall be a "state of the art" processor based system configured
and designed for the hospitality industry.
 PBX System: Provide to support traditional proprietary digital telephones, industry
standard analog telephones, proprietary IP telephones and SIP based IP telephones.
 Telephones: Meet governing regulatory requirements related to hearing aids worn by
hearing impaired guests.
 Coordination: Systems shall be compatible and be able to interface with each other, and
with the Property Management System (PMS).
 Approvals: The PMS and the Telecommunications Systems require approval for use in
the country of installation. The PBX shall also be compatible with the Public Switched
Network in the country of installation.

9.1.1 Administrative Telephone Guidelines

 The telephone system guidelines listed in this Module identify specific telephone station
requirements in each functional space within the property.
 The guidelines define a "typical" system; therefore quantities vary based on the size,
design and specific property /hotel program.
 Variations may be required due to operational "customs" in a particular country and
the project’s competitive marketplace.
 Customizing the guidelines for a property is performed in consultation with MHR
Operations and the MIND

9.1.2 Telephone Equipment Room

Provide a dedicated space within the Computer Room or a dedicated room for telephone
equipment, UPS (uninterrupted power source), and backboard. Refer to Data Center /
Computer Room and consult the MIND for specific requirements and provide the following:
 Adequate room size for planned and related equipment.
 Submit to MHR for approval an equipment room drawing that defines the coordinated
equipment plan. Submit to MHR for approval. A diagram that defines the preferred
layout is referenced

9.1.3 Guestrooms

Provide the telephone extension line at the guestroom writing desk and bedside. Contact
MIND for the Brand specific telephone line requirements.
 Provide telephones with volume control handsets and text telephones as required by
governing accessibility regulations.
 Mount accessible phones at required mounting height and clearance.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 278
9.1.4 Suites

Provide phone types at the following locations:

 Desk: cordless phone
 Bedside: corded phone
 Pantry: corded wall phone

9.1.5 Public Phones (if available)

Comply with Interior Design, finish requirements and the following:

 Conduit and electrical power to each phone and proper back panel housing.
 Locate one house phone at pay phone enclosure and provide a house phone jack
immediately below the counter.
 Verify phone height for chair operation.
 IP Telephones that connect directly to operator are to be placed in the following areas.
 Main Lobby – 3 units or more
 Near Front Desk – 2 units or more
 Ballroom Foyer – 2 units or more
 Meeting Rooms – 1 unit in each Meeting Room.
 Lift Lobby’s – 1 unit per floor

9.1.6 Telephone Extensions

 The system installer prepares a listing of the property telephone extensions in

coordination with the MIND representative
 Installer walks the property with property pre-opening team and designates room
names, staff position for each phone, pager, fax machine and modem connection.
The following is a representative listing of major extension groups:
• 9 = Outside Line
• 0 = Operator

9.1.7 Guestrooms

Use a four digit dialing plan for the main guestroom phone line.
• Dial 7 or 8 before the number for calling room to room
Provide direct dial buttons on guestroom phones for various guest services.
• 2000 = House Phones
• 2400 = Lounge
• 2500 = Fitness Center

9.1.8 Offices & Services

Use a four digit dialing plan with the actual numbering determined by the individual property design
and DID number availability from the Local Exchange Carrier.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 279
 • 5000 = Executive Offices
• 5100 = Sales & Reservations Offices
• 5200 = Accounting
• 5300 = Human Resources
• 5400 = Learning and Development
• 5500 = Security Office
• 5555 = Security Hot Line
• 5600 = Front Desk, Concierge, Bell Captain
• 5700 = Retail / Guest Services
• 5800 = Housekeeping / Laundry
• 5900 = Engineering

9.1.9 Food & Beverage / Banqueting:

Use a four digit dialing plan with the actual numbering determined by the individual property
design and DID number availability from the Local Exchange Carrier.
• 6000 = Restaurant Reservations / Business
Center
• 6100 = Banquet Services / Pre-function
• 6200 = Stewarding / Pantries
• 6300 = Lobby Lounge & Bars
• 6400 = Restaurants
• 6500 = Exterior F&B
• 6600 = Room Service
• 6700 = Kitchens

9.2 Other Communication Systems

Provide other communications equipment that may include, but not limited to, the following:
• Radios
• VOIP Wireless telephones
• Cellular Telephones: Commercially available with push to talk capability and
Closer User Group (CUG) subscription.

9.2.1 Radios

 System Frequency: UHF, VHF, DCT or other frequency approved within the country of
installation.
 Control Base Station: Provide desktop microphone and locate in Security Office
 Channels: Four channels minimum to address the property departments
(Security, Engineering, Housekeeping, etc.) and one channel for emergency calls
transmitted to all channels at once. At larger properties provide additional channels as
needed by other departments.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 280
  Repeaters: Locate centrally, two or more repeaters, power splitter, two antennas (one
on roof, and one in engineering shop) and provide one repeater with paging capabilities.
More repeaters may be required based on the property design.

9.2.2 Mobile Hand phones:

Provide under OS&E. The MIND recommends a subscription package which include mobile
phones device, data package, calling minutes, Closer User Group (CUG) with a local telecom
provider.

9.2.3 Telephone connection (Main Line)

Approved brands: No preference

Summary standard: A minimum of 1 PRI line (E1 or T1)
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

The telephone system must be IP based and equipped with all standard hotel features such
as call accounting, voice mail and interfaces to the property management system.

The number of inbound / outbound telephone lines installed on the PABX must be sufficient
to provide a 99% successful connection. The current Telco ratio is 1 PRI (30 channel lines)
to 100

9.2.4 Internal communications

Approved brands: Avaya, NEC

Summary standard: Wireless IP based telephones, Skype, WebEx, closer
user group (CUG) subscription or push to talk
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

9.2.5 Voice Mail

Voice mail provided to guests and administrative staff interfaces with the telephone switch and
property management system for message notification. Generally, voice mail in guest rooms

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 281
must come in 4 different languages: English, German, French and Arabic. Voicemail must have
8 simultaneous line recordings and a minimum of 30 hours’ storage capacity.

9.2.6 IP Telephones Handsets

Approved brands: Alcatel, Vtech, NEC and Cisco

Summary standard: minimum 12 core fiber + multi core copper if required
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

9.2.7 Guestroom Analog Phones

Analog phones are to be placed in the guest room Writing Desk, Bedside and Toilet/Washroom
(Optional).
The analog phone at the Writing Desk should be a true hospitality phone with Message Waiting
lamp and
speakerphone, 10 speed dial buttons, and full faceplate with services speed dial buttons.

Note: In an effort to reduce costs MHR recommends the use of Telematrix and or Teledex
phones or equivalent analog handsets in guest rooms, service areas (e.g. Pantries) and
designated public areas.

9.2.8 Boardrooms – IP Telephony Phones

Provide Multi-line digital speaker telephones and Voice Over IP conference stations

9.2.9 Back-of-the-House Areas

IP Telephone handsets must be provided for the following locations:

 Housekeeping
 Accounting,
 Room Service - shall have guest name recognition capability.
 Human Resources - Director, Assistants, Secretary
 Housekeeping - Director, Assistant, Clerks, Laundry, Valet
 Purchasing/Receiving -Manager, Receiving Clerk, Secretary
 Technical Services - Director of Engineering, Assistant, Secretary

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 282
  Main Kitchen - Exec Chef, Room Service
 Accounting – Financial Controller, Assistants, Secretary, Payroll Master, Cashier,
Clerks,
 IT Manager
 Front Office - Front Office Manager, Reservations Agents
 Executive Offices - General Manager, Resident Manager, Director of Sales &
Marketing, PR Manager,
 Coordinators, Secretaries,
 Business Centre – Manager and pc workstations)
 Restaurant - Maitre de stations
 Bars for bartender/guest use to include the pool bar
 Front Desk - Receptions/Guest Relations Officers
 Concierge Desk
 Bell Stand & Doorman’s station

9.2.10 Single line analog wall for the following:

• Service elevators
• Laundry and valet offices
• Engineering shops, chiller plant, boiler room, main electrical rooms
• Kitchen - main kitchen, banquet kitchen, service bars, bakery, dry stores and flower shop
• Ballroom and Meeting Room Corridors
• Room Service
• Health Club -reception, massage rooms, exercise area and male and female locker rooms
• Restaurant Service Stations
• Loading dock
• Staff Cafeteria
• Administration Boardroom
• Staff Locker Rooms
• Maids Room - Housekeeping Service Rooms and stores on each hotel floor
• Parking Garage - next to exit stairs and/or elevator

9.2.11 Fail Safe Telephones

Fail Safe telephones are analogue telephones that bypass the hotels PABX systems and go
directly to the exchange. The idea of Fail Safe phones is to eliminate any failure (accidental or
deliberate) to a hotels PABX system rendering any form of communication inoperative.

The following areas are proposed as a minimum:

• General Manager’s office

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 283
 • Duty Shift Engineer
• Telephone Operator’s room
• Security Office
• Telephone Operators room
• Computer Rooms

A minimum of 8 ‘Fail Safe” telephones should be procured and enabled at the telephone
switch. The designations of the 8 units can vary and is property / project dependent –
however the afore mentioned designations are mandatory and an MHR standard.

10. Commercial and Business Solutions

Business solutions can be hosted on premise, centrally or from the cloud. The appendix will
also stipulate the most current hosting model for each system and will also indicate which ones
are core (mandatory) and optional. MH&R’s strategy is to have all business solutions in the
cloud where applicable.

Acquisition of business solutions will be made5 months prior to the opening of the hotel and
after review by MH&R.

10.1 Accounting

Approved brands: SAP, SUN Systems (Infor); Sage

Summary standard: SAP for leased properties, SUN for managed properties,
PMS back office interface
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Sun/Sage on site (Hotel premise) / SAP in Cloud

Sun and SAP accounting systems are powerful financial accounting solution used throughout
MH&R hotels and offices. They are well suited to the hospitality industry with complex lines of
business or multiple locations, as it connects seamlessly with MH&R enterprise systems (e.g.
Hyperion) and provides you with a centralized, real-time view of data across the estate.

Core Modules
 Budgeting & Planning - budgeting & forecasting re: hotels expenses and projected hotel
occupancies.
 Financial Management - a unified ledger combining general, sales, purchase, project,
cashbook and user-defined ledgers
 Purchase Management – enables Purchase Orders, Purchase Requests and other
activities through sophisticated web-based spend control

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 284
  Reporting - generate reports on all real-time business data for critical insights
 Sales Management - full control over your sales, purchasing and inventory
 Time & Expense - handles project accounting, resource management, billing and time
& expense
 SAP is interfaced with Opera PMS

10.2 Banquet and event customer surveys

Approved brands: CST

Summary standard: e-mail invitation, web survey and reporting platform
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

Online Survey module that helps gauge customer satisfaction re: Banquets and Events. An
eMail invitation is activated and issued to Function Organizer who then fills in an online survey
on his/her experience at the hotel and services and organization of the particular event.

10.3 Booking Engine

Approved brands: SynXis (Sabre)

Summary standard: Embedding in MH&R website and collaboration platform
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

MH&R’s worldwide room reservation system provided by Sabre Hospitality.

Saber Hospitality provides SynXis CRS to all MH&R properties – it combines state-of-the-art
technology with advanced user features to deliver a reservation and distribution solution.
For details see section Central Reservations.

10.4 Business Intelligence / Management information

Approved brands: Hyperion / OBI (Oracle Business Intelligence) / Revintel

Summary standard: Business intelligence and Management Information
System
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 285
Management requires powerful and comprehensive information across the Mövenpick
business units to transform data into an environment which enables relevant questions to be
answered and important trends to be identified, ultimately facilitating better business decisions.

Across the hospitality industry, properties and corporate offices are asked to increase revenue
and guest satisfaction while keeping costs under control. Hyperion can help achieve these
goals. Hundreds of metrics are available to help users uncover past, present and future trends
and react to opportunities and threats.

Key Benefits:
• Business unit resource planning
• Financial Statistics
• Guest and Members
• Company Statistics
• Channel Statistics
• Future Reservations Group Statistics
• Catering Statistics
• Conversion Rate Optimization (CRO) Statistics
• Marketing Statistics
• Hyperion is interfaced with SAP
• Revintel is interfaced with Opera PMS

10.5 Central profile

Approved brands: Opera

Summary standard: Opera cloud single data base
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

The Opera cloud system is a unique software product that collects and manages individual
guest; travel agent; source; group and company profile data in a central database that can be
shared by multiple properties. It collects demographic information (postal and e-mail
addresses, phone numbers, etc.), complete stay details, production data and revenue
statistics. In addition, the Opera membership module supports many types of customer award
programs. Opera can be used strategically by the hotel or chain to support Sales efforts and
to enhance customer relationship management.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 286
The main modules within Opera are, Client Profiles, Profile Match and Merge, Memberships

Key Features:
- Seamless integration with other OPERA Systems
As part of the OPERA family of products, OCIS is completely interoperable with
all OPERA products including ORS, SFA, PMS, S&C, OWS and GDS
- Seamless integration with other OPERA systems
As part of the OPERA family of products, OCIS is completely interoperable with
all OPERA products including ORS, SFA, PMS, S&C, OWS and GDS
- Multiple addresses, phone numbers and many more
An unlimited number of postal addresses, e-mail addresses, phone numbers,
membership IDs etc. may be associated with each profile. Specific contact
information may be designated as ‘primary’ for the profile.
- Centralized membership program management
Membership program administration features automatically collect stays, nights
and revenue data from PMSs for administration of programs. OCIS
Memberships supports bonus points and promotions, monitors membership tier
qualifications and tracks award point consumption.
- Profile subscriptions
Profiles are kept up-to-date throughout the chain through a sophisticated
subscription module. Subscribed profiles may be managed centrally and by
designated local properties.
- Profile relationships for rate entitlements and commissions
Affiliations between guests and companies, agencies, groups or sources can
be recorded in guest profiles to allow the guest to access negotiated rates.
Agents and source profiles may be configured to specify commissions to be
paid when the profile is associated with a reservation.

- Advanced Match & Merge

Hotels can minimize profile duplicates by using the Match & Merge feature.
Customizable merge rules can be configured to determine whether or not
possible duplicate profiles should be automatically merged, remain as separate
profiles or manually reviewed

Key Benefits:
 Shared profile and reservation information
 Flexible, multi-tiered membership tools
 Easy distribution of rates to hotels

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 287
10.6 Central Reservations

Approved brands: Sabre

Summary standard: SynXis Central Reservations System (CRS), 2way PMS
interface, with CCX module
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

MH&R’s worldwide room reservation system provided by Sabre Hospitality.

Saber Hospitality provides SynXis CRS to all MH&R properties – it combines state-of-the-art
technology with advanced user features to deliver a reservation and distribution solution.
For details see section Central Reservation System (CRS).

The SynXis CRS gives your hotel:

▪ Unlimited global access
▪ Maximum exposure to millions of travelers by distributing rates and inventory through all
distribution channels, online and offline
▪ Connectivity to Global Distribution Systems (GDS), Online Travel Agents, Website and
Mobile booking engines, and reservation call centers
▪ An easy-to-use control center to manage availability, rates and content
▪ Seamless integration with other critical property systems to give you a holistic view of your
revenue
▪ Credit card payment integration with MH&R public website booking engine.
▪ SynXis is also interfaced with IDeaS revenue management system and Opera cloud PMS

10.7 Credit Card Clearing

Approved brands: 3C Payment Service Provider (PSP)

Summary standard: PMS and POS and credit card terminal interface
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud or on site (Hotel premise)

Due to different banking laws and government regulations 3C is mostly used in Europe and
selected areas in middle East – eg Dubai. 3C can be used with selected Acquirers such as
SIX, Ingenico or Network International.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 288
10.8 CRM (Customer Relationship Management)

Approved brands: Opera cloud PMS / (new central CRM available early
2018)
Summary standard: Not Specified
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

Description following soon.

10.9 E-learning

Approved brands: Lobster Ink; SkillSoft

Summary standard: Self learning
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

MH&R’s e-learning is broadly synonymous with instructional technology and computer-based

instruction using 3rd party organizations like Lobster Ink and Skillsoft. This virtual education
environment has helped many of MH&R employees benefit from tailored and customized
training programs that have added value in our employees day to day work life.

Lobster Ink is a media based training solution to supplement skills and knowledge training in
Food & Beverage, Front Office and Housekeeping. Through a common platform, we will
achieve consistency of knowledge being delivered in all our hotels. Learners write a test online
at the end of each module to track their learning progress and 'awards' are given to recognise
their achievements. Transfer of knowledge and skills to the workplace is evaluated by
department managers through practical assessments recommended by Lobster Ink.

SkillSoft provides a wide array of integrated learning types to continuously develop and
maintain IT skills – including short expert-led videos, video-based eLearning courses, live web-
based instructor-led training, free live mentoring services, certification test preparation, and
access to tens of thousands of full text online books.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 289
10.10 E-mail campaigning

Approved brands: MailChimp, Inxmail Professional

Summary standard: Bulk e-mail sending to customers with sophisticated
tracking
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: Cloud

These tools are e-marketing solutions that allow MH&R hotels and area offices to send
marketing emails, automated messages, and targeted campaigns.

10.11 Email Room Reservation Confirmations and Pre-arrival

Approved brands: Serenata@mail

Summary standard: Interfaced with Opera cloud
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

Uniform reservation confirmations across all booking channels:

With Serenata @mail hotels can standardize their reservation confirmations across all booking
channels. No matter whether the reservation was entered directly in the property management
system or handled via the central reservation system or the hotel internet booking engine,
Serenata @mail will use one consistent and interactive HTML template to send the
confirmation email to the guest.

With Serenata @mail, you can instantly email confirmations, pre-arrival emails and upgrade
opportunities directly from your Property Management System. These aren’t simple text emails
but rich, colorful HTML pages bearing the hotel's message and branding. They are all
personalized to the individual guest and filled with inviting photos of the best amenities of the
property. Furthermore, Serenata@mail enables you to address your guests in their own
language (including Arabic, Chinese and Japanese).

Dynamic display of images and contents:

Template content is displayed dynamically based on the known guest information (e.g. arrival
date, gender, known guest preference, etc.). Thus, your promotions or template headers will
vary seasonally and look different for instance in summer and winter.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 290
10.12 Enterprise Interfacing

Approved brands: Enterprise Service Bus (ESB)

Summary standard: Dedicated cloud solution interchanging data
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

The ESB connects all internal and external solutions pulling and pushing data. Connectivity is
across the Mövenpick business units with approx. 750 endpoints and 1 mio transaction per
month.

10.13 Enterprise SMS

Approved brands: Inetworx gateway

Summary standard: Application to peer (A2P) SMS
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

Enterprise SMS gateway will serve as an alert for most business solutions deployed at MHR.
This alert includes but not limited to reservation confirmation, welcome message, guest
requests follow ups inside and outside the hotel, global MHR promotions and offers, etc.

10.14 E-recruitment

Approved brands: Lumesse Talent Link

Summary standard: Job offer management and posting with public websites
and portals
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

This platform enables us to enjoy greater efficiencies in our recruitment practices, grant access
to candidates we would not have been able to discover before and will ensure an overall
professional interaction between MH&R hotels and job seekers.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 291
10.15 Frequent Flyer Program (FFP)

Approved brands: Frequent Flyer Program system

Summary standard: Management of miles
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Custom solution
Hosting Location: Cloud

MH&R is a partner of a frequent flyer program made of and we offer members attractive
possibilities of how to collect miles at all Mövenpick hotels and resorts worldwide. Depending
on the guest program and card status, guest might be entitled to some great benefits, such as
an early check-in or late check-out, Executive Lounge access or even an upgrade to the next
higher room category. The FFP system is interfaces with all hotel and airline systems.

10.16 Guest surveys

Approved brands: CST

Summary standard: Video Enhanced Online Survey (VEOS)
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

CST VEOS is MH&R Online Survey module that helps gauge guest satisfaction of hotel
accommodation, facilities and food & beverage. An eMail invitation is issued after guest
departure. The guest then fills in an online survey on his/her experience at the hotel. VEOS
includes a powerful reporting module.

10.17 Human Resources and Payroll

Approved brands: Country Specific: Recommended is HITS

Summary standard: HR file management, payroll, vacation request etc.
Core / Optional: Optional
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

HITS enables the management of compensation and benefits for all employees at the hotel.
HITS helps execute, manage a hotels staff payroll and benefits plans in an easy and sufficient
way. It also helps with useful utilities, such as, transferring the employees’ salary automatically
to the bank and also to link the HR financial processes with the back-office system which
facilitate the integration between the HR system and the financial one inside the organization.

HITS personnel helps with leave management system and time/attendance to help simplify
administrative activities, setup employees’ vacation packages right through tracking, analysis

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 292
and sharing information with your payroll. HITS Time Management provides an easy, highly
flexible way to manage and adjust and summarize employees’ time on the job via employee’s
integration with any type of time keeping machine like finger print, magnetic card or proximity.

10.18 Digital Asset Management

Approved brands: NCAG Media Database and Cavok

Summary standard: Online Media and asset databases
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud based

The Media and Asset Databases are web-based programs providing pictures, videos or
marketing material for internal and external download or website and design tools feed.

10.19 Meeting and conference builder

Approved brands: Social Table; Barco Click Share; Smart Kapp interactive
boards
Summary standard: Meeting & Events MHR strategy
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

 Meeting planners expect rooms that are technology enabled to help them collaborate
more easily.
 Deploy interactive technologies in meeting rooms
 Eliminate traditional flipcharts and take meetings to the next level by enabling remote
sharing and cloud storage of team notes through tools such as Smart Kapp interactive
whiteboards
 Meeting rooms must be free from Clutter and unnecessary wires.
 Make it easier for participants to collaborate and share presentations

10.20 Parking system

Approved brands: No preference or local solution

Summary standard:
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 293
MH&R recommends the implementation of Car parking and Access control for hotel guests: to
enable the following functionality; Convenient parking options for guests, customers.
 Integration of employee identification, neighbor passes, etc
 Potential Increased revenues
 One card for access and parking

10.21 Point of sale system

Approved brands: Symphony2

Summary standard: Micros 9700 or Symphony 2
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Oracle Cloud

MH&R recommends MICROS Simphony: it is the premier enterprise enabled point-of-sale

(POS) solution that enables our hotels to manage all food and beverage transactions at any
outlet. It links to a hotels property management systems, credit card interfaces, and reporting
at the individual property or revenue center.

Key Features:
• Tiered Pricing
• Paperless Kitchen Solution – no Captain’s Orders
• Hand Held Support
• Credit Card Support

Procurement

Approved brands: FutureLog

Summary standard: Webshop modules
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Custom solution
Hosting Location: Cloud

Futurelog’s Webshop is a multiple module cloud service.

Modules:
Purchasing
Inventory management
Recipe management
Capex approval
Invoice approval / interfaced with SAP

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 294
10.22 Property Management System (PMS)

Approved brands: Opera cloud

Summary standard: Opera PMS Version 9
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

OPERA PMS is a full-featured, integrated, web-enabled, multi-lingual and scalable suite of

products consisting of modules for the hospitality industry.

OPERA offers effective and easy deployment for smaller, independent single and multi-
property operations and global, multi-branded hotel chain environments.

In addition, Opera enterprise software solutions offer products for a hotel chain’s corporate
office, including Central Reservations Systems for centralised guestroom bookings, Sales
Force Automation for centralised function space sales, and Customer Information System, the
Customer Relationship Management (CRM) package specifically designed for the hotel
industry.
Built around the Oracle database management system, speed, reliability, functionality and
ease of use are built into OPERA’s design. At the core of the OPERA Enterprise Solution is
the OPERA Property Management System. This highly effective software for property
management and core central systems introduces new concepts of guest service and service
delivery, providing accurate, timely information to empower management and staff.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 295
Below table 3 shows default interfaces to be ordered along with Opera PMS:

Interfaces Interface Name

PMS & Back of House (Sun/Sage/SAP
Accounting)
PMS & Simphony
PMS & Call Accounting
PMS & TV System
PMS & HSIA
PMS & Door Lock System
PMS & Rooms Management System
PMS & IDeaS
PMS & Serenata@mail
PMS & Spa/Recreation system
PMS & SynXis
PMS & GRMS
BMS & GRMS

MHR Files Transfer via Enterprise Materials Control to Sun Accounting

Service Bus (ESB) Payroll/HR system to Sun Accounting
PMS to VEOS
PMS to Advantage M Program
PMS to FFP
PMS to MPS
PMS to Circle M Program
Service Centre to CAFM System
Hyperion
Passports Scanner to local CID

10.23 Sales and Catering System

Approved brands: Opera V5 Sales & Catering

Summary standard: Opera Sales & Catering
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

OPERA Sales & Catering Full Service facilitates:

▪ Flexible booking options for multiple conference rooms and multiple events
▪ Fully customisable catering packages, instant menu creation and resource inventory
control
▪ Financial tracking of both expected event revenue, margins and final consumption based
on customisable revenue types
▪ ‘Group Rooms Control’ provides detailed group forecast information in one screen
▪ Advanced ‘Banquet Event Order’ for internal hotel communications and planning

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 296
▪ Integrated data extraction with Word Merge functionality for fully customisable offers
▪ Advanced reporting options, such as Catering Pace, Pick Up, Forecast, Daily Menu Cost
and more
▪ Activity Management allows for tracking of e-mails, correspondence, contracts,
appointments and more
▪ Outlook or Group wise interface for synchronisation of contacts and activities
▪ Advanced data extraction possibilities for all Profiles types, with integrated Word Merge
direct mailing options
▪ Campaign Management for coordination of entire campaigns within OPERA.
Automatically creates sales activities and tracks resulting business
▪ ‘Sales Rep Dashboard’ gives an immediate overview of a sales manager’s current
activities

10.24 Sales Force Automation (SFA)

Approved brands: Salesforce.com

Summary standard: International sales lead management
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

MHR uses salesforce.com to monitor ISO (International sales offices) and their respective
activity reporting. It also manages all accounts contacts database for easy reference and a
better view all accounts history, key accounts contacts, and internal account discussions.

10.25 Rapid response/ service center

Approved brands: Service Centre

Summary standard: Technical and IT ticketing tool available on Forum
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Custom solution
Hosting Location: Hosted in MHR data center

MH&R uses the SharePoint based Service Centre throughout all hotels and across all regions.
All User requests are sent via the ticketing tool to be resolved, prioritized or escalated. It has
proven to be an effective tool that helps MH&R systematically addresses all IT related queries
in an orderly and systematic fashion. A hotel’s Service Centre is interfaced two-way with the
local CAFM system.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 297
10.26 Restaurant Reservations / Table Management

Approved brands: Respak

Summary standard: Handle table management and guest F&B preferences
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

ResPAK helps increase restaurant yield by seating more diners, taking more bookings, turning
your casuals into repeat diners, and enabling your front-of-house staff to provide superior
customer service.

It is a fully integrated online product – bookarestaurant.com and via moevenpick-hotels.com to

help further reach our guests, increase awareness on our different hotel venues and build
deeper engagement with our guests so they come back to your restaurant again and again.

10.27 RFP (Request for Proposal)

Approved brands: LANYON

Summary standard: Corporate contract proposal management
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud Based

Lanyon is a contracting tool used to receive and to respond to RFP from consortia (group of
independent agencies joined together under one umbrella) and corporations.

10.28 Spa and membership system

Approved brands: Reservation Assistant Software

Summary standard: Spa membership management, spa product and
interfaced with PMS
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

Key Benefits:
Scheduling: Booking appointments, recurring appointments, groups, classes and courses,
group-ex & fitness schedules, packages, staff time, manages contracts of spa & fitness
members.
Gift Vouchers: Sell, print, track, redeem and even partially redeem gift vouchers with ease
Stock Management: Inventory control and stock taking of spa products

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 298
10.29 Talent Management System

Approved brands: TMS (Talent Management System)

Summary standard: Employee performance management
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Hosted by MHR (Cloud Version)

This online application which facilitate the annual performance review, succession planning,
development planning and training course management for leaders within the hotel.

It also provides professional, streamlined processes which lead to better management of

performance and succession planning decisions.

10.30 Time and Attendance

Approved brands: No preference

Summary standard: Interfaced with Payroll System
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

Each MHR property / hotel must be equipped with a time & attendance machine mounted to
all back of the house employees’ entrances or accesses of the hotel premises.
This machine records employee’s presence according to their respective department roaster
and all related in/out movement while on duty. It is also vital to management access to hotel
staff canteen – when off duty you should not be allowed in the staff cafeteria.

10.31 Travel Agent Commissions

Approved brands: WPS (World Payment System)

Summary standard: WPS enables easy payment of all commissions
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

Through our partnership with WPS travel agent commissions are efficiently and easily
reconciled and paid. Travel agents receive one consolidated payment in their country currency.
Both hotels and travel agents receive detailed online reporting, reducing or eliminating
research time that occurs during the manual billing process. The hotel will be designated as
using an electronic commission settlement program which makes travel agents more willing to
book MHR hotels.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 299
10.32 Web check-in check-out

Approved brands: Contact MIND

Summary standard: Interfaced with Opera cloud PMS
Core / Optional: Optional
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: Cloud

The online check-in and check-out solution is the add-on to the existing reservation and
departure procedures. Due to the Property Management (PMS), e-mail, SMS and Credit Card
Clearing (CCC) integration, the guest arrival and departure experience is considerably
enhanced following the Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts Natural Enjoyment philosophy. No need
to queue up at the front desk.

10.33 Revenue Yield Management

Approved brands: IDeaS Revenue Management System (RMS)

Summary standard: Integrated with Opera cloud and SynXis
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: Yes
Hosting Location: Cloud

IDeaS RMS delivers the most scientifically advanced automated revenue management
solution available. You’ll have the power to forecast, control inventory, price and report with
absolute accuracy and tremendous granularity, driving better revenue for your hospitality
organization.

• Quickly and efficiently distribute availability

• Determine the correct pricing all properties at all times
• Accurately forecast and optimize demand using your transaction data
• Make decisions with a clear view of competitors’ positions
• Assess property performance on a daily, weekly, monthly, and annual basis
• Deliver maximum revenue impact by room class and length of stay
• Easily and uniformly deploy a single, user-friendly RMS across any number of
properties

11. Audio / Visual

At the initiation of the project design, contact the MIND to outline system requirements based on
the project location, site, operations and regional systems.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 300
11.1 Antenna Television (MATV) System

Dish Farm:
Provide an RF television distribution system throughout the property public spaces and
guestrooms for delivery of television programming.

Approved brands: Triax, Telves,

Summary standard: Minimum 4 dishes for different polarization
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

In order to provide guests with an international bouquet of TV channels, appropriate space

for a dish farm needs to be provided (e.g on building rooftop). The satellite dishes cannot be
insight of the guests.

Note: A multiplexer is needed where the TV channels are distributed by a local internet service
provider via cable TV network.

Infrastructure:
Provide IP based network infrastructure for guestroom entertainment and for other selected
facilities.
 The MATV infrastructure does not provide data service or high-speed internet access
for guests.
 The MATV infrastructure is designed to accommodate digital television (DTV) and
high definition television (HDTV) programming.
 MATV Distribution System: Design to receive and deliver local, satellite, premium and
locally originated television programming.

11.1.1 MATV System Rooms:

 The headend equipment is located in an environmentally conditioned, secure room.

Design this room to maintain a temperature between 18˚ to 21˚ C with 40% to 50%
relative humidity, non-condensing.
 Where the property is using local cable for the off-air local programming, the headend
equipment room is located near the A/V equipment room or near / in the property’s
computer equipment room.
 The MATV IP headend may be co-located with the property computer and / or telephone
equipment. If the headend is not located in the same room as the Communications
Room, provide Ethernet links back to the Communications Room.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 301
11.1.2 Television Channel Signal Sources:

 Provide programming from multiple sources; the intent is to provide programming

redundancy to minimize guest impact of any single source failure. Contact the MIND
for specific channel requirements for property location.
 Provide for reception of local broadcast programming from the national major
international networks broadcaster such as NBC, ABC, FOX, PBS and other significant
local channels.
 Provide reception of premium channels such as HBO, CNN, ESPN, Disney, etc. This
programming may be from local cable, from satellite or from the pay-per-view
programming vendor.
 Contact the MIND for Pay-Per-View criteria and specifics and additional MATV
system infra- structure requirements.
 Provide equipment and modulation for a minimum of 3 in-house channels used by the
property. Channels distribute content in full HD resolution.

11.1.3 MATV / IP Headend Processing

Design the headend to be relatively fail safe.

 Individual active single channel and pass band components are combined through the use of a
passive combiner to prevent the failure of any single active component affecting other
components in the system.
 Provide single channel processors that accommodate digital high-definition for off air
channels.
 Design for adjacent channel cable operation with minimum 100 active channels.
 Provide frequency-agile adjacent channel modulators for locally originated video
channels.

Distribute the MATV signals to the following areas:

 Guestrooms (salons and bedrooms in suites)
 Event space equipment rooms (coordinate with A/V systems)
 Food & beverage areas (including executive lounge)
 Retail areas
 Recreation spaces (and spa when applicable)
 Executive / Sales offices
 Business center
 Employee dining
 Engineering (for television service)
 In public areas, electronically block premium and pay-per-view channels.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 302
11.1.4 Guestroom MATV Distribution:

The distribution system is supported by the IPTV system to broadcast minimum 100 active TV
channels and provisions for future channel capacity. Consult with the MIND for property
specific requirements.

11.2 Guestroom Entertainment Systems IPTV:

Approved brands: Contact MIND to obtain the latest approved IPTV brand
Summary standard: Support at least 200 channels and channel
management, Hospitality TV; 4K, Ultra HD, Super HD,
MPEG4 Feed
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: On site (Hotel premise)

11.2.1 KEY Requirements & Functions

 Purpose: This system provides television programming (local, satellite, and premium cable
channels), music, property information (events, F&B, information and local “barker” channel),
interactive games.
 Additional Services: The system may also provide programming from related facilities
(local offers, convention centers, airports), etc.
 Minimum 100 TV channels based on the Nationality mix of the hotel guest.
 About 25 to 50 High definition TV Channels
 Should work on both coax as well as IP Network infrastructure
 Should support both Smart TV and standalone STBs
 Bring Your Own (BYO) Everything:
• Mobiles screen mirroring
• Playing music and video from the guest mobile
 Video On Demand (VOD) is Optional
 RSS feeds
 White labeled GUI which can be customized for the hotel requirements
 Internet Radio and TV
 Screen casting
 Screen mirroring
 From Apple, Android and Windows mobiles
 Apple TV / Chrome Cast / Miracast
 Digital Signage – optional
 Real time view of what guests are watching – reporting
 Options to connect Gaming stations
 Content Management Systems

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 303
  Interface
• With PMS for language selection / welcome message / Folio viewing / wakeup
call / Guest Messages / Room Service
• With BMS for Emergency Messages
• With GRMS
 Advertising and marketing
• Promotion / Services / F&B / SPA / Happy hours
• Upselling / yielding
 Reporting and Statistics
• Separate reports for Guest rooms and Public areas
• Mobile Device OS
• Amount of Data used per device / in Days / Months / Years
• Busiest areas in the hotel
• Most watched TV channels
• Most used apps
• Most used Screen sharing options (Apple TV / Chrome Cast / Miracast)
• Most interactive TV module used (Folio viewing / wakeup call / Emergency
message)
 Set top box should act as a WIFI access point and support Airangel HSIA platform in
existing properties which do not have latest smart TVs.
 The vendor must have access to universal videos / movies studios. This service will be
free of charge to guests and it will enrich content diversity in locations with limited TV
channels providers. (Refer to inflight Entertainments, Netflix, etc.)
 BYOD app must be included in the basic functionalities
 Interface with alarm system and public addressing system
 Dynamic and easy to use remote control (Example: Apple TV Remote control)
 Consider Anti-bacteria remote controls
 ROI Calculations
 Sales Level Agreements
 Geographical presences
 Innovation initiatives
 References: Biggest site, Biggest customer, Total number of TV supported in
Hospitality industry
 OTT Apps: Netflix, Icflix, IFli, Spotify, Pandor, Amazon, Hulu, Skype, youtube, Etc.

11.3 Digital Signage & Way-Finding: Visual Information System

Approved brands: Contact MIND to obtain the latest approved brand

Summary standard: Web based solution
Core / Optional: Core
Preferred / negotiated Price: No
Hosting Location: Cloud Based Solution

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 304
The design of the electronic way-finding system display is specific and unique to each property
and is distinct from the digital signage displays provided to promote property amenities, local
offers, and activities.
 Purpose: The Digital Signage Systems manage and display information relating to
events, food & beverage, and property activities to guests via various visual displays
throughout public circulation and assembly areas.
 Way-finding: This system incorporates way-finding features that assist the guest in
locating event spaces. Larger flat-panel displays located at “entries and “decision points”
along the guest’s journey provide information relating to event locations and times.
Smaller door-side displays near event space guest entry doors are used to provide event
information from this system.
 Digital Signage Systems: Independent digital signage systems are also used to
provide flight information at airport properties, general hotel and local area information,
and to promote food & beverage venues and special amenities (Spa, Golf Club, etc.) at
resorts.

 Headend / Server: The components of this system include a “headend” that accepts
and manages information, and various visual displays throughout public circulation and
assembly areas to present information to guests.
 Flat Panel Screen Displays: All systems include large flat panel displays with non- or
anti-glare viewing surfaces at key guest circulation junctures in the facility.
 Door Side Graphic Displays: All systems provide smaller flat panel door side graphic
displays located at entrances to each event space. These are integrated with the
signage.
 General Property Information: Provide at least one channel for property general
information that is distributed only to the guestroom televisions. Consult with the MIND
for property specific requirements.

11.3.1 Features & Functions

The information displayed relating to meetings and events, includes name, time and location of
the event. Large displays show meetings occurring or currently scheduled for each day; door
side displays show meeting information specific to the related event space.
 Advanced Features: More advanced features may include displaying graphics, client
logos and full motion video on large and / or door side displays.
 Property LAN: Connect the system to the property LAN such that programming and
control is performed from a designated computer in the administration offices.
 PMS: Interconnect with the property management system (PMS) to permit automated
posting of events and interconnect to the property television distribution system to
provide meeting information to the guestroom televisions. Consult the MIND for specific
interface required and available.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 305
11.3.2 Displays

 Locations: Locate large displays to provide directional information at each level of the public
areas for the anticipated flow of guests from the elevators and from the main entrances to
the hotel and event space. Locate the displays to minimize retracing or backtracking of
traffic.
 Large Displays: Large displays are commercial quality flat panel LCD displays equipped
with frames or bezels having non- or anti-glare protective glass.
 The quantity of large displays is determined through analysis of displays needs. Provide
sufficient displays such that, with a minimum character height of 19 mm (¾ inches), a
dwell time of 10 seconds for each “page” of information, and a full day’s event information
displayed, the maximum wait time to see any given event information does not exceed
30 seconds.
 The display may be recessed into a shadow box detail in the wall, or provided with a
decorative bezel to integrate the display with the interior architecture and treatment.
These details must provide adequate ventilation for the display device, and maintain
the fire rating of the wall into or onto which the display is mounted.
 Decorative framing or enclosure provides for some flexibility in display size to
accommodate the possibility of future displays of slightly different overall dimensions.
Coordinate with interior designer for better enclose.
 Provide for independent control of overhead speakers that are near the large displays
such that any programming that includes an audio signal can be fed to the display area
without interference from other local sound system programming.
 Door Side Displays: Provide a door side, flat panel graphic display at each public
entrance to each event space.
 LCD: Provide 56 cm (22 inch) (diagonal measure) door side displays adjacent to each
main entrance to each event space. Provide frames or bezels having non- or anti-glare
protective glass.
 The display may be recessed into a shadow box detail in the wall, or provided with a
decorative bezel to integrate the display with the interior architecture and treatment.
These details must provide adequate ventilation for the display device, and maintain
the fire rating of the wall into or onto which the display is mounted.
 Any decorative framing or enclosure should provide for some flexibility in display size
to accommodate the possibility of future displays of slightly different overall dimensions.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 306
11.4 Sound System – Background Music

11.4.1 Sound Systems:

 Background Music: Background music is defined as instrumental (no words or lyrics)

that is played at a low- level to provide auditory cues and subtle accompaniment to guests.
It is intended that this type of music is audible throughout public areas including lobby,
circulation and assembly and activity areas such as hallways and corridors. It is never
provided in guestroom corridors.
 Foreground Music: Foreground music is defined as having more dynamic character
and entertainment quality than background music and may include music with lyrics. It
is typically played at higher levels in food and beverage venues, event spaces and
activity areas.
 Customized Music Services: Sometimes referred to as: “music styling”, this refers to
services which (1) provide customized programming or playlists of music channels, and
(2) provide a means of changing the tempo and / or genre of the music according to
different times of the day; this is called, “day-parting”.
 Sound Reinforcement: Sound reinforcement systems provide amplification of voice and
music sources and from A/V program sources such as computers, video and audio
tapes, etc. These systems are provided in event spaces and entertainment areas and
some activity areas.
 Purpose: The background music (BGM) system distributes music to public areas
including lobby, circulation and assembly and activity areas.
 Location: The equipment is co-located with the main event space equipment, where
possible. Where impractical to completely centralize the systems, interconnect the
remote equipment with the central equipment to accommodate centralizing the
background music sources and to permit centralized master control of all BGM
systems.
 Quality: The equipment, materials and components are commercial quality designed
for continuous use. Consumer quality components are not acceptable.
 Standards: Workmanship complies with manufacturers’ recommendations and
generally accepted industry standards as published by ICIA / InfoComm and NSCA.

11.4.2 Features & Functions

 Music Sources: Background music for public circulation and assembly spaces
originates from a subscription service having no media located at the property.
• Examples include subscription music services that are delivered via Internet,
cable, or satellite. Background music services or sources that use on-premises
media such as cassettes, tapes, or CDs are not acceptable as music sources for
the public circulation and assembly areas.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 307
 • Background music subscription service for the public circulation and assembly
areas provides “day-parting” programming to permit the property management to
pre-arrange music changes according to time of day. These programming changes
occur automatically and do not require operator intervention or action.
• Background music systems for the event spaces provide at least three,
independently selectable, channels of music from the subscription service dedicated
for event space systems such that each event space salon or room may select from
among any of these sources. In addition, provide a line-level input on the patch panel
to permit the use of auxiliary music sources.
• Background m usic systems for food & beverage (F&B) areas; provide one
independent, dedicated channel of music from the subscription music service. In
addition to this source, each F&B area can select from the main property
background music sources.

11.4.3 Volume Controls

 Provide independent music volume controls for each distinct area of the property. Locate
these controls either at the main equipment rack or locally where the controls can be
concealed from public view and access, where local control is appropriate.
 Example: A local control at the front desk area to permit staff to adjust the volume
at night. These controls automatically reset to a pre-defined volume level and music
source before morning activities begin.

11.4.4 Speakers

 The type of speaker varies according to the architecture and space design
being served. Interior spaces may use an array of ceiling speakers, self- contained
speakers, planter speakers, etc.
 The intent is to conceal the speakers as much as possible while providing
consistent, low-level background music coverage.

11.4.5 Areas Served

 Requirement: Provide a continuum of low-level background music throughout the public

assembly and circulation areas. This music serves as an aural cue for guests.
 Acoustic Zones: As a design principle, ensure that guests are not able to hear more
than one music source at any time, at any public area.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 308
  “Buffer” zones of quiet areas or using noise from water features to acoustically isolate
areas may be required to accomplish this effect. Critical areas are at the entrances to
food & beverage venues and courtyard activity areas.

Low-level Background Music: Provide for the following areas:

Public Assembly and Circulation Areas:

Provide low- level background music throughout public circulation and assembly areas, except
guestroom corridors.

 Lobby & Front Desk Areas:

• Provide low-level background music throughout the lobby area.
• Provide an independent volume control behind the front desk.
 Porte Cochere:
• Provide the same programming as the main lobby area. In busy downtown area
locations where traffic noise is significant, this treatment is not required.
• Locate speakers in the porte cochere if less than 6.1 m (20 ft.) high, or may be
concealed in planters or landscaping nearby.

Restrooms:

 Provide low-level background music, same programming as the adjacent areas.

Typically, these speakers are tapped to provide a lower volume than the adjacent
circulation area speakers.

Elevator Lobbies:

 Main Floors: Provide low-level background music with same programming as the
adjacent lobby and circulation areas.
 Guestroom Floors: Provide low-level background music only in high-rise projects. Do
not locate speakers within 12.2 m (40 ft.) of guestroom doors.

Retail Areas:

 Provide low-level background music with same programming as the adjacent lobby and
circulation areas.
 Each retail space has an independent control for volume; themed retail areas (golf shops,
spa shops) have program selection from a dedicated subscription music source in addition
to volume control.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 309
Pre-function Areas:

 Provide low-level background music with same programming as the adjacent lobby and
circulation areas.
 For additional requirements see Event Spaces, below.

Courtyards – Indoor:

 Provide low-level background music from speakers concealed in planters or

landscaped areas. Where a functional part of an adjacent food and beverage or activity
venue, design the system to permit connecting speakers to that venue’s background /
foreground music sound system with independent volume controls.
 Ensure that guests do not hear more than one music source at any time at any public area.
This may be accomplished through interconnecting the programming switches or through
control system programming. “Buffer” zones may be required to accomplish this effect as
described above.

Outdoor Circulation Areas:

Provide low-level background music from speakers concealed in landscaped areas.

Courtyards - Outdoor:

 Provide low-level background music from speakers concealed in landscaped areas.

 Provide a local input to feed the Courtyard sound system, and tie lines back to the central sound
room.

Bridges or Walkways to Adjacent Facilities:

 Provide low-level background music from speakers concealed in landscaped areas, under the
bridges, or in overhead covered structures.

11.5 Events Space Sound Systems & Visual Display

 Purpose: Sound reinforcement systems accept signals from microphones and A/V
program sources and evenly distribute high fidelity, high-level, full frequency response sound
throughout an audience or listening area.
 Requirements: Provide built-in sound reinforcement systems for spoken word and
reproduction of recorded audio program for individual event spaces
 Passive A/V Network Tie Line Connections: Provide for event spaces that do not
require built-in sound systems as defined by the above.
 Control Systems: Digitally programmable and provide the exclusive user interface for
sound system functions. This system provides an interface with the property’s

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 310
 management system and allows staff to monitor and control the AV systems through
computers and mobile devices on the management network.
 Locate control system control panels both at the main equipment rack and in each
event space.
 Processing (for the sound systems): DSP based (digital signal processing) that provides
mixing, routing, equalization, leveling, combining, and other sound processing functions.

11.5.1 Event Spaces:

 Pre-function Areas: Provide system capacity to play background and foreground music
during reception events throughout.
 Provide the capability to interconnect these areas with adjacent event spaces for overflow
functions.
 Systems are controlled by the control systems for the adjacent event spaces.
 Zone the systems to permit assigning program sources for any of the adjacent event spaces.
 Ballrooms: Provide independent high-level, high intelligibility sound reinforcement
systems in each Ballroom salon.
• The primary purpose of Ballroom sound reinforcement systems is to amplify the
spoken word.
• The secondary purpose is to provide foreground music and playback of recorded
A/V programs.
• The third purpose is to provide background music.
• The Ballroom sound reinforcement systems are not intended to be the primary
reinforcement for live musical entertainment.
 Provide input / output plates, in-room controls, A/V network connectivity and ceiling
speakers.
 Provide in each center salon a ceiling mounted manually retractable projector mount,
to accommodate portable projectors, positioned to serve the primary object wall.
 Extend the connectors from the projector mount to the front of the room’s A/V input
plate. Built-in projectors and / or projection screens are not required.
 The retractable projector mount includes connections for power and video signals;
these connections run to the input plate located on the object wall of the salon.
 Input connections include AVNet tie lines which are used with portable transmitter /
receiver pairs to route analog or digital signals to the projector. The transmitter
provides audio program signal break-out to feed the built-in room sound system.
 Provide multiple retractable projector mounts in salons that have multiple projection
walls.
 These projector mounts may also serve as hang points and retractable feature lighting
supports, when properly specified.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 311
11.5.2 Meeting Rooms

 Meeting Rooms are equipped with built-in sound systems and tie line plates as described
for Ballrooms.
 Meeting Rooms are each also equipped with built- in electrically operated projection
screens and manually retractable projector mounts positioned to serve the primary
object wall.
 Extend the connectors from the projector mount to the front of the room’s A/V input
plate.
 Use Video walls or minimum 70inches interactive smart board. Built-in projectors are not
required.
 Built-in projection screens, at the minimum, are HD aspect ratio, and may be dual-
aspect ratio, where practical.
 Meeting Rooms may be required to have floor pockets for power, data and
telecommunications connections; contact the MIND Representative for additional
requirements.

11.5.3 Breakout Rooms

 Provide each room with a tie line plate as described for Ballroom salons.

Boardrooms:
 Boardrooms are defined as having fixed walls (no operable partitions) and a fixed table.
One end wall is designated as the “object / projection wall” or front of the room.
 The Boardroom technology is “UHD video tele-conference ready” including
interconnections with telecommunication services (ready to support VOIP conference
calls), and pre-wired for multiple microphones at the fixed Boardroom table.
 Use Video walls or minimum 70inches interactive smart board. Built-in projectors are not
required
 Provide inputs for digital video, audio, network, tele- communications and convenience
outlets built into the Boardroom table.
 Provide a built-in sound system having features and functions as described for Ballroom
salons, above.
 Provide inputs for the sound system and flat panel display at both the front of the
room and built into the Boardroom table.
 Provide a concealed large flat panel visual display located at the front wall of the room.
 This display is equipped with upgraded front-firing built-in speakers and multiple inputs;
the inputs are extended to the Boardroom table and to the front wall of the room.
 Equip the display with non- or anti-glare viewing surface.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 312
11.6 Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The digital signal processing components are commercial duty, programmable units. The DSP
function may be either a single central device or distributed processing devices.
 The DSP performs the function of mixing signals from input panels and auxiliary signal
sources including signals from the background music service.
 The DSP provides level control for system inputs and outputs.
 The DSP system combines channels of associated Ballroom salons, meeting rooms and / or Pre-
function areas.
 Front panel controls of the DSP are electronically disabled or secured behind
mechanical covers. The system design does not require and does not permit user
interface or manipulation directly of the DSP unit.
 The DSP provides bandpass equalization of sound signals from the inputs and
equalization of the signals to the speakers.
 The DSP leveling of music signals from background music sources.
 The DSP programming does not include automatic mixing or gating functions.

11.6.1 Amplification

Provide amplification for each channel of sound reinforcement.

 Amplifiers are commercial duty; convection cooled and designed to drive constant voltage
speaker circuits.
 Amplifiers are either single or multichannel devices.

11.6.2 Monitoring

Provide auditory monitoring at the equipment rack for each amplifier channel speaker level output.
 Provide one-line level monitoring channel with its input on the patch bay.
 Provide for the use of a headphone for monitoring signals.

11.6.3 Output Controls

Speakers are wired in zones relating to head table areas of event spaces. Individual zones of
speakers may be turned on or off using the control system. This function is provided through the
control system DSP and multiple amplifier channels.
 Alternately, when the number of zones to be controlled exceeds three, use relays to turn
off speaker zones and minimize the number of patch cords required to restore performance
in the event of DSP or control system failure as noted above.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 313
11.6.4 DSP Programming

Provide a legal copy of the authoring software and unrestricted license and an archival electronic
copy of the operating code to the property as part of the as-built documentation of the system.

Control
Event space sound systems are equipped with an overall control system. The primary function
is to provide local and central control of the basic functions of the sound systems.
 The control system is the exclusive staff and guest interface with the processing
equipment; direct access to the processing is not required, accommodated or
permitted.
 The control system provides browser based IP access via the internal property network
and via internet access. This includes monitoring and control functions of the sound
systems.
 The development and design of the user interface screens, system functionality,
and logic are developed through an iterative process involving the design consultant. A
revision of the programming for the DSP and control system is anticipated three months
after the property is opened.
Central Control Panel
 The event space sound reinforcement system includes a large 30 cm (12 inch) diagonal
measure, minimum, color LCD touch screen control panel for overall system functions.
 System functions are provided by touch screen. The user interface does not require
the user to use any pointing device or keyboard for system operational functions.
 Where event spaces are remote from the equipment room, provide a large touch
screen control panel in a rugged protective enclosure in the service corridor associated
with these rooms.
In-room Local Controls:
 Each event room, area, or salon that is equipped with a dedicated sound system is
provided with an in-room control panel located near the entrance from the service
corridor.
 In Ballroom salons and Meeting Rooms where a service vestibule is provided, locate
the in-room control panel within the vestibule in a protective enclosure where it is not
visible to guests.
 Where a salon or Meeting Room does not have a service vestibule, locate the in-room
control panel behind a protective and concealing cabinet
 The controls are designed to give access to specific system functions to the staff and
to meeting planners as desired by the staff, but also provides a means of securing the
controls to prevent access or operation by unauthorized persons when so desired. This
security is accomplished by electronic, electromechanical or purely mechanical means.
 The control system is micro-processor based to provide the user interface to the digital
signal processing system. The in-room control panels provide extended functions
including selection of lighting presets.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 314
  In-room control panels are intrinsically rugged and installed in a way to be relatively
impervious to damage from physical contact from carts, chairs, etc. normally found in
event spaces.
 In-room control panels include an illuminated, programmable LCD display, push
button and / or rotary controls to provide user interface and system status information.
In addition, the control system accommodates the use of mobile technology to provide
staff with system control.
Control System Programming
 Provide a legal copy of the authoring software and unrestricted license and an archival
electronic copy of the operating code and user interface screen designs to the property
as part of the as- built documentation of the system. Coordinate with MIND
representative to obtain Supplement for specific, parametric control system functional
and programming requirements.
 Quantity: The quantity of speakers is determined by the spacing, as described above.
The quantity of evenly spaced ceiling speakers for each event space, meeting room, or
ballroom salon can be roughly calculated as the overall area divided by (floor-to-ceiling
dimension) squared.
 Zoning for Control: Provide individual zones of speaker control to permit turning off speakers
above head tables and platforms, when necessary. This controls feedback and improves
system gain.
 Provide interconnecting cabling between and among the event spaces, associated Pre-
function, activity areas and appropriate communication “points of presence” in the facility
such as television headend rooms, telephone equipment rooms, computer rooms, the
loading dock, business center, A/V department operations office, etc.
 Provide multi-mode fiber and shielded Category 6 network cabling.
 The minimum number of interconnecting cables is four A/V optimized Ethernet circuits
terminated on RJ45 connectors and two multi-mode fiber cables terminated on
specialized A/V connectors (e.g Neutrik). The performance of tie lines is certified to
meet BICSI standards for both design and performance for the type of cabling installed.
 The tie lines land on plates in each of the event spaces.
• Event spaces are equipped with at least one of these plates; larger spaces are
equipped with at least two plates.
• These connections are integrated with the A/V input/ output plates.
 Ballroom Salons and Meeting Rooms may be required to have floor pockets for power,
data and telecommunications connections; contact the MIND Representative for
additional requirements.
 This network serves event spaces including those such as breakout rooms and other
areas that may not be equipped with built-in A/V or sound systems.
 Design connectors on the plates to be protected from damage from physical contact
from carts, chairs, feet, etc. normally found in event spaces.
 Provide a media connection panel located at the property receiving dock. This panel
provides interconnectivity to local and national television production vehicles for special
events. The panel is stainless steel, lockable, and weather tight.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 315
11.7 Portable A/V Equipment

Provide a complement of portable equipment that supports the built-in systems.

 Include microphones, cables, projectors, flip charts, theatrical lighting systems, portable
high-level sound systems, projection screens, production mixers for audio and video,
cameras, adapters, video graphics displays, computers, etc.
 Develop a project specific list for portable A/V and lighting equipment requirements.
Include interfaces, receivers and transmitters required for analog and digital video and
audio sources to work with the AVNet system.

11.8 Documentation

Provide technical manuals with the following:

 Detailed functional block diagrams that illustrate as-built conditions. Identify each
equipment item by manufacturer and model number, label alpha numerically contractor
furnished controls, relays, patch panel jacks, and similar devices. Reference these
designations on fabrication drawings, patch panel details, and related instruments.
 Detailed as-built drawings of contractor fabrications. Illustrate the mechanical and
electrical construction, with manufacturer’s part numbers and values for components.
 Final rack elevation drawings.
 Manufacturer’s literature, including descriptive literature and performance
specifications, operating manuals, and servicing information.
 Schedule of nominal control settings for proper sys- tem operation.
 Test and measurement data gathered during systems tests and commissioning.
 Systems Operating Instructions for each system specifically describing the functions,
operation, and maintenance of the systems installed. Write the instructions in full
detail in language sufficiently clear for comprehension by nontechnical persons.
 Troubleshooting guide for system operators listing the procedures to follow in the
event of an apparent equipment failure, written in logical outline format.
 A restatement of the terms and conditions of the sys- tem warranty and a schedule of
manufacturer warranties covering parts and labor for the equipment supplied.
 Archival copies of un-compiled source code and user interface designs for programmed
equipment. Include copies of the authoring software and documentation.
 Systems Operating Instructions for each system specifically describing the functions,
operation, and maintenance of the systems installed. Write the instructions in full
detail and in language sufficiently clear for comprehension by non-technical persons.
 Schedule of nominal control settings for proper system operation.
 Troubleshooting guide for system operators listing the procedures to follow in the
event of an apparent equipment failure, written in logical outline form.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 316
  Simplified as built block diagrams deleting alpha numeric references to controls, relays,
patch panel jacks and other similar devices.
 A restatement of the terms and conditions of the system warranty. Describe the terms
of manufacturer warranties, that extend beyond the one year provisions of this system
warranty.
 Submit within four weeks of final acceptance, four complete sets of corrected or
revised pages and drawings to update the operating and maintenance manuals
described above to reflect adjustments and changes to the system during the final
testing and acceptance.

11.9 Warranty

The system warranty includes the following:

 Guarantee to repair or replace defects in materials, workmanship or performance of
the installed systems or their comprising elements at no additional cost.
 Provide temporary replacement equipment of a similar nature if repairs to the defective
item cannot be completed within 24 hours. Use temporary labels to match the original
labeling nomenclature. Always re- place the temporary item with the original unit after
repair.
 Replace any equipment item that exhibits similar failures three times within the warranty
period.
 Replace with new equipment any equipment item that exhibits similar failures three
times within the warranty period, at no cost.
 Respond with remedy to requests for service within 24 hours of the request. Provide
the property’s personnel with a telephone number with which service requests can
be placed at any time.
 This requirement applies from the date of the AV consultant’s recommendation of
acceptance and continues for the following 365 consecutive days. The warranty shall
remain in effect for a period of one year from the date of system acceptance except
for equipment items whose manufacturer’s warranties exceed this warranty period and
they remain in effect beyond the one-year system warranty period.

11.10 Food & Beverage Sound Systems

Providing background and foreground music entertainment in food & beverage areas
complements the atmosphere developed by the interior designer and operator.
 Local Controls: Provide in each area and in each venue.
 Location: The equipment providing the background music is co-located with the main
event space sound systems, where practical.
 Access: Each area being provided with background music has local controls where the
controls are concealed from public view and accessed only by staff. The controls are

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 317
 located within the space being controlled so that staff can hear the effects of their
adjustments. The controls include selection of programming and volume control.
 Background Music: Themed entertainment and food & beverage areas are provided with
a dedicated channel of background music from the subscription music service. No local
music inputs, such as CD or iPod/MP3 players are required.
 Additional Requirements: There may be more advanced A/V entertainment
requirements; see Food & Beverage Concept Report for specific requirements.

11.10.1 All Day Dinning and Fine Dining Restaurants

 Provide background music throughout the seating areas.

 If a seating section is designated as “Private Dining” provide a local speaker level
volume control for that area.

11.10.2 Lobby Lounge / Bars

Provide background and foreground music throughout the seating areas.

 Provide zoned local volume controls and a music source selection control behind the
bar.
 If the concept calls for television entertainment, provide sufficient televisions to
permit most of the seated patrons to view a video display without having to turn away
from their table guests.
 Current technology, professional quality displays with non- or anti-glare viewing
surfaces and third-party Ethernet (cabled) control are required.
 Provide a digital media server (player) and control system with IPTV terminal(s)
behind the bar and connected to the sound system.
 Locate a touch screen control panel behind the bar and at the hostess stand.

11.10.3 Piano Bars

Where a piano is part of the concept for a lounge or bar area, provide a contact microphone in
the piano to provide live sound to the system.
 Provide a small control panel located at, on, or near the piano that includes a switch to
turn on / off the local background or foreground music and a volume control to adjust the
level of piano music. The activation of this control will cause the music to ramp up or
down over a 10 second period, not simply switch on and off.
 Provide an identical panel as described above behind the bar to permit the bartender
to control the sound from the piano and control the background and foreground music
volumes.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 318
  Where the piano entertainment is anticipated to include a vocalist or small combo,
provide one or two microphone jacks in addition to the piano microphone. Provide a
small, portable sub-mixer located at the piano to permit the combo musicians to sub-
mix their instruments. The bartender panel has three volume controls: one for the piano,
one for the vocalist and one for the other instruments.
 Where the piano is located near a food and beverage venue, provide the piano as a
music selection for each such venue.

11.10.4 Pool Bars:

Provide background and / or foreground music with the main programming source located at
the central control room. Provide zoned local volume controls and source selection controls
behind the bar.
 Where the pool complex is significant, provide a dedicated feed and channel from the
central music server with a local control panel to permit adjusting the music server for
this area.
 Where this feature is included, ensure that the adjacent activity area sound systems
are interconnected such that the same music programming is played throughout the
pool area.
 Locate and contain A/V equipment serving pool areas in an environmentally conditioned,
clean, dry and secure space or provide a self-contained, environmentally sealed and
conditioned equipment rack for this equipment.

11.11 Fitness Area Sound & Video Systems

Provide background and foreground music to complement the guest activities in various areas
of the Fitness Center.
 Volume Controls: Provide for each activity area.
 Location: The equipment providing the background music is co-located with the main
event space sound systems, where practical. Alternately, it is located in a staff lounge,
telecom equipment closet or administrative office associated with the Fitness Areas.
 Access: Each activity area being provided with music has local controls where the
controls can be concealed from public view and accessed only by staff. The controls
are located within the space being controlled so that staff can hear the effects of their
adjustments. The controls include selection of music programming and volume control.
 Entry Areas and Circulation Corridors: Provide low-level background music to welcome the
guest to the fitness area. If a reception desk is included, volume controls for pool, reception
and locker rooms are located behind the desk.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 319
11.11.1 Aerobics & Weight Rooms:

 Provide background and foreground music and televisions in each of these areas. The
foreground music is an independently selectable channel of music from the subscription
service.
 Provide wall mounted volume and source controls to permit the guest to make music
selections.
 Provide latest interactive video wall technology and flat screen television monitors that
can be easily seen by guests using the aerobic machines and exercise area.
 Aerobic exercise equipment (elliptical machines, treadmills, steppers, etc.) are
equipped with individual smart television monitors ready with BYOD & BYOC and
personal head / ear phone jacks
 MATV: Connect exercise equipment m onit or s and area flat panel televisions to the
MATV (IPTV Terminal)
 Locker Rooms: Provide low-level background music on the same channel as the
entry area; locate controls for this zone at the reception desk.
 Indoor Pool Areas: Provide low-level background music; locate controls for this zone
at the reception desk.
 Outdoor Pool Areas: Provide low-level background music using weather proof
speakers concealed in surrounding plantings. If a pool snack bar is provided, connect
speakers’ system to the pool snack bar sound system. Otherwise, locate controls
behind the reception desk.

11.12 Spa Sound & Video Systems

 Background and Foreground Music: Provide to complement the guest activities in

various areas of the spa.
 Volume Controls: Provide for each activity area. The equipment providing the
background music is co- located with the main event space sound systems, where
practical.
 Access: Each activity area being provided with music has local controls where the
controls can be concealed from public view and accessed only by staff. Locate the
controls within the space being controlled so that staff can hear the effects of their
adjustments. The controls include selection of music programming and volume
control.
 Dedicated Television Information Channel: Properties equipped with a Spa have a
dedicated television information channel that is distributed to guestrooms via the
guestroom entertainment system.
 The programming for this channel originates from the
 Spa Manager’s office.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 320
  Additional Requirements: The Spa Programming Report may call for additional
A/V technologies to be incorporated into the Spa A/V systems including digital art
distributed throughout the Spa areas, personal listening pods, etc.

11.12.1 Entry Area and Circulation Corridors

Provide low-level background music to welcome the guest to the Spa.

 Locate volume controls for the entry area, circulation corridors, pool and locker rooms
behind the reception desk.
 Provide low-level background music throughout the guest circulation corridors to mask
sounds from the treatment rooms. Alternately, provide low-level “nature or organic”
sounds from a digital music source.

11.12.2 Treatment Rooms

Provide stereo ceiling speakers and a wall mounted music control in each treatment room.
 The music control provides volume of and music selection from least six channels of stereo
background music. An auxiliary music input permits the playing of music from personal
music devices.
 Alternately, provide WiFi system designed to provide wireless music service
throughout the Spa. Provide each treatment room with WiFi / Bluetooth receiver
(docking station) having input to accept signals from a personal music player such as
smart mobile devices.
 A commercial music subscription service is the source of the background music
programming.

11.12.3 Outdoor Areas

Provide low-level background music using speakers concealed in surrounding planting.

Controls are located behind the reception desk or in a nearby service area.

11.12.4 Wet Areas

Provide low-level background music throughout the wet activity areas including whirlpool,
plunge, indoor pool and wet treatment rooms. Provide water and weather proof and self-
contained speakers.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 321
Retail Areas:
Provide low-level background music with volume controls at the cashier area. The music
channel is the same as the adjacent entry or corridor music.

11.13 Architectural acoustics, Event Spaces

 The acoustical characteristics of the event spaces are critical to creating successful
meeting experiences.
 Excessive background noise, excessive reverberation, echoes and sound from adjacent
spaces interfere with the guests’ ability to discern the spoken word, increases stress and
reduces intelligibility. The intent is to reduce stress and maximize intelligibility.
 HVAC Systems: The most typical source of unwanted high levels of background noise
is the HVAC system. Design the HVAC systems to minimize noise levels in the event
spaces.
 Avoid locating noise making HVAC devices in the ceiling spaces or on the roof of event
spaces. Select quiet supply diffusers while following ASHRAE guidelines for noise
control.

11.13.1 Echoes

 Cause: Echoes are caused by large, acoustically reflective (hard) surfaces. Most
frequently, these are the walls of the event space.
 Physical Properties: The greater the distance between the sound source and the
reflective surface, the more distinct the echo becomes.
 Therefore, larger rooms are more susceptible to having echo problems. Live bands
and productions with staging and high-level portable sound systems exacerbate this
echo problem because their speakers direct much of their energy toward the side and
rear walls.
 Absorptive Surfaces: Wall surfaces which are properly designed with diffusive or
absorptive elements will reduce or eliminate echoes.

11.13.2 Isolation from Adjacent Spaces

 Acoustic Isolation: Provide a sense of privacy for guests attending meetings in event
spaces. This relies on isolation from adjacent spaces including public and service
corridors, and adjacent event spaces.
 Sound Transmission Class (STC): The isolation quality of architectural elements (walls,
doors, operable partitions) is often referred to as Sound Transmission Class, or STC.
This standard based, single figure rating is determined under tightly controlled

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 322
 laboratory conditions on a relatively small area sample. Because of field conditions,
larger architectural elements require a higher STC rating to compensate for vibro-
acoustic behavior of the element. EG: Larger operable partitions need to be rated higher
than smaller partitions to provide the same performance.
 Noise Isolation Class (NIC): Field testing of architectural spaces is better expressed in
terms of Noise Isolation Class, or NIC. This methodology is designed for field evaluation
and considers the subjective effectiveness of all of the associated architectural
elements. NIC relates much more closely to the guests’ subjective experience and
therefore should be used instead of STC when describing the desired performance of a
demising or operable partition.

11.13.3 Pass Doors

Not permitted in operable partitions, due to acoustical seal compromises and door
maintenance problems.

11.13.4 Audio Equipment Rooms

 Sound System Equipment Rooms: The main event space sound equipment is located
in a dedicated Sound System Equipment Room that is on the same level as and has its
main door opening to the service corridor associated with that event space.
 No other system equipment is located in the sound system equipment room, except
for an IDF for the property LAN and telecommunications services.
 Sound and telecommunications equipment is contained in totally enclosed and lockable
steel equipment cabinets to prevent damage.
 If the equipment room serves both A/V and tele- communications equipment, separate
the equipment with a fence and lockable door to protect the telecommunications
equipment and allow the A/V equipment to be accessible.
 The Sound System Equipment Room is an environmentally conditioned, secure
room. Design this room to maintain a temperature between 18˚ to 21˚ C with 40% to
50% relative humidity, non-condensing
 There is no equipment in the ceiling space above this room that requires maintenance,
adjustment or service that can leak or produce condensation.
 Where event spaces are remote from the equipment room, provide a large touch screen
control panel in a rugged enclosure in the service corridor associated with these rooms.

 The Sound System Equipment Room has:

• Sealed floor
• Painted walls
• Fluorescent lights
• Lay-in ceiling

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 323
  The Sound System Equipment Room is not intended to provide storage portable A/V
equipment. It may, however, serve as the A/V Department offices.
 Mezzanine Level Control Rooms: Provide a mezzanine- level AV control room above the
pre-function guest entry to accommodate technicians operating the AV systems for
events as follows:
• In high end projects that anticipate a high volume of social activities
• Where a ballroom is somewhat small for the anticipated programmed events
• Provide windows that open to the ballroom space to allow the technicians to hear
the event.

11.13.5 Raceway

Raceway refers to the pathways which contain and manage the A/V and telecommunications
cabling. This includes conduit, pull boxes and cable trays.
 “Accessible Raceway” System: Provide to permit maintenance and upgrading of
cabling infrastructure to accommodate future requirements.
 Physical Protection: Provide raceway elements to provide physical protection to the cables,
to accommodate servicing and replacement, and to provide electromagnetic shielding to
minimize interference with the system.

11.13.6 Conduit

 Location: Provide conduit from sound system input and control devices. Conduit
extends from the device back box to above the cable tray so that the cable is
continuously protected.
 Flexible Conduit: Not permitted. Conduit is ferrous and thin wall or rigid.
 Sweep Bends: Conduit serving network cabling has “sweep bends” to permit ready
maintenance or future installation of fiber optic cabling.

11.13.7 Cable Trays

 Purpose: Provide cable trays to collect cables from input and control devices and from
speakers and route them to the equipment room.
 Dividers: Cable trays are divided with ferrous dividers to keep different circuit levels
separated from each other.
 Location: Cable trays are either attached to the wall or center hung to permit easy
maintenance, additions and upgrading of the system cabling.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 324
11.13.8 Open Wiring

Open wiring may be used above accessible ceilings for speaker and control circuits only.
Support open wiring using “J” hooks no further apart than 5 feet on center.

11.13.9 Power & Grounding Service

Provide power for the sound system from a dedicated single phase, same phase isolated
ground panel located within the sound equipment room. This panel is referred to as the:
“Technical Systems Power Panel” and is dedicated to providing power to the A/V equipment
racks and to convenience outlets within the Sound Equipment Room.

11.13.10 Power Panel

Equip with an isolation transformer having a Faraday shield, derived neutral and isolated
ground tied back to the main building ground grid with a dedicated, large gauge cable.
 Main Sound System Audio Ground: A dedicated high quality, chemically charged, non-
sacrificial technical ground providing an impedance to earth of less than 5 ohms (such
as Lyncole Industries “XIT” ground rod). Equivalent grounding schemes may be
considered if their proven performance is equivalent to the system described.
 UPS: Equip the sound system is with an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to protect
the programming and settings of the control system and the DSP system. The
amplifiers are not carried by the UPS system.
 Convenience Power Outlets: Provide adjacent to sound system input plates and A / V
network connector panels in the event spaces.

11.13.11 Telecommunications

 System Interconnectivity: Provide interconnections with the telephone services to the

tie lines and A/V network patchbays.
 Provide internet connections and a variety of telecommunications services (house
phone, DID, etc.) These services are patched into the A/V network to serve guests’
needs.
 Adapters: Provide to use network RJ45 connections as four phone circuits.
 Internet Connection: Provide to the control system for remote monitoring, operation and
maintenance.

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 325
12. IT BUDGET ESTIMATIONS (USD)

No Applications Description QTY CAPEX OPEX Total

Oracle - Opera V9 Property Management
1
PMS System
Revenue Management
2 Ideas
System
3 Symphony 2 System F&B Point of Sale (POS)
Infor Sun Systems version
4 Sun Accounting
6.2
5 Inventory Oracle Materials Control
6 Office 365 Microsoft office
Esx Operating System
7 VMware
Version 6.0
8 OS for Server Microsoft 2012 Server
9 Host Servers Dell VERTX Servers
10 Antivirus Trend Micro
11 Data Backup Barracuda appliance
12 Admin Router Next Generation Fire Wall
13 Ticketing Tool Guest Service Tool
14 Engineering Soft Dynawin or FSI
15 Security Mimecast & Trustwave
MHR Enterprise
16 Business Systems
Solutions
17 Admin Internet Min 50Mbps leased Line
18 Guest Internet Min 100Mbps leased Line
19 HSIA Gateway Airangel gateway
ADSL 10Mbps link & 4G
20 Back Internet
router
21 Telephone Call Billing FCS or Tiger TMS
22 HR Payroll HITS or Equivalent
23 Laptops Dell Latitude (Specifications)
24 Personal Computers Dell Optiplex (Specifications)
25 Multifunction Printers HP, Xerox, Canon, or Ricoh
26 Color Printers HP or Xerox
27 Black & White Printers HP or Xerox
Passport (PP) Samsotech Flash PP
28
Scanner scanner
29 Guest Firewall To protect guest IT services
Subscribe to min 100
30 TV Channels
channels
31 SPA System Spa reservation system

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 326
32 IPADs Tablets for FO & Concierge
Samanage used for IT
33 MyIT Support Tool
support
34 InCar WIFI 4G WIFI in Limousines
Web Check in Check
35 Ariane Services
Out
36 MHR Corporate IT Flight & accommodation
37 MHR Task Force Flight & Accommodation
No Infrastructure Description QTY CAPEX OPEX Total
With Video Management
1 CCTV + Video Wall
system
Min 55 Inches (LG or
2 TV Screens
Samsung)
3 IPTV Refer to IPTV specifications
Refer to cabling
4 Cabling
specifications
5 Switches HP, Brocade, Cisco
6 WIFI Ruckus, Aruba, Cisco
7 IP PBX NEC, Alcatel, & Cisco
Vingcard online doorlock
8 Door Lock
system
Engage an audio visual
9 Audio / Visual
consultant
10 Online Digital Signage Magnetics; LG
11 Computer Rooms Refer to specifications
Depends on design and
12 BMS
deployed controllers
Smart GYM
13 Ready with BYOD & BYOC
Equipment
Depends on size and
14 IT Closets
Deployed IT services
Engage an IT consultant to
15 Central UPS
calculate the available load
16 Online GRMS Refer to specifications
17 Public addressing
To be interfaced with
18 Elevator Access
Vingcard
To be interfaced with
19 Parking System
Vingcard
20 4G / LTE Coverage Consultant a local ISP
21 System Integrator
In Guest room & other
22 USB Chargers
guest’s areas
Consultant with MHR
23 BOH Access Control
Technical Services

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 327
Section T: Appendices

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 328
1. Appendix 1: MH&R Standard Space Requirements Programs – abridged.

MH&R STANDARD SPACE REQUIREMENTS – ABRIDGED

For: 250 Room City Hotel, EUROPE
Dated: 01/08/2005 Code: 02.02.0100
Please note that this is a standard space requirement program and accordingly has not been adjusted to suit
any particular project. Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts reserves the right to adjust, amend or alter accordingly.
Hotel Capacity 250 Rooms
Index Area Rooms Quantity M2/unit M2
01.10 Guestroom Areas 9045
King Size Rooms 160 28 4480
Double Twin Bed Rooms 70 30 2100
Rooms for Handicapped 2 32 64
Junior Suites (1 module) 12 42 504
Suites (2 modules) 6 56 336
Housekeeping 332
Corridors 1229
01.20 Public Areas 1463
01.21 Lobby 454
01.22 Front Office & Reception 129
01.23 Business Centre 30
01.24 Restaurant / Bar 850
01.30 Banqueting / Meeting Room Areas 1650
Ballroom 1 300 300
Meeting Rooms (2 sections) 1 150 150
Meeting Rooms (3 sections) 1 60 60
Boardrooms, small 5 35 175
Boardrooms, medium 2 50 100
Prefunction Area 1 196 196
Others 669
01.40 Recreational Areas 291
01.50 Administrative Areas 364
01.60 Service Areas 1168
01.61 Kitchen 585
01.62 Storage Areas 142
01.63 Receiving Dock / Loading Area 202
House Keeping / Laundry 239
01.70 Engineering Areas 2160
01.80 Staff Areas 292
Sub Total 16433
01.90 Exterior Areas and Parking 2774

Total Net Area 19207

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 329
Total Gross Internal Floor Area 23049

Surface per Room without Parking 66

MH&R STANDARD SPACE REQUIREMENTS – ABRIDGED

For: 250 Room City Hotel, MIDDLE EAST / AFRICA
Dated: 01/08/2005 Code: 02.02.0100
Please note that this is a standard space requirement program and accordingly has not been adjusted to suit
any particular project. Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts reserves the right to adjust, amend or alter accordingly.
Hotel Capacity 250 Rooms
Index Area Rooms Quantity M2/unit M2
01.10 Guestroom Areas 11387
King Size Rooms 140 32 4480
Double Twin Bed Rooms 60 35 2100
Rooms for Handicapped 2 35 70
Junior Suites (1 module) 36 50 1800
Suites (2 modules) 10 65 650
Presidential Suites 2 100 200
Housekeeping 503
Corridors 1584
01.20 Public Areas 2118
01.21 Lobby 784
01.22 Front Office & Reception 240
01.23 Business Centre 30
01.24 Restaurant / Bar 1064
01.30 Banqueting / Meeting Room Areas 2846
Ballroom 1 500 500
Meeting Rooms (2 sections) 2 200 400
Meeting Rooms (3 sections) 2 150 300
Boardrooms, small 5 40 200
Boardrooms, medium 2 60 120
Prefunction Area 1 314 314
Others 1012
01.40 Recreational Areas 1044
01.50 Administrative Areas 588
01.60 Service Areas 1670
01.61 Kitchen 902
01.62 Storage Areas 248
01.63 Receiving Dock / Loading Area 204
House Keeping / Laundry 316
01.70 Engineering Areas 3645
01.80 Staff Areas 561
Sub Total 23859
01.90 Exterior Areas and Parking 2399

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 330
Total Net Area 26258

Total Gross Internal Floor Area 31509

Surface per Room without Parking 95

MH&R STANDARD SPACE REQUIREMENTS – ABRIDGED

For: 400 Room Resort Hotel
Dated: 01/08/2005 Code: 02.02.0100
Please note that this is a standard space requirement program and accordingly has not been adjusted to suit
any particular project. Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts reserves the right to adjust, amend or alter accordingly.
Hotel Capacity 400 Rooms
Index Area Rooms Quantity M2/unit M2
01.10 Guestroom Areas 19163
King Size Rooms 235 38 8930
Double Twin Bed Rooms 115 38 4370
Rooms for Handicapped 2 38 76
Junior Suites (1 module) 36 50 1800
Suites (2 modules) 10 76 760
Presidential Suites 2 120 240
Housekeeping 503
Corridors 2484
01.20 Public Areas 2550
01.21 Lobby 784
01.22 Front Office & Reception 190
01.23 Business Centre 30
01.24 Restaurant / Bar 1546
01.30 Banqueting / Meeting Room Areas 2560
Ballroom 1 500 500
Meeting Rooms (2 sections) 2 200 400
Meeting Rooms (3 sections) 2 150 300
Boardrooms, small 0 40 0
Boardrooms, medium 2 60 120
Prefunction Area 1 314 314
Others 926
01.40 Recreational Areas 1577
01.50 Administrative Areas 480
01.60 Service Areas 1612
01.61 Kitchen 844
01.62 Storage Areas 248
01.63 Receiving Dock / Loading Area 204
House Keeping / Laundry 316
01.70 Engineering Areas 5075

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 331
01.80 Staff Areas 897
Sub Total 33914
01.90 Exterior Areas and Parking 3049

Total Net Area 36963

Total Gross Internal Floor Area 44355

Surface per Room without Parking 85

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 332
 2. Appendix 2: Area Finishing Standards Matrix.

Requirements
Ot
Minimum Architectural Requirements Final Surface Finishes he Remarks
r
W
at
Room Room Room
Natural Light in er
Width in Depth in Height Floor Walls Ceiling Remarks
% of Room Size Su
AREA cm (*) cm (*) in cm (*)
pp
ly

DWD = Decorative Wall Design

W = Wallpaper (vinyl backed)

DCD = Decorative Ceiling

MC = Metal Panel Ceiling

PP = Plastered & Painted
CFT = Ceramic Floor Tiles

CWT = Ceramic Wall Tiles

PP = Plastered & Painted
* Finished

C = Carpet (wall to wall)

AC = Acoustic Ceiling
PF = Parquet Flooring
* Wall to wall * Wall to wall Floor Level

NS = Natural Stone

NS = Natural Stone
Inside Inside to Finished
Dimension Dimension Ceiling

P = Panelling
L = Linoleum

O = Others
Dimension

O = Others

O = Others

Design
1.10 Guestroom Areas
Guestroom (City) 400 700 270 20% Floor Area C or PF WP + DWD PP -
Guestroom (Resort) 450 730 270 20% Floor Area C, NS, CPT / PP + DWD
O
CWT + PP /
Bathroom 160 300 230 - CFT or NS PP x
WP + NS
Handicapped (ASA) According to
Guestrooms (City) WP International
700 280 20% Floor Area PF PP -
Handicapped (ASA) O / PP / DWD Regulations for
Guestrooms (Resort) ASA Rms
Allergy Rooms 400 700 280 20% Floor Area PF O / PP / DWD PP To be defined
Guestroom Corridors 180 - 260 Preferable C WP PP - Decorative wall
(City) / corner
(Resort) NS / CFT O / PP / DWD protection
PP / CWT in
Housekeeping Room 250 300 250 - CFT / L - X
parts
WP
Executive Lounge - - - 20% Floor Area C / PF DCD -
O / DWD
1.20 Public Areas
21 Lobby - - 400 To be defined NS / O - DCD -
Shop - - 200 To be defined NS / PF / O - - -
Guest Lift 120 200 220 Not Applicable NS To be designed MC - 1 Lift / 100 rms
Directional
Guest Lift Landing - 400 280 To be defined NS - AC -
Signage
L/ Wall to wall
Service Lift 140 220 220 - Heavy Duty -
Aluminium protection
Wall to wall
Service Lift Landing - 300 250 - CFT PP -
protection
Restrooms:
NS or CWT +
- Anteroom Ladies - 250 260 - NS / O PP x
PP & DWD
NS or CWT +
- Anteroom Gents - 250 260 - NS / O PP x
PP & DWD
High partition
- Toilet Cubicles 90 160 260 - NS / CFT Walls + CWT / PP x
DWD, PP
- Urinals - 200 260 - CFT CWT PP x

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 333
 1 Work Station
22 Front Office C
per 100 Rooms
Front Desk Station 210 180 280 To be defined C - - -
Offices 340 - 250 10% Floor Area C WP PP -
Telephone Operator - - 250 10% Floor Area C WP PP -
Material Storage 180 - 250 - L / CFT PP - -
Floor loading
Safety Deposit Room 250 300 250 - L PP PP / MC -
500kg / m2
Luggage Store 220 400 250 - L PP PP -
23 Business Centre - - 250 - C - PP / DCD -

24 Restaurants & Bars

PF + C; NS; To be designed
Restaurants - - 320 20% Floor Area DCD -
CFT by Interior Des:
PF durable;
Coffee Shop - - 320 20% Floor Area DCD x
NS; CFT shockproof &
Bar - - 320 20% Floor Area NS ; PF + C decorative DCD x
Restrooms:
NS or CWT +
- Anteroom Ladies - 250 260 - NS / O PP x
PP & DWD
NS or CWT +
- Anteroom Gents - 250 260 - NS / O PP x
PP & DWD
High partition
- Toilet Cubicles 90 160 260 - NS / CFT Walls + CWT / PP x
DWD, PP
- Urinals - 200 260 - CFT CWT PP x
1.3 Banqueting / Meeting
Rooms
Ballroom - - 500 10% Floor Area C or PF WP, DWD, O DCD - Rectangular
shape, column
Grand Meeting Room - - 400 10% Floor Area C or PF WP, DWD, O DCD - free; mobile
partition walls;
decorative wall
Meeting Rooms - - 400 20% Floor Area C or PF WP, DWD, O DCD -
protection
Decorative wall
Boardrooms - - 350 20% Floor Area C or PF WP, DWD, O DCD -
protection
Pre-Function Areas - - 400 5% Floor Area NS, C or PF WP, DWD, O DCD -
Projection Booth 120 200 220 - L WP PP
Translation Booths 120 200 220 - L WP PP
Restrooms
- Anteroom Ladies - 250 260 - NS NS + PP PP x
- Anteroom Gents - 250 260 - NS NS + PP PP x
- Toilet Cubicles 90 160 260 - NS / CFT WP & PP PP x High partitions
- Urinals - 200 260 - CFT CWT PP x
Banquet Kitchen - - - 10% Floor Area CFT CWT MC x
Banquet Office - - - 10% Floor Area CFT CWT MC -
1.4 Recreation Areas
Indoor Pool / Whirlpool 360 360 250 - NS / PF CWT + DWD DCD x
Showers 220 220 250 - NS / CFT CWT / Mosaic PP x
Restrooms
NS + PP /
- Anteroom Ladies - 250 260 - NS / CFT PP x
DWD, Mosaic
NS + PP /
- Anteroom Gents - 250 260 - NS / CFT PP x
DWD, Mosaic
- Toilet Cubicles 90 160 260 - NS or CFT CWT + PP PP x High partitions
- Urinals - 200 260 - CFT CWT PP x
Gym / Exercise / Fitness 600 1000 320 If possible Special floor PP PP x
Recreation Room - - 320 If possible Special floor DWD PP x

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 334
 Massage Room 280 400 250 If possible L / PF PP, WP PP x
Solarium 300 300 250 If possible L / PF PP, WP PP x
Manager’s Office
Health Bar - - 350 If possible NS, CFT , PF PP, DWD DCD x
3.05 Administrative Areas
Executive Offices 300 400 250 10% Floor Area C WP or PP PP -
Executive Conference
450 650 250 10% Floor Area C WP or PP PP -
Room
Telex, Fax, Copying,
200 180 250 - C or L WP or PP PP -
Mail Room
Computer Room -
Material Storage /
200 300 2200 10% Floor Area L PP - -
Archives
1.60 Service Areas
61 Kitchen - - 320 10% Floor Area CFT CWT MC x
Production &
- - 320 10% Floor Area CFT CWT MC x
preparation
Washing Areas - - 320 10% Floor Area CFT CWT MC x
Chef’s Office - - 320 - CFT CWT MC x
Restrooms - - 320 - CFT CWT MC x
Changing Rooms - - 320 - CFT CWT MC x
Bakery - - 320 10% Floor Area CFT CWT MC x
Pastry - - 320 10% Floor Area CFT CWT MC x
Butcher - - 320 10% Floor Area CFT CWT MC x
62 Storage Areas
General Store Rooms 350 600 250 - CFT PP - -
Dry Food Store - 250 - CFT PP - -
Wine Spirits (non-
180 250 - CFT PP - -
refridgerated)
Walk-in Cooler (Soft
180 - - - Polyurethane Floor with Polyester Finish -
Drinks & Beer)
Walk-in Freezer 180 - - - Polyurethane Floor with Polyester Finish -
Flower Store 180 - - - CFT P / CWT - x
Receiving / Loading Out of site of
63
Dock guest areas
Goods Receiving Office 300 400 220 10% Floor Area L PP - x
Refridgerated Garbage
220
Room
Dry Garbage - - - - CFT CW -
Garbage Compactor
300 550 500 - Concrete PP - x
Room
Toilet - CFT CWT - x
Heavy Duty Wall / corner
BOH Corridors 200 - 250 - PP -
Material protection
Housekeeping /
64
Laundry
H.Keepers Office 350 450 250 10% Floor Area L PP - -
Storage Rooms 180 - - - CFT PP -
Laundry - - - - CFT CWT / PP - x
65 Engineering Areas
Offices 300 400 250 10% Floor Area L PP - -
Workshops PP - x
Paint Shop PP x
Store Archives PP
Restrooms CFT CWT - x
Showers / Lockers CFT CWT - x

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 335
 Air Handling Plantroom
Chillers Plantroom
Heating Plantroom
Water Treatment
Plantroom
Transformer
Switchboard
Emergency Generator
Elevator Machine Rms
Telephone Equipment
Rms
3.7 Staff Areas
Showers & Lockers CFT CWT -
Restrooms CFT CWT -
Changing Rooms CFT PP -
3.8 Garage Areas
Parking Attendant /
L PP -
Security Office
Parking Bay
Size:
Underground Parking 240 O PP X 550x230cm
Roadway:
600cm

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 336
3. Appendix 3: Area Design Standards – Noise Insulation and Fire Protection.

Sound / Noise
Insulation
Fire Protection Requirements
Requirements in dB
(A)
Explanation of Symbols:

4
Doors up to 4
N = Not requested

Floor/ Wall/ Ceiling

Floor/ Wall/ Ceiling
E = Construction Level

over
I = Insulation

Windows

Windows
Levels

Levels
Doors

Doors
01:10 Guestroom Areas:
Guestroom 52 52 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Bathroom 52 52 42 E190 N N N
Guest Corridor 52 52 42 E190 E130 E160 N
House Keeping Room N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Executive Lounge 52 52 42 E190 E130 E160 N

01:20 Public Areas:

21 Lobby 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Shop 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Restrooms N N N E190 E130 E160 N

22 Front Office and Reception:

Front Desk 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Offices 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Telephone Operator 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Material Storage N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Guest Safety Deposit Room N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Toilets 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Luggage Store N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Fire Control Room N N N E190 E130 E160 N

23 Business Centre:
Guest Workstation 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N

24 Restaurant / Bars:
Restaurant 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Coffee Shop 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Bar 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Restrooms N N N E190 E130 E160 N

01:30 Banqueting / Meeting Rooms

Ballroom 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N
Grand Meeting Room 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N
Junior Meeting Room 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N
Boardrooms 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N
Pre-Function Areas 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N
Projection Booth 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 337
 Sound / Noise
Insulation
Fire Protection Requirements
Requirements in dB
(A)
Explanation of Symbols:

4
Doors up to 4
N = Not requested

Floor/ Wall/ Ceiling

Floor/ Wall/ Ceiling
E = Construction Level

over
I = Insulation

Windows

Windows
Levels

Levels
Doors

Doors
Translation Booth 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N
Restroom N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Banquet Kitchen N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Banquet Office 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Wardrobe N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Furniture Store N N N N N N N
Technical Store N N N E190 E130 E160 N

01:40 Recreational Areas:

Indoor Pool / Whirlpool 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Showers and Lockers 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Restrooms N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Gym / Exercise / Aerobic Rooms 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Recreational Room 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N
Massage Room 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N
Solarium 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N
Sauna / Steam Bath 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N
Managers Office 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N
Health Bar 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N
Reception 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Pool Equipment Store N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Equipment Store N N N E190 E130 E160 N

01:50 Administrative Areas:

Executive Offices 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Executive Conference Room 52 52 52 E190 E130 E160 N
Computer Room N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Material Store / Archives N N N N N N N
Coffee Corner 42 42 42 E190 E130 E160 N
Restrooms N N N E190 E130 E160 N

01:60 Service Areas:

61 Kitchen:
Production and Preparation N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Washing Areas N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Chefs Office N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Restrooms N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Changing Rooms N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Bakery N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Pastry Area N N N E190 E130 E160 N

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 338
 Sound / Noise
Insulation
Fire Protection Requirements
Requirements in dB
(A)
Explanation of Symbols:

4
Doors up to 4
N = Not requested

Floor/ Wall/ Ceiling

Floor/ Wall/ Ceiling
E = Construction Level

over
I = Insulation

Windows

Windows
Levels

Levels
Doors

Doors
Butcher N N N E190 E130 E160 N
62 Storage Areas
General Store Rooms N N N N N N N
Dry Food Store N N N N N N N
Wine Spirits (Non-Refrigerated) N N N N N N N
Walk-in Cooler Soft Drinks / Beer N N N N N N N
Walk-in Freezer N N N N N N N
Flower Store N N N N N N N

63 Receiving / Loading Dock Area:

Goods Receiving Office N N N N N N N
Refrigerated Garbage Room N N N N N N N
Dry Garbage N N N N N N N
Garbage Compactor Room N N N N N N N
Toilet N N N N N N N

64 Housekeeping / Laundry:
Housekeeping Office N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Storage Rooms N N N N N N N
Laundry N N N N N N N
Housekeeping N N N N N N N

65 Engineering Areas:
Offices N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Workshops N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Paint Shop N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Store / Archives N N N N N E130 N
Restrooms N N N N N E130 N
Showers & Lockers N N N N N E130 N
Air Handling Plant Room N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Chillers Plant Room N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Heating Plant Room N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Water Treatment Plant Room N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Transformer Switchboard N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Emergency Generator N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Elevator Machine Rooms N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Telephone Equipment Room N N N E190 E130 E160 N

01:70 Staff Areas:

Showers & Lockers N N N N N E130 N

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 339
 Sound / Noise
Insulation
Fire Protection Requirements
Requirements in dB
(A)
Explanation of Symbols:

4
Doors up to 4
N = Not requested

Floor/ Wall/ Ceiling

Floor/ Wall/ Ceiling
E = Construction Level

over
I = Insulation

Windows

Windows
Levels

Levels
Doors

Doors
Restrooms N N N N N E131 N
Changing Rooms N N N N N E132 N

01:80 Exterior Areas:

01:90 Garage Areas:
Parking Attendant / Security Office N N N E190 E130 E160 N
Cleaning N N N N N E130 N
Restroom N N N N N E130 N
Indoor Parking N N N E190 E130 E160 N

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 340
 4. Appendix 4: Area Design Standards – HVAC.

Room Ventilation Rate

Explanation of Symbols: Room Temp. Exhaust Air
Humidity Outside Air Quality
* only in severe winter
conditions

Pos/neg. Rm Pressure
** only in severe summer

Minimum air change

conditions

Allowed (return air)

DBA Noise Level

outside or exhaust air

m3/h per person

***

Heat Recovery
% rell Summer
Humidification

% rell Winter

Make -up Air

m3/h per unit
P Possibly

m3/h per m2

m3/h per m2
ºC Summer
Ventilation

ºC Winter

Required
C Corridor
Heating

Cooling

W Window
Y Yes
01:10 Guestroom Areas:
Guestroom Y Y Y * 23-25 21 50 * 2*40 - - Y - - - - + 30 Y
Bathroom Y Y - - - 22 - - - - - - Y 80 - G/C - 40 Y
Guest Corridor Y Y Y - 23-25 20 55 - - - 2 Y - - - - + 45 Y
House Keeping Room Y Y Y - 26 20 50 - - 10 3 Y Y - - - - 45 Y
Executive Lounge Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - 50 - - Y Y - - - Eq 35 Y

01:20 Public Areas:

21 Lobby Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - - - 3 Y Y - - - + 45 Y
Shop Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - 10 - 6 Y Y - - - + 45 Y
Restrooms Y Y ** - 23-25 21 - - - - - - Y 70 - C - 45 P

22 Front Office & Reception:

Front Desk Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - 30 - - Y Y - - - + 45 Y
Offices Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - 30 - - Y Y - - - + 40 Y
Telephone Operator Y Y Y Y 23-25 21 50 50 30 - - Y Y - - - + 40 Y
Material Storage Y Y - - - 18 - - - 4 - - - - - - - - -
Guest Safety Deposit Room Y Y - - 23-25 20 - - - 4 - - - - - - - - -
Toilets Y Y ** - 23-25 21 - - - - - - Y 30-60 - C - 45 -
Luggage Store - Y - - - 18 - - - 4 - - Y - - - - - P

23 Business Centre: Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - - 5 - - Y - - - + 35 Y

24 Restaurant / Bars:
Restaurant Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 * 40 22-30 - - Y - 22-30 - - 40 Y
Coffee Shop Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 * 40 22-30 - - Y - 22-30 - - 40 Y
Bar Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - 50 22-30 - - Y - 22-30 - - 40 Y
Restrooms Y Y ** - 23-25 21 - - - - - - Y 30-60 - C - 45 P

01:30 Banqueting / Meeting Rms:

Ballroom Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 * 20 - - Y Y - - - Eq 35 Y
Grand Meeting Room Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 * 30 - - Y Y - - - Eq 35 Y
Junior Meeting Room Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 * 50 - - Y Y - - - Eq 40 Y
Boardrooms Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 * 50 - - Y Y - - - Eq 30 Y
Pre-Function Areas Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 * 30 - - Y Y - - - Eq 40 Y
Projection Booth Y Y Y - 23-25 21 - - 50 - - - Y - - - - 50 Y
Translation Booth Y Y Y - 23-25 21 50 * 100 - - Y Y - - - Eq 30 Y

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 341
 Room Ventilation Rate
Explanation of Symbols: Room Temp. Exhaust Air
Humidity Outside Air Quality
* only in severe winter
conditions

Pos/neg. Rm Pressure
** only in severe summer

Minimum air change

conditions

Allowed (return air)

DBA Noise Level

outside or exhaust air

m3/h per person

***

Heat Recovery
% rell Summer
Humidification

% rell Winter

Make -up Air

m3/h per unit
P Possibly

m3/h per m2

m3/h per m2
ºC Summer
Ventilation

ºC Winter

Required
C Corridor
Heating

Cooling

W Window
Y Yes
Restroom Y Y ** - 23-25 21 - - - - - - Y 30-60 - C - 45 Y
Banquet Kitchen Y Y - - 25 20 - - - 80 20-25 - Y - - - - 50 Y
Banquet Office Y Y - - 23-25 21 - - - 20 - - Y - - - - 40 Y

01:40 Recreational Areas:

Indoor Pool / Whirlpool Y Y - - 30 30 60 - 20 - 3-4 - Y - - - Eq 45 Y
Showers and Lockers Y Y Y - 25 23 - - 30 - 6-8 - Y - - C - 40 Y
Restrooms Y Y ** - 23-25 21 - - - - - - Y 30-60 - C - 45 Y
Gym / Exercise / Aerobic Rms Y Y Y - 23 21 60 - - - 10 Y - - - - Eq 45 Y
Recreational Room Y Y Y - 25 23 55 - 30 - - Y Y - - - Eq 35 Y
Massage Room Y Y Y - 23 25 55 - 40 22 - - Y - 22 - Eq 45 P
Solarium Y Y - - 23-25 23 55 - 40 - - Y Y - - - - 45 Y
Managers Office Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - 30 - - Y - - - - + 40 Y
Health Bar Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - 30 - - Y - - - - Eq 45 Y

03:05 Administrative Areas:

Executive Offices Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - 30 - - Y - - - - + 40 Y
Executive Conference Room Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 * 50 - - Y Y - - - Eq 40 Y
Tele / Fax / Copy / Mail Room Y Y Y - 24-26 22 50 50 30 - - Y - - - - + 45 Y
Computer Room Y Y Y Y 24-26 22 50 50 30 - - Y - - - - + 45 Y
Material Store / Archives Y Y - - - 18 - - - 4 - - - - - - - - -

01:60 Service Areas:

61 Kitchen:
Production & Preparation Y Y Y - 25 20 - - - 80 20-25 - Y - - - - 50 Y
Washing Areas Y Y Y - 25 20 - - - 40-50 - - Y - - - - 50 Y
Chefs Office Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - 30 - - Y - - - - + 40 Y
Restrooms Y Y ** - 23-25 21 - - - - - - Y 30-60 - C - 45 P
Changing Rooms Y Y Y - 25 23 - - 30 - 6-8 - Y - - C - 40 Y
Bakery Y Y - - 26 20 - - - - 10 - Y - - - - 50 Y
Pastry Area Y Y Y - 23 20 - - - - 10 - Y - - - - 50 Y
Butcher Y Y Y Y 23 20 60 60 - - 10-15 - Y - - - - 50 Y

62 Storage Areas:
General Store Rooms Y Y - - - 18 - - - 4 - - - - - - - - -
Dry Food Store Y Y Y - 20 18 - - - 4 - - - - - - - - -
Wine Spirits (Non-
- Y Y - 12-16 12-16 - - - 4 - - - - - - - - -
Refrigerated)
Walk-in Cooler Soft Drinks /
- - Y - 6-16 - - - - 4 - - - - - - - - -
Beer

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 342
 Room Ventilation Rate
Explanation of Symbols: Room Temp. Exhaust Air
Humidity Outside Air Quality
* only in severe winter
conditions

Pos/neg. Rm Pressure
** only in severe summer

Minimum air change

conditions

Allowed (return air)

DBA Noise Level

outside or exhaust air

m3/h per person

***

Heat Recovery
% rell Summer
Humidification

% rell Winter

Make -up Air

m3/h per unit
P Possibly

m3/h per m2

m3/h per m2
ºC Summer
Ventilation

ºC Winter

Required
C Corridor
Heating

Cooling

W Window
Y Yes
Walk-in Freezer - - Y - -20/22 -20/22 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Flower Store Y Y Y Y 16-18 16-18 60 60 - 4 - - - - - - - - -

Receiving / Loading Dock

63
Area:
Goods Receiving Office Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - 30 - - Y - - - - + 40 Y
Refrigerated Garbage Room - Y Y - 6-8 6-8 - - - - - - Y - - - - - -
Dry Garbage - Y - - - 10 - - - - 10-15 - Y - - - - - -
Garbage Compactor Room - Y - - - 10 - - - - 10-15 - Y - - - - - -
Toilet Y Y ** - 23-25 21 - - 30 - - - Y 30-60 - C - 45 P

64 Housekeeping / Laundry:
Housekeeping Office Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - 30 - - Y - - - - + 40 Y
Storage Rooms Y Y - - - 18 - - - 4 - - - - - - - - -
Laundry Y Y Y - 28 20 - - - - 10-15 Y - - - - - - P
Housekeeping Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - 30 - - Y - - - - + 40 Y

65 Engineering Areas:
Offices Y Y Y - 23-25 21 55 - 30 - - Y - - - - + 40 Y
Workshops Y Y - - 20-30 20 - - - 3-6 - - Y - - - - - P
Paint Shop Y Y - - 20-30 20 - - - - 20 - Y - - W Eq - P
Store / Archives Y Y - - 20-30 18 - - - 4 - - - - - - - - -
Restrooms Y Y ** - 23-25 21 - - - - - - Y 30-60 - C - 45 P
Showers & Lockers Y Y Y - 25 23 - - 30 - 6-8 - Y - - C - 40 Y
Air Handling Plant Room - Y - - 20-30 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Chillers Plant Room - Y - - 20-30 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Heating Plant Room - Y - - 20-30 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Water Treatment Plant Room - Y - - 20-30 10 - - - 5 - - - - - - - - -
Transformer Switchboard - Y - - 20-30 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Emergency Generator - Y - - 20-30 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Elevator Machine Rooms - Y - - 20-30 10 - - - - - - Y - - - - - -
Telephone Equipment Room - Y Y - 20-30 20 - - - - - Y - - - - - - -

03:70 Staff Areas:

Showers & Lockers Y Y Y - 25 23 - - - - 6-8 - Y 60 - C - 40 Y
Restrooms Y Y ** - 23-25 21 - - - - - - Y 30-60 - C - 45 P
Changing Rooms Y Y Y - 25 23 - - 30 - 6-8 - Y - - C - 40 Y

03:80 Garage Areas: - Y - - - - - - - - - - Y 150 - *** - - -

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 343
 5. Appendix 5: Area Design Standards – LV; Lighting; IT, Telephone & WC Systems.

Explanation of Symbols LV System Illuminating Tel & IT System WC Systems

Lighting Design

Overall Light Management System Part of BAS (BMS)

Cable/SAT TV Connections and Inter TV Connections

Emergency Lighting / Illuminated Exit Signs
Ra General Colour Reproduction Index

Multi-Vision System (Beamer, Screen)

1
230/110V AC 50/60Hz Power Outlets

400/220V AC 50/60Hz Power Outlets

Cat Level according to

Safety / Fire Protection System 2

common Technique
2 Refer to Fire Life & Safety

.Audio Acoustical System

URG Unified Glare Rating

ISDN / xDSL Connections

and Security

Analogue Connections
Em Illumination Levels
Emergency Generator

iPhone Connections
UPS Connection

IT Connections

CCTV System
Master Switch

Centralised
Dimmable

Local
01:10 Guestroom Areas:
Guestroom X X 200-300 22 80 X X X X X X X X

Bathroom X X 200 22 80 X X

Guest Corridor X 150 25 80 X X X X X X

House Keeping Room X 150 - - X X X

Executive Lounge / Library X 300-500 25 80 X X X X X X X X X

01:20 Public Areas:

21 Lobby X X 300 22 80 X X X X X X X X X X

Shop X 300-500 22 80 X X X X X X X X X X

Restrooms X 200 - - X X X X

22 Front Office & Reception: X X X 300 22 80 X X X X X X X X X X X

Front Desk X X 300 22 80 X X X X X X X X X

Offices X 500 19 80 X X X X X X X

Telephone Operator X X X 500 19 80 X X X X

Material Storage X 150 25 80 X X X

Guest Safety Deposit Room X X 150 - - X X X X X

Toilets X 200 22 80 X X

Luggage Store X 150 - - X X X

Fire Control X X X 200 22 60 X X X X

23 Business Centre: X 500 19 80 X X X X X X X X X X X

24 Restaurant / Bars:
Restaurant X X 150-300 - 80 X X X X X X X X X

Coffee Shop X 200-300 - 80 X X X X X X X X X

Bar X X 75-200 - 80 X X X X X X X X

Restrooms X 200 22 80 X X X

01:30 Banqueting / Meeting Rms:

Ballroom X 300-500 19 80 X X X X X X X X X

Grand Meeting Room X X 300-500 22 80 X X X X X X X X X X X X

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 344
Explanation of Symbols LV System Illuminating Tel & IT System WC Systems

Lighting Design

Overall Light Management System Part of BAS (BMS)

Cable/SAT TV Connections and Inter TV Connections

Emergency Lighting / Illuminated Exit Signs
Ra General Colour Reproduction Index

Multi-Vision System (Beamer, Screen)

1
230/110V AC 50/60Hz Power Outlets

400/220V AC 50/60Hz Power Outlets

Cat Level according to

Safety / Fire Protection System 2

common Technique
2 Refer to Fire Life & Safety

.Audio Acoustical System

URG Unified Glare Rating

ISDN / xDSL Connections

and Security

Analogue Connections
Em Illumination Levels
Emergency Generator

iPhone Connections
UPS Connection

IT Connections

CCTV System
Master Switch

Centralised
Dimmable

Local
Junior Meeting Room X 300-500 22 80 X X X X X X X X X X X X

Boardrooms X 400 22 80 X X X X X X X X X X X X

Pre-Function Areas X 400 22 80 X X X X X X X X X X

Projection Booth X 400 19 80 X X X X X

Translation Booth X 400 19 80 X X X X

Restroom X 200 22 80 X X X

Banquet Kitchen X X 500 22 80 X X X X X

Banquet Office X 500 19 80 X X X X

01:40 Recreational Areas:

Indoor Pool / Whirlpool X 300 22 80 X X X X X X X X X

Showers and Lockers X 200 22 80 X X X

Restrooms X 200 22 80 X X

Gym / Exercise / Aerobic Rms X 300 22 80 X X X X X X X X

Recreational Room X 300 22 80 X X X

Massage Room X 300 22 80 X X X

Solarium X X 150 - - X X

Managers Office X 500 19 80 X X X X X X

Health Bar X 300 - 80 X X X X

03:05 Administrative Areas:

Executive Offices X X 500 19 80 X X X X X X X X X

Executive Conference Room X X 500 19 80 X X X X X X X X X X X

Tele / Fax / Copy / Mail Room X X X 300 19 80 X X X X X X

Computer Room X X X X 300 19 80 X X X X X X X X

Material Store / Archives X X 200 25 80 X X X X X

01:60 Service Areas:

61 Kitchen:
Production & Preparation X X 500 22 80 X X X X X

Washing Areas X X 500 22 80 X X X X X

Chefs Office X 500 19 80 X X X X X

Restrooms X 300 22 80 X

Changing Rooms X 300 22 80 X X

Bakery X X 500 22 80 X X X

Pastry Area X X 500 22 80 X X X

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 345
Explanation of Symbols LV System Illuminating Tel & IT System WC Systems

Lighting Design

Overall Light Management System Part of BAS (BMS)

Cable/SAT TV Connections and Inter TV Connections

Emergency Lighting / Illuminated Exit Signs
Ra General Colour Reproduction Index

Multi-Vision System (Beamer, Screen)

1
230/110V AC 50/60Hz Power Outlets

400/220V AC 50/60Hz Power Outlets

Cat Level according to

Safety / Fire Protection System 2

common Technique
2 Refer to Fire Life & Safety

.Audio Acoustical System

URG Unified Glare Rating

ISDN / xDSL Connections

and Security

Analogue Connections
Em Illumination Levels
Emergency Generator

iPhone Connections
UPS Connection

IT Connections

CCTV System
Master Switch

Centralised
Dimmable

Local
Butcher X X 500 22 80 X X X

62 Storage Areas:
General Store Rooms X X 200 25 80 X X X X X X

Dry Food Store X X 200 25 80 X X X X X

Wine Spirits (Non- X X

X 200 25 80 X X X
Refrigerated)
Walk-in Cooler Soft Drinks / X X
X X X 200 25 80 X X
Beer
Walk-in Freezer X X X X 200 25 80 X X X X

Flower Store X X 300-500 25 80 X X

Receiving / Loading Dock

63
Area:
Goods Receiving Office X 500 19 80 X X X X X

Refrigerated Garbage Room X X X 150 25 80 X X X X

Dry Garbage X X 150 25 80 X X X

Garbage Compactor Room X 500 25 80 X X X

Toilet X 200 25 80 X

64 Housekeeping / Laundry:
Housekeeping Office X 500 19 80 X X X X

Storage Rooms X 150 25 80 X X X X

Laundry X 300-750 19 80 X X X

Housekeeping X 150 25 80 X X X

65 Engineering Areas:
Offices X 500 19 80 X X X X X X

Workshops X X 500 19 80 X X X X

Paint Shop X X 1000 19 90 X X X X

Store / Archives X 200 25 80 X X X

Restrooms X 200 25 80 X X

Showers & Lockers X 200 25 80 X X

Air Handling Plant Room X X 250 25 60 X X X X

Chillers Plant Room X X 250 25 60 X X X X

Heating Plant Room X X 250 25 60 X X X X

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 346
Explanation of Symbols LV System Illuminating Tel & IT System WC Systems

Lighting Design

Overall Light Management System Part of BAS (BMS)

Cable/SAT TV Connections and Inter TV Connections

Emergency Lighting / Illuminated Exit Signs
Ra General Colour Reproduction Index

Multi-Vision System (Beamer, Screen)

1
230/110V AC 50/60Hz Power Outlets

400/220V AC 50/60Hz Power Outlets

Cat Level according to

Safety / Fire Protection System 2

common Technique
2 Refer to Fire Life & Safety

.Audio Acoustical System

URG Unified Glare Rating

ISDN / xDSL Connections

and Security

Analogue Connections
Em Illumination Levels
Emergency Generator

iPhone Connections
UPS Connection

IT Connections

CCTV System
Master Switch

Centralised
Dimmable

Local
Water Treatment Plant Room X X 250 25 60 X X X X

Transformer Switchboard X X X 200 25 80 X X X X

Emergency Generator X 200 25 80 X X X X

Elevator Machine Rooms X 200 25 80 X X X X

Telephone Equipment Room X X X X 200 25 80 X X X X X X X

03:70 Staff Areas:

Showers & Lockers X 200 25 80 X X

Restrooms X 200 19 80 X X

Changing Rooms X 200 22 80 X X X X

03:80 Garage Areas:

Parking Attendant Security
X X X 500 22 80 X X X X X X
Office
Underground Parking X X 150 25 20 X X X X X X

Surface Parking X 50 - 20 X X X X

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 347
 6. Appendix 6: Area Design Standards – Life Safety and Security Systems.

Explanation of Symbols: Fire Protection Life Safety Security / Monitoring

1. Each Exit

Emergency Escape Routing &

Smoke, Heat & Fire Detector

CCTV (Refer to EL Planning

Fire Bells &/or Strobe Lights
2. Building with more than 3 Floors

Emergency Communication
Manual Alarm Push Button

Portable Fire Equipment

Intrusion / Burglar Alarm

3. Per Local Code Requirement

Access System (if BUS

Emergency Lighting &
Illuminated Exit Signs
4. Automatic Fire Protection for Kitchen Hoods

Evacuation System

Ambient System
5. Mist or CO System in Plant Rooms
6. Except Restrooms

controlled)
Fire Hose
Sprinkler
7. Underground Parking Only

Buzzer?

System
Plans
8. If Windows or Doors

GL)
01:10 Guestroom Areas:
Guestroom X X2 X X X X X X X
Guest Corridor X X X X X X X X X X8
House Keeping Room X X2
Executive Lounge X X X X X X

01:20 Public Areas:

21 Lobby X X X1 X X X X
Shop X X X1 X3 X X
Restrooms X X X1 X3 X

22 Front Office & Reception: X X X1 X3 X X X

23 Business Centre: X X X1 X X

24 Restaurant / Bars: X X X1 X3 X X X X X

01:30 Banqueting / Meeting Rms: X4 X X1 X X X X X X X6 X6

01:40 Recreational Areas: X X X1 X3 X X X X X X X6

03:05 Administrative Areas: X X X1 X X X X X X

01:60 Service Areas:

61 Kitchen: X4 X X1 X X X X X X6 X6

62 Storage Areas: X X X1 X3 X X X X X X

63 Receiving / Loading Dock Area: X X3 X X X X6 X X6

64 Housekeeping / Laundry: X X X1 X3 X X X X X X

65 Engineering Areas: X X5 X1 X3 X X X X X6 X6

03:70 Staff Areas: X4 X X1 X3 X X X X X6 X6

03:80 Garage Areas: X7 X1 X3 X7 X7 X6 X6

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 348
7. Appendix 7: MH&R Kitchens – kitchen flow diagram & sample layouts.

7.1 Kitchen Flow Diagram

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 349
7.2 Sample Layout for MH&R Compact Kitchen:

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 350
7.3 Main Kitchen Central Cooking

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 351
7.4 Main Kitchen – Banquet Kitchen, VIP Bar & Pantry

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 352
7.5 Main Kitchen – Bakery, Pastry & Ice Cream

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 353
7.6 Main Kitchen – Main Service Bar and Cold Preparation

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 354
7.7 Main Kitchen – Room Service

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 355
7.8 Main Kitchen – Dishwashing & Trolleys

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 356
7.9 Pool Bar Restaurant & Pool Snack Bar Pantry

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 357
7.10 Satellite Kitchen Sample – Gourmet Restaurant

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 358
 8. Appendix 8: MH&R Laundry – sample layout and linen circuit

8.1 Laundry Layout

Key:

1 Arrival of dirty laundry Laundry Area

18 Detergent store
Dirty Laundry Sorting Area 19 Washing spinning machine (100kg)
2 Landry chute 20 Washing spinning machine (40kg)
3 Built-in scale 21 Rotary dryer for form linen & small flat items
4 Dirty laundry carts (45kg)
5 Sorting table 22 Towel folding machine
23 Ironing dryer with 2 rollers for larger flat linen
Dirty Laundry Storage Area 24 Automatic folding machine
6 Double soaking sink 25 Sheet stacker
7 Storage units 26 Table for large flat linen
27 Table for form linen
Dry Cleaning Area
28 Press and folding unit for 2 operators
8 Dry cleaning machine (12kg)
29 Laundry supervisor’s office
9 Guest laundry washing machine (7kg)
30 Technical room
10 Guest laundry rotary dryer (7kg)
11 Trouser press Clean Linen Storage Area
12 Finishing table 31 Linen marking unit
13 4-station vacuum 32 Sewing machine
14 Mannequins 33 Clean linen carts
15 Dry cleaning press 34 Linen room
16 Stain removal table 35 New linen storage
17 Clean guest laundry storage 36 Uniform storage

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 359
Housekeeper’s Area
37 Maintenance products 42 Key distribution window
38 Guest supplies 43 Uniform distribution window
39 Lost-and-found 44 Clean linen exit toward service elevators
40 Head housekeeper’s office
41 Housekeepers space

8.2 Linen Circuit:

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 360
9. Appendix 9: MH&R Flow diagrams

9.1 Entrance Lobby / Reception Area Flow Diagram

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 361
9.2 Conference Venue including Banquet Halls & Meeting Rooms Flow Diagram

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 362
9.3 Back of House Flow Diagram

9.4 Kitchen Areas Flow Diagram

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 363
9.5 Spa Flow Diagram

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 364
10. Appendix 10: Abbreviations

ABBREVIATION EXPLANATION
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AP Wireless Access Points
BMS Building Management System – Technical Systems, e.g. HVAC
CAT6 Category 6 Cable (Gigabit Ethernet)
CENELEC Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrique
CRS Central Reservation System
CCTV Closed Circuit Television
DDC Digital Direct Control
EIA Electronics Industry Association
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
FFP Frequent Flier Programs
FPS Fire Protection System
FF&E Furniture Fixtures & Equipment
GIS Guest Information System
HMS Hotel Management Systems (also referred to as PMS)
HSIA High Speed Internet Access
HVAC Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning
IT Information Technology
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
Kbp/s Kilobits per second
LAN Local Area Network
MH&R Mövenpick Hotels & Resorts
MPE Multi Property Edition
POS Point of Sales
PMS Personal / Property Management System
(Hotel specific systems, e.g. Protel)
RGB Red Green Blue colour model
RJ45 Registered Jack (RJ)
SOE Small Operating Equipment & Consumables
SPE Single Property Edition
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
TEWI Total Equivalent Warming Impact
UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
VLAN Virtual LAN
VPN Virtual Private Network
VPO Video on Demand

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 365
WAN Wide Area Network

www.moevenpick-hotels.com
Standard Design & Operational Planning Guidelines
Version 10, January 2018 366